Compiled by

J. L. I. Fennel!
The Penguin

Gourse

Acomplete coursefor beginners

CZ&SH /< J^USKCX^

PENGUIN REFERENCE BOOKS
THE PENGUIN RUSSIAN COURSE

&

f/

B i

THE PENGUIN

RUSSIAN COURSE
A COMPLETE COURSE FOR
BEGINNERS

Compiled by J. L. I. Fennell

PENGUIN BOOKS

Penguin Books Ltd, Harmondsworth, Middlesex, England

Penguin Books, 625 Madison Avenue, New York, New York 10022, U.S.A.
Penguin Books Australia Ltd, Ringwood, Victoria, Australia
Penguin Books Canada Ltd, 2801 John Street, Markham, Ontario, Canada L3R 1B4
Penguin Books (N.Z.) Ltd, 182-190 Wairau Road, Auckland 10, New Zealand
Adapted from Russian, by N. Potapova, U.S.S.R., 1958
Published in Penguin Books 1961
Reprinted 1962, 1963, 1965, 1968, 1970, 1972, 1974, i975 1977, 1978
Copyright J. L. I, Fennell, 1961
All rights reserved
Made and printed in Great Britain
by Richard Clay (The Chaucer Press) Ltd,
Bungay, Suffolk
Set in Monotype Plantin

Except in the United States of America,

this book is sold subject to the condition
that it shall not, by way of trade or otherwise,
be lent, re-sold, hired out, or otherwise circulated
without the publisher's prior consent in any form of
binding or cover other than that in which it is
published and without a similar condition
including this condition being imposed
on the subsequent purchaser

CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION

THE RUSSIAN ALPHABET

HOW TO WRITE RUSSIAN

PRONUNCIATION

XV

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

THE LESSONS

XXi
I

GRAMMATICAL TABLES

256

KEY TO THE EXERCISES

285

RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

301

ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY

333

CONTENTS OF THE LESSONS

345

The Penguin Russian Course has been

put on tape by the Tutor-Tape Co. Ltd.
The course-lasts three hours on tape and
costs 10; it can also be bought in three
separate tapes at about 3 each. It is
available from Tutor-Tape's Demonstration Centre at 102, Great Russell
Streetj London WCi 3 or by mail from
their offices at 2, Replingham Road,
London SW18.

INTRODUCTION
T H E Penguin Russian Grammar is based on N . F. Potapova's Elementary Russian Course, published by the
Foreign Languages Publishing House, Moscow. Much of
the excellent textual material found in Mme Potapova's
grammar has been used in this book, but the explanations
of grammatical rules and the exercises have been radically
revised, and in most cases rewritten, to suit the abbreviated
dimensions of this book.
Each lesson begins with a vocabulary, the semantic
difficulties of certain words being explained in notes at the
end of the vocabulary. The main bulk of each lesson is
taken up with grammatical rules and their explanations.
These are followed by one or more passages of Russian
designed as far as possible to illustrate the rules explained
in the lessons. Finally there is a series of exercises, the
key to which is found at the end of the book.
After the lessons there is a section containing grammatical tables - declensions and conjugations - which will be
of use to the student for reference purposes. This is followed by the key to the exercises, a Russian-English
vocabulary containing all the words in the lessons, and an
English-Russian vocabulary containing all the words in
the English-Russian exercises.
The student is advised first of all to learn by heart the
vocabulary of the lesson; then carefully to work through
the rules. He should then read the Russian passages
several times until he can translate them into English
without difficulty. After this the exercise should be
attempted; the results should be checked with the key. It
may be found useful to work through the exercises several
times, at first referring when in doubt to the grammar and
the vocabulary, later - to the key. Only when the student
feels that he has mastered the exercises and can translate
vii

the sentences into Russian without difficulty, should he go

on to the next lesson. It is much better to go slowly and
thoroughly at first and to try to master the basic principles
of the language than to hurry in the hope of quickly acquiring the ability to talk fluently.
One final word. Russian is not a difficult language.
The grammar is simple and straightforward; Russian
words are pronounced more or less as they are written;
and word-order presents few difficulties. But it is easy for
a beginner at first to become depressed by the number of
words he has to learn by heart. Also he may well be worried
at a later stage by the recurrent feeling that he has forgotten
what he learned three or four lessons earlier. After about
ten lessons, however, he should find that the words become
increasingly easy to memorize, that most of what he has
already learned has, by dint of repetition, remained in his
head and that there are no insuperable difficulties in his
path.
*

NOTE TO T H E REVISED R E P R I N T OF 1965

I would like to thank the many people who have made
suggestions and pointed out inaccuracies and misprints in
the earlier editions, especially Miss Enid A. Marshall, of
Ladybank, Fife, Scotland.
J. L. 1. F.
Oxford 1965
*

viii

Russian Alphabet

PRINTED

Aa
66
BB

WRITTEN

i/ a.

APPROXIMATE
PRONUNCIATION

a in ' father'

<%<T
<%4

e i n ' book'
v in : vote'

Tr

gin' good'

An

d i n 'day'

Ee

ye va. 'yes'

$4

yo in 'yonder'

3KJK

J/Cofc

:
s in ' pleasure'

33

03}-

jsin 'zone' '

5 in 'please

II n

lu 4

ee in 'meet'

fta

lia

v i n 'boy'
fein 'kind'

KK

<j/t ^t

/ (see p. xviii)
mm 'man'

HH

cM^u,
df sc

Oo

Oo-

Jin
MM

nia 'note'
o in 'pot'

PRINTED

un

APPROXIMATE
PRONUNCIATION

WRITTEN

vL<n,

p in 'pen'
r (see p. xviii)

Pp
Cc
TT

yy

o<c
IT (J/ m.

s in 'speak'

&y

oo in 'fool'

t i n 'too'

/in'fire'
Xx

kh (see p. xix)

UP

tz in 'quartz'
(see p. xix)
ch in 'chair'

H I

niui

LLC UL

sh in 'short'

mm

LLC UL

shch (see p. xx)

B*.

(see p. xxii)

BIM

ift

(see p. xvi)

BB

(see pp. xxi, xxii)

3a
IOH)

Ha

Sa
JOH>
& st

e in 'men'
u in 'university'
y a in 'yard'

xi

HOW T O W R I T E R U S S I AN
There is very little difficulty in writing Russian. At first
the student should practise writing individual letters
separately. They need not be so florid as the examples
given above and below; several letters, indeed, can be
modified to suit the student's hand.
Joining the letters together is not difficult and is often
similar to English, especially when the letters are familiar
(e.g. UflOKs, -CfCOflO; OflC ). It must, however, be
borne in mind that some letters ( %A,, Ul> and JC ) begin
with a small hook which is preserved if joined to a preceding letter:
,
6

xAicuua,

JAUAA,,

gagM

It is not necessary to join every letter together in a word.

Often, in fact, it is difficult, or even impossible fr, for
instance, cannot be joined to ut, <A4, or J t

if they

follow it.
Some letters can be written in different ways:
is written either O or OT is written either m

or T

For clarity's sake a line is often put over /ft and under Ut
(but not under AAj. ); this helps to avoid confusion
especially when these letters are in close proximity with
Mi and 4V

The following examples should be studied and copied

out:
xii

Skui. Jllocm. Mom ocui.

Stcui Moom,o\u.
Lmfuuia.^fuuii. $hdoma.3<ioL.LtfLH,.
&lUL4a.

oM naoji, Gb&%Q''

Bm&K,. (Ujwit. ffouKa. fftyAia/ia,. Jujima,

Sfom- duicSa,9f. iHbom,tfwdtaxa>
t5L nolo-. Ou eg&nv

(WIMOW.

tlol cffiam aatrv ujum. 0<rbSt&M>rULe.

SaeCb M0& JKMlb II MOU $&%&

tALoata - cffLoautyjcu CCCtP.

Ccuwam, viemiwi -ewcoiw u, ducmfw.

3an, nam MOflwcut,.

PRONUNCIATION
The following notes are intended merely as a rough guide
for the beginner, and are of most use when the student is
able to relate them to sounds as pronounced by a native
Russian (on radio or gramophone at least).
I. Vowels
a The Russia a is pronounced like the ' a ' in 'father'
or 'car', but is a slightly shorter sound:
TaM
Kan

'there'
'how'

o has approximately the same sound as the English ' o '

in 'port', 'morning'. The lips, however, should be
rounded and protruded:
TOT
BOT

'that'
'hereis'

y is pronounced like the English 'oo' in 'fool'.

Again the lips should be rounded and protruded:
cyn
TVT

'soup'
'here'

a is like t h e ' e ' in 'let', ' m e n ' , b u t t h e tongue is not

raised so high a n d t h e mouth should be more open:
3To

'this'

Note that a generally occurs at the beginning of a word or is

preceded by a vowel; it is most frequently found in words of
foreign origin (anoxa 'epoch', aapoflpiw 'aerodrome').

H is similar to ' e e ' in ' s e e ' , b u t slightly shorter in

length:
nHK
'peak'
a , e, , re are what are known as iotized soft vowels in other words, they are prefixed in pronunciation by
xv

the equivalent of an English 'y'. They are pronounced

as follows:
a like 'ya' in 'yard' - jrra 'Yalta'
e l i k e ' y e ' i n ' y e s ' - ecT'he eats'
like'yo'in'yonder'-MaT'he gives'
ID like 'u' in 'university' - Mop 'humour'
Note that H is also what is called a soft vowel. It is, however
only iotized (that is, pronounced with a ' y ' sound before it)
when it occurs initially in the declension of the personal pronoun
OH 'he': ax (gen. pi.); HM (dat. pi. or instr. sing.); HMH (instr. pi.).

bi The nearest equivalent to w in English is the ' i '

in 'it', 'ill', or 'sin'. To pronounce it, the tongue is
drawn back as far as possible and not allowed to go forwards or raised as high as in producing the vowel H.
TU
EM

'thou'
'we'
*y u3

CMH

'son'

MM

H The sound fi is close to the English 'y' in 'toy',

'bay'. It is only found after a vowel and is used to form
a diphthong. Thus:
a+: an like 'y' in 'sky' - Mafi 'May'
O + H: OH like 'oy' in 'boy' - MOH 'my'
There are, however, slight differences from the equivalent English sounds:
(a) T h e first element of the diphthong (the vowels a, e, y, etc.)
is shorter in Russian than in English.
(b) In pronouncing the ft the back of the tongue is brought
closer to the roof of the mouth than in the pronunciation of the
' y ' in 'boy', 'bay', etc.
T h e only vowels whose sound is not appreciably altered when
followed by ft are H and w. In other words, there is little or no
difference between the pronunciation of H and w and that of aft
and brii (both of which are the standard adjectival endings in
Russian).
Note that the combination vowel+ft (yft, eft, ft, 10ft, etc.) is
only one syllable, whereas the combination vowel + vowel (oo, an,
oe, aa, etc.) is two syllables.

xvi

2.

Consonants
6 resembles the English ' b ' in 'boy'. At the end of a
word it sounds like the ' p ' in 'lip':
6aHK
xjieS

'bank'
'bread'

B is pronounced like the Enghsh ' v ' in 'voice', except

that the upper teeth are pressed against the back of the
lower lip, and not the front:
BOT
Bjira

'here is'
'the Volga'

At the end of a word or before a voiceless consonant

(K, n, c, T, dp, x, n\, q, m, and ni) B is pronounced like
the ' f in 'father':
KeB
Bee
3aBTpaK

'Kiev'
'everything'
'breakfast'

r is pronounced like the ' g ' in 'good'. At the end of a

word it sounds like the ' k ' in 'cook':
rofl
flpyr

'year'
'friend'

H is like the English 'd'; the tongue, however, is

brought against the back of the upper teeth with the
tip pointing downwards. At the end of a word fl sounds
like an Enghsh ' t ' :
m
can

'yes'
'garden'

ne is pronounced approximately like the Enghsh ' s '

in 'vision', 'pleasure'. However, the Russian sound
is considerably harder: the position of the tongue is
lower - i.e. further away from the palate:
JKyK

'beetle'
xvii

3 is like the ' z ' in 'zero':

3y6

'tooth'

K is like the ' k ' in 'kind':

KaK

'how'

a The Russian a resembles the English ' 1 ' in 'full',

'table', but is somewhat harder. To pronounce it
properly the back of the tongue should be kept low,
away from the roof of the mouth, and the tip of the
tongue brought up against the back upper teeth:
CHOBO

'word'

(byToa

'football'

M is like the English ' m ' :

MaK
'poppy'
H is like an English ' n ' , but to pronounce it the front
of the tongue must be placed against the back of the
upper teeth with its tip pointing downwards (cf. n. and
T). The tip of the tongue should not be raised as in
pronouncing the English ' n ' :
'but'

HO

n resembles the English ' p ' in 'please', 'pin':

naKT

'pact'

p For the Russian p there is no corresponding Enghsh

sound. It resembles somewhat the rolled ' r ' of Scotland
and Northern England. It is formed by the vibration of
the tip of the tongue against the front of the palate. It
is a distinct trilled sound:
pOT
pan
Bop

'mouth'
'crab'
'thief
xviii

c is like the V in 'soon', 'yes':

Moor

'bridge'

T is like the English ' t ' , except that the tongue is

brought against the back of the upper teeth with the tip
pointing downwards:
TVT

'here'

Tame

'tank'

<p closely resembles the T in 'farm':

parcr
'fact'
x This sound has no counterpart in English. It
resembles the Scottish ' c h' in 'loch' and the German
' c h ' in 'Buch', 'hoch'. It is articulated almost in the
same way as K, except that at the moment of pronunciation the tongue does not touch the roof of the mouth,
only coming close to it and leaving a passage for the
outgoing breath:
xojiM

'hill'

n. sounds like a combination o f t ' and ' s ' as in 'lots':

OTn,
ip>rraH

'father'
'gipsy'

Note: (a) After q both H and M are pronounced like MJ H is

written after q mostly in words of foreign origin:
qntppa
qpK

'figure'
'circus'

(b) When q is followed by e, the combination is pronounced

asqa:
neHTp
'centre'

v. is pronounced like ' c h ' in 'chair':

wa&

'tea'

Note that in the word *no 'what', v is pronounced as 'ah',

xix

m is pronounced approximately like the English 'sh'

in 'short', but it is harder; the position of the tongue
is lower:
mar
'stride'
m The nearest English equivalent is the 'shch' in
'fres/s cAeese':
HUH
'cabbage soup'
Note: (a) >K and m are never followed by the letters 3.or M, but
always by e or H. After m. and m, e is pronounced like a and H like
M (HHHceHep 'engineer', MainHira 'machine'). M and rq are never
followed by bi but instead by H.
(b) , i , m, and rq are never followed by x and K> but instead by
a or y.

Syllables and Word Stress

In words of more than one syllable only one syllable is
stressed. The stress in Russian is more emphatic than
in English. The stressed syllable, as compared with .
the unstressed, is articulated with much greater force
and is therefore lengthened. Hence the pronunciation
of vowels is affected by stress:
(a) Vowels on which the stress falls are pronounced
clearly and distinctly, and more time is required to
pronounce them.
(b) Unstressed vowels are fainter and less drawn out
Less time is spent on their pronunciation.
Note that is always stressed, no matter what its position in the
word.

Of all the vowels, o is the most affected by its position

in the word:
(a) When it occurs in an unstressed syllable immediately before the stressed syllable, it is pronounced like
a faint Russian a:
MocKB 'Moscow'
oak
'she'
OHO
'it'

Boa
'water'
dpoHiaH 'fountain'
AocK
'board'
XX

BOK3n 'railway station'

opra 'way'
rop
'mountain'
(b) In all other unstressed syllables o is pronounced
still more faintly as an a:
rojioB 'head'
xjinoK 'cotton'
noTOJiK. 'ceiling'
MJIOT
'hammer'
As for the other vowels, only e and a are in any way
affected. When they precede a stressed syllable they
are pronounced faintly and change to a sound that
resembles H:
cecrp
'sister'
H3K
'language'
creH
'wafi'
Bi other unstressed syllables they are pronounced even
more faintly:
none
'field'
Tra
'aunt'
Throughout this book the stressed syllable is indicated
by an acute accent, ', except in capital letters.
OKH

Hor

.s

'window'
'foot','leg'

4. Hard and Soft Consonants

All consonants in Russian (with the exception of v and
m) are hard when followed by the vowls a, o, y, M,
and 3, or when they come at the end of a word. Most
hard consonants have corresponding soft consonants, or
can be pronounced softly, when they are followed by
the 'soft' vowels e; , H, SO, and a or by the 'soft sign',
b - a symbol used merely to indicate that the preceding
consonant is soft.
Some consonants will not change appreciably when
followed by a soft vowel or a soft sign. In most cases
the student will find that he automatically softens a
consonant correctly as long as he pronounces the soft
vowel following it correctly,
xxi

The student should practise pronouncing pairs of consonants +hard and soft vowels:
ny Ty -

jno (cf. English 'do' - 'dew')

n o (cf. English 'too' - 'tube')

no
na
na
nu
ny
ny

ne
ne
(the soft Ji is pronounced with the tip of
na the tongue just between the teeth)
Jos.
nxo
HH (cf. English 'noose' - 'new')

The Soft and Hard Signs - x. and %

The soft sign, &, is used mainly to soften the preceding
consonant (MOTE* 'mother').
When it appears before the vowels a, e, , , however,
it denotes the presence of the sound H between the
consonant and the vowel and at the same time softens
the consonant:
ceMBH
craTBa

'family'
'article'

naaT&e
6en&

'dress'
'linen'

The hard sign, &, occurs chiefly after prefixes (such as 06, c, etc.)
and before H, e, , K>. It serves to keep the consonant it follows
hard:
clean
'congress'
o&bHCHHHe 'explanation'

xxii

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
ace. accusative case
adj. adjective
adv. adverb
attr. used attributively
cj. conjunction
conj. conjugation
dat. dative case
dim. diminutive
/. feminine gender
fut. future
gen. genitive case
impf, imperfective
aspect
inf. mfinitive
instr. instrumental
case
intrans. intransitive
m. masculine gender

n. neuter gender
nom. nominative case
num. numeral *
pf. perfective aspect
part, participle
pass, passive
pers. person, personal
pi. plural
pr. preposition
prep, prepositional
case
prs, present
pron. pronoun
s. substantive (noun)
sing, singular
trans, transitive
v. verb

xxiii

The Lessons

yPK 1

CJIOBPb

LESSON 1

VOCABULARY

BOfl water
Bjira Volga
BOT here is
a yes
HUM house
rniaH
flocK board, blackboard

JleHHHrpfl Leningrad
MocKB Moscow MOCT bridge
npTa school-desk
plan
' peic river

H and

CJIBO word

KaHji canal
KpTa map
Kuacc class(room)
jiMna lamp

CTOJI table
cryji chair
TaM there
Tyr here
ro this

rPAMMTHKA

^RAMMAR

1. Absence of article in Russian

The Russian language has no articfej The noun apiw
may mean 'the house', 'a house!, of'house' dependv.
v.
*
ing on the sense.
2. Omission of Verb corresponding to the English
'is', 'are' in the Present Tense
In Russian, the verb equivalent to the English 'is',
'are', etc., is not generally used in the present tense.
The sentence noiw TaM corresponds to 'the house is
there'.
After BOT, a demonstrative particle meaning 'here
is' 'here are' and used to indicate one or more objects
3

or persons (like the French 'voici' and 'voil'), no

verb is used. Thus
BOT
flOM.
BOT MOM H MOCT.

Here is the house.

Here are the house and bridge.

The same applies to the neuter form of the demonstrative pronoun STO which may be used to translate
'it is', 'this is'.
3TO

flOM.

This is a house.

Interrogative Sentences
Questions in Russian may be denoted by intonation,
the word order of the sentence remaining the same as
in the affirmative statement:
JSftM TOM.
ROM TOM?

The house is there. (Affirmative)

Is the house there? (Interrogative)

TEKCT

TEXT

BOT OM. BOT MOCT. O M TaM. MOCT TyT. JIOM TBM ? a,

POM TaM. MOCT Tyr? JIa, MOCT TyT. BOT CTOJI, cryji,
jiMna. TaM Kprai H pp. 3TO KpTa. T y r MocKB.
TaM Bnra. T y r CJIBO JiMna. 3TO Bojx. 3TO MOCT
HflOM.TaM cryji, CTOJI H npia. CTOJI TyT, cryji TaM.

ynPAMCHHHH
EXERCISES
Translate into Russian:
(i) The house is here.
(2) The bridge is there.
(3) Here is a house.
(4) Here is a bridge.
(5) Here is a lamp, a chair, a table.
(6) The school-desk is there. (7) The plan is here.
(8) This is a map.
(9) Here is the Volga.
(19) Th e canal is here.
(11) A bridge is there.
(12) Is this Moscow?
(13) Here is Leningrad.
(14) This is a classroom.
(15) Is this a map ?
(16) Are the house and the river there ?
(17) Here is the word 'bridge'.
4

yPOK2

CJIQBAPfc
AHTJIHH/. England

6pai m. brother
6yxTa/. bay
Basa/, vase
ra3ra/. newspaper .
rqe ado. where
roBopio I speak, I say
flaw I give
HOMH adv. home(wards)
3aBfl m. works, plant, factory
san m. hall
3flecb adv. here
Hfly I go
KapTHHa/. picture
KHra/. book
KMHaTa/. room
Mcio . place
Mou, MOH, MO /iron, my
Hex no
OKH . window

LESSON 2

VOCABULARY
oieq m. father
nep . nib, pen
no-pyccKH fo. in Russian
noie I sing
npotbccop m. professor
pa6ia/. work
POCCHH / . Russia

pyic/. arm, hand

cecrp / . sister
crpaH/. country, land
cryflHT m. student
CTyseHTKa/. (female) student
TBOft, TBOJ, TBO pTOlt. yOUT
d)H3HK m. physicist
4>p3a / . phrase
XHMKK m. chemist
xop tn. choir
apron. I
Airra/. Yalta
Hxra/. yacht

OH, OBta, OH pron. he, she, it

rPAMMAXHKA ; GRAMMAR
I. The Gender of the Noun
(i) Russian nouns have three genders: masculine, feminine, and neuter.
(2) The gender of nouns which denote persons and certain
animals is determined by their sex; for instance, th
noun 6paT 'brother' is masculine.
5

(3) The gender of a noun can frequently be detenninedby

the final letter of the word. This is important in
discerning the gender of nouns not denoting persons
or animals. Thus:
(a) All nouns ending in a consonant are masculine:
flOM

house

CTOJi

tabl

saBn

works, plant, factory

(b) Most nouns ending in -a are feminine:

crpaH
pyK

country, land arm, hand

Only a few nouns ending in -a are masculine. To this

category belong: some proper nouns, e.g. Jlyic
'Luke'; many diminutives of Russian masculine
names, e.g. lOpa (diminutive of rOpn 'George').
(c) Almost all nouns ending in -o are neuter:
OKH6

window

cjioBo

word

2. The Personal Pronouns of the 3rd Person

In Russian, the same personal pronoun of the 3rd
person denotes either animate beings or inanimate
objects. It has three forms: OH m. he, it; oaf. she, it;
OHO n. it.
re KfeH ? O H TVT.
BOT CTOJI. O H 3flea>.
(masc.)
re COHH ? OH 3flecb.
Vpfi KHra ? OH& TUM.
(Jem.)
. re nep ? BOT OH6. (new.)

Where is Ivan ? He is here.

Here is the table. It is here.
Where is Sonya? She is
here.
Where is the book ? It is
there.
Where is the nib ? Here it
is.

3. The Possessive Pronouns MOH and TBOH

The possessive pronouns MOB 'my', TBOH 'your'
('thy') change their form according to the gender of
the nouns they qualify:
Masculine: MOH 6paT
Feminine: MOH Jiaiwna

TBOH 6paT
TBOH jiainna

Neuter:

TBO6 CJIBO

Mo CJIBO

4. The Verb Endings -H, -y, and -et in the Present

Tense
The ist person singular of the present tense of most
Russian verbs ends in -loXthis is invariably so after a
vowel):
H no'I sing','I am singing'

flroBopfit

fl

flaib

In a few cases the ending is -y:

Hfly

' The 3rd person singular often ends in -T. The ending
-'T is always stressed:
HnoT

OHfla&r

OHHflT

Many Russian verbs, however, have the ending -HT in

the 3rd person singular of the present tense:
OH roBopHT.

'He speaks, is speaking, says, is saying.'

5. A Dash instead of a Link-Verb

If the subject and the predicate of a sentence are both
nouns, then in speaking a pause is made between them;
in writing a dash is used:
MOH 6paT - d>63HK.

My brother is a physicist.

TEKCT

TEXT

( i ) BOT KapTHHa. 3 T O Bjrra. BOT 6yxra H axra.

(2) 3ro 3an. TyT nor xop. noi, H K)pa nor.

(3) TyT KpTa. BOT MocKB H BOT JleHHHrpfl. Bnra
3AecB. 3 T O Borna ? Her, STO Kanji.
(4) BOT <bp3a: 3TO MOH 6paT. T y r CJIBO 6paT.
(5) fL Hny jjoMB. BOT MO POM. 3 T O Mo OKH. TaM MOH

KMHaia.
(6) GryijHT BHTH HHKHTHH roBopar: cryjjHT. PL
4>H3HK. MO 6paT BOJIH - XHMHK. M O H OTeu; npodpccop.
(7) Tpe CHH ? OH speb. On nar ypK. OH roBoprr
no-pyccKH: 3ro ra3ra H KHra. TaM Kapnma H
Ba3a. 3pea> CTOJI, Jiaicna H cryji. BOT j^ocic.
(8) BOT AOM. 3Aeo> 3aBA. 3Aecb MOH paSora. M o
McTo 3AecB. Fpe TBOH AOM ? O H TaM.
(9) 5L HAy AOMH. O H HAT AOMH, H C H H HAr AOMOH.

ynPAXCHEHHfl

EXERCISES

Translate into Russian:

(1) Is this a classroom? Yes, and I am giving a lesson

here.
(2) There is a hall there. My brother Yura is singing
there.
(3) This is a map. The Volga is here. The Don is there.
(4) He is going home and I am going home.
(5) Where is the vase ? It is here. Where is my book ? It
is there.
(6) The student is speaking Russian. He is saying: 'My
father is a chemist.'
(7) Where is the choir singing ?
(8) Is this my picture?
(9) This is a picture. Here is a bay and a yacht. My
brother says: 'This is Yalta.'
(10) My father speaks Russian. He is a physicist.
(11) Here is a sentence: 'My sister is a student.'

yPOK 3

CJIOBAPb

LESSON 3

VOCABULARY

Bam, Bma, Bme poss. pron.

your
Bem>/. thing
Bpai m. physician, doctor
Bbi pron. you
KO*af. daughter
pfiwi m. uncle
e/ry I go (by some means of

He particle not
HO c/. but
6qem> a<fo. very
nnoxo ofo. badly
none n. field
pa6oraio I work
cjioBpb m. dictionary, vocabulary
a m m. son
T&OKe, i6>Ke adv. also

aaiuiAf. earth
ana g. or
HBMceHp m. engineer
KapaHflm m. pencil
Kto pron. who
?
waxbf. mother
MM pron. we
aam, Hma, ssm^oss. pron. our

T&TH/. aunt

TOBpzm, m. comrade
y^rem m. teacher
xopom <ufo. well
<mraio I read
iro pro, what ? #'. that

rPAMMA^BKA

GRAMMAR

I. The Gender of Nouns

f,
(a) Most nouns ending in -a are feminine:
T&TH aunt . .^sentiui earth

This ending is found in some* masculine nouns indicating

persons of male sex or the diminutives of proper
names:
Mua uncle

BEH (diminutive of HBEH)

(b) Nouns ending in -e are neuter:

none field

(c) Nouns ending in -& may either be masculine or

feminine:
ynfcrejn, m. schoolteacher
MaTB/. mother
cnoBpib m. dictionary, vocabulary

Nouns ending in , , DI, or m + t are always feminine:

floii /. daughter
Benn/. thing

Nouns, however, ending in xc, % mi, or u\ not followed

by b are masculine:
TOBpHin m. comrade
KapaHflni m. pencil
Bpaq m. physician

Note that TOBapmn; and Bpai can refer to people of

both sexes.
2. The Possessive Pronouns Hani and nam
The possessive pronouns Haan 'our' and nam 'your'
in the singular (just like MOM 'my' and TBOM 'your')
have three genders:
Masculine: nam 6paT
Feminine: nama cecrp
Neuter:
naine Aicro

Bain OTq
sma Man.
Bfime CJIBO

3. The Personal Pronouns m and BM

The personal pronoun T H ('you', 'thou') is used when
addressing a close friend or relative. B M can either
denote the plural of 'you', or may be used as the polite
form of address to one person (compare the French
'vous'). When writing a letter the writer usually spells
B M with a capital letter whether it comes at the
beginning of a sentence or not.
10

The use of TBOH and Bain corresponds to the use of

Tbi and B U .

4. The Verb ending -er in the Present Tense

Many Russian verbs in the 3rd person singular of the
present tense have the unstressed ending -er:
. OHpa66iaeT.
UHefleT.

He works, he is working.
He goes (by car, train, etc.), he is going.

5. Interrogative Sentences
An interrogative sentence may be formed with the
help of the interrogative pronouns KTO ? 'who ?',TOO?
'what ?' or the interrogative adverb rne ? 'where ?':
KTO 3TO ?
iToTO?
Fe OB ?

Who is this ?
What is this?
Where is he ?

Note: When a or Her are used in answer to a question they are

separated from the rest of the sentence in pronunciation by a
pause and in writing by a comma:
3TO KHHra ? fla, ro KHra.

6. The Negative
In order to negate a sentence the particle He is placed
before the principal word in the sentence:
(cf.

OH He paSTaer.
He OH pa6Taer.
3TO He MOCKB.

He is not working,
It is not he that is working.)
This is not Moscow.

TEKCT
TEXT
(1) MOH Man, pa6raer 3/jecb. OH Bpai. Mou oiri Txce
Bpau, HO OH He paTaer 3flecB.
(2) KTO TO? 3TO Bama cecrp? Her, ro He MOH cecrp.
OH MOH TOBpum.
(3) Ham yqHTejn. nor qeHB xopom. KTO aui VTHTejn. ? Harn yqHTejn> - HHHceHp. OH xopom pa6Taer.
11

(4) BHH ut. Kita, r#e BBI ? MEI 3Mea>, Mania.

(5) Bain JXH roBopHT no-pyccKH? JJa, OH roBopT
qem. xopoiu H OH traraer Tnce qenb xopom.
(6) 3TO MOH cjioBpt H io THce MOH cjioBpB. Ho rjje
TBOH KHHra ? OH Tyr.

(7) Mon MaTB fler

AOMH, HO MOH cecrp

HJjr AOM.

(8) CTOJI TOM? JJa, CTOJI TaM. Mo cryji 3ecB. JiMna

TaM? HeT. Tfle JiMna? Ona 3ecb. Tpe TBOH KHHra?

Bor oaa.
ynPAJKHEHHH

EXERCISES

Translate into Russian:

(1) My son is an engineer. He works here. This is my
sister.
(2) Here is a map. Is this Russia ? Yes. This is Leningrad.
Here is Moscow. Here is the river Moskva. What is
this? A river or a canal? A canal.
(3) Does your father read Russian ? Yes, he reads well and
he speaks Russian. My mother does not speak Russian.
(4) It is not your father who is singing; your brother is
singing.
(5) Is your aunt a doctor ? No, she is an engineer; so is my
brother.
(6) Who is there ? It is your sister. She is singing.
(7) Here is our field and here is our house. This is the hall.
Here is your room.
(8) This is Comrade Ivanov. Are you a physicist or a
chemist, Comrade Ivanov ? I am not a physicist and I
am not a chemist. I am a doctor. And I am a professor.

12

yPOK 4

CJlOBAPb

LESSON 4

VOCABULARY

aHrjDMHHH m. Englishman
aHTJDiqHKa/. Englishwoman

Korfl adv. when

Aiafi m. May
BpMH n. time
HBocTb/. news
rep m. hero
OHO pron. they
rocTb m. guest
nen> I (no|io, -un.) to sing
fljiaTb I (flJia||K), -euib) to do, no-aHTJiMcKH adv. (in) English
to make
noHHMarb I (noHHM||io, -emb)
Aem> m. day
to understand
jryMaTb I (flyMa|io, -ena>)rto pyccKHH m. a Russian (man)
think
pyccKaa /. a Russian (woman)
xceH / . wife
ceifflbH/. familyi
H3Hb/. life
Tenpt adv. how
SHmie . knowledge
TJIBKO adv. only
SHaTb I (3H|io, -eiin>) to know
y adv. already, yet
1
BATH I (na I y, -nib) to go (on 4>aMHJiHH/. surname
xoTH cj. although
foot)
va&m. tea
HMH n. name
I. The English 'family' corresponds to the Russian cencba and the
Russian cbajuHJHiH to the English 'surname'. The two must not
be confused.
'>.From now on'the conjugation of the verb will be indicated in
the vocabularies by the Roman figures I and II (see p. 15,
Grammar section). In brackets after these figures will be the
ist and 2nd person singular of the present tense - in full if
there are any changes in the root (in sounds or stress); if there
are no changes, the ist person and the ending of the 2nd
person are given.
If the ist person is not or rarely used, it is omitted; if the verb
is used only in the 3rd person, then only this person is given in
brackets.
13

rPAMMATHKA

GRAMMAR

z. The Gender of Nouns - (continued)

(a) Nouns ending in -a are always masculine: i a , repfi.
(b) There are ten neuter nouns ending in -MH. The most
common of these are HMH 'name' and BpMH 'time'.
(c) Nouns ending in -CTB are almost always feminine:
HBOCT& 'news'

ieer& 'honour'

An exception is rocTi 'guest' which is masculine.

(d) Russian surnames ending in -HH and -OB have different forms for the masculine and feminine. The
feminine is formed simply by adding the ending -a:
Masculine: HBKHTHH, WBSHB
Feminine: HHKmHa, HBaHBa

The following table summarizes the gender of nouns:

Masculine
Ending in:
i.

consonant
cryflHT student
CTOJI

table

cryji

chair

Feminine
Ending in:
-a
cipaH
KHHra
cecrp

Neuter
Ending in:

country
book
sister

-0
OKH
CJIBO
MCTO

window
word
place

2. c o n s o n a n t + B
ywrejib teacher
flee*
day

-H
3eMJIH

-e
field
none
3Hmie knowledge

3. -it
Mafi
ijafi
repa

consonant+B
HOISHb life
flO^fc
daughter
HBOCTB news

-Ma
HMH
name
BpMH time

May
tea
hero

land
(paMHJIHH surname
CeMbH
family

2. The Personal Pronoun of the 3rd Person Plural

There is no distinction in gender in the 3rd person
plural of the personal pronoun. Thus OHH refers to
masculine and/or feminine and/or neuter:

/
Nicholas is a Russian.
Olga is also a Russian.
They are Russians.
Where are the books? They are
here.
Note: pyccKHe is the nominative plural of pyccKHH (a Russian
man) and/or pyccKaa (a Russian woman), KHHTH is the nom. plur.
HHKOJiafi pyccKHH.
OjiBra TH<e pyccKaa.
OHH pyccKHe.
re KHHTH ? OHH 3flecb.

of KHHra.

The Present Tense of the Verb. Conjugations I

and II
In Russian there is only one form of the present tense
which corresponds to the two present tense forms in
Enghsh, present indefinite and present continuous:
OH iHTeT no-pycciai
xopom.
Tenpb OH vscrAer.

He reads Russian well.

He is reading now. '

In Russian, verb endings in the present tense are

inflected for person (T', 'you', 'we', etc.) and number (singular, plural). For each person in the singular
and plural there are corresponding verb endings. In
accordance with these endings, Russian verbs are
divided into two conjugations: Conjugation I and
Conjugation II. (There are also a few verbs which have
elements of both conjugations: these can be called
verbs of mixed conjugation.)
Conjugation 1
Infinitive: *nrrTi t o read
Present T e n s e
Person

ist
2nd
3rd
Plural

H tJHTO
T U T mTenn>
OH "j
OH ytraxer
OH J

Singular
I read, a m reading
y o u read, are reading

he ^
she breads, is reading

it J

Mw iHTeM
we read, are reading
you read, are reading
Bbi qHTere
OHH tmrKiT
they read, are reading
L i k e qHTTb are declined flnaTb, paTara, nomuuTB, 3Hare>, and
flyiuaTb.

ist
2nd
3rd

15

Infinitive: net* to sing

Present Tense
Person
ist .
2nd
3rd
Plural
ist
2nd
3rd

Conjugation

Singular
I sing, am singing
you sing, are singing

H non
TU noms
OH >

he "J

OH >HOT
OHO J

she >sing8, is singing

it J

MbinoM
BbinoTe
OEtnoBVr

we sing, are singing

you sing, are singing
they sing, are singing

n
Infinitive: roBopn to speak
Present Tense

Person
ist
2nd
3rd
Plural
ist
2nd
3rd

a roBopA
TH roBopnn.
OH ^
OH W-oBopHT
OHO J

Singular
I speak, am speaking
you speak, are t
he "\
she Upeaks, is speaking
it J

MM roBopM we speak, are speaking

Bbi roBop&re you speak, are speaking
OHH roBopT they speak, are speaking

Endings: -K>, -HUH., -HT, -HM, -Hre, -HT

4. The Infinitive
(a) Most Russian verbs have an infinitive ending in -TB:
qnrTB
nerB
roBopHTb

to read
to sing
to speak

(b) Some verbs end in -TH in the infinitive. The verb

HATH'to go (on foot)'is one of them.
Note: Henceforth verbs will be given in the vocabularies in the
infinitive.
16

5. Punctuation
All subordinate clauses in Russian are separated from
the main clause by a comma:
a sa&so, iTO Tbl pa6Taenn>.
Korfl OH roBopHT, A

I know that you are working.

When he speaks I understand.

nOHHMlO.

TEKCT

TEXT

(i) ^ITO T H AJiaemB ? Si ^HTIO. T M HHTeiiib no-pyccKH ?

Her, H *nrrio no-aHTJiHHCKH.
(2) T B I 3Heiin>, TTO HBH HHKHTHH H Onsra HaHBa pyccKHe ? a, H 3Hio. BBI pyccKH ? Her, H aHrjmqHHH H MOH HCeH - aHTJMaHKa.
(3) BBI noHHMeTe, TTO Bma cecrp nem. xopom
noT ? Jla, H 3Hio. Tenpt OH Aar ypK.
(4) Si Bpa 5KiiHHa. Bpa - Mo HMH. JKHJiHHa - MOH
(haMHJTHH.
(5) KTO 3AecB noHHMeT no-pyccKH? Si. KTO roBopnr
no-aHrjTHHCKH ? Mbi. 3TO HBOCTB.
(6) Si 3Haio, m o TOBpmn IIIyKHH - HHHCeHp. JlflAH
KJIH H OH paiaiOT Tyr. Ho OH He 3HioT, KTO TBI.
(7) Si mwio no-pyccKH, H MOH TETH Tace lreT nopyccKH. Ho MBI He noHHMeM, Kor^ BBI roBopre.
(8) *ITO TBI 3Heun> ? Si 3Hio, m o io Mo HMH.

ynPAXCHEHHfl
EXERCISES
Translate into Russian:
(1) This is my book and this is my book too. Do you
understand that ?
(2) Is your name Ivanov ? I know that your sister is Vera
Nikitina and that she is a doctor.
(3) When he reads Enghsh he reads very well; but when
he reads Russian he reads badly. But he does understand what I say.
17

(4) Ivan Petrov is not a Russian although his* surname is

Petrov. He does not speak and he does not understand
Russian.
(5) My wife knows that your wife sings very well.
(6) Is your son already an engineer? What does he do?
Does he work yet (is he already working) ?
(7) When we work we talk only Russian; we do not talk
English.
(8) Where is your dictionary? I don't know. Who knows
where it is ? I think that you know.
(9) 'Is this thing a pencil?' says the teacher. 'No, it is a
pen,' says Vanya.
* ero, pronounced 'yevo*.

18

yPOK 5

CJIOBAPb
a cj. but, and
aBTOMOHJib m. motor car
flpec m. address
aHTJDHCKHH adj. English
HOJiHOTKa / . library
rpaHCflaHHH m. citizen
rpaHCflHKa/. citizen(ess)
flHce adv. even

cjm j.if
xcHmHHa/. woman
H3yqTb I (H3yq||io, -emb) to
study .
KpecTbjiHHH m. peasant
Kpb'nna / . roof
uflJieHHO adv. slowly
Hope . sea
MVHCiHHa m. man "*

LESSON 5

VOCABULARY
HeiHHro, HeMHHCKO adv. a little
H03K m. knife
HOTO/. night

no-HeiunKH adv. (in) German

no-tppaHuyscKH adv. (in) French
poflHHa / . fatherland
poiHH m. novel
cerflsmi adv. today
ceoqc adv. now, at the present,
immediately
coBTCKHH adj. Soviet
craTbfl / . article (in a newspaper)
yMTb I (yM||io, -emb) to be
able, to know (how ... )
4>paHiry3CKHH adj. French
Hab'iK m. language, tongue

I. The r in cero/ma, is pronounced like an English ' v '

BBipaxcana

Expressions

KaK no-pyccKH ... ? What is the Russian for ... ?

JS cBHflHHH.
Good-bye.
3flpBCTBy(Te).
How do you do ? Greetings! (lit. 'be healthy! ').

19

rPAMMATHKA

GRAMMAR

I. The Plural of Nouns

(i) Formation of the plural - regular forms.
Masculine

Feminine
-M

Neuter
-a
CJIBO - oiOB
OKH
- Kna
Mcro - Mecr

CTyflHT - CTVfleHTBI
saBfl
- 3aBflM
MyMW- MyJKTHHa
- HM

ra3ra
crpaH
cecrp

- raserai
- crpHBi
- ccrpu

ypK
HOJK
flHflH
rep

KHHra
Kpb'rnia
SeMJIfl
4>aMHUHH
craTbH
HBOCTb
HOqb
Bemb

- KHHTH
njie
noji
- Kpb'mrH Mpe - Mop
- 3MJIH
SHHHe-
(paMH
JJUH
- craTbH
- HBOCTH
- H1H
- Bupa

- ypKH
- HOHCH
-HHflH
- repH

rocTb
- rCTH
aBTOiuo- aBTomoOHJtt. HJIH

From the above table it can be seen that the plural

endings of Russian nouns are: -BI, -H or -a, -a.
The following rules should be noted:
(a) Most masculine nouns ending in a consonant have
their plural ending in -BI (CTOJI - CTOJIBI), or, if the last
consonant is K, r, x or xc, n, m, m, (the so-called
gutturals and sibilants), -H (ypK - ypKH).
(b) Masculine nouns ending in -ft or -B change the
last letter to -H (rep - repH; TOCTB - rcra).
(c) Feminine nouns (and a few masculine nouns) ending in -a change the -a to -BI (rasera - ra3T&i) unless
the preceding letter is a guttural or a sibilant, in which
case the plural will end in -H (KHHra - KHHTH; Kptmia
- Kp&'niiH).

(d) Feminine nouns ending in -a or -B change the

last letter to -H (dpaMajraa - dpaMHjraH; BemB - Binn).
20

Note that this also applies to the few masculine nouns

ending in - H (pfipx ~ HAH).

(e) Neuter nouns change the ending -o to - a and -e to

- H (CJIBO - cjioe; Mpe - MopaS).
Note: Most masculine nouns ending in -eu, (oTq) form the
plural by dropping the -e- and adding -M (OTO).

(2) Unexpected forms in the plural.

(a) Some masculine nouns have the ending -& in the
plural: AOM - AOM, Apec - aApec; or the ending -a:
yqHTejn. - yqHrejiH (also yrrejTH). These endings in
-& and - a are always stressed.
(b) Masculine nouns ending in -anHH, -HHHH (rpajKA-

aHHH, KpecTBHHHH) usually form the plural by

changing the final syllable - H H to -e: rpaHCAaHHH rpaacAaHe; Kpecr&HHHH - Kpecr&HHe.
(3) The position of the stress.
The stressing of nouns in the plural often gives the student some
difficulty. It is best at first to try to learn the stress on each noun
separately; the rules for stressing can be learned at a much later
stage.
The stress can do three things:
(a) it can remain where it is in the singular (in this case no
information on stressing will be given in the vocabularies):
cryflHT CTyflHTbi.
This is always the case when the stress, in a three or more
syllable word, does not fall on the firjt or last syllable (TOBpmn
- TOBpnnm; ra3ra - ra3n>i).
(b) it can shift to the end: KapaHflm - KapaHflanm; CJIBO CJIOB.
(c) it can shift to the first syllable: pyK - pyKHj OKH - KHa. '

(4) The plural of Russian surnames ending in -OB and -HH.

Russian surnames ending in -OB and - H H (such as
HBaHB and HHKHTHH) take the ending - B I in the
plural:
cerpbi HBaHBM
6paT H cecrp HHKHTHHK
21

the Ivanov sisters

the Nikitin brother and
sister

2. The Conjunctions HO and a

(a) The conjunction HO is used to express antithesis and
corresponds to the English 'but':
H He roBopi no-pyccKH, HO
noHHMio.

I do not speak Russian, but

I understand it

(b) The conjunction a may also express antithesis:

OH noT, a a ner.

He sings (can sing), but i i

do not (can't).

However, the conjunction a may be also connective,

in which case there is little difference from the conjunction H 'and':
Bbi'noTe, a H imio.

You are singing, and

(=whereas) I am reading.

Sometimes the conjunction a finds no equivalent in

the English translation:
3TO He poiuH, a cnoBpb.

It is not a novel, it is a
dictionary.
Note: The conjunction H can be used to denote emphasis with
the meaning 'even', 'also'. Thus H OH nor can mean 'he too
(or 'even he') is singing', as well as 'and he is singing'. It can
also be used to mean 'both... and'. OH roBopr H no-aHTjrMcKB
H no-pyccKH (he speaks both English and Russian).

3. Nouns Denoting Nationality

Both pyccKHH and anrnnHCKH are adjectives (here
in the nominative masculine singular). P^CCKHH, however, is also used for the noun 'a Russian' (the feminine is p^ccKaa).
'Englishman' and 'Englishwoman' (and all other
nationalities), on the other hand, have a special noun
in Russian aHrjnraaHHH, aHnnraHKa.
The adjective cannot be used in place of the noun.
Thus:
OH aHTjnraHHH.
(not OH aarjiHHCKHH)
b u t OH aBTJiHHCKHH cTyflHt.
22

He is English.
He is an English student.

He is (a) Russian,
a Russian lesson

Cf. OH PJ>CCKH.
pyCCKHH ypK

Note: Nouns and adjectives denoting nationality are never

written with a capital, except of course at the beginning of a
sentence.

TKCTM

TEXTS
i

Si aHTJiHqHHH. SL roBopib no-aHTJiHHCKH. TenpB H

H3yHio pyccKHH H3B'rK.* Si yiK HeMHro noHHMio H
roBopib no-pyccKH.
T B I TJKe H3yHeuiB pyccKHH H3BIK. TenpB, TBI Tce
HeMHro noHHMeniB H roBopmiiB no-pycKH.
MOH 6paT xopom roBopHT no-aHranncKH, OH yMer
tnrrTB no-HeMinai. Mon cecrp yMer roBopHTb no4>paHny3CKH.
A BBI roBopHTe no-d)paHqy3CKH ?
> Hr, He roBopib, HO noHmtaio.
* Note: The accusative (i.e. the case of the direct object in the
sentence) is the same as the nominative for all inanimate masculine
nouns in the singular and for inanimate nouns of all genders in the
plural. This is explained in detail in Lesson 10.
2

ToBpHUTH, TTO BBI ceHqc AJiaere ?

*lHTeM.
BBI qurere no-HrjrHHCKH?
Her, no-pyccKH. M B I H3yqeM pyccrarit H3B'IK.
BBI yac noHHMere no-pyccKH ?
-^ JIa, HeMHHoxo.
BBI 3HeTe, Kan no-pyccKH CJIBO 'fatherland' ?
3Hio. 3TO pAHHa.
A KaK no-pyccKH CJIBO 'comrade' ?
no-pyccKH o TOBapmri.
23

3
3ApBCTByHTe, TOBapHnm! Xopom, ITO BBI 3flecb,
3ApBCTByH, HaH! TBI He paeraemB cerAHH ?
Her, cerAHH H He paoraio. nrp! H TBI 3AecB! ^ T
TBI AjraemB ?
KHHTH HHTlO, TOBpmn, TJTBKO KHHTH tD2TaK>. JI^tKB
Korp yqHTejiH roBopHT, H tnrrio.
A mo TBI qnTeua. ?
TenpB H iHTio no-am-jiMcKH.
3TO aHTJiHHCKaH KHHra? TBI yMeniB vnr-n, noaHrJTHHCKH ?

,11a, yMio.
Hy*, H HAy AOM. Jip CBHAHHH, TOBpHUTH'
Jl0 CBHAHHH.
*'WeU*.
ynPAXCHEHHH EXERCISES
Translate into Russian:
(i) Here is the library. The men are reading newspapers;
the women are reading books.
(2) Are the men Enghsh ? Yes, they are. They are studying
the Russian language.
(3) Here is a Russian woman. She knows how to speak
English and French. She also understands a little
German if you speak slowly.
(4) Our teacher is Russian. He is a Soviet citizen. He is
' giving a Russian lesson today.
(5) This is not a novel but a dictionary. Do you know
what the Russian for 'dictionary' is ? Yes, but I don't
know what it is in German.

24

ypoK 6

CJIOBAPb
Sb'icrpo adv. fast, swiftly
BHfleib II (BHJKV, BHflHHTb) tO
see
Bee pron. all, everybody (pi.)
Bc pron. everything (n. sing.)
rpMKO adv. loudly
flHKTHT m. dictation
BrpTb I (mp || K), -emb) to
play
KaK adv. how, cj. as, like
Kyfl adv. whither, where
O&bHCHHTb I (o6l>flCHfl||lO, -emb)
to explain
OHHTb adv. again
OTBenTb I (oTBeM||io, -emb) to
answer
HHcTb I (many, nmemb) to
write
rmcbMO . (pi. imcbMa) letter
uojKajiycTa please

HOTM adv. then

npBHJio n. rule
paaroBp m. conversation
CHflTb II (ciDKy, cHflHmb) to
sit
CJrymaTb I (cJiyma||io, -emb) to
listen (to)
CMOTpTb II (CMOTpK), CMTpmin>) to watch, to look at
cnpmHBaTb I (cnpuiHua|io,
-emb) to ask
aofl adv. hither, here
TaK adv. so, thus
THXO adv. quietly
Tyfl adv. thither, there
yqjJTb II (yqy, y^mnb) to learn
(by heart); to teach
qen, ibH, ^b? -<mi} pron.
whose ?

BBipaxcHHH
HflT ypK
fljiaTb ycnxH
t-^ /Tbi nojKHBemb ?
\ B W nojKHBere?
CnacHo
HflTH Ha ypK

A lesson is going on.

to make progress
How are you ?
Thank you.
to go to a (the) lesson

25

rPAMMATHKA
i. The Present Tense of the Verb (continued)
(a) A number of verbs of Conjugation I take the ending -y
in the present tense for the ist person singular:
H HAy ' I go, am going', and the ending -VT for the
3rd person plural: OHH HA^T 'they go, are going'.
Infinitive: HATH I to go, to walk
Present Tense
Person
ist
2nd
3rd

Singular
H Hfly
I go, am going
TU Hflmfc
you go, are going
OH "I
he "I
OH S-Hflr
she >goes, is going
OHO

ist
2nd
3rd

it J

Plural
Mbi Hfl'M
we go, are going
Bbi Hflexe
you go, are going
OHH BflyT
they go, are going

Infinitive: nacib I to write

Present Tense
Person
ist
2nd
3rd

ist
2nd
3rd

v
Singular
A runny
I write, am writing
Tbi nrnnena you write, are writing
OH "J
he "I
OH S-nameT she ^writes, is writing
OH J
it J

Plural
Mbi minieM we write, are writing
Bbi nnmere you write, are writing
OHH mnnyT they write, are writing

Note the change of the consonant c to m throughout the present

tense, and the change of stress.
26

(b) Some verbs of Conjugation II with infinitives in

-neTB or -OHTB change the A to SK in the ist person
singular only. As HC cannot be followed by K (see
p. xx), the ist person singular ends in -SKV. Thus
CHflTB 'to sit' is conjugated:
H CH3ic
Tbl CHfljrmh
OH, OH, OH CHflHT

Mbi CHflHM
Bbi CHflHTe
OHH CHflHT

BHAerB 'to see' is conjugated in the same way.

If the stem of a verb in the 2nd conjugation ends in a
sibilant (MC, I , m, or m), the ist person singular and
the 3rd plural will end in -y and -aT respectively.
Thus, yqHTB 'to learn (by heart), to teach' is conjugated:
yry
Tbl y i m i i h
OH, OH, OH y^HT

MM f
Bbi y<iHTe
OHH y^aT

2. The Imperative Mood

In Russian, the most common forms of the imperative
are the 2nd person singular and plural:
Singular
qHTH read
nofi
sing
gO
HflH
roBopH speak

Plural
nnaaTe
nHTe
HflHTe
roBopnre

read
sing
gO
speak

The imperative of verbs of the first and second conjugation is formed from the stem of the present tense.
To obtain the imperative singular, drop the ending of
the 2nd person singular (or the 3rd plural) present
tense, and add to the stem of the present tense:
(a) after vowels - the letter -H:
tnrra(enn>)+H- mn&a
read
no(mb)+0 - HH
sing
(b) after consonants, the ending
Hfl(mb) + H - HflH
roBop(mm.)+H - roBopn
yq(Hmb)+H - yiH

27

-H:
go
speak
teach

For the plural form of the imperative, the ending -TO

is added to the singular imperative:
iHTaH+Te - iHTHTe
HOH+Te - nirre
HflH + Te-HflHTe

roBopH+ie- roBopre
yqn+Te - yrinre

3. The Interrogative Adverbs rae? and icyfl?

The two Russian adverbs r#e? and Kyjj? correspond
to 'where' and 'whither' in English; but Kyn? may
also be translated by 'where':
rue BM paOTaeie ?
Kyn Bbi HflTe ?

Where are you working ?

Where are you going ?

The interrogative adverb re? is used in questions

relating to the place where an object is located.
A question with the word re? may be answered by
the words 3RecB 'here', Taiw 'there':
Toe OH CHflHT ? OH CHART
iraM.

Where is he sitting ? He is
sitting there.

Kyaa? is used in questions relating to the direction

of a movement.
A question with the word icyn ? may be answered by
the words Tyn 'there', cwp 'here':
Kyfl OH HflT ?
OH HflT Ty.

Where is he going ?
He is going there.

4. Possessive Pronouns
So far the possessive pronouns MOH, TBOH, nam, and
aam have been dealt with in the. singular only (see
Lessons 2 and 3). In the plural (for all genders) their
forms are:
MOH, TBOH, Enm, Bannt

The possessive pronouns of the 3rd person - er6*

* Note: The r in er is pronounced like an English V .
28

('his' or 'its'), e ('her'), and HX ('their'), are

merely the genitive of OH (or OH), one, and OHH
respectively, and mean 'of him (or it)', 'of her', and
'of them'.
Consequently they are invariable and do not alter in
gender according to the object or person they qualify.
Thus:
er6 flOM his house
ero KHHra
his book
er rmcbM his letter
er6 TOBapmnn his comrades
e
flOM
her house
e KHHra
her book
Hx flOM their house, etc.

The possessive pronoun may be used as an attribute or

as a predicate:
MOH KHHra TaM.
KHHra - MOH.

My book is there.
The book is mine.

5. The Interrogative Pronoun i e ?

The interrogative pronoun ne& 'whose?' has three
gender forms in the singular, ie, HBA, HB, and
one in the plural, IBH. Thus:
TOOflOM?
aa KHHra ?
*n>H KHHTH ?

whose house ?
whose book ?
whose books ?

In questions <ien is often accompanied by ro:

tJbH TO KHHra ? Whose book is this (it) ?
ilea TOflOM? Whose house is this ?
MbH TO KHa ? Whose windows are these ?

29

TEKCT
i.

ypK
3ACCB HAT ypK. M B I H3yqeM pyccKHH H3BTK. M B I
qHTeM, irinneM H roBopiw no-pyccKH. Ham ydrrejn.
cnpuiHBaeT ypK. Pepi BpyH oTBeqaer xopom.
M B I Bee OTBeqeiw xopom. noTM yqHTejn. OBHCHHCT
npBHJio. O H roBopr AiAJieHHO H rpMKO. Bce
cryAHTBi CHAHT THXO H cnymaiOT. Si yac xopom
noHHMio no-pyccKH. MOH TOBpmnH THte xopom
noHHMioT no-pyccKH.
ToBpmn CMHT, HHTHTe, noHcanyBcra, roBOpHT yiHTejiB. CMHT iHTeT 6Bicrpo, HO qem. THXO.
yHHTejn. roBopHT: ^hrraHTe, nojKjryHcra, rpMKO
H He TaK 6b'lCTpO.
Ham TOBpmn iHTeT. TenpB OH HHreT rpMKO
H MflJieHHO. HOTM HHTlO H.
Xopom, roBopHT yHtrrejiB. BBI BCC AJiaere
ycnxH. TenpB mnuHTe AHKtaHT.
M B I CHAHM H iranieM AnKraHT. yqHTejn. He CHAHT.
O H MHTeT. O H mraer rpMKO. Bce CJrymaiOT H mmiyr.
noTM yqHTejiB roBopHT:
TenpB HAHTC AOMH. y^HTe CJIOB. Jjo CBHAHHH.

2.

Pa3roBp
3ApBCTByHre, TOBpHm. HaHB!
3ApBCTBya, KJIH!

KaK BBI noHameTe ?

CnacH6o, xopom. A TBI ? KaK TBI noHamemB ?
CnacHo, H THce xopom.
*IBH 3TO KHHra ?

MOH.
KyA TBI HAmB ? T B I HAiHB AOM ?
Her, H HAy Ha ypK.
JIO CBHAHHH.
Jlfi CBHAHHH.
30

ynPAXCHEHHH
1. Write out twenty sentences, using various forms of the
present tense of the verbs given btdow and also using
the adverbs:
e.g.

Si noHHMio no-pyccKH.
O H maraer THXO.

KJIH HAT AOMH.

Verbs: paoraiB, trarTB, noHHMTB, ymexb, HATH,
CHATB, BHAeTB, roBopHTB, cnpaumBaTb, oraenrB,
nerB, micaTB.
Adverbs: xopom, nnxo, rpMKO, THXO, MAJieHHO,
B'icrpo, TaM, TyA, 3AecB, ciOA, no-pyccKH.
2. Give the imperative of the following verbs (2nd pers.
sing, and 2nd pers. pi.):
HHTTB, pa6TaTB, ITHcTB, nBTB, HATH, CHATB, CJTyniaTB, OTBenTB, HipTB.

3. Put the following sentences into the singular:

(i) *lBH 3T0 KHHTH ? - MOH.
(2) ^IBH ro micBMa ? - E.
(3) ^IBH TO cjiOBapii ? - Hx, a He Baum.
4. Translate into Russian:
(1) Where are you going? Are you going to a lesson?
No, we are going home.
(2) Are you making progress ? my brother asks. Then
he listens when I reply.
(3) Answer in Russian! Do not listen when he says
that it is good only to speak English.
(4) I see that you are not writing. Please write, all of
you! No, don't talk, Ivan. Write your dictation,
and quickly!
(5) When you explain the rule I understand everything
that you say; but when you speak quickly, I do not.
Please speak slowly, very slowly.
31

(6) What is his sister doing? Where is her uncle

going ? She is going there. He is going there. They
are all going there.
(7) That's good! Now you are getting on. No, I am
working badly. You don't understand. I don't
know how to learn words. I don't know whose
book this is.

32

YPOK 7

CJIOBAPb
6Ji libra, -afl, -oe; -we adj.
white
6ecflOBaTb I (6ecfly|io, -emb*)
to converse, to chat
6ojn.ui[|H, -an, -e; -He adj.
big
BMcre adv. together
flesyrnKa/. girl
flMa adv. at home
flopor||a, -an, -e; -ne adj.
dear; expensive
Hpyr m. friend
HcypHn m. magazine

H B I U H , -aa, -oe; -bie adj.

30JIOT||H,

CTaplbm, -aa, -oe; -we adj. old

CTOHTb II (CTO|lb, -HHIb) tO
stand
TeJieBH3op m. television set
Terpaflb/. exercise book
JjiHiia / . street
xopm||HH, -aa, -ee; -ne adj.
good
qenoBeK m. person, man
qpH||biH, -an, -oe; -bie adj.
black

-a,

-e;

CHH||HH, -HH, -ee; -He adj. blue

adj.

gold(en)
KpacHB|biH, -an, -oe; -bie adj.
beautiful
KpcH[|bJU, -an, -oe; -we adj.
red
KypHTb II (Kypib, Kypmnb) to
smoke
MnbtmK m. boy
MOJiofl||H, -H, -e; -He adj.
young
Ho n. sky, heaven

* The conjugation of verbs in -oBa-n. is explained in Lesson 12.

BBIpaHcHHH
KaK Bma (paMHJiHH ?
CMOTpTb TejieBH3op
HaKpbTb Ha CTOJI

new

oSenaTb I (o6fla||K>, -emb) to

have dinner
OTflbixTb I (oTflbix||K>j -emb)
to rest
TqecTBo n. patronymic
np3flBHK m. holiday
npenpcH libra, -an, -oe; -bie
adj. beautiful, splendid, fine
pacTHHe n. plant
p3a/. rose
py^Ka/. penholder, pen

What is your surname ?

to watch television
to lay the table

33

FPAMMATHKA
i.

Adjectives
Russian adjectives agree with the nouns they qualify.
In the singular they have three forms; in the plural one only (for all three genders).
Adjectives can be divided into 'hard', 'soft', and
'mixed'.

(i) Hard adjectives. The endings of 'hard' adjectives are:

-BIH (or -, if the stress is on the last syllable)
for the masculine singular
-an tor the feminine singular
-oe for the neuter singular
-aie for all genders in the plural.
Masculine

Feminine

-6K, - H E

-aa

Neuter

-oe

MOJIOflH qejiOBK
a young man

MOJioflH flBymKa
a y o u n g girl

MOJiofle pacrHHe
a y o u n g plant

HBMK flOM
a new house

HBaa KHHra
a n e w book

HBOe CJIBO
a n e w word

Plural
- M e (for all the
genders)
MOjioflue flBymKH
y o u n g girls
HBbie ra3Tbi
fresh newspapers

Note: The masculine ending -6s is always stressed. The masculine

ending -bm is never stressed.

(2) Soft adjectives. The endings of'soft' adjectives are:

-HH

for the masculine singular (CHHHH KapanAin a blue pencil)

34

-aa for the feminine singular (CHHHH Basa a

blue vase)
-es for the neuter singular (cHHee H6o the blue
sky)
=iie for aU genders in the plural (cmme KapaHsaniH blue pencils).
In most adjectives of this type the consonant before
the ending is a soft H.

(3) Mixed adjectives

(a) When the stem of an adjective ends in r, K, or x
the letter BI is always replaced by H.
Thus the endings of such adjectives are:
-HH (or -6H, if the stress is on the last syllable)
for the masculine singular
-an for the feminine singular
-oe for the neuter singular
-ne for aU genders in the plural.
Masculine

Feminine

-OH, -H

-as
floporfia KHHra
expensive book
pyccKaa ra3ia
Russian newspaper

floporH flpyr
dear friend
pyCCKHH S3HK

Russian language

Plural
-He(for all the
genders)
floporae KHHTH

expensive books
pyccKHe cJioB
Russian words

35

Neuter
-oe
flopore nep
expensive nib
pyccKoe CJIBO

Russian word

(b) When the stem of an adjective ends in , I , m,

or m the letter BI is always replaced by a; the letter o
(when not stressed) is replaced by e. Thus we have the
-HH (or -6H, when the stress is on the last syllable)
for the masculine singular
-an for the feminine singular
-ee (or -6e, when the stress is on the last syllable)
for the neuter singular
-He for aU genders in the plural.
Masculine
-OH, -HH

Feminine

-aa

Neuter
-6e, -ee

dojibinH flOM
large house

6ojn>ma crpaH
big country

6ojn>m6e none
big field

XOpmHH fleHb
fine day

xopmaa KHHra
good book

xopmee MCTO

good place

Plural
-He (for all the
genders)
6ojn>nre flOM
large houses
xopnrae nojia
fine fields

2. The Function and the Position of the Adjective in

the Sentence
(i) In the sentence, the adjective may be used as an
attribute and as a predicate.
(2) The adjective used as an attribute usuaUy stands
before the noun it qualifies, e.g. HBBIH JKVPHJI 'a new
magazine'.
However, in order to add emphasis to the meaning,
the adjective can stand after the noun.
36

(3) An adjective used as a predicate usuaUy stands after the

noun it qualifies and in speech it is separated from the
latter by a pause:
3IOT jKypHn nnbiii.

3.

This magazine is new.

The Interrogative Pronoun KaKH?

A question referring to the adjective may be formed
with the pronoun KaicB? 'what?'. This pronoun,
like the adjective, agrees in number and gender with
the noun it refers to:
Masculine
KaKH (TO) AOM ?
What house (is
this)>

Feminine
Neuter
KaicAa (ro) fjamn ? KaKe (TO) CJIBO ?
What street (is
What word (is
this)?

this)?

Plural
KaKHe (TO) ropofl ?
What towns (are these) ?

The pronoun KaKH may also occur in exclamations:

KaKH npeKpcHbiH neHb!

4.

What a splendid dayl

The Demonstrative Pronoun STOT

The demonstrative pronoun TOT 'this' has three

gender forms in the singular and one in the plural:

Masculine
TOT KapaHflm
this pencil

Feminine Neuter
Ta KHHra TO nep
this book this nib

Plural
(for all the genders)
TH TeTpflH
these exercise-books

Note: The neuter form of the demonstrative pronoun 4TO may be

used for ' this is ', ' it is ', irrespective of the gender and number
of the noun to which it refers:
3TO HBbiH
3TO HBbie

flOM.
flOM.

This is a new house.

These are new houses.

37

5 Russian Names and Patronymics

In Russian it is common practice to address grown-up
persons who are not relatives or close friends by their
first name (HMH) and the patronymic (mecrBo), which
is derived from the father's name:
HHKOJlH HBHOBiM
BHKTOP HHKOJieBHq
Bpa HuKojieBHa

(Nicholas, son of Ivan)

(Victor, son of Nicholas)
(Vera, daughter of Nicholas)

Whenever the proper name of the father ends in a hard

consonant, -OBHI (for persons of the male sex) or
-OBHa (for persons of the female sex) is added:

{ OBHa

HBH J "" 0 B H q

HBHOBHtIW.

HfiaHOBHa /.

Whenever the'proper name of the father ends in -a,

this letter is dropped and -EBHI (for persons of the
male sex) or -esna (for persons of the female sex) is
added:

i*{ss

sasr

Whenever the proper name of the father ends in -a or

-a, this ending is replaced by - H I (for persons of the
male sex) or -HHHiHa, -anna (for persons of the
female sex):
tr
J+mi
m ~v_n_
HHKHT
a < ,
1

|.+HqHa

Uni* {J

HHKHTira.

,
HHKHTH4Ua/.
Kjibeq m.
HjiBKHnraHa/.

38

TEKCT
BOT MOH HBBIH KpacHBi KapaHnin H BOT MOH
HBaa qpHaH pynKa. A ro HTO ? 3 r o HBoe 30JioTe
nep. TaM qpHBie, canne H KpcHBie KapaHaamn.
3Ta flBymKa - MOH cecrp; OH 6ojn>niH. OH
yMeT nerB H OH roBopar no-pyccKH. On xopom
3HeT pyCCKH H3BIK.
T y r CTOHT npenpacHaH CHHHH B3a. A TyT HCHB

6ojn.ma H noporaa pyccKan mmra. KaicH xopman

KHHra!
3TO pyccKaH ra3ra? HeT, TO aHrjraHCKaH ra3ra.
3TO Bce am-jrHHCKHe ra3rBi. A HBH TH 6ojn>mHe
KHHTH ? OHH Bce MOH.

2. HMa
CerflHH npaoHHK. Hma ceMBH jJMa. Bce oTABixiOT.
y Hac cerflHH TCTH*: HHKOJin IlBJioBira H er xceH
Bpa BacHJTBeBHa HBaHBBi, a TioKe HX CBIH H pow.
HHKOJin nBjiOBHH H MOH OTu, SecnyiOT H KypHT.
Bpa BacHjnseBHa, MOH cecrp H e Myncf CMTPHT
TejieBH3op. Rm m-pior.
MOH MaTB roBopHT: KaK xopom: cerflHH MBI
oSnaeM.Bce BMcre. THH, HaKpBmh Ha CTOJI.
'

- ,

* ' We have guests today'.

f'husband'.

"(
3. Pa3roBp
BBI aHrjnraHHH ?
JSj. M O H pomma KaK Baiue HMH ?

AHTJIHH.

Mo HMH JIJKOH. A BBI pyccKHH ?

JIfl, H pyCCKH.
KaK Bama (paMHjrHH ?
HBaHB.
A BaUie HMH H THeCTBO ?
MnxaHJi HHKOJieBHH.

39

 H Bama Hcena Tnte pyccKaa ?

Her, on aHrjnmHKa.
ynPAHCHEHHH
1. Give the foUowing adjectives and pronouns their
correct endings.
KaK... 6ojn>m... KHHra!
3 T . . . p y c c K . . . CJIBO.

Ham... nopor... pmma.

Er xopom... aBTOMo6Hjn>.
Hx CHH... TerpnB.
2. Put the above in the plural.
3. Translate into Russian: JJJiaMA
(1) HtnTo/JLvan vanovichTwhat are you doing?
Watching the television again? And smoking?
Yes, I am. It's a very good set.
(2) My surname is Brown; my Christian name is John.
Here is my family. This is my father and these are
my sisters.
(3) Whose is this new black exercise book and whose
are these red pencils ? I don't know. But I do know
that the blue penholder and the gold nib are mine
and not yours.
(4) What is your family doing? Today is a hoUday.
They are aU sitting together at home. My father is
resting. My brother is smoking and watching the
television. My sister is writing a letter. My mother
is reading a magazine. My old aunt is laying the
table. What a picture!

tfe^

34v\$>

40

<f

J>

ypoK 8

CJIOBAPb
MHro adv. much, a lot, many
MXKHO it is possible
Mom, I (Mory, Macemb ...
Mryr) to be able
Hflo it is necessary
SOJTDHIH, -a, -e; -b'ie (short Hejib3H it is impossible
form 6jieH, 6ojn.H, 6OJH>H; HyjKHO it is necessary
njiaBaib I (rxnBa||K), -enn>) to
oojnvHb'i) adj. ill, sick
swim
6biib to be
npHHTH||biH, -aa, -oe; -bie adj.
BJiocbi pi. hair
pleasant
Bcerfl adv. always
BbicK||nH, -an, -oe; -He adj. cp|bm, -aa, -oe; -bie adj. grey
CMji||brft, -aa, -oe; -Me adj.
high, tall
rjia3 m. (pi. rmai) eye
bold, courageous
roJiOB/. (pi. rjioBbi) head
cnaTb II (cumoj cmnnb) to
rpjio n. throat
sleep
ryjDtrb I (ryjDi||K), -emb) to cnopT m. sport
(go for a) walk; BOTH ryjDfrb cnopTCMH m. sportsman
to go for a walk
cnopTcMHKa/. sportswoman
flJDKeH, AOJDKH||, -; -b'i must TMH||biH, -aa, -oe; -bie adj.
erq adv. still, yet
dark
sy6 m. tooth
TeMnepaiypa/. temperature
HHTepCH||bffl, -aa, -oe; -bie adj. Trui||biH, -aa, -oe; -we adj.
interesting
warm
JiejK&rb II (jie)K||y, -mm.) to yMH||bifi, -aa, -oe; -bie adj.
lie, to be lying
clever
nee m. (pi. Jieca) forest, wood
xojiflH||biH, -aa, -oe; -we adj.
jmq n. (pi. jrqa) face
cold
JI6BK|[HH, -aa, -oe; -He adj.
xoTlb mixed conj. (xoTy, X7
dexterous, deft
ienb ... XOTT) to want, to
jno6HM[|brH, -aa, -oe; -bie adj.
wish
nmpKlJHH, -aH, -oe; -ne adj.
favourite
JHoHTb II (moQmb, jntiHmb)
broad
to love
ajiBnHHHCT m. mountaineer
6raTb I (6era||io, -emb) to run
about
6ojiTb II (6OJDST, 6ojDtr) to
ache

41

BBIPAJKHHH
to play chess
to play football
to play tennis
It is raining,
to stay at home

BrpTb B mxMaTbi
BrpTb B (pyrji
HTpTb B THHHC

AojKflb HflT.
CHflTb flMa
y MeHH "\
y leoa > 60JIHT rojiOB, sy6. YoThave \ headache,
y Her )
Hehas,etc./at00thache>etc-

TPAMMATHK/

1. The Short Form of Adjectives

(a) Formation of the short form. So far aU adjectives have
been given in their long, or complete, forms. Most
quaUtative adjectives - i.e. adjectives which denote
only quality, such as 'young', new', etc.1 - have socaUed short (or predicative) forms as weU.
To obtain the short form of an adjective in the masculine singular, the ending of the 'ong form (-BTH, -OH,
-HH) is dropped. Thus only the stem is left MOJIOOOH MJioa..

In the feminine and neuter singular, -a and -o respectively are added to the stem. In. the plural (aU genders)
-BI (or -H if the stem ends in r, K, X, HC, H, m, or m) is
added.
Gender and number
Masculine
Feminine
Neuter
Plural

Long form

Short form

MOJIOflH
MOJiofla
MOJiofle
MOJioflb'ie

MJIOfl
Mjiofl+a
MJIOfl+ 0
MJIOfl+SI

"I
(
I young
J

When the stem of the adjective ends in two consonants,

-o-, -e-, or -- is usuaUy inserted between them in the
1. cf. Relative adjectives, which denote the attribute of an object through its
relation to other objects. E.g. 'Russian', 'steel', 'gold', etc

42

Masculine
Feminine
Neuter
Plural

yMHblH
yMHaa
yMHoe
yMHbie

yMH
yMH+
yMH+6
VMH + M

Masculine
Feminine
Neuter
Plural

HHTepCHbt
HHTepcHaH
HHTepcHoe
BHTepcHbie

HHTepceH
HHTepcH+a
HHTepcH+o
HHTepCH + H

n n n si

Masculine
Feminine
Neuter
Plural

s s sa

Complete form
to tO D U

Gender and number

u u au

masculine singular only, thus facitating the pronunciation. E.g. JIBKHH 'dexterous'-JIBOK; HHTepcHBt 'interesting' - HHTepceH; yMHBiH 'clever'
- yMH.1 In the feminine and neuter singular and in
the plural short forms no insertion is made. Thus:
Short f o r m
JIBOK
JIOBK +
JIBK+O
JIBK + H

Note: The stress tends to be capricious in the short form of many

adjectives. The student should not worry about this unduly at
the present stage. He may even be comforted to know that in
some cases Russians themselves fail to agree on the stress of the
short form of an adjective.

(b) The use of the short adjective. The short adjective is

always used to form a predicate in the sentence. E.g.
TBOH cecrp yinaa.

Your sister is clever.

The long form may be either attributive or predicative:

yMHblH MjjmHK
O H yMHUH.

a clever boy
He is (a) clever (boy).

I. Rules guiding the choice of vowels for insertion between the last two consonants of the stem are given in the appendix, p. 264.

43

Note that after KSK 'how' and THK 'SO' the short form
of the adjective must be used:
KaK OH MJiofl!
OHH TSK VMHM.

How young he is!

They are so clever.

Adverbs
Most Russian adverbs are the same as the neuter short
form of the adjectives, such as xopom 'weU',
6&iCTpo 'quickly', Kpacaso 'beautifully'.
Note that adverbs are often used in impersonal sentences
as the predicate:
3flecb xJioflHO.
HirrepcHO.
KaK 3flecb xopom!

It is cold here.
It is interesting.
How nice it is here!

The 3rd Person Singular of the Verb SBITB (ecT&)

In the present tense the verb SBITB 'to be' is generaUy
not used as a link-verb. Only in certain phrases, when
emphasis is required, the form ecTB - 3rd person
singular - is used in the meaning of 'there is', 'there
are':
3flecb ecTB Jiec.
ECT* 3flecb H peK.

There is a wood here.

There is also a river here.

The Phrases y Menn, y Mean CCTB, etc.

ist person
2nd person
3rd person m.
3rd person/.
3rd person .
ist person
2nd person
3rd person

y MeHH (y MeHH ecib)

y Tea (y Tea ecib)
y Her (y Hero ecib)
y He (y He ecn>)
y Her (y Her ecrt)
y Hac (y Hac ecn>)
y Bac (y Bac ecra.)
y BHX (y HHX ecib)
y KOT (ecib) ?

44

I have
you have
he has
she has
it has
we have
you have
they have
who has?

The above phrases (formed by the preposition y meaning 'in the possession of +the genitive of the personal
pronouns and the interrogative pronoun KTO) are used
to express possession in Russian instead of the verb
'to have'.
The verb eciB is used in these expressions when it is
necessary to emphasize the possession of a certain
$9Jjr;'-*
object by somebody:
V Mena ecTfc KapaHflm.

I have a pencil.

When the possession of the object by somebody is

known and it is only necessary to emphasize some
feature of the object, the verb ecTB is generaUy
omitted:
Y MCEH KpacHKnt Kapanflam.

I have a red pencil.

Note: (a) y max etc. can also mean 'at my place', 'at my house'
or even 'with me':
ToBpHrq HBaHB ceftqc
y MeHH.

Comrade Ivanov is now with

me (at my place).

(b) The answer to the question y Koro (ecTb) ... ? is y MeHH

(ecib) etc.
y Koro (ecib) p^ccKaa
ra3ra - V MeHH.

Who has got a Russian newspaper ? - I have.

5. Modal Verbs and Expressions

(a) The conjugations of the verbs MO<SB 'to be able' and
xoTrB 'to want', 'to wish' are as follows:
Present Tense
Singular
a Mory'

Tbi MjKeim.
OH ")
OH > MJKeT
0H0J

Plural
I can

MM MJKCM

you can
he can
she can
it can

Bbi Mncere
OHH MOryr

45

we can

you can
they can

Present Tense
Singular
HXOI

Tbi xqerm
OH
owr
OH VxqeT
)

Plural
I want
you want

Mil XOTHM
BMXOTHTe

we
you

she ywants
it
J

OHH XOTT

they

want

XOTTB is one of the very few verbs of 'mixed conjugation': in the singular it follows Conjugation I and in
the plural - Conjugation II.
Note the difference between yiuTB and MOIB, which
can both be translated by 'can' in English: yiwTB
means 'to know how to ...' (cf. French savoir) and
expresses ability as a result of knowledge:
SI yMxo qHTTb no-pyccKH.

I can read Russian.

MonB signifies rather the mental or physical abity to

do something:
SI Mory MHro nrraTb.

I can read a lot.

(b) In order to express obUgation or duty, the word

nHHceH 'must', 'have (has) to', is used. It has the
form of a short adjective and changes for gender and
number:
Singular
aflJDKeH,flOJDKH I must
TblflJDKeH,flOJDKH you must
he must
OH flJDKeH
she must
OH flOJDKH
OH flOJDKH
it must

Plural
MM flojDKHM we must
Bbi AOJDKH& you must
OHH flOJDKHM they must

In the negative the particle He is put before the word

AaxceH. The word naxceH in aU its forms is followed by the infinitive:
SIflJDKeHpaSTaTb 3flecb.
OHflOJDKHHHCTb.
O H HeflJDKeHHATH Tyn.

46

I must work here.

She must write.
H e must not go there.

(c) In order to express possibihty, necessity, and impossibility (or prohibition), the words MHCHO, afasao
(or Hno), HenB3H are used. They are normally
followed by the infinitive:
CerAHH M6JKHO arpa-rfe
B 4>yr6ji.
3flecb M3KHO lETn.
.
._. .
.
HyjKHo
(nano)
HHT
0M0H

.
3flecb H S i u i KypHTb.
Hejrb3H
HflT

HflTH ryjMTb:
flOJKflb.

Today it Is possible to
(one may) play football.
One may read here.
( One must go home.
J ft is necessary to go
\
home.
It is not permitted to
smoke here.
It is impossible to go for
a walk: it is raining.

6. Verbs with the Stem Ending in -6-, -B-, -M-, -nThese usuahy insert in the first person singular -n-,
before the ending, for instance:
Juo6HTb 'to love' - jno6jn, JHOSinnb, JHO6HT, etc.
cnaTb 'to sleep' - cnmo, cnmnt, CHHT, etc.
Note that jno6irn. can be followed by the infinitive when it means
'to like doing something'.
K jno6jn cnaib.

I like sleeping.

TEKCT
I. MOH 6paT, MOH cecTp H H
H cryAHT. Y MSBA ecTB 6paT H cecrp. MOH 6paT
BHKTOP H cecrp Bpa THte cryAeHTBi. Mo 6paT (pH3HK, MOH CeCip - XHMHK, a H H3yqlO H3BQCH.
M B I Bce cnoprcMeHBi. BpaT MOH - ajammHCT. O H
JIBOK H CMeji. M O H cecrp xopom mper B Tmmc,
xopom iuiaBaer H 6raer. H nrpio B djyrSji. OyrSji
- MOH JHOHMBIH cnopr. Si TaKHce neHB JHO6JH
njiBaTB. BpaT H H Tnte nrpeM B mxMarBi.

47

M O H 6paT ^em. BBICKHH; y Hero TMHBie BJIOCBI,

a rjia3 cpBie, KaK y MCHH. y Her yMHoe jmn.
Cecrp Hma KpacHBaa: y He THte TMHBie BJIOCBI,
HO rjia3 6ojrBHme H CHHne. Bpa xopom yMeT nera
y ne xopmHH rjioc*. Ho cerAHH OH He MHCCT nerB:
y He rpjio 6OJTHT.
M O 6paT H MOH cecrp - xopmne cryAHTBi. OHH
JH6HT pa6TaTB H nnran. Tyr MJKHO MHro HHTrB.
Y Hac BcerA HBBie KHHTH H HtypHjibi.

* 'voice'.
2.

Pa3roBp
3ApBCTByH, KJIH.
3ApBCTBya, Mania.
M3KHO KypHTB, no>KnyHCTa ?
nojKjryHcra, KypH.
T B I He HAiiiB ryjiHTB?
Her, He Mor^. CerAHH XJIOAHO, a H HCMHJKKO
6JieH.
CerAHH He XJIOAHO, AOpor MOH; Aace Terui H
HeHB npHHTHO.
He Mor^ HATH ryjiHTB. Si pmnea CHATB AMa. y
Maui BBicKaa TeMnepa-rypa.
BBICKaH ?
a, ^eHB BBicKaa.
HyjKHO jiecTB. Hejn>3H ryjiHTB. OTABrxn. y Te6a
ecTB HHTepcHBie KHHTH ?
Jla, H KHHTH H JKVpHajIBI.
Xopom. Ax! HAO HATH. JIp CBHAHHH.
,H0 CBHAHHH.

ynPAHCHEHHH
i. Fui in the blank spaces with the phrases y \ieaA,
y Te6a, etc., bearing in mind the person indicated in
the first part of the sentence:

48

Example: M B I nrreM no-pyccKH, y Hac pyccKaa

KHHra.
(i) Si H3yqaio pyccKHH H3BIK, ... ecn> pyccKaH KHHra.
(2) OHH innnyT,... HBBie pyqKH H TeTpAH.
(3) MOH cecrp Bpai, ... HHTepcHaa para.
(4) M B I roBopHM no-pyccKH, cenac ... ypK.
(5) MOH TOBpinq pnaet ycnxH, ... xopmn yqnTejTB.
2. FUI in the blank spaces with the short forms of suitable
adjectives selected from the following:
MOJIOAH, yMHBIH, KpaCHBBlfi, UTHpOKHH, ClapBlH,
BBICKHH, XOpOUTHH, JIBKHH.
(1) MOH 6paT ... (2) MOH cecrp ... (3) Pen Bnra ...
(4) 3TOT AOM ... (5) CnopicMH... (6) 3 T H ABymKH...
3. Translate into Russian:
(1) He is very dexterous and courageous, but he cannot
yet swim. Does he want to swim? Yes, he does.
He loves sport.
(2) How dark it is here! And how cold! I cannot read
and I cannot write.
(3) It is raining and I must stay at home. Can we play
chess, please ? No, we can't. I want to go for a walk.
(4) What sort of pen have you got ? I have got a black
pen; the nib is gold.
(5) I like watching the television when it's dark. But
today my eyes are hurting and I have got a sore
throat. I think I am ill. I must sleep.
(6) The river is so wide that it is impossible to see the
forest.

49

ypoK 9

CJIOBAPb
6flH[|biH, -aa, -oe; -bie
poor

adj.

B pr. (+prep.) in
Becsf. spring
BocTK m. east
BCKtfly adv. everywhere
Biep ado. yesterday
flKTop m. (pi. flOKTop) doctor
flnro adv. for a long time
3nafl m. west
3ejiH|biH, -aa, -oe; -Bie adj.
green
ssm&f, winter
KaBKis m. Caucasus
KjiHMaT m. climate
KoimpT m. concert
jifl m. ice
jio . summer
M0p3 m. frost
Ha pr. (,-rprep.) on, at (in)
HacrynaTb I (HacTyner)
to begin, to set in (of seasons,
weather)
HeflBHO adv. recently
o, 06 pr. (+prep.) about, concerning
ceHb / . autumn
norfla/. weather

npB|bm, -aa, -oe; -bie (short

form npaB, npaB, npBO, npBbi) adj. right
HTHqa / . bird
p3H||bm, -an, -oe; -bie adj.
different, various
paccK3biBaib I (paccKsba|io,
-emb) to narrate, to tell
CBeTHTb II (cBe^ry, CBnnnb) to
shine
cBep m. north
CHer m. snow
coBcM adv. quite, entirely
cjraqe n. sun
CCCP (C0K13 CoBrcKHX ComiajiHCTHqecKHx Pecny6jmK)
The U.S.S.R. (The Union of
Soviet Socialist Republics)
CTpaflTb I (CTpaflQio, -emb) to
suffer
ciacTJiHB[|biH, -aa, -oe; -bie
adj. happy
Tarb I (TeT) to melt, to thaw
ipaB/. grass
yjKHHaib I (yjKHHa[|io, -erm>) to
have supper
K>r m. south
HPK||HH,

bright

SO

-aa,

-oe;

-ne

adj.

BbipaHcana
Macro 6beT...
HanpHMp
CHer HflT (uiji).
CTOHT npeKpcHaa norfla.
Ha yjnme

It often happens...
for example
It is (was) snowing.
The weather is (keeps) fine.'
out of doors. Also: on the street

rPAMMATHKA
i. The Past Tense of the Verb
(a) Formation. The past tense of most Russian verbs is
formed by adding:
-ji for
-na for
-no for
-HH for

the masculine singular

the feminine singular
the neuter singular
the plural (all genders).

to the stem of
the infinitive.

In other words, the suffix of the infinitive (-TB) is

replaced by the suffix of the past tense (-a, -na, -no,
-na):
torr-Tb tarrn, iHTaa, mrrajio, qnrnH
6biTb - 6bur, 6bm, 6b'uio3 6b'uiH
roBopHTb - roBopHji, roBopana, roBopajio, roBopnH

Russian verbs in the past tense only change for

gender (in the singular) and for number. They do not
change for person (as in the present tense). They
conjugate, therefore, as follows:
Singular
H iHTJi m., HHTna/.
Tbl HHTji m., HurJia /.
OH rarn
OH <nrrjia
OH QHTjIO

Plural
Mbi rariira
Bbi HHTjm
OHH qHTjra

51

Singular
a6buii., 6bui/.

Mbi6b'iim

Tbl 6bui m., 6bui/.

Bbi 6bUIH

OH 6bUI
OHbUl
OH 6bUIO

OHH Sb'lJIH

Plural

Note: The past tense of MO^H 'to be able' is Mor, Mora, Mora,
Morjm. The past tense of HATH 'to go' is men, mua, nuio, num.

(b) Use. There is only one past tense in Russian, and it

may correspond to different forms of the past tense in
Enghsh:
OH MHro rarn no-pyccKH.
OH iHTji Bnep.
Bqep MOH 6pai Sbin

flMa.

He read a lot in Russian.

He was reading (he read)
yesterday.
Yesterday my brother was at
home.

2. Expressions Denoting Possession in the Past

Tense
In order to express possession in the past tense, the
phrase y luerai CCTB ... becomes y Mean SBIJI (-a, -o,
-H), the past tense of 6BITB replacing ecTB. The
gender and number of 6MJI is the same as the gender and
number of the object(s) possessed. In other words,
the object of the sentence in English ('I had a book')
becomes the subject ('a book was in my possession')
in Russian and therefore influences the verb. The
following examples will help to illustrate this:
y MCHH ecTB KHHTO.
y Mean 6uji KHHra.
y He 6bui 6paT.
y TeH 6MJIH ypKH.

I have a book.
I had a book.
She had a brother,
You had lessons.

y a u x wji
flOM.
y Koro SMJIH rcTH ?

They had a house,

Who h a d guests ?

JSfiuvnes i n t h e P a s t Tense
When referring to the past tense, ojiHceH is used with
the forms of the past tense of the verb SBITB corresponding to the gender and number of the subject:
AJTHceH 6BIJI m., AOJinma BUi / . , AOJDKH BUIO n.,
AOJDKHB'I SBUTH pi.
rtaep OH nejixceH 6WJI MHTO

HHCTb.
THH flOHxcH Sbin pa6raTB.
B<iep Mbi flOJUKHbl bWH
ymTb ypK.

He had to write a great deal

yesterday.
Tanya had to work.
Yesterday we had to study
our lesson.

4. Impersonal Sentences in the Past

(a) In order to express possibihty, necessity, or impossibility in the past, the neuter form of the past tense of
SBTTB - 6&HJ10 - is added to MHCHO, HyncHo (Hanp) or
nejiBsa:
HyJKHO 6JIO HHCTb HHCbM.
norfla 6bui xopmaa, MSKHO SMJIO ryjiHTb.

TaM HeHb3ji 6J10 Kypim..

It w a s necessary (one had)

to write the letter.
Th weather was fine. One
could go for a walk.
It w a s n o t permitte d to
smoke there.

(b) The same apphes to impersonal sentences formed from

the neuter singular of the short form of the adjectives
(3AecB XJIOAHO 'it is cold here'):
3flecb 6b'uio xjioflHo.
Eb'ijio ieHb HHiepcHO.
KaK npHHTHO 6b*uio Bqep.

It was cold here.

It was very interesting.
How pleasant it was yesterday!

53

5 The Declension of Nouns

While in English the relations between any part of
speech and the noun in the sentence are expressed
mostly with the help of prepositions (e.g. 'I was
saying to my brother'), in Russian they are expressed
by changing the endings of the noun (e.g. Si roBopHJi
6pTy ' I was saying to my brother'), and sometimes by
using a preposition as well (Si HAy K 6py ' I am going
to my brother').
The changes in the ending of the noun are called case
inflection or declension.
There are six cases in Russian: the Nominative,
Accusative, Genitive, Dative, Instrumental, and
Prepositional. These cases will be dealt with according to importance and difficulty. In this lesson the
nominative and the prepositional, being the easiest,
are given.
6. The Nominative Case
Most nouns so far have been given in the nominative
case (CTOJI, KMHaTa, OKH, etc.). The nominative is
used:
(a) to denote the subject of a sentence:
CTOJI CTOHT TVT.

The table stands here.

(b) to denote the noun-predicate:

MOH Man. - Bpai.

My mother is a doctor.

(c) in forms of address (i.e. the old vocative):

ToBapHm, HuaHB, mo Bbi
fljiaere Tyr ?

Comrade Ivanov, what are

you doing here ?

Furthermore a noun in the nominative may be used to

form a sentence by itself.
3HM. Mops.

It is winter. There is a frost.

54

7 The Prepositional Case

(i) The formation of the prepositional. The prepositional
case is formed:
(a) by adding -e to the end of masculine nouns:
CTOJI - Ha crone
'on the table'
When the masculine noun ends in -H or -B this last
letter is replaced by -e:
Man - B Me
CJioBpb - B cjioBap

'in May'
'in the dictionary'

Note: The stress sometimes shifts to the case endings in masculine nouns. The student should not worry about this at this
stage, but should merely try to note which nouns have this
tendency.

(b) by replacing the endings -a and -H in feniinine nouns

with -e:
KMHaTa - B KMHare
3eMJia - Ha 3eivui

'in the room'

'on the earth'

(c) by replacing the ending -o in neuter nouns with -e:

OKH - B OKH6

'in the window'

When the neuter noun ends in a consonant+-e in

the nominative, the prepositional case is the same:
Ha none
'on the field'
(2) Uses of the prepositional case. The prepositional (or
locative, as it is sometimes called) is only used with
prepositions, the most common of which are:
o (or 06 when before a vowel) 'concerning', 'about':
Mbi roBopHM o norfle.

We are talking about the

weather.
He is thinking about his
father.

OH flyMaei 06 om.

55

'in' 1
Ha'on' fboth indicating'place where':

B rpofle KpacHBbie
yjnmbi.
ra3ra jie>KHT Ha croji.

In the town there are

beautiful streets.
The paper is lying on the
table.

Note: Ha can sometimes be used to translate 'at' (usually when

the noun stands for the place, rather than is the place):
Ha KOHupTe
Ha ypKe

at the concert
at the lesson

aa is also used to translate 'in' with the words cBep 'north',

lor 'south', BOCTK 'east', and 3nafl 'west':

Ha lore

in the south

With KaBK3 'the Caucasus' Ha is also used:

Ha KaBi<3e
in the Caucasus

TEKCT
I.

B n e p y Hac B'IJIH rcTH. y Hac yHamajiH B H K T O P

HuKOJieBH^ H e r meH TaTBHHa AjieKcHApoBHa.
O H H AJiro y Hac CHAJiH, H BIJIO TCHB npHHTHO.
B H K T O P HHKOJieBHH paccK3BiBaji o 6pTe H m o u i e .
KaK B B I yjK 3Here, HuKOJiafi HiiKOJideBira 6BIJI Ha
cBepe, B ApxHrejiBCKe. H o T e n p t OH paOTaer B
MocKB. E r A K T O P B ApxHrejiBCKe roBopiui:
HHKOJlH HHKOJleBHq, BBI XOpIHHH HHJKeHp, HO
B B I 60JJBHH lejioBK. HAO xaTB A O M . Hejn>3H
pa6TaTB 3AecB. XJIOAHO 6B'IJIO B ApxHrejiBCKe, H
OAHBIH HHKOJlH HHKOJleBH^ ieHB CTpaAji TaM.
KTop 6 B U I n p a B .

O H AJDKCH 6BDT xaTB

AOMH.

T e n p B OH paTaer Taiw, rAe pa6TaeT e r 6paT. Si

pymaao, HTO OH HCHB cqcrjiHB.

56

2.

O KJiHMaTe

CerAHH Ha ypne MBI tnrrjni o KJiHMare CCCP.

CCCP - 6ojn>mH crpaH. KjiHMaT Ha cBepe H Ha
tore, Ha 3naAe H Ha BOcrKe p3HBui.
Hcro SbiBeT Tan: Ha KaBKa3e HacryneT BecH;
CBiHT HpKoe cjmne, noiT JTTHHBI; BcrAy 3ejiHaH
TpaB. A Ha cBepe CCCP, HanpHMp, B ApxHrejiBcKe, em 3HM. TaM XJIOAHO. BcioAy JIOKHT CHer.
JlA na peK em He Ter.
BbiBdeT emj Tan: B Pare 1 HAT Aongn; Ha H6e
TeMH. Ha yjinne XJIOAHO. Hacryner ceHB. A B
TamKHTe2 Jiro. norna CTOHT xopman. Ha H6e
CBTHT cjnme.
HeAaBHO B ra3re MBI mrjm o norAe B HpnyTCKe3
H Sbne: B ftjrre crona npeKpcHaa norAa. H6o
SB'IJIO CHHee; BOA B Mpe 6bui em Tnnan. A Ha
BOcrKe CCCP, B Hpic^TCKe, ync men CHer. HaCTynjTH M0p3BI. EBUIO XJIOAHO.
I. Riga - the capital of the Latvian S.S.R.
2. Tashkent - the capital of the Uzbek S.S.R.
3. Irkutsk - an important industrial centre in Eastern Siberia.

ynPASKHEHHH

i. Put the following sentences in the past tense:

(1) KTO tnrreT ? (2) MOH cecrp B MocKB. (3) y nac
ecTB KHHra. (4) Jln Ha peK Ter. (5) M B I nem
JHO6HM ryjiHTB. (6) OHH AOJDKHB'I paiaTB. (7) Hejn.3H KypHTB. (8) TaM XJIOAHO. (9) CTOHT xopman
norAa.

57

Fill in the blank spaces with a suitable noun in the

required form selected from the right-hand column:
(i) ApxHrejiBCK - Ha ... CCCP

KOHUpT

(2) 3nM. H a ... jie>KHT CHer.

(3) M B I BIJTH Bnep B ...

ypK
ceep

(4) O H pa6Taer B ...

3eMJIH

(5) BB'IJIO HHTepCHO ^HTTB O ...

MocKB
KMHaTa
d)yT6n

(6) JlTH paccKaBiBajiH o ...

(7) B i e p MBI 6B'IJTH Ha ...

(8) M B I Hrpjni B ...

Translate into Russian:

(1) It was very cold yesterday. It was snowing. It is

already winter.
(2) When I was in Moscow I had a car. Did you have
one (repeat car) too ? No, but when we were in the
south we had a new Soviet car.
(3) My sister had to work a lot when she was in the
north. She is a doctor, and everyone was ill.
(4) Don't talk about the climate in the north of the
U.S.S.R. I know it's cold there and I don't
want to be in a place where it's always cold.
(5) What sort of pen did he have ? A red or a black
one? I don't know. What was that lying on the
table in the room where you were sitting ?

58

y p o K o

CJIOBAPb
6per m. shore
6OH m. battle
6paTb I C6ep||y, -mb) to take
BHHaa/. bathroom1
BHJHca /. fork
rofl m. year
ropa<i||HH, -aa, -ee; -He adj. hot
(to the touch)?
flTCTBO n. childhood
flHBH m. sofa
ecib mixed conj. (em, emb ...
eflHT) to eat
H<pK||HH, -aa, -oe; -ne adj. hot?
HtHTb I (jKHBfly, -mb) to live
KaHHr m. study, office
KBapTHpa / . flat, apartment
KJiacib I (KJiaflly, -mb, past
tense KJian) to put (horizontally)
KOBp m. (pi. KOBpb'i) carpet
KpcJio n. armchair
KyxHa / . kitchen
jijKKa/. spoon
Memo n. indeclinable menu
MHco n. meat
HanBO adv. on the left

HanpBo adv. on the right

ocpHimHTKa / . waitress
HHCbMeaHbdi CTOJI m. writing
table, desk
HHTb I (m>K), nbmb) to drink
noji m. floor
pecTopH m. restaurant
pb'i6a / . fish
cafl m. (pi. caflb'i) garden
cnJTbHH / . bedroom
crBHTb II (crBjno, cTBHmb)
to put (standing)
creaa / . (pi. crreHbi) wall
croJiOBaa/. dining-room1
cyn m. soup
cbip m. cheese
TapJHca / . plate
TejietpH m. telephone
yroa m. (pi. yrjni) corner
4>pyKTbi m. pi. fruit
qac m. (pi. lacb'i) hour
lacb'i m. pi. clock, watch3
nmad) m. (pi. mKadibT) cupboard
mKJia/. school

1. Both BHHaa and croJiOBaa are feminine adjectives (the word

KMBXrra is understood) used as nouns.
2. JKpKHH means hot, of weather or sun;
ropHHHH means hot to the touch or the taste. It can also be used
to translate 'fervent'.
They must not be interchanged. Tnjibrii ('warm') can be used
for tangible or intangible warmth.
3. ^acb'i meaning 'clock' or 'watch', is only used in the plural. It
can also mean 'hours'.

59

BBipaxcHHH
a xo*ry ecib.
I am hungry.
K xotry rmrb.
I am thirsty,
ecib cyn
to take, drink soup

TPAMMATHKA
The Prepositional Case of Masculine Nouns in -y
Some masculine nouns, mostly monosyUabic ones, take
the ending -y in the prepositional case after the prepositions B and Ha: nee 'wood', can 'garden', MOCT

'bridge', non 'floor', rjias 'eye', ron 'year', nac

'hour', iiiKacb 'cupboard', 6eper 'shore', yroa
'corner'.
B Jiecy, B cany, Ha Mocry, na nojry, B raa3y, B rosy, B mKad>y,
Ha 6epery, B yrn$.
The ending -y of the prepositional case is always
stressed.
Note that this ending occurs only when the location of an object
or the time is indicated, i.e., when the question roe? 'where' ?
or Korfl? 'when?' can be put. In all other instances the usual
ending -e is used. Compare:
o rmcipe
o rfle

about the cupboard

about the year

B lUKaiJjy in the cupboard

B rofly

in the year

Mobile Vowels
In the declension of some masculine nouns the vowels
e, , and o (if they occur in the last syllable of the
nominative) are ehrninated. They are known as
'mobe vowels':
oiii 'father' - 06 om 'concerning father'
KOBp 'carpet' - Ha Koap 'on the carpet'
yroji 'corner'- B yrjry'in the corner'

60

3 The Accusative Case

(i) The formation of the accusative, (a) Masculine nouns
denoting inanimate objects (table, chair, etc.) or
abstract notions have the same form in the accusative
as in the nominative. But masculine nouns denoting
people or animals add -a, or -a (if the nominative ends
in -B or -H). E.g.
CTOJI CTOJI
ciyflHT - CTyflHTa
ywrejib - y n r r e j i a
repH - repa

(b) Feminine nouns, whether animate or inanimate,

change the ending -a to -y and -a to -10. Those ending
in -B in the nominative do not change in the accusative:
KMHaTa - KMHary
3eMJia - 3jvuno
flOlb - flOlb

(c) The accusative of aU neuter nouns is the same as

the nominative.
(2) Uses of the accusative, (a) The accusative is used mainly
to denote the direct object of most transitive verbs,*
such as 'to read', 'to see', 'to write'.
H torrio KHry.
J? eM p t i 6 y .
O H nbT Booy.
Bbi 3HeTe ypK.
OH BHflHT yxHTejifl.
O H nHHieT CJIBO.

I read a book.
I eat fish.
He drinks water.
You know t h e l e s s o n.
She sees t h e teacher.
He writes t h e w o r d .

(b) When the prepositions B and Ha are used to

indicate motion ('to', 'on', 'on to'), they are foUowed
by the accusative.
*

A transitive verb is one that denotes an action passing to an object that is expressed, e.g. I killed (transitive verb) the dog (object).
An intransitive verb indicates an action that is limited to the subject, e.g. I sleep,
I go.

6l

OH Hflr B niKjry.

He is going to school.

(Cf. OH 6MJI B nncjie.)

fl KJiafly KapaHflm HE
CTOJI.

I am putting the pencil on

the table.

OH fler B MOCKB^.
H Hfly H8 ypK, KOHflepT.
Mbi fleM Ha cBep.

He is going to Moscow.
I am going to the lesson,
concert.
We are going to the north.

The Use of y Mean, y TeSa etc. to replace MOH,

TBofi etc.
The phrases y MCHH, y Tea, apart from meaning
' I have', 'you have', etc., can also sometimes be used
to replace the possessive pronouns ('my', 'your', etc.)
particularly in coUoquial speech:
KHHra jiejKHT y MeHH Ha
crone.
y He B KMHaTe 6ojn>me
OKH.

The book is lying on m y

table.
There is a big window in
her room.

MOH, TBOH, er, e, etc. can, of course, be used instead.

5. Questions with the Particle an

As weU as by using special intonation and leaving the
word order unchanged, questions may be denoted by
the particle HH.
The subject and the verb are usuaUy inverted, and an
is put in between:
EMJTH ira B M B nntjie
cerflHa?

Were you at school today?

Note: If particular stress is required on one word in the question,

then that word tends to come at the beginning of the sentence
with JJH after it:
CerflHa jm BBI Hflre B
mKJiy ?
HBan JJH TO mKjia ?

62

IS it today you are going to

school ?
Is this a new school ?

In both the above cases the word order could be the same as in a
statement, but with cerojniH and HBaa stressed:
Bw HflTe cerflHH B mKJiy?
3TO HOB8H HIKJia ?
6.

C o n j u g a t i o n o f t h e Verbs HCHTB, S p a r c , KJIBCTB,

eCTB, UHTB
T h e s e verbs are difficult
separately:

a n d should b e

learned

Present Tense:
a
Tbl
OH
Mbi
Bbi
OHH

jKHBy
JKHBlIIb
HCHBT
JKHBM
JKHBTe
JKHByi

6epy
6epmb
6epT
6epM
6epTe
6epyT

KJiafly
KJiaflmb
KJiaflr
KJiaflM
KJiaflTe
KJiaflyr

eM
emb
ecT
eflHM
eflHTe
eflar

HMO
nbmb
HbT
HbM
nbTe
nbioT

Imperative:
H<HBH(Te) 6epH(ie) Kjiafl(Te)

rnb(Te) neH(ie)

Past Tense:
Haul (-, -o, -H) - 6pan (-, -o, -H) - KJIBJI (-a, -o, -H)
eji (-a, -o, -H) - HHJi (-, -o, -H)
Note the stress shifts in the feminine forms: aoui, 6pan,
HHJl.
KJiacTb=tp put in a lying position (KJiafly KapaHflm Ha CTOH);
whereas CTBHTb=to put in a standing position (OH crBHT
jiMny Ha CTOJI);

crBHTb, however, is used for putting plates on a table; Knacn.,

of course, is used for knives and forks.

TEKCT
I.

y MeHH B KMHaTe
H mcKeHp. M O H (paMHjmH Mop30B.
M o n ceMBH HCHBT B MocKB. 3jjecb y nac HeSojn.m a , HO xopmaa KBapTHpa. B KBapTHpe ecTB cnjn>HH,
cTOJiBaa, MOH KaOHHr, BnHaH H Kyxna.

63

y Mean B KaHHre CTOHT iracBMeHHMH CTOJI H

Kpcjio. 3necB H HHTio H rramy. y Mean Ha cron
nentT KHHTH, ra3TH, a TioKe CTOHT nacb H TejiedjH.
B KMHaTe 6ojn>me OKH. HanpBO CTOHT mmH H
CTOHT Kpcjio. HanBo flBepB*; B yrjry CTOHT unxad). B
nncacby MOH KHHTH, Ha creH p3Hbie KapTHmsi.
Ha nojry Jieadrr KpacHBbrh KOBp. EojiBmaa jiMna
CTOHT y MeHH Ha CTOJl.
B flrcTBe H HOIJI B KaeBe. TaM y n a c Te 6bin
6ojn>mfl H KpacHBan KBaprpa.
* 'door'.

2.

B pecTopHe
HBaH H BHKTOP CHHT B pecTopHe. OHH XOTHT ecTB H
BHKTOP HCHB xner HHTB.

^ T O Tbi xieiHB ecTB ? - cnpmHBaer HaH BHKTopa.

H e 3Hio. Tpe Memo ?
BOT Memo, ^faro. Hy, HTO xneniB ?
OipHHHHTKa TioKe cnpmHBaeT, HTO OHH XOTHT
eCTB H ITHTB.
Cyn, pb*i6y H (ppyKTBi, - roBopHT HaH.
A B M ? - cnpmHBaer OH Bibcropa.
Cyn, Mflco H cbip, noiKnycra.
OcbmrHHTKa crBHT Ha CTOJI rapjiKH, H iianpBo
KJiaflT JIHCKH H H03KH, HaJIBO - BHJIKH. HOTM OH
HflT B KyxHK). HaH H BHKTOP CHAHT H roBopHT o
cnpre; OHH i e m . JIKJOHT Tmnic H cpyT6ji. H o BOT
HflT od)HHHHTKa.
BOT Bain cyn, - roBopor OH.
OHH eflHT cyn, HO cyn nem. ropflHHH. OHH ejjHT
MjxneHHO. BHKTOP Bc BpMH m>T Bfly.
H e Hflo miTB Tan MHro, - roBopHT HBH.
MHe Hflo nHTB. 3necB HCHB ndpKO B pecropne.

64

ynPAXKHEHHH
i. Put the nouns in brackets in the appropriate cases:
(i) B (yroji) CTOHT CTOJI.
(2) KHHTH jieHcT B (iimad)).
(3) Y Hac B (KMHaTa) xopom.
(4) Mbi roBopHM o (cajij.
(5) B (cap) XJIOJIHO.
(6) OdiHrmaHTKa KJiajjr (BHjrKa) Ha CTOJI.
(7) M B I psM B (MocKB).
(8) Bce HHTiOT o (nee).
(9) *ITO JieacHT Ha (non) ?

(10) Tbi BHjnmn. (y^nrent) ?

2. FiU in the blank spaces with verbs (present and past
tenses) selected from the foUowing:
5KHTB, paSTaTB, BTpTB, CHflTb, CTOHTB, JIOKTB.
(1) Ha crone ... ra3ra. (2) KoBp ... na nojry.
(3) Hma cern ... B rpone. (4) Mou 6paT ... B
MocKB. (5) OHH ... B cafly. (6) SI ... Ha nuBHe.
(7) 3 a KHHra ... B nncaipy.
3. Translate the foUowing into Russian:
(1) It was hot and we were sitting in the garden and
drinking tea.
(2) We live in Leningrad where we have a large flat.
In our flat there is a kitchen, a dining room, a
bedroom, and a study. In my study there is a desk.
It stands on the carpet in the corner.
(3) Please eat. I know you are hungry. No, I'm not,
I'm thirsty. Here's some hot soup. Drink it.
(4) My father is going to the east. Why ? He used to
hve in the south but now he Uves in the north.
Did you know that Tashkent is his favourite town ?
(5) Can you see the waitress ? Look! She is laying the
table. Now she is putting the knives and forks on
the table. The girl on the right? No, that's my
sister. What's she doing here ? She Uves here. She
is not the waitress.
65

psi 1 '

s*

-0%

y p o K 11

CJIOBAPB
BesTH I (Be3|y, -mb, past tense K0JJX3 (=KOJUieKTHBHOe X03HHB3, -Ji, -Ji6; JJH) to convey,
CIBO) pi. collective farm
take, drive (by some means of /'jfeTTb I Or||io, -emb) to fly
transport)
\ jierTb H'-yie'iy, neimb) to fly
Beere I (Befl||y, -mb, past tense ^jlTSfHH, -aa, -ee; -He summer
BJi, -, -6; -H) to lead, guide
(attr.)
(on foot)
McJio n. butter, oil
BOflHTb II (BOJKy, BOflHUIb) tO MOJIOK n. milk
lead, guide (on foot)
MOTooHKji m. motor-cycle
B03HT6 II (BOJKy, B3Htnb) tO HecTH I (nee || y, -mb, past
tense Hc, -Ji, -JI; -jni) to
convey, take, drive (by some
carry (on foot)
means of transport)
BOKSJi m. station
HOCHTb II (HOmy, HCHmb) to
rpofl m. town
carry (on foot)
rpy30BHK m. (pi. rpy30BHKH) o6b'niHO adv. usually
ocraHBJDiBaTb I (ociaHBjmlorry
flaneK adv. far
Ba||io, -emb) to stop
flamme adv. farther
napK m. park
flBO^Ka/. little girl
nHTa / . post-office, post, mail
flTH pi. children
no^TaJibH m. postman
flopra/. road
pbmoK m. (pi. pb'mKH) market
3flHTb II (3Hty, 3flHmb) to go CTapHK m. (pi. crapHKH) old
(by some means of transport),
man
4>6pia/. factory
to ride, to drive
(ppMa / . farm
exara I (fly, flemb) to go (by
XOflHTb II (xoHcy, xflHmb) to go
some means of transport), to
ride, to drive
(on foot), walk
qpe3 pr.
(+acc.)
through,
sBTpa adv. tomorrow
across, via; after
KjKflJbiH, -aa, -oe; - u e pron
each

66

rPAMMATHKA
i. Verbs of Motion
In order to translate most verbs of motion (to go, drive,
fly, etc.) into Russian it is necessary to choose between
two separate verbs.
For convenience sake these verbs can be grouped in
pairs:
Cb) HTHTb }

b0th meanin

S ' t 0 6' ( o n

foot)

S);eSS} bothmea ^ ,tofl y'

(a) 3miTB \ both meaning 'to go' (by some means
(b) xaTB /
of transport)
The basic distinction between the two verbs in each
pair is as foUows:
(i) The first verbs of each pair (xomiTB, jieTTB, 3jniTB)
are used to designate a habitual or frequent or repetitive
action. E.g. :
JJ,TH xfljTT B HTKjiy.
lcro jierio B MocKBy.
OH 3flHji B HTJUQO KcHbiH rofl.

Children go to school (Le.

habitually, in general,
usually).
I frequently fly to Moscow.
He used to go to England
every year.

Note: This does not apply to idioms like floacflb HflT, which
means 'it is raining' or 'it (always) rains', according to the
context.

67

(2) The second verbs of each pair (H/BTH, jieTTB, xaTB)

can only be used: (i) to translate the English 'to be
going' (I am aying', 'he was driving', 'we are going')
and (n) if a direction is mentioned or implied (' I am
going to school', ' Where are you going ?'). E.g.:
JJm Hflyr B ujKJiy.

The children are going to

school.
He is flying to Moscow.
He was flying to England.
Where are you going?
(spoken to someone not
on foot)

OH jieTHT B MocKBy.
OH jieTn B Am-jmio.
Kyfl Tbi flemb ?

Note: i. If no direction is mentioned or implied, then, whether

the action is habitual or not, the (a)-type verbs are used. Thus:
OH 3flHT can mean 'He drives (about the town)' or 'He is
driving (about the town)'; OH XOAHJI - 'He was walking up and
down' or 'He (always) used to walk up and down'.
2. The (b)-type verb can be used in the present tense to indicate
the near future, just as in English ' I am going home' can refer
to the present or the future. Thus fly Ha BOCTK can mean ' I
am actually on my way to the east', or ' I am going to the east
(tomorrow, next year, etc.)'.

The above rules apply as weU to other verbs of motion

(running, climbing, etc.) which wiU be given later.
They also apply to the three verbs of taking - carrying,
conveying, and leading:

(b) recST } 'to carry'(whUe on foot)

(a) B03TI, \ 'to convey' (by some form of trans(b) Be3TH /
port)
(a) nonj&TB \ 'to lead, guide' (when both subject
(b) BecTH /
and object are on foot).
68

To iUustrate these differences:

O H n a c r a H C H T KHHTH B

HJIHOTKy.
O H HecT (from HecTa)
KHHry B OHOJIHOTKy.
O H B3HT c e c r p y B J I H flOH.

O H B3HT om.

Kyfl Tbi Be3mB (from

Be3TH) cecrpy ?
O H BflHT 6pia B uiKJiy.
O H BeflT (from
6pTa B iiiKjiy.

Becro)

He often takes (on foot)

books to the library.
He i s taking the book to
the library.
He takes (by car, train,
aeroplane) his sister to
London (often, once a
week, once a month,
etc.).
He drives his father
(around the town, etc.).
Where a r e y o u taking (by
car etc.) your sister ?
He takes (on foot) bis
brother to school.
He i s taking his brother to
school (on foot).

2. Conjugation of Verbs of Motion

As aU the above verbs are used very frequently, great
. effort must be made to master their conjugation as
soon as possible. As is often the case with commonly
used verbs in Russian, their conjugation is at first a
Utile difficult.
AU the (a)-type verbs given here are II conjugation
(except for ncTTB which is regular I conjugation)
and in each case the last consonant of the stem changes
in the ist person singular only.
Thus the present tenses of XOHHTB, sHHTi., HOCHTB,
B03HTB, and BonuTB are:
xoHty
XflHmb
XflHT
XflHM
xflHTe
XflHT

3JKy
3flHUIb
3flHT
3flHM
3flHTe
3flHT

Homy
HCHIllb
HCHT
HCHM
Hcare
HCHT

69

Boxcy
B3HJJJJ,
B3HT
B3HM
B3Hre
B3HT

BOcy
BflHmb
BflHT
BflHM
Bjjjrre
BflHT

The imperatives and past tenses are formed perfectly

regularly and present no difficulty:
xoH(Te), 3flH(Te), etc.
xoflHJi, 3flHJi, HOCHJi, etc.
N o t e : T h e i s t persons singular o f B03HTb a n d BOjjBTb are t h e
same.

AU the (b)-type verbs given in this lesson are I conjugation (except for jieTrB which is II: Jie*ry, neTHnu.).
They are conjugated as foUows:
Infinitive:
HflTH

eXSTb

HeCTH

Be3TH

BeCTH

Hecy
Hecmb
Hecr
HecM
Hecre
HecyT

Be3y
Be3nn>
Be3r
Be3M
Be3re
Be3yT

Befly
Beflmb
Beflr
BeflM
Beflre
Benyr

Present Tense:
Hfly
niyrrn.
HflT
HflM
Hflre
Hflyr

y
flemb
fleT
fleM
flere
flyr

Past Tense:
mji, iiuia,
mjio; m i m

xaji, - a ,
-o; - H

Hc, -Ji,
-JI; -jm

Bs, -Ji,
-JI; -JIH

Bn, -,
-6; - H

The imperatives of the above verbs (except for xaTB

which has none) are: Hmi(Te), HecH(re), Be3H(Te),
Ben)(Te).

3. The Preposition Ha used to translate 'in', 'at',

and ' t o '
It wiU be remembered (see Lesson 9) that Ha + the
prepositional case can sometimes be used to translate
70

'at' (Ha ypKe 'at the lesson') or 'in' (BH ibre 'in the
south'; Ha KaBK3e 'in the Caucasus') and that with
these same nouns in the accusative it means 'to' (HU
ypK 'to the lesson'; Ha ior 'to the south', etc.) (see
Lesson 10).
Ha is also used to translate 'in', 'at', or 'to' with the
following nouns:
(ppHKa
3aBfl
BOK3Ji
nira
pb'moK
(ppMa
YpJi
yjiHua

factory
works, plant, mill, factory
station
post-office
market
farm
the Urals
street

Mbi fleM Ha d>6pHKy.

O H 6bui B nome.

We are going to the factory.

He was at the post-office.

4. The Preposition npes

*Ipe3+the accusative case can be used in expressions
of place or time.
(a) Used with nouns of place it means 'through', 'across',
'over', or 'via':
Mbi HflM i p e 3 MOCT.
Mbi fleM B MocKBy i p e 3
EepjiHH.

We are going over the

bridge.
We are travelling to Moscow via Berlin.

(b) Used with nouns expressing time it means 'after',

'within':
ipe3 lac

after an hour, in an hour

71

TEKCTM
JlTHHH flCHb
IIoHTanBH KcTHH neT flaneK. O H ner Ha MOTOHHKJie Ha (ppary. Jlopra HflT ipe3 none. Bb'iCTpo
flyr rpy30BHKH: OHH Be3yr MOJIOK H Mcjio B rpon
na pbiHOK. rioHTanbH KCTHH xopom 3HeT flopry.
O H 3AHT KnqrbrH ptm, Ha dppMy.
CTOHT xopman norfla. BBICOK B noe JieTiOT
iTTHUbi. rioHTajiBH BHflHT dppMy. OH em AajieK.
OH 6b'icTpo ner Ha MOTornncjie. Ha flopre crapmc.
O H Beflr nBOKy AOMH. OHH omyT Ha dppiae H
3HioT KcTHHa xopom.
3npBCTByH, HHKOJi! - roBopHT crapHK.
3npBCTByHTe! - roBopHT KCTHH. O H ocraHBJiHBaer MOToqHKJi, HflT B pom H Hecr Tyfl nTry UHCBMa, wcypHajibi H ra3rbi.
rioTM OH Be3r nHxy fljTBine. O H nnaceH em
xaTB HeHBflaneKB HBBIH KOJTX3. O H AOJOKCH 6brn>
TaM npe3 iac. Tan ITOHHTHO 3AHTB BBM OTOinncjie,
Korfl norAa xopmaa, comme CBrirr npKO H mimbi
noiT.
MOH ppK xan Ha rpy30BHK. Si cronn Ha yjnme. BOT
OH ocTaHBJiHBaeT rpy30BHK.
Kyn neiin. ? - cnpimiBaio H.
Kyn ? Tbi 3Henu>, a 3H<y KjKflbffi pem> Ha BOKsan.
Her, He 3Han. A HTO TBI Be3un> Ha Boion cerflHH ?
CerflHH Be3y MOJIOK. H O oSbrano Boncy Mcno.
A TBI Kyn HflmB ?
Hny sa nrry. Hecy Tyfl micBMa. noTM H Hfly
flOMB. CeCTp AHHOHKa TH<e HflT flOMH. OH
cenqc B IHKJIC
A rae mKJia ? TaM, rfle JIonyxBbi JKHB^T ?
Her, TaM, rfle OHH HOAJIH. OHH ceiraac na ibre.
TenpB Ocpranbi HoyT TaM, HO H OHH THte flyr
3BTpa Ha lor.
72

ynPAXCHEHHfl
i. FUI in the blank spaces with the appropriate form of
one of the two verbs given in brackets:
( i ) Cefinc H . . . B iiiKjTy. ( X O H T B , HHTH)

(2) O H Hcro ... Ha (ppiwy. (3ffHTB, xaTB)

(3) M B I Bcern ... MOJIOK HS PBIHOK. (BO3HTB,
Be3TH)
(4) Bnep mn povuph, Korai. MBI ... nBOHKy B
mKjry. (BOAHTB, Becra)
(5) TenpB noqrajiBH ... micBMa B pom. (HOCHTB,
HeCTH)
(6) Mbi ... B MocKBy 3BTpa. (jierTB, nerrB)
(7) flrH ... B npKe. (XOHTB, HOTH)
(8) Kyfl Tbi... cernHH ? (3nHTB, xaTB)
(9) Si o6b'rqHO ... nncBMa Ha nvry. (HOCHTB, Hecr)
(10) O H cefinc ... MaTB B rpofl. (BO3HTB, BC3TH)
(11) KaK mmibi BWCOK ...! (jierTB, nerTB)
2. Translate into Russian:
(1) We always go to the Caucasus every year, but this
year we are going to the Urals.
(2) Where is the old man going ? I think he is going to
Moscow; then he is flying to England.
(3) In an hour I am taking you in the car to the Ubrary.
(4) The postman was driving to the farm on his
motorcycle.
(5) The Petrovs go to the Caucasus every year and
take (their) sister there.
(6) Tomorrow I am flying east. Do youflyoften ? Yes,
I like flying very much.

73

YPOK 12

CJIOBAPb
apTHCT m. performer, artist
(singer, actor, musician)
BecHH ado. in spring
Bfriep m. evening
BiepoM adv. in the evening
BcraBaTb I (Bcra|K), -mb) to get
up (from one's chair), to get
out of bed
Bcrpeiib I (Bcrpei||io, -emb)
to meet
Bcrpe^TbCH I (Bcrpeti||iocb,
-embca) to meet one another
rjioc m (pi. rojioc) voice
HBepb/. door
jxnM adv. in the day-time
sBTpaK m. breakfast1
sBTpaKaTb I (3BTpaKa||K>, -enn>)
to have breakfast
saKpbraib I (3aKpbm||io, -emb)
to close
3aKpbmTbCH I (3aKpbma|erca)
to be closed
3acbmTb I (3acbma||io, -emb)
to fall asleep
3fl0pBaTbCH I (3flOpBa||K)Cb,
-embca) to greet (one another),
to exchange greetings
sflopBbe n. health
3HMH adv. in winter
3HaMeHHTbm adj. famous
JiTOM adv. in summer
JlOHtHTbCH II (jI05K||yCb, -HIHBCH)
to lie down

My3H m. museum
HaxoflHTb II (HaxoHty, naxflHmb) to find
HaxoflHTbca
II
(HaxojKycb,
Haxoflmnbca) to be situated
HOTOBib I (Hoiy|io, -emb) to
spend the night
Hubio adv. at night
o6fl m. dinneri
ofleBib I (ofleBlio, -emb) to
dress, clothe
ofleBTbca I (ofleB|iocb, -embca) to dress (oneself)
ceHbK) adv. in autumn
ocTaHBJiHBaTbca I (ocraHBjmBa||iocb, -embCH) to stop, halt
OTKpbmTb I (oTKpbiB||io, -emb)
to open
OTKpbmTbca I (oTKpberca)
to be opened
HJieBTb I (runo|K>, -mb) to
spit
npocbmTbca I (npocbmaQiocb,
-embca) to wake up
pa3TOBpnBaTb I (pa3roBpaBa||io, -emb) to converse,
talk
pHO adv. early
pe6HOK m. child
caflHTbCH II (caacycb, caflHmbCH;
to sit down, to set (of the
sun)

74

ce6 reflex, pron. oneself

CMeaTbca I (cMe||iocb, -mbca)
to laugh
coMHeBTbCH I (coMHeB|iocb,
-embca) to doubt
TamieBTb I (Tamry[|io, -emb) to
dance
THXHH adj. quiet
yjKHH m. supper1

VMbmTb I (yMbra|]K>, -emb) to

wash (hands, face, and neck)
yMbTBTbca I
(yMbiBfliocb,
. -enibCH) to wash oneself
yipo n. morning
yrpoM adv. in the morning
xyflJKHHK m. artist, painter
qyBCTBOBaTb I (qyBCTByJio,
-emb) to feel

Note: Henceforth adjectives will no longer be given in the

vocabularies with the feminine, neuter, and plural endings,
unless there is some irregularity.
I. 3BTpaK is breakfast, the first meal of the day. OSfl, 'dinner', is
normally given in the Soviet Union between I and 2 p.m.; it is
sometimes called BTopft 3BrpaK ('second breakfast'). On
special occasions (official banquets, dinner parties) o6fl may
occur in the evening (at 8 p.m.). VJKHH is always supper and is the
last meal of the day.
BBIpaHcHHH
CMOTpTb Ha ceH B spKano
Hoopoe yTpo.
JfpwH Biep.
CHOKHHOH HIH.

to look at oneself in the mirror

Good morning.
Good evening.
Good night (lit. 'peaceful
night').
It is time to go to bed.
It is time to get up.

Ilop (HJTXH, JiojKHTbca) cnait.

riop BcraBTb.

TPAMMATHKA
1. Reflexive Verbs
(a) Formation. Reflexive verbs in Russian are formed by
adding the particle -CH or -CB to the end of the verb.
-CH is added when the last letter is a consonant (or
a soft sign, or a diphthong ending in -ft):
ofleBTbca
ofleBeTca

to dress oneself
he dresses himself, he is dressing

-CB is added when the last letter is a vowel:

ofleBwcb

-1 am dressing myself, I am dressing

75

Thus the present tense of ofleBTBca is:

oflesaiocb
ofleBembCH
OfleBerca
OfleBeMca
ofleBerecb
OfleBWTCH

The imperative:
OfleBHCH
ofleBHTecb

The past:
ofleBJica
OfleBnacb
ofleBnocb
OfleBflHCb

(b) Use. Verbs formed with the reflexive particle -CH (-CB)
can have several meanings. The foUowing are the
most common:
Reflexive proper. In such verbs the action is directed
towards the agent or subject. Thus yMbTBCH means
'to wash oneself'; ofleBaTBCH - 'to dress oneself'.
Such verbs, which are merely compounds of transitive
verbs+the particle -CH, are also found in their nonreflexive, transitive forms:
. yMbiBio pegHKa.
(cf. SI yMbiBrocb.
SL ofleBio pe&eHKa.
(cf. H ofleBiocb.

I am washing the child,

I am washing (myself).)
I am dressing the child,
I am dressing (myself).)

Reciprocal verbs. Here the action is mutual and

imphes two or more agents; the words 'one another'
can often be added to the verb in EngUsh. Thus:
Bcrpe"iTbCH='to meet (one another)'
3flppBaTbca='to greet one another'

76

OHH BcrpeqioTCH H sflopBaiOTca KJKflbifi e s t .

They meet and exchange greetings every day.
Note: Bcrpeqib is a normal transitive verb as well, meaning
' t o meet'.
O H BCTpeieT cecrpy.
He meets his sister.
3flopBaibCH, however, has no non-reflexive form.

As weU as these there are several other types of verb

formed with the particle -CH (-CB). Some have no
reflexive or reciprocal connotations, such as:
CMeTbCH
npocbmTbca

'to laugh'
'to wake u p '

Note the irregular present of cMeaibca: cMeibcb, CMembca ...

Others are merely passive verbs, like HaxoflHTBCH, 'to

be situated', 'to be' (cf. HaxoflHTB, 'to find'):
OTKpbmaibca
3aKpbTbca
JTfle HaxflHTCH Bam AOM ?
JBepb oTKpberca.
Jjjaepi. saKpbmerca.

' t o be opened' (cf. oiKpuBrb, ' t o open')

'to be closed' (cf. 3aKpbiBrb)
Where is your house (situated) ?
T h e door opens or T h e door
is being opened.
T h e door closes or T h e
door is being closed.

Note: The two reflexive verbs caflHTBCH, 'to sit down'

and JioHCHTBCH, 'to he down', are usuaUy foUowed by
Ha+the accusative.
O H caflHTCH a a CTVJI.
OHa jiojKHTCH Ha flHBaH.

77

H e sits down on the chair.

She lies down o n t h e sofa.

2. The Reflexive Pronoun ce6a

The reflexive pronoun ce6a, 'oneself', which is never
found in the nominative, may refer to any person,
singular or plural. Cea is the accusative form; ce6 the prepositional.
Mbi roBopHM o ce6.
OH roBopirr o cefi.
CMOTpib aa ce6a B
3pKano.
a MyBCTByio ce&a
ruixo.

We are speaking about ourselves.

He is speaking about himself.
I am looking at myself in the
mirror.
I feel ill.

Note: The reflexive ^ryBCTBOBaTbca means 'to be felt', 'to make

oneself felt';
ilyBCTByeTCH, iro ...
One can feel that...

3. Expressions of Time
In order to express 'time during which' for the different parts of the day the foUowing are used:
yTpoM
BqepoM
flHM
Hqbio

'in the morning'

'in the evening'
'in the day-time', or, sometimes, 'during the
afternoon'
'in the night', 'at night'

and for the seasons:

BeCHH
JlTOM

ceHbio
3HMH

'in
'in
'in
'in

the spring'
the summer*
the autumn'
the winter'.

These adverbs are, as wiU be seen later, merely the

instrumental cases of yTpo, Bnep,flem>,HOHB; BecH,
jiro, cem>, and 3HM.
78

Verbs i n -oaaTB, - e s a i b
Most verbs with an infinitive ending in -osaTB or
-esaTb change the - o s a - or - e a a - into y in the present
tense and the imperative, but retain the - o s a - and - e s a in the infinitive and past tense.
Thus TyBCTBOBaTB has the present tense nyBCTByio,
-yenn. ..., the imperative qyBCTByH(Te), but the past
tense ryBCTBOBaji, -a, -o; -H.
The same apphes to TaimeBaTB, 'to dance', and to aU
verbs with a stem ending in JK, n, H, m, or in, such as
HoneBTB, 'to spend the night'.
Note: (a) Verbs whose stem does not end in , u, H, m, or m
and whose infinitive ends in -eBaib change the -eBa- into 10.
Thus njieBTb, 'to spit' has the present tense runok), runomb ...
(b) The verbs 3flopBaTbCH, OfleBTb, and coMHesaTbca do
not follow the above rules. Their present tenses are:
sflopBaiocb, sflopBaembca ...
ofleBio, ofleBemb ...
coMHeBiocb, coMHeBembca...
(c) The verb BcraBTb, 'to get up' and others ending in -aaai*
(such asflaBTb,'to give') have for the present tense -aib, -amb...
(Bcrai, Bcramb ...) and for the imperative -aBH(re) (BcraBH(ie)).

TEKCTBI
B necf
M b i HflM B ieHB KpacHBoe Mcro - ApMneBo. M M
XOTHM BHfleTB flOM, Tfle 3KHJTH 3HaMeHHTbie pycCKHe
xyflH<HHKH H apTHCTbi. TenpB TaM My3o.
M b i HflM y a fljrro. Cjmne caflHTca. H a c r y neT THXH Biep. Mbi ocTaHaBJTHBaeMca B necf.
CaflHMCH Ha 3MJTK) H OTflblxeM. OneHB npHHTHO
CHflrB B'qepoM B jiecy. Bc THXO H TCMH.
M B I yMbmeMCH H caflHMCH ynomaTB. Bce pa3roBpHBaiOT, CMeiOTCH.

79

 nop cnaib, - roBopio a. 3BTpa Hnp pHO

BcraBib. CnoKHHOH H*IH!
CnoKHHOH HHH! - OTBeiaioT Bce.
Si jiOHcycB Ha 3MJno H cMOTpib B TMHoe H6o. H
flyMaio: KaK xopom HoneaTB B Jiecy! Si 3acbmio
H cnjiio ^erab xopom.
Si npocbmiocB -y>K yTpo. noioT ITTHUBI. Si Bcraio,
yMbiocb H 3BTpaKaio. MOH TOBpHmn Tnce BcraIT, yMbiOTCH, ofleBioTCH H aBTpaKaioT. OHH Bce
xopom cnjm.
Tfle A6pMfleBo? AaneK ? - cnpmHBaeT HHKOJiaS.
Mbi CMTpHM Ha KpTy. BHflHM, HTO AGpMfleBO
HaxflHTCH ya< HeflajieK.
Mbi HflM fljiBuie.

2. YTpo. Si cHHcy y ce6n B KMHare. ^yBcrayio ceH

^eHB xopom - HHBIO xopom cnan.
JIsepB OTKpbiBercH Mflnemio.
MJKHO ? - roBoprr rnoc.
Si Bcraib H OTKpbmio flBepB.
JJp, nojKjryHCTa.
3 T O MOH flpyr, HaH HJTBH*I np3opoBCKHH. O H
caflHTCH B Kpcjio H 3aKpbeT raa3. Jlnce ne
3flopBaeTCH. OSbrano OH roBopHT: flpoe yTpo,
Korfl BcrpeneT MeHH yrpoM.
Ox, KaK y MeHH OJTHT rojioa! - roBopHT OH.
O H BcraT H CMTPHT Ha cen B 3pKajio. Stex. y Her
COBCM jIblH.

Tfle Tbl 6bi Bnep BnepoM ? - cnpamnBaio a.

Si yaornaji y npotpccopa. nTOM Mbi fljiro TaHHeBaJTH.
Tfle Tbi HoneBji ?
HotieBajiflMa.Bcerfl Honyio flMa.
Ho no^eMy Tbi cefl qyBCTByemb TSK iuixo ?
He' 3Haio, - roBopHT OH.
80

ynPAHCHEHHH
1. Rewrite the following sentences, putting the verbs in
brackets in the present and past tenses:
(i) Ham OTn (BcraBTB) pHO yTpOM.
(2) Mbi, flra, em (cnaTb).
(3) noTM Mbi (npocbmibca), (BcraBTB), (yMMBrbCH) H (ofleBTBCH).
(4) OH Bcerfl (3flopBaTBCH), Korfl MM (BcrpeiaTBCH).
(5) KTO (cMeHTBca) ?
(6) Si (cOMHeBTBCH).
(7) O H (ruieBTb), Korfl OH (CMCHTBCH).
2. Answer these questions with complete sentences:
(1) Korfl BM Bcrare yTpoM ?
(2) MHro jm BM ryjiHere ?
(3) JIib6HTe jm BM paSraTB B cafly?
(4) KaK BM ceH HyBciByere cerflHH ?
(5) *ICTO JTH BM 3flHTe B PoCCHH) ?
(6) Bbi cnareflHM?
(7) Tfle HaxflHTCfl Bam AOM ?
3. Translate into Russian:
(1) It is time to get up, to get dressed and to wash.
(2) When does the museum open? I don't know. In
the summer it opens early in the morning and
closes early in the evening.
(3) In the evening he has supper; then he Ues down on
the sofa and reads the paper. He goes to bed early
and gets up early.
(4) It's raining now. It always rains in the winter.
We can't go for a walk. Can we dance ? No, not on
the carpet.
(5) Please sit down. I want to have a talk. But I don't
want to talk. You're always talking about yourself.
(6) What is he putting on the table? I think he's
putting a book there.
81

y P O K 13

CJIOBAPb
JHHH nenan

Days of the week

BOCKpecHbe n. Sunday (the

Resurrection)
HOHefljTbHHK ra. Monday (the
day after Heflna - the Old
Russian for Sunday)
BTpHHK m. Tuesday (the second
day)

cpefl / . (ace. cpny) Wednesday

(the middle day)
qeiBpr m. Thursday (the fourth
day)
HHTHHua/. Friday (thefifthday)
cy66ra / . Saturday (the Sabbath)

Note: Days of the week in Russian are written with a small letter,
unless, of course, they come first in the sentence.
apxHTKTop m. architect
flepBHa/. village, country
flSpbiH adj. (short form floSp,
apxHieKiypa /. architecture
adinma/. bill, poster
-, -o; -) good, kmd
SbiBib I (6biB||io, -emb) to be SflHHe n. building
(KHHO) (pHjjbM m. film
(frequently), to happen
KJiy6 m. club
BHCTb II (BHmy, BHCHLUL) to
KOCTp m. (pi. Kocrpb'i) camp
hang (intrans.)
fire
B3flyx m. air
KynTbca I (Kyniiocb, -embca)
Bxofl m. entrance
to bathe, to have a bath
rapJK m. (pi. rapajK) garage
jiKHHa/. lecture
rocTHHHua/. hotel
1
rOTBHTb II (rOTBJIK), TOT- jnbflH pi. people
BHHib) to prepare, to cook
i. qejioBK, 'a person', has no plural. Instead JHOAH, 'people', is
used.
82

Mcan. m. month
Hefljia/. week
oflHjKflbi adv. once, one day
3cpo . lake
ocSeHHO adv. especially
Tflbix m. rest
TnycK m. holiday, vacation,
leave
HJIHJK m. beach

nMHHTb II (nMH||lO, -HHIb) tO

remember
npH pr. (+prep.) atf
nyTemcTBOBaTb I (nyremecTBy || K), -emb) to travel

nbca/. play
pa3 once
pHiuie adv. earlier, formerly,
before
CB&KHH adj. fresh, cool
CKpo adv. soon, quickly
CKyqHbift adj. boring, dull
CJiEmKOM adv. too
cJtt'niiaTb II (cjnmlly, -Hun.) to
hear3
THeq m. dance (Tdmibi pi.
dancing)
Torfl adv. then
qHCTbrii adj. clean, pure

2. npn, which only takes the prepositional case, has several meanings, the most common of which are:
(i) 'Close to', 'hard by':
ilpH BXfle CTOHJia JKeHIUHHa.
At (near) the entrance
woman was standing.
(2) 'Dependent on', 'attached to':
npH rocTHHnne ecib rapat.
Attached to the hotel is
garage (or The hotel h
its own garage).
IlpH q)6pHKe ecib KJiy6.
The factory has its club.
D o not confuse cjnmaTb, to hear (II conjugation) and
cjiymaTb to listen to (I conjugation)
Both can be used transitively, Le. with direct objects in the
accusative.

BbIpa>KCHHH
qHTTb JlKUKK)
CMOTpTb (KHHO)d)HJIbM
(Cf. CMOTpTb TeJieBH30p
CMOTpTb HSflOM(OCC.)
Huraer.
KaKHcajib!
flaBatb nbcy
MJKei 6bITb

to give a lecture
to see a film
to watch television)
to look at a house
It doesn't matter or Not top bad, so-so
(in answer to question 'How are
you?')
What a pity!
to put on a play
perhaps

83

rPAMMATHKA
I. The Future Tense of the Verb 6MTB
(I)

Formation. BBITB, 'to be', is conjugated in the future

as foUows:
H 6yjry
T U Syaemb
OH S
osa >6yneT
OHO J

MBI 6yaeM
BBI 6yflere
OHH ^flVT

There is also an imperative form - 6yflb, 6yflbTe - which means

'be':
Byflb TaK flo6p ...
].
B^fflbTeTaKflo6pb-i... } b

...

e s o k m d

'

(2) Use of the future of 6MTB. (a) 6;yay, SynemB, etc. is

used primarily as the future of the link verb 'to be'.
E.g.:
6yny
flMa.
Hoqb SyfleT Truiaa.

I shall be at home.
The night will be warm.

(b) The future tense of 6HTB is used to denote possession in the future; in other words, it replaces ecTB or
6BUI in the expressions y Memi ecTB, 6WJI:
Y MeHH SyfleT KHHra.
y Bac 6yfleT KHHra.
y Hac SyflVT KHHTH.

I shall have a book,

You will have a book.
We will have books.

As with the present and past tenses, the object of the

sentence in Enghsh ('I shaU have a book') becomes
the subject in Russian ('A book wUl be in my possession').
84

(c) Sypry, 6ynemB, etc., is used with onnceH,

ponasa, etc., to denote obligation or duty in the future.
It almost invariably foUows njiHceH.
3Bipa a nbnxeeu 6yny
paTaTb.
Tbi . flOJUKH 6yflemb
OTflbIXTb.
Jlm pjoKB
6^JTVT
BrpTb
flMa.

Tomorrow I shall have to

work.
You will have to rest.
The children will have to
play at home.

(d) In order to express possibility, necessity, or impossibihty in the future, the third person singular,
6yfleT, is added to MSKHO, H^MCHO (Heap) or
Hejib3H, almost always following them.
3BTpa MHCHO 6^fleT OTflbixTb.
Hena.3H 6yneT paooiaTb
flMa.

It will be possible to rest

tomorrow.
It will be impossible to
work at home.

(e) With impersonal sentences formed from the

neuter singular of the short form of adjectives, SyoeT
is used to denote the future. It may precede or follow
the adjective.
CKpo 6yneT Tenon.
KaK x o p o m 6yneT jiTOMI

It will soon be dark.

How nice it will be in
summer 1

2. The Compound Future Tense

Many Russian verbs have a compound future tense
formed by the future tense of SBITB - Gfpy, Synenib,
SyjieT and the infinitive of the verb.
Thus:
Syny VT&TB.
T u 6yfleim> ofleBTbca.
OH SyneT imcTB.

85

I will read.
You will dress.
He will write.

The verb remains in the infinitive throughout. The

compound future tense is used mainly to denote:
(a) A progressive action ('I shaU be reading'), in which
the verb has some duration.
(b) A habitual action ('I shaU read every day'). It cannot
be used for an instantaneous or complete action ('I
shaU shoot you dead', 'He wiU hit me'); for this it is
necessary to employ the simple future, which wiU be
dealt with later on.
Note: The present tense can often be used in Russian as in
English, to denote the near future. Thus: 3BTpa a paSiaio,
meaning 'Tomorrow I am working', could replace 3BTpa a
6yfly pa66iaTb - 'Tomorrow I shall (be) work(ing)\
This use of the present tense with a future meaning is frequently
found with the HflTH-xaTb type of verbs of motion.

3. Expressions of Time with B and Ha+the Accusative Case

B+the accusative is used to translate 'on' when
foUowed by 'day' or one of the days of the week:
B KaKH nein, TBI flemb
B MocKBy ?
B noHeflJibHHK.
Bo BTpHHK.
B cpfly.

On what day are you going

to Moscow ?
On Monday.
On Tuesday.
On Wednesday, etc.

Note: In order to facilitate pronunciation B becomes BO before

some nouns beginning with two or more consonants.

B+the accusative is also used to translate 'in' or 'per'

after pa3, 'once':
pa3 B Mcaq.
pas B Heflmo

once a month
nce a week

Ha+the accusative is used to translate 'for' when

denoting intention of spending a certain time:
SL fly Ha BOCTK Ha rofl.
OH exan B JleHHHrpfl s a
Heflmo.

86

I am going to the east for a

year.
He was going to Leningrad
for a week.

cfy
i. HamiuryS

TBKCT a y t a ^
fUteaA***-.

Y Hac npH 3aBfle ecrb Kjry - 6ojn>me KpacHBoe

3flHHe.
CerflHH noHefljTBHHK. Ha cren npn Bxfle BHCHT
ad)Hma.
BHKTOP H AHflpfi CTOHT npn Bxne H HmiOT a<pHiny. TaM THte CTOHT crapbi mmceHep Oflop OflopoBHH. BHKTOP roBopar:
CMOTpHTe, Oflop OflopoBHq, 3aBTpa, BO BTpHHK, B KJiye 6yfleT <KHB HHTepcHaH jiKUHH o
JKH3HH* B AHTjrHH.* HeKimK) HHTeT 3HaMeHHTMH
npopccop AxMTOB. O H 6MJI B AHTJIHH nroM H
xopom 3Her CTpany. B nHTHnqy Tnce Gyper JiiamH
06 apxHTeKT^pe B MocKB. tHrTB 6^fler apxHreKTOp
HHKHTHH.

3TO He TaK HHrepcHo, - roBopHT AHflpS. Si

ync cjrb'imaji nKinno 06 apxHTeKType B MocKB. B
cpfly 6yfleT KHHO<PHJTBM CMjrbie jnflH.
Si yjK CMOTpn TOT d)Hjn>M. <>HJTBM - xopmn.
ApTHCTM oneHb xopom HiplOT, OC6eHHO HBH
3CyK0B.
Si em He BHflen, - roBopHT AHflpH. H o He
Mory HflTH B cpfly. M O H TTH yfler y Hac yjKHHarb
B 3TOT fleHB.

KaK CKyHHo! Ho mraer, B Herapr 6yfleT KOHupT.

A B cySiy yflyr THUbi.
Korfl ?-cnpiHHBaeT <E>flop OflopoBHH. B
cy66Ty ? Ax, KaK HOJIB! He Mory; HflJDKeHpaSroTB
Ha dppHKe B cy66Ty BqepoM. Si pHBine onera
JHOSHJI TaHneBTB. Ho TenpB H CJTHIIIKOM crap.
Bjame He Mory. A HTO yfler B BOCKpecHBe ?
B BocKpecHie yfler mca. KsKfloe BOCKpecHBe
GbiBeT m>ca. HrpioT He Bcerfl oceHHO xopom.
B TO BOCKpecHbe flaior m>cy Mcjni B flepBHe.
* Prepositional case of HCBSHJ and AHTJIHH. See below, p . 103.

87

2.

HCBM

JJopcrH Mama!
Hacryner nro, ocpo GyfleT Terui, H H ync
flyMaio 06 Tflbrxe. Macer 6MTB, H y TeH H y MeHH
rnycK 6yneT nroM, H IHBI 6yfleM OTflbrxTB BMcre?
nMHHHiB, oflHn(flbi MM 6MJTH BMcre Ha KaBK3e?
Torfl Mbi MHro nyreincrBOBajiH. TenpB-H xony
OTflbrxTB Ha 3epe Cenarp. TaM Mbi em H OMJTH.1
Cejmrp - HCHB KpacHBoe 3epo. EojrtiiiHe
HjnbKH. B3H<yx HHCT H CBOK. Ha 6epery Jiec. TaM
neHB npHHTHO yfler OTflbrxTB. MJKHO yfler
iyjiflTB, KynTBCH H iuiaaTB. ByfleM neHcTB Ha
njiHjKe. ByfleM TOTOBHTB oofl H ynom Ha Kocip. A
KaK npHHTHO yfler HoqeBTB Ha epery HJTH B Jiecy!
Y Hac yfler npeKpcHbm rflbixl
rimiiH.
TBOH flpyr HHKOJia.
1. Note the stresses on the negative past of 6brn>:
H, Tbl, OH H 6bIJI
H, Tbl, OH He 6btn
OH H 6bIJIO
Mbi, Bbi, OHH H 6bUTH

ynPAHCHEHHH
1. Rewrite the following sentences, putting the verbs in
brackets in the present, past, and future tenses:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

MOH MaTb (6MTB) Ha KaBKa3e.

Tbl He (HHTTb) ?
Korfl Tbl (HHTTb), H (rmcTB).
Tfle BM (flaaTB) ypK ?
y Koro (6MTB) ypK cerflHH ?
88

2. Rewrite the foUowing questions, putting the words in

brackets in the appropriate cases, and answer the
questions with complete sentences:
(i) KTO TO caflHTCH Ha (flHBH) y (TM) B (KMHara) ?
(2) EfleiHB HH TM B (POCCHH) Ha (HefljIH) HJD3 Ha
(Mcmi) ?
(3) B KaKH fleHb OH XflHT Ha (jlKHHH) ?
(4) KTO yfler cjrymaTB (yHHTejn>) ?
(5) M>KHO j m yfler CHflTB B (nee) H pa3roBpnBaTB

0 (cafl) ?
3. Translate into Russian:
(1) You wiU feel very weU in a month or even within a
week.
(2) I shaU have a lesson on Wednesday, and on Thursday I shaU have to listen to a lecture in your
school.
(3) AU these people wUl be walking in the woods
tomorrow, but I won't. I'm going to Leningrad
this evening for a week.
(4) On what days wiU you be working? I am not
working now; I am resting. Good, you'U be in the
factory club on Tuesday? No, it's too duU there;
1 want to dance aU day and aU evening. Don't you
want to listen to the lecture on Marxism? No, I
don't.
(5) I don't think he can hear what you are saying.
Talk loudly and perhaps he wiU understand. I
can't talk loudly; I've got a sore throat.

89

YPOK 14

CJIOBAPb
6JIH3KO adv. near

BarH m. (railway) carriage >

BOKpyr/>r. (+gen.) around
Bpar m. (gen. Bpar) enemy
BblXOflHTb II (BblXOJKy, BblxflHmb) to come out, to go out
flaBH adv. long ago
flpeBO n. (pi. flepBbH) wood;
tree
flepjKTb II (flepaty, flpHcmnb)
to hold
H3 pr. (+gen.) from, out of,
(made) of
KOHn. m. (gen. KOHfl, pi. KOHqb'i) end
KHH n. (indeclinable) cinema1
KpeMJJb m. (gen. KpeMJia)
Kremlin
KyjibTypa/. culture.
Mara3HH m. shop
MHMO pr. (+gen.) past
MV3K m. (pi. MyjKbii) husband
HeflaaeK adv. near, not far
KOJIO pr. (+gen.) about, near
or pr. (+genj from
napoxfl m. steamer
npBbiH adj. first
ruiaidiopMa / . platform

HJimaflb / . (gen. pi. nnomaflH)

square
ne3fl m. (pi. noe3fl) train
nojiyqTb I (nojiyi||io, -emb)
to receive
npHe3JKTb I (npHe3H<||io, -emb)
to arrive (on some form of
transport)
npTHB pr. (+gen.) opposite,
against
c (co) pr. (+gen.) from, off,
since
CBeTotpp m. traffic-lights
cpajKTbca I (cpa>K||K>cb, -embca) to fight
crpHTb II (crp||io -mnb) to
build
crpHTbCH II (crpOHTca) to be
built
TKca n. (indeclinable) taxi1
TeTp m. theatre
yHHBepcHTT m. university
ynHTejibHHua / . teacher, schoolmistress
yqHTbca II (y^Cb, y^mnbca) to
study, to learn2
qeirrp m. centre
irrmie n. reading

i . There are several foreign words in Russian, such as KHH, 'cinema',

Memo, 'menu', TaKCH, 'taxi', that do not decline. .
2. YiHTbca and VHHTL must not be confused.
y^HTbca is intransitive and means 'to study' (at school, in a
university):

90

Tfle TM VHHJICH?

Where were you at school ?

Where did you study ?
yiHTb means either 'to teach':
A yran peeHKa
I taught the child,
or 'to learn by heart':
OH yijin ypK.
He was learning the lesson.
When 'to study' is used transitively, HayqTb is used:
OH H3y<ieT pyccKHH H3WK.
He is studying Russian.
BBipaHcnna
rorBHTbca B yHHBepcHTr
flepxcaib 3K3MeH
flBepb Ha 6ajTKH
OKH BbixflHT Ha njiroaflb.
Ha cJiflyiomHH

fleHb

to prepare for (entrance examinations to) the university

to take an examination
door (leading) to a balcony
The window overlooks (faces) the
square.
on the following day

TPAMMATHKA
I.

The Genitive Case

(i) The formation of the genitive case, (a) Masculine nouns

add
-a, if the nominative ends in a consonant.
(cryji - cryjia; crynar - cryflHTa)
- a , if the nominative ends in - B or - H
(aBTOMOHHB - aBTOMOHJin; repfi - repa).
(b) Ferninine nouns change the ending - a into - B I (or
-H if the last consonant of the stem is r , K, X, JK, I , in,
or in).
T h e endings - a and - B change into - H .
Thus:
KMHaTa - KMHBTBI
KHHra KHHTH
Hefljw - HefljjH
(paMHJJHH fpaMHJDIH
HOHb - BVB

91

(c) Neuter nouns change the ending -o to -a, and

-e to -a.
Thus:
OKH - OKH
Mpe - Mp*H
SflHHe - 3flHHH

(2) Uses of the genitive case.

(a) The most common uses of the genitive without a
preposition are to denote:
Possession (KHHra nsoiKH - 'the girl's book')
Quality
(napK KyjnvrypBi m xflbixa - 'park of
culture and rest')
Relation (CMH yiHTena - 'the teacher's son')
Object (dependent on a noun of verbal origin)
(Trmie ra3TBi - 'the reading of the
paper ')
In aU the above cases it wiU be seen that the genitive
can be used to translate an Enghsh noun preceded by
'of.
(b) Prepositions governing the genitive.
There are several prepositions which govern the
genitive:
Bfc 'from', '(from) out of:
OH fleT H3 MOCKBM.
OH 6epT KHary a s mu(ha.
OH BbixflHT H3 KMHarai.

He is coming from Moscow.

He takes the book from the
cupboard.
He is corning out of the

room.

Note that in aU cases H3 means 'out of or 'from the

interior of. It can never be used with people meaning
'from'.
92

H3 can also mean 'made f:

CTOJI H3 opesa.

The table is (made) of

wood.

O T 'from', 'from the outside of:

OT OKH, OT

flBpR

OH nojryqeT micbM OT
OTfl.

from the window, from

the door
He receives a letter from
Ms father.

C ' from ', ' down from ', ' from off.
C is the opposite of na, meaning 'on', or 'to' (when
used in conjunction with certain nouns, like (bpHKa,
nHTa - see above, Lesson n ) :
K cTBjno B3y B CTOJI.
H 6epy B3y co cron.

I put the vase on the table.

I take the vase from (off)
the table.

Note: Like B/BO, co is also used to replace c before some nouns

beginning with two or more consonants in order to facilitate
pronunciation.
OH HflT Ha Howry.
OH Hflr c niTbi.

He is going to the post-office.

He is coming from the postoffice.
He is travelling from the
south.
He gets up from the sofa.

OH fleT c sra.
OH BcraT c ansHa.

C is also used in expressions of time to translate

'since'.
Biep OH paQTaji c
yrp.

Yesterday he worked from the

morning.

Note: The expression aajieK or, 'far from', is unchangeable,

no matter what noun follows it. Thus:
flaneK OT rpofla
flaneK OT niTbi (not c nqTbi)
The same applies to HeflajieK or and 6JTH3KO OT.

93

JSp 'up to', 'as far as', 'until', 'before'.

JSfi can be used with nouns denoting space or time:
Mbi xann no JleHHHrpoa.
AaJieK o MOCKBM?
SI paSraji o 3aipasn.
Ilorfla CToajia xopmaa
HO B i e p a .

We were travelling a s far

a s Leningrad.
Is it far to M o s c o w ?
I worked before (or u p to)
breakfast.
The weather kept fine till
the evening.

y 'in the presence of, 'at the house of, 'near', 'hard
by'. Apart from being used to denote 'in the possession of (see above, Lesson 8), y can also mean 'at the
house of (cf. French chez) or 'in the presence of:
OHH y Hac yjKHHajm.
Biep a 6bui y KTopa.

They had supper w i t h u s

(at our place).
I was a t t h e doctor's
(with the doctor) yesterday.

A further meaning is 'near', 'close by':

CTOJI CTOHT y OKH.

The

table stands b y

the

window.

The foUowing prepositions also govern the genitive:

OKOJIO

'near' or 'approximately':

Mbi jKHBM KOJIO napna.

SI mean TM KOJIO raa.

We live near the park.

I lived there about a year.

BoKpyr 'around':
M B I CHflHM BOKpyr rronfi.

We are sitting around the

table.

94

npTHB 'opposite', 'against':

OH CHAHT npTHB

flpyra.

ByfleM cpajKTbca npoTHB

Bpar.

He is sitting opposite his

friend.
We will fight against the
enemy.

MHMO 'past':

Mbi xajDi MHMO flepBHH. We rode past the village.

The Present Perfect Continuous

The present tense in Russian can be used to denote an
action which has been going on for a certain time and
is stiU going on. In English the perfect tense is used:
SL 3HIO er c

flTCTBa.

I have known him since

childhood.
(a 3B3UI er c flrcTBa means ' I knew him from childhood',
implying that he is dead or that I no longer know him now.)
H y>K rofl easy 3flecb.
I have been living here for
a year.
OH paTaeT co BTpmnca. He has been working
since Tuesday.

In order to translate 'for a long time' with the present

continuous, the adverb nasHO ('a long time ago'), and
not fljiro, is used:
OHflaBHpaSTaeT.

He has been working for

a long time.

(OHflJrropaoTaer means 'He (always) works for a

long time').
With the past tense flasno means 'a long time ago':
OHflaBHpaSTWi.

He worked a long time ago.

95

Use of xoflHTb/nflTH with Nouns Denoting Means

of Transport
Whereas the verbs 3nHTB/xaTB must be used for
people travelling by any means of transport, the verbs
xoflHTb/aflTH are used to denote the movement of
some vehicles, such as n6e3fl, 'train', and napox,
'steamer'.
Thus:
Mbi fleM Ha napoxfle.

We are going by steamer.

napoxfl xflHT H3 JIHflOHa B JleHHHrpfl.

The boat goes from London to Leningrad.

But:

ExaTB, however, is usuaUy used with the word

aBTOMOHJTB.
ABTOMO6HJH> fleT MHMO

Borana.

The car goes by the sta-

tion.

TEKCTLI
B flercTBe H r o p b MaKpoB JKHJI HH Ypjie B rpofle
MarHHTorpcKe. HropB xopom nMHHT, KaK CTpHJica
TOT MOJIOflH COBTCKHH JTpOfl. CTpHJTHCB HBbie
3flHHH, 3aBflbI, TeTpbl, flOMa, Mara3HHbi.
TenpB B rpofle onBume flOM, imipKHe yjombi,
KpacHBbie ruimaflH. H a epery pemi napK KyjTBTypbi
H Tflbixa. B rpOfle TcTpbl, KHH, HJIHOTKH H
HTKOJTbl.
Orfl H MaTB HropH HamyT B ManorroropcKe flaBH.
H x KBapTHpa HaxflHTCH B nHTpe rpfla, Ha y r n y
yjTHqbi JlHHHa. O r n H r o p a - flicrop. Ceqrp
HropH - yHHTejrBHHqa. BCH CCMBH acaBr BMcre.
96

Hropb yqHJiCH B MaraHTorpcKe. ynncH OH

Bcerfl xopom. Tenpb OH yn< rofl paoraer Ha 3aBfle. O H THte roTBHTca B yHHBepcHTr. O H xner
xaTB B MoCKBy HflepHtlBTaM 3K3MeH.
Si flJDKeH xaTB B MoCKBy qpe3 Hefljno,roBopHT on. Mbi MHceM xaib BMcre.
OneHB xopom.
H npe3 Hefljno OTn n CMH flyr BMcre B MocKBy.

JIKTOp MaKpoB H Hropb npHe3HcK>T B MocKBy.

OHH BbixflHT H3 BarHa Ha ruiarippMy Borajia a
noTM Ha immaflb. 3flecB OHH epyT TaKCH H flyr c
BOK3jia B rOCTHHHUy MoCKB.
Bb'icTpo fler aB-roMOHJTb Bnra. Or B0K3ana flo
rocTHHHnbi He nem flaneK. BOT yn< rijimaflb
CBepflJiBa1 H BojTbmH TeTp. ABTOMOHJTB ocraHBJiHBaeTCH y CBerodppa. OT& I H CBIH CMTPHT BS
EoJibinH TeTp. 3flmie Teipa neHB KpacHBo.
ABTOMOHJTB flerfljn>me,MHMO TeTpa, n ocraHBnHBaercH y rocTHHanbi MocKB.
rOCTHHHna MoCKB - OJTBHlOe 3flHHe B
nHTpe rpofla. B KMHaTe MaKpoBa 6ojn>niHe KHa,
flBepB Ha ajTKOH. Omia BbixflHT Ha luiinanb.
Hropb npBbio pa3 B MocKB. C flrcTBa OH MHro
HHTji o MocKB, HO eifl He bui TaM. O H BbixflHT H3
KMHaTbl Ha ajTKOH H CMTpHT Ha KpeMJIB. roCTHHnqa HaxflHTCH coBcM JTH3KO OT KpeMJii OKOJIO
KpeMJiH, HanBO, KpcHaa ruirnanb. HanpBo Hropb
BHflHT crpoe 3flHHe yHnBepcHTera H coBc 6JTH3KO
HanpBo - yjumy TpbKoro.2
i. Sverdlov Square, in which stands the Bolshoy Theatre, is in
the centre of Moscow. It is named after Yakov Mikhaylovich
Sverdlov, one of the early Communist party leaders.
2. Gorky Street - the main street of Moscow, named after the
writer Aleksey Maksimovich Gorky (1868-1936).

97

yiIPAJKHEHHH
i . FiU in the blank spaces with prepositions to suit the
meanings of the sentences:
(i) Bnep Mbi MJTH ... TeTpe. ... leTpa Mbi xajm ...
aBTOMOHJie.
(2) Si fljrro >KHJI ... fibre. Tenpb H ny ... fibra ...

ceep.
(3) Mma paoraer ... cbpHKe. OH HflT ... dppHKH
... Kjry.

(4) M M nomM ... yjmne TpbKoro HeflajieK ...

KpcHOH ruiiflaflH.
(5) O H JKHBT ... yHHBepcHTTa.
(6) Mbi 3flHM ... rpofla ... rpofl, ... (ppHKH ...
dppHKy.

2. Put the nouns and verbs in brackets in then correct

forms.
(1) BpaT (oTn) (JKHTB) Ha (^jraqa) TpBKoro.
(2) T M flnro (VHHTBCH) y (yHHTejrbHHqa) ?
(3) OKOJIO (3flHne) (HaxoflHTBcn) napK (KynBTypa)
H (Tflbrx).

(4) O H Bcerfl (paOraTb) c (yrpo) flo (enep).

3. Translate into Russian:
(1) Since the spring I have been studying in the university. I am studying Russian and every day I learn
a lesson.
(2) We wiU be hving not far from the post-office in
Gorky Street, near the building where your uncle
used to work.
(3) When we watch the television I usuaUy sit by the
door. Before the end I get up and go out of the
room. I take my books from the table near the
window and go to my bedroom and read.
98

(4) On what day wiU it be possible to go to the

cinema ? On Thursday ? Good, I'm not working on
Thursday.
(5) The boat goes on Friday. I am going to Leningrad
for a month. I shaU have to read a lot about the
U.S.S.R. Have you been to Russia ?* Yes, a long
time ago. I worked there for a long time.
(6) When people dance the whole evening and drink
too much they usuaUy feel bad the next day.
(7) Once a month I get a letter from my sister. She is
a teacher in a school near Magnitogorsk.
* For prepositional case of POCCHH, see below, p. 103.

99

y p o K 15

CJIOBAPb
amreTHT m. appetite
aspoflpM m. aerodrome
6ea pr. (+gen.) without
60Jib/, pain .
66jn.me adv. more; 6jH>nie He
no longer
BJie3Tb I (Bjie3[|io, -emb) to
climb in
Bonpoc m. question
roTBbiH adj. ready
fljia pr. (+gen.) for (the sake of)
H3-3a pr. (+gen.) from behind;
because of
HHcrpyKTop m. instructor
KOMHfla / . command, order;
team
KonaKa/. copeck
jiyqme adv. better
MHHyra/. minute
lemTb I (Mem[|io, -emb) to
binder, prevent, stop
HaflarbCH I (Hafl[|iocb,i -embca) to hope
HH ... HH neither ... nor
HHTfl adv. nowhere
HHKorfl adv. never
HHKT pron. (gen. HHKor) nobody

mni6pron.(gen. HHHer) nothing

HOCHTb II (HOmy, HCHmb) to
wear*
napannoT m. parachute; napamioTHoefljioparachute jumping
HOflHHMTbCa I (nOflHHM[|K)Cb,
-embca) to go up, rise
HOflxoflHTb II (noflxoaty, HOflxflHnib) to come up to,
approach
noMorTb I (noMor|io, -enib) to
help
nocemTb I (nocem.||io, -enn>)
to visit
ncjie pr. (+gen.) after
nocTjib / . bed, bedding
ntraeMy adv. why
npHOJDDKlbCH I (npH6jIH)K|MCb, -embca) to approach
nptiraTb I (npb'rrajio, -emb) to
jump
npbDKK m. (gen. npbUKK) jump
pacKpbrsTbca I (pacKpbiBerca) to open up
peimflHB m. relapse, recurrence of an illness
caMOJiT m. aeroplane

1. Haflarbca, like CMeaibca, loses its first a in the present tense.

2. HocHib, as well as 'to carry', also means 'to wear' or 'to be wearing'. The form Hecra is never used with this meaning.
IOO

coBTOBaib I (coBry||io> -emb)

to advise
cnopTKjiy m. sports club
cnycKTbca
I (cnycK||iocb,
-embca) to descend, corne
down

ycrpHCTBO . structure, working, arrangement

xy>ne adv. worse
uieH m. member
nuiana/. hat

BBipaxcnBH
JieacTb B 6ojrbHHne
CHflTb B TIOpbM
K COJKajlHHK)

to be in hospital
to be in prison
unfortunately

TPAMMATHKA
i. Uses of the Negative
(a) In order to express absence in Russian, the word HCT
(a contraction of He ecTB) is used with the genitive
case.
B KMHaie ecTb flHBH.
B KMHaie ner flHBHa.

There is a sofa in the room.

There is no sofa in the room.

In the past and future Her is replaced by H6 SMJIO and

He 6yneT respectively, no matter what the gender or
number of the noun.
Ha CTOJi H 6buio TapaKH.
3BTpa He SyaeT ypKa.

There was no plate on the

table.
There will be no
tomorrow.

Note: In order to express absence of human beings it is not

always necessary to use this construction; a simple negative
personal construction may be used:
AKTop H bui flMa.
The doctor was not at home.
.TJKTopa H 6buio flMa.
IOI

The first of these two sentences, however, implies that you are
going to say where he was - OH 6bui B Tearpe for example. The
second is a categorical statement of his absence: 'He was not
there, and that's all I know. '
Do not confuse a simple negative with an impersonal HeT+the
genitive:
Tapnna He Ha croji.
Ha crone Her TapjjKH.

The plate is not on the table.

There is no plate on the table.

(b) In order to negate expressions of possession (y MCH

ecTB, etc.), the verbs ecTB, 6BIH, Sfner, etc. are
replaced by HCT, H6 SBUIO, and He 6yneT, irrespective
of the gender or number of the object possessed. Tae
object possessed is always in the genitive.
y MeHH Her KapaHflama.
Y flKTopa H bijio ce-

I have not got a pencil, I

have no pencil.
The doctor had no sister,

crpbi.

y Hac He 6yfler ra3ru.

We shall not have a newspaper.

(c) The object of a transitive verb in the negative is usuaUy

in the genitive instead of the accusative.
Si He BHHty CTOJia.
OH He BCTpeqaer cecTpbt.

I do not see the table.

He is not meeting bis
sister.

(d) The double negative. When using the negative pronouns

HiiKTo 'nobody' and H H I T 'nothing' and the adverbs
HHKoro 'never' and marn 'nowhere', it is essential
to use the negative particle He with the verb:
HHKT He SHer.
Nobody knows.
OH HHKorna He Harer.
He never reads.
I02

The genitive of HHKT and HHHT is HHKor and HHqer respectively. Thus:
OH HH^er Be rmmer.

He is writing nothing, he is
not writing anything.

More than one negative pronoun or adverb may be used

in a sentence, the particle He stiU being retained:
OH HHKorfl mnier He
inrreT.

He never reads anything.

With HH ... HH 'neither ... nor', He is always used

with the verb:
OH He MwraeT HH KHHTH,
HH ra3Tbi.
y MeHH Her (=He ecTb)
HH 6pTa, HH cecrp.

He reads neither the book

nor the newspaper.
I have neither brother nor
sister.

H H may also be used by itself for stress in a negative

sentence:
y Her H bijio HH KOnoKH.

He hadn't a copeck (iooth

part of a rouble).

2. The Dative Case

(i) The formation of the dative case, (a) Masculine nouns
add: -y if the stem ends in a consonant (cryji - cryjiy;
TOBpHifl - TOBpmny); -H if the nominative ends in
-B Or -& (flOJKflB -flOHCflK;na - nan).
(b) Feminine nouns change the ending -a or -a into -e
(Kmira - KHHre; Heflna - Heflne).
Those which end in - B , however, have the dative in
-H (HO^IB - H^H). The prepositional is the same.
Feminine nouns ending in - a a have the dative (as
weU as the prepositional) in -HH ((paMHJiHa - dpaMHJIHH).

(c) Neuter nouns change the enciing -o to -y, -e to -K>:

OKH - OKHy
none - njiK
3flHHe - 3flHHH>

103

(2) Uses of the dative, (a) Without a preposition. The

dative is the 'giving case' in Russian and is used
mainly as the indirect object, usuaUy of persons.
HflaibKHHry SpTy.
OH nrnner micbM OTD#.

I give the book (direct object)

to my brother (indirect
object).
He is writing a letter to his
father.

It is also used after verbs of saying, etc.:

OH roBopHT cecrp, *rro
He tells bis sister that he
er He Syfler
flMa.
will not be at home.
CbiH oraeier OTJJ#.
The son answers his father.
(Cf. OTBeiTb na nncbM 'to answer a letter')
The dative is frequently used with impersonal constructions such as:
BpTy jKpKO.
Cecrp XJIOAHO.
yHHTejno Jiyqme.

My brother is hot.
My sister is cold.
The teacher is (feeling) better.

Certain transitive verbs take a direct object in the

dative, the most common being: noMorTb 'to help',
coBTOBaTb 'to advise', and MemTB 'to hinder':
KTO noMorer Hmcojiaio ?
OH MemeTflaflepaSraib.

Who is helping Nicholas ?

He is stopping his uncle
from working.

(b) With prepositions. The two most common prepositions taking the dative are:
K 'towards', 'up to', ' t o ' (but not 'into'):
H Hfly K otuf.
OH mji K oKHy.

I am going to my father.
He was going to the window.
Note: The opposite of K is or 'from'.
104

K can also be used in expressions of time to mean 'by':

K Biepy aflJwceH6bm>
sflecb.
Ko BTpHHKy Bc 6yjj,eT
roTBo.

I must be here by evening.

Everything will be ready
by Tuesday.

Note: Like B/BO, C/CO, KO is sometimes used before nouns

beginning with two or more consonants.

IIo The most common meaning of n o + t h e dative is

'along':
OH HflT no ynnne.

He is going along the

street,

or 'about', 'up and down':

OH xflHT no KOMHwre.

He is walking np and
down the room.

It is frequently used to translate 'according to':

Mbi paTaeM no nnny.

We work according to
plan.

TEKCTLI
MOH MaTB JIOKHT B oommme. OH yac naBH TaM.
H e noceinio pa3 B Hefljno, B cyOTy jjHM. CerflHH
OH HyBCTByer cen jryqme; y He JiBiue HCT nn.
OH roBopHT, HTo OH HHKorfl He HyBCTBOBana ceH
ruixo, HTO y He motorn H buio OJTH. H O H 3Hio,
MTo 6TO He npBfla.
Si coney y e nocrjm. M M paaroBpnBaeM o flMe,
o cfle. A BOT flKTop. H er xopom 3Hio - OH
crpbnt flpyr ceMBH. O H noflxflHT K nocrnH. M M

3flOpBaeMCH.

105

 Amie MaxaHJiOBHe jrymne cerflHH, - ronopHT OH.

Ho K coHcanHHio og mroer He ecr. noieM^ BM
HHHer He xoTirre ecTB? *ITO Memer BaM* ecTB?OH cnpiHHBaeT MaTB.
Ax, H He 3HE0,-OH OTBenaer flKTOpy. y
MeHH HCT annerHTa. y Mean H MJIO annerirra HH
B^ep, HH B BOCKpecHBe. Monter brrb, 3BTpa
yfler jryqme.
Hafliocb, HTO BaM Qyper nymne. Ho cnn BM He
yflere ecn., BaM yfleT xyace. Si BaM coBryio - iinvre,
HTO MHcere. y Bac He yfleT pemiflHBa. ^pea Mcnir
BBI yflere OIIHTB ryjiHTB B npKe.

2. npBBTfi npMKK
JMfla Mop30Ba paOTaer Ha dppHKe y Hac B rpofle.
OH qneH cnopTKJiya npn (ppHKe. Osa nem.
CMnaH flByiinca H B cnopnurye OH H3yqer naparmbTHoe flno. HHcrpyicrop MHro noMorer JMfle;
OH obHCHHer flByiinte ycrpcTBO napaunTa. OH
er cnymaer H oiBener Ha Bce er BonpcM. OH
ncTO JieTeT Ha caMOJire.
OflHKflbl HHCTpyKTOp nOflXOflHT K JMfle H TOBOpHT:
ByflBTe roTBM KO BTOpHmcy. Bo BTpHHK no
ruiny Bam npBbiM npbDKK.
Bo BTpHHK OH c yTp Ha aapOflpMe. norfla
xopmaa. Oaa noflxflHT K caMonTy H BJie3er.
HHcrpyicrop Tnte Bjie3er. CaMOJiT noflHHMeTCH.
BOT HHcrpyicrop flaT JMfle KOMOHfly. n o er
KOMnfle JMfla CMno npb'rraer c caMOJira. naparmT
pacKpbaeTCH, H OH MflJieHHo crrycKeTCH. OH
BHflHT rmipKoe none. OH npHjnDKercH K 3eMJi.
Em MHHyra, H flBymica yjK Ha 3eMJi. CaMonT
neTHT K aaponpMy.
* Dative of BM.
106

ynPAHCHEHHH
i. Put the nouns in brackets in the foUowing sentences
in the appropriate cases:
(i) y (yHHTejiBHHna) H MJIO (KHHra).
(2) H3-3a (flOJKflB) OH He BHflHT (caMOJlT).
(3) HHKT (mrar) He nomiMeT.
(4) OTBenaHTe (flicrop), Korfl OH coBTyer (BM).
(5) KTO noMorer (HHcrpyicrop) ?
(6) Mo flpyr noflxflHT K (3flHHe).
2. Put the foUowing sentences in the negative:
(1) y JMflbi MH napaimT.
(2) O H Bcerfl HHTaeT ra3Ty ncjie 3BTpaKa.
(3) H BHHcy H cecrpy H pra
(4) HoJKH H BHJTKH Ha CTOJl.
3. Translate into Russian:
(1) I never had either a house or a flat.
(2) Who is stopping you working?
(3) Unfortunately my uncle is in hospital and my
aunt is in prison. I visit my uncle once a week but
it is not possible to visit my aunt.
(4) Because of the rain it is impossible to run about the
garden today.
(5) Who is that man without a hat going up to your
sister? Her husband? Why doesn't he ever wear a
hat in winter?
(6) I hope the teacher is not cold; I know it's not hot
in the classroom, but it's not too bad for winter.

107

YPOK 16

CJIOBAPb
AcppHKa/. Africa
BenHKHH adj. great
B03BpamTbca I (B03Bpam.QMCb, -embca) to return
flnarbca I (flJia||iocb, -embca)
to become
flOB6jn,Hbr adj. (short form
flOBJieH,flOBJJbHa,-o; -w)
satisfied, pleased
sa pr. (+acc., + instr.) behind,
beyond
SaHHMTbCH I (3aHHMK>||Cb,
-embCH) to be engaged in, to
study
HHorfl adv. sometimes
HHiepc m. interest
HHTepecoBTbca I (HHTepecyllK)Cb, -embca) to be interested
in
HCTOpna/. history; story
KasTbca I (KajKycb, Kxcembca)
to seem
Kcpe m. (indeclinable) coffee
jnjMH m. lemon
My3bnca/. music
Han pr. (+instr.) over
od)Hnp m. officer

nHae n. singing
npefl pr. (+instr.) before, in
front of
no pr. (+instr.) under ,
noflHHMTb I (noflHHM||io, -emb)
to raise, lift
nJIb30BaTbCH I (nJIB3y ||wcb,
-embca) to make use of
noieMy-TO for some reason or
other
npHBbrqKa/. habit
poajib m. (grand) piano
pyjKb . (pi. pyjKba) rifle, gun
cpr. (+instr.) with
ceKperapb m. (gen. ceitpeTapa)
secretary
cjiyjKHTb II (cjryHcy, cjiyjKHmb)
to serve
cjiyx m. hearing, ear1
CHa^Jia adv. at first
cojiflT m. soldier
craHOBHTbca II (craHOBjnocb,
craHBHmbca) to become
THrp m. tiger
y6HTbiH part, (short form ySJHT,
-a, -o; -M) killed
HHii . (pi. HHiia) egg

i. Cjiyx only means 'ear' in the sense 'he has a good ear' - y Her
xopmHH cjiyx. The Russian for 'an ear' is yxo (pi. yam).

108

BMpancHHH
MM c OTIIM

my father and I

Mbi c HHM, Mbi c BMH

xne6 c McjiOM
3a 3BTpaK0M, ooflOM, etc.
xoflHTb/3flHTb 3a flKTopoM
xoflHTb 3a KHHTOH
nJib30BaTbCH ycnxoM
arpaTb Ha poajie

he and I, you and I

bread and butter
at breakfast, dinner, etc.
to fetch the doctor
to go and fetch a book
to enjoy success
to play the piano
. . >

rPAMMATHKA
I. The Instrumental Case
(i) The formation of the instrumental case, (a) Masculine
nouns ending in a consonant add -OM for the instrumental case.
Those ending in JK, n, a, m, and m, have the instrumental in -OM if the stress is on the last syllable, or
-eM if the stress is not on the last syllable. Thus:
CTOJI - CTOJJM; HOHC - HO>KM; TOBpHm, - TOBpmneM.
Masculine nouns ending in - B or -a have -eM in the
instrumental (or -M if the stress is on the end). Thus:
yHHTejn. - vHHTejieM; ln - neM; cnoBpB - cnoBapM.
(b) Feminine nouns change the -a ending of the
nominative to -on (or, more rarely, -ont) unless the
last consonant of the stem is nc, n, a, HI, or m,> in
which case the instrumental ending is -efi (-era).
Feminine nouns in -a have the instrumental in -ea
(-era) (or -e'fi, if the stress is on the end).
Feminine nouns in - B simply add -ra for the instrumental.
Thus: KOMHara - KMHarofi; ynHTejn>HHqa - ynHTenbmmea; HefljiH - Heflnefi; POCCHH - Poccea;
3eMJiH - 3eMJi; ceHB - ceHBio.
(c) Neuter nouns change the ending -o into -OM;
-e into -eM; - into -M.
Thus: OKH - OKHM; 3flHHe - 3flHHeM; pynoi py>KBM.
109

(2) Uses of the instrumental, (a) The main use of the

instrumental is to denote the instrument, agent, or
means with or by which a thing is done. It often
translates an English noun or pronoun preceded by
'with' or 'by'. It can never be used, however, to
translate 'together with':
H many KapaHflamM. . I write with a pencil.
OH 6t>m yoHT TarpoM.
He was killed by a tiger.

(b) The complement of the verb 'to be' in the past,

future, or imperative (but very rarely in the present)
is frequently in the instrumental, particularly when a
temporary state is implied:
OH 6KUX HHHceHpoM
Bbi 6yflere flmopoM.
Bat MOH 6paT flKTop.

He was an engineer.
You will be a doctor.
My brother is a doctor.

The noiihative can be used with the past tense, but it

tends to indicate a permanent rather than a temporary
state:
nymKHH 6bui

BeJiHKHH

HOST,

Pushkin was a great poet

(and still is).

Note: The complement of the following link-verbs is always in

the instrumental, no matter what the tense: Ka3Tbca 'to seem,
to look'; craHOBHTbCH, fleaaTbca 'to become'; cJiyjKHTb 'to
serve (as)' :.
OH cjiyjKHT ceKperapM
KJiySa.
Odnmep Kasnca MntiHKM.

He serves as (is) secretary

of the club.
The officer looked like a
boy.

Ka3TbCH, however, is more frequently used impersonally:

OH, Ka3jiocb, 6bui 6jieH.
KtercH, KHH oncpbrro.

no

He seemed to be ill.
It looks as though (I think)
the cinema is open.

(c) Certain verbs in Russian are always foUowed by

the instrumental. Common amongst these are: 3amiM-rbCH 'to be engaged in', 'to study'; HHTepecoBa-rbCH
'to be interested in'; njn>30BaTBCH 'to make use of5:
H 3aHHMK>cb rpaMMTHKOtf.

I am studying grammar.

Note: When the adjective flOBjmHbiH 'pleased', 'satisfied',

used in its short form, is followed by a complement ('pleased
with him') , the latter is always in the instrumental:
H qeHbflOBJieHyrenaKM.

I am very satisfied with my

pupil.

(3) Prepositions taking the instrumental. C 'with', 'together with':

O H ryjiaeT c 6pTOM.

H e is walking w i t h his brother.

Note: If ' w i t h ' in English cannot be replaced by ' b y means o f ,

' b y the agent o f , then c + t h e instrumental must be used,
although it may not literally translate 'together with':
Cf. O H He e e l HOJKOM.
O H ecr c annerTOM.

H e does not eat w i t h (by means

of) a knife.
H e eats wit h appetite.

' T o talk t o ' is translated in Russian by roBopirrb c+instr.:

O H roBopaJi c OTHM.

H e was talking to his father.

This must not be confused with roBoparb+dat . which means

' t o say t o ' :
O H roBopibi o m y ,
M3KHO KypHTb.

qro

H e was telling his father

that it was possible to
smoke.

Hanj noaj 3a 'Over'; 'under'; 'behind'.

AU these prepositions+the instrumental indicate
'place where':
OH CHAHT Han (non) (3a)
MOCTM.

Ill

He sits over (under) (behind) the bridge.

When 'motion towards' is implied, then non. and 3a

are foUowed by the accusative. Han can never be followed by the accusative and must be replaced by n p e 3
'across':
SI KJiafly KapaHflm non,
(3a) KHHry.
OH caflHTca 3a CTOJI.
OH Hflr vpes MOCT.

I am putting the pencil

under (behind) the
book.
He sits down at (behind)
the table.
He is going over the
bridge.

npefl, which can only take the instrumental, means

either 'in front o f :
OH CHflHT npeii. HMOM.

He is sitting in front of
the house.

or '(just) before', in expressions of time:

npefl yjKHHOM OH pa66Tan.

(Just) before supper he

was work

Declension of Personal Pronouns

The full declension of personal pronouns is as foUows:
Nom.

4 f f i " I MeHH

TBI

OH OH OH

Tea

er

Dat.
MHe
Te6
eMy
Instr. MHOH (MHK>) TO6H (TO6K>) HM
Prep. MHe
Te6
HM
Nom. Mbi
Ace. 1> Hac
Gen. J
Dat.
HaM
Instr. HMH
Prep. Hac

Bbi

OHH

Bac
BaM
BMH
Bac
112

e
en
eu (io)
He

Whenever a personal pronoun beginning with a vowel

is preceded by a preposition it is prefixed with H - for
the sake of consonance (c HHM, y He, K HHM, 6e3
HHX). The prepositional case of OH (OH), OHH, OH
(HM, Hefi, HHX) always has this prefix, as it can never
be used without a preposition.
When, however, er, e, or HX mean 'his' (its), 'her'
or 'their', they are never prefixed with -H.
Thus:
B er flMe
y e cecTpbT

in his house
at her sister's

Note: The prepositions K, npefl, and c, when used with a

become KO, npeflo, co. When o is used with the prepositional
MHe it becomes 060 MH, the stress falling entirely on MHC
KTO and I T O are declined:
Norn. KTO
Ace. KOTO
Gen. Koro
Dat. KOMy
Instr. KeM
Prep. KOM

mo
trro
ier6
ieMy
qeM
iM

TEKCT
KjKfloe yTpo Mbi C pTOM BcraM pHO, ofleBeMCH H
cnycKeMCH. 3BipaKaeM ob'raHO BMcre c OTHOM. O H
CHflHT 3a CTOJIM H iHTeT c HHTepcoM ra3ry HJTH
KHHry. C HMH OH romTH HHKorfl He roBoprr 3a 3aBTpaKOM. PHBme OH MJI npodiccopoM H noneMy-TO Bcerfl
roTBHH JirarHH 3a 3BTpaKOM. BOT noneMy y Her TaKn
npHBb'rqKa - mrrTB H MOjmTB 3a CTOJIM. H O Korfl MBI
caflHMCH 3a CTon, OH noflHHMeT rJioBy H roBopHT BHM:
3flpBCTByHTe, nra! KaK cnnn ? Xopom ?
Hnner, nana, - Mbi Bcerfl OTBeqeM.
noTM Mbi HaHHHeM ecTB c armeTHTOM. BpaT MOH
ob'imio ecT HHH JiHoxoH. H eM xjie c McjioM; HHorfl
eM HeMHaoxo cb'rpa THCC Mbi m>M Kd)e c MOHOKM.
113

Cecrp Hma He JHHT Kcpe; OH m>r na c JTHMHOM.

OH BCTar pam,me n 3BTpaKaeT flo Hac; OH flOJDKH
HflT B ymmepcnrr, rfle OH sammercH HcrpHe.
BnepoM OH B03BparueTCH AOM H MBI Bce yaamaeM
BMcre.
ncjie yanma Mbi cnflHM BMcre H pa3roBpHBaeM.
3TO Hem. ITOHHTHO. Ho HHorfl MOH cearp raper Ha
poHJie H MOH paT nor. XOTH H HHTepecyiocB My3MKOH H
MeHB jnoojn e, H Bcerfl HeflOBJieH, Korfl OHH flaibr
TaKH KOHflpT. K coHcanmno, cecrp nem. iuixo
Hrpaer - OH HHKorfl He njn.30BajiacB ycnxoM. A y
pra Cepra coBcM HCT cnyxa. Korfl OHH HaHHHiOT, a
rOBOpib HM, HTO HflJDKeH3aHHMTBCH y ceH B KMHaTe.
Ho nana noneMy-TO neHB OBneH nmieM Ceprn H
cnymaer ero c mrrepecoM.
ynPAXCHEHHH
1. Put the words in brackets in the right cases:
(i)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Cepra HflT 3a (KHHra) (crn).

(KTO) TBI HeflOBJieH ? (Mbi) HHH (OHH) ?
(^ITO) eCT MjTBHHK MHCO ?
3a (pen) none, 3a (none) Jiec.
Si roBopHJi c (OH) o (OH) H O (TM).
OH KJiaflT rmcBM non e (Tapjnca).

2. FiU in the blank spaces with verbs (present and past)

selected from the foUowing:
CJjyjKHTB, neacTB, ecTB, HflTH, Ka3TBCH, HHTepecoBTBCH
(1) BbicoK B He caMOJiT ... nTHneii.
(2) KTO ... ceKperapeM KJiya?
(3) Si qeHB ... HCTpHea.
(4) Mbi ... MHCO HOHCM H BHJIKOH.
(5) OH ... nOfl MOCTM.
(6) KTO TO ... 3a KapaHflamM ?
114

Translate into Russian:

(i) If no one is satisfied with him or his work, he must
stay at home.
(2) WhUe he was talking to her brother about the
weather, she was already going home.
(3) Please go and fetch a doctor before lunch. I am
feeling very iU.
(4) My poor friend was kiUed by a soldier when he wa s
in Africa.
(5) What do you usuaUy write with - a penc or a pen ?
(6) I was listening to the professor with interest. He
seemed to be talking inteUigently. He knows how
to talk.
(7) At first he was a soldier, then a doctor. He was a
clever man.

115

YPOK 17

CJIOBAPb
arKa/. attack
aiaKOBrb I (aTaKy||io, -emb)
to attack
Bflpyr adv. suddenly
BspocjibrK adj. (also used as
noun) grown-up, adult
BOJJK

m.

(gen.

pi.

BOJTKB)

MOMHT m. moment
MocKBHM m. (gen. MOCKBira)
Muscovite, inhabitant of Moscow
Mira m. (gen. Maq) ball
HaSjiioflTb I (HaSjnoflQio, -emb)
to observe
HaKOHi; adv. at last
nafwbm adj. scientific
HcKOJibKo several1
HHHa /. nurse, nanny
o6e3bHHa/. monkey, ape
nojioBHHa/. half

wolf
Bopra pi. (gen. Bopr) gate;
goal (in football)
HCHBU adj. five, living
jKHjniie . dwelling (place)
sarflHTHHK m. defender; fullnojioiHue n. (gen. pi. HOJIOback (in football)
THeu) towel
SBepb m. (gen. pi. 3Bepfi) (wild)
animal
nonyjiapHbiH adj. (short form
nonyjiapeHj " nonyjiapHa, -o;
30onpK m. zoo
-bi) popular
KarmrH m. captain
noceiHiejib m. visitor
KHJiOMTp m. kilometre
Kom> n. (gen. pi. KHHH) spear HOCJiflHHH adj. last
KpyjKK m. (gen. KpyjKK) drcle, npHxoflHTb II (npHXOHcy, npHxflamb) to come (on foot)
group
JieB m. (gen. jn>Ba) lion
npOflOJDKTb I (npOflOJDK||K>,
Mail m. match
-emb) to continue2
MjKfly^r. (+instr.) between

r. When MHro and HcKOJibKo mean 'many' and 'several' they are
followed by the genitive plural.
2. npoflOJDKTb can be used with an object (npoflojiacaTb aiKy 'to
continue the attack') or an infinitive (npoflOJBKib *mi&n> 'to
continue reading'). It can also be used reflexively (aiKa npoflOJDKerca 'the attack continues'). .
116

pyoflb nu (gen. pyojia) rouble

CBHCTK m. (gen. CBHCTK)
whistle
CJIOH m. (gen. cjiOH) elephant
CHBa adv. again
craflHH m. stadium
CTHHHH / . station; centre
cyflba m. (nom. pi. cyflbH, gen.
pi. cyflen) judge; referee

CTr m. score; bill, account

yflp m. blow, kick, stroke
yqeHHK m. (gen. yaeHHK) pupil
lacTb / . (gen. pi. lacrH) part;
military unit
iHKjibHHK m. schoolboy
nnpatpHH adj. penalty (attr.)
SKCKypcaa / . excursion, trip

Bupancnna
no cy66raM, BOCKpecHbHM
no Be^epM
B TpH Mac
flaBTb CBHCTK
HOJKHMTb pyKH
3a6HBTb rOJI

on Saturdays, Sundays, etc.

in the evenings
at three o'clock
to blow the whistle
to shake hands
to score a goal

TPAMMATHKA
i. Declension of Nouns in the Plural
(i) Masculine nouns ending in a consonant are declined
in the foUowing way:
Norn.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

cTOjn
CTOJIbI
CTOJIB
CTOJiaM
CTOJiajMH
CTOJix

Three rules must be remembered:

(a) If the noun ends in r , K, X, m, q, m, or m, then the nominative plural has -a in place of -bi. E.g.: Bpar - Bpara; TOBpam TOBpaum.
(b) If the noun ends in ac, q, m, or m, the genitive plural will
end in -e. T h u s : HOIK - HoxcH; TOBpmn; - TOBpamen.
(c) If the noun ends in u the genitive plural will be - B (if the
stress is on the last syllable) or -eB (if it is on a preceding
syllable). T h u s : aru, - OTAB; Mcan. - McaneB.

117

Masculine nouns ending in -B or -H are declined in

the plural as foUows:
Nom.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.

Prep.

CJIOBapH
cjioBapift
CJioBapfi
CJIOBapHM
cnoBapaMH
cJioBapax

repH
repeB
repes
repHM
repHMH
repax

Note the difference in the genitive plural. Some

masculine nouns have the nominative plural in - or
-A (always stressed). The most common are: jiec,
rjia3, eper, ropofl, Benepa,flOKTOp,ynarejui,
noeafl, flOM.
(2) Feminine nouns ending in -a. have the foUowing
plural:
Nom.
KMHarax
Ace.
KMHaTU
Gen. KMHaT
Dat. KMHaTaM
Instr. KMHaTaMH
Prep. KOMHBTax
If the stem of the noun ends in r, K, X, at, n, m, or m, then the
ending -w will be replaced by -H. E.g. KHHra - KHHTH.
If the stem of the noun ends in two or more consonants, then in
the genitive plural' the last two consonants are usually separated
by -o-, -e-, or --. Thus: BHJnta - BHJIOK; BymKa - flBymeK;
cecrp - cecrp. The rules governing the choice of this so-called
'mobile vowel' are complicated and need not bother the student
at this stage. Such genitive plurals should merely be noted and
memorized individually. If a soft sign (B) separates the last two
consonants o f the stem, then it will be replaced by -e-. E.g.
TiopbM - TipeM. Kote the genitive plural of KonoKa - KoneK.
Feiriinine nouns ending in - B , - a , and -aa have the
foUowing plurals:
Nom. lCTH
HHHH
CpaMHJIHH
Ace.
tiicTH
HHHB
(paMHJmH
Gen.
Dat.

qacTfi:
lacTw

HHHB
HHHHM

d>aMHJUXH
d)aMHJuiHM

Instr.
Prep.

<iaciHMH
lacTjix

HHHHMH
HHHHX

d)aMHjnuMH
fymiaucx

118

From the declension of repn and HHHH it wiU be seen

that in the plural all animate nouns (i.e. nouns denoting human beings or animals), be they masculine or
feminine, have the same accusative as the genitive.
The accusative plural of aU manimate nouns is always
the same as the nominative.
Note the following: (a) Feminines ending in -JKB, -<n>, or -mb
have the dative, instrumental, and prepositional in -aM, -aMH,
-ax:
Hoib - HoiM, HoiMH, Hoqx.
(b) If the ending -a is preceded by two or more consonants,
then again a 'mobile vowel' will generally be inserted between the last two consonants in the genitive plural. Thus:
3eMjia - 3eMjH>.

(3) Neuter nouns ending in -o, -e, and -ne decline as

foUows in the plural:
Nom.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

CJIOB&
CJIOB&
CJIOB
CJIOBM
CJIOBMH
CJIOBx

noJiH
nojui
nojia
nOJIHM
HOJIflMH
nOJIHX

3flmifl
3flmiH
3flHHM
3flHHHM
3flHHHMH
3flHHHX

Note 1. There are a few neuter nouns in -be or -b. These are
declined in the plural like 3flHae, but the -a- is replaced by -bexcept in the genitive which ends in -aa.
E.g. Konb 'a spear' - Km>a, KHBH, KHHH, Km>aM, etc.
PyJKb, however, has the genitive pyjKe.
2. A 'mobile vowel' will usually appear in the genitive if there
are two or more consonants at the end of the stem. E.g. OKH KOH; nacbM - naceM.
3.. There are a few neuters in -ne and -me. These usually decline
like cjiOB. E.g. nojioieHue (gen. pi. nojiorHeii), JKHjrame.

119

2.

Numerals
Cardinal numbers from nought to one hundred are as
foUows:
O HOJJb
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
30
40
50

OflHH, OflH, OflH

flBa, flBe
TpH
qeTb'rpe
narb
mecTb
ceMb
BceMb
flBarb
flCHTb
flBflUaTb
TpHfluaib
CpOK
naTbflecT

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
60
70
80
90
ICO

oflHHHaflnaTb
flBeHfluaTb
TpHKiflUaTb
HeTbipHaflqaTb
DHTHflflaTb
mecTHfliiaTb
ceMHfluaTb
BoceMHafluaib
fleBaTHfluaTb
mecTbflecar
cMbflecaT
BceMbflecar
fleBaHcro
CTO

Note: T h e suffix -floaTb (pronounced -ima-n.) found in 11 - 19,

20, and 30 is a contraction of flcarb. T h u s oflHHHaflqaTb
'eleven' is simply a telescopic form of OAHH Ha flcarb 'one on to

ten'.
Care should be taken with the spelling and stressing of 50, 60,
70, and 80 (-flecaT in each case is a form of the genitive plural thus iiaTb-flecaT is 'five tens-'). T h e unstressed syllables are very
lightly pronounced. IlaTbflecT tends to sound like pidissydt.

(1) Compound numbers. Compound numbers are formed as

in EngUsh (but without the conjunction 'and' or
hyphens). Thus: CTO ceMBflecHT IIHTB one hundred and
seventy-five.
(2) Nouns qualified by numerals, (a) The number 'one'
(oflftH, onn, OflH) agrees in gender with the noun
foUowing it:
OflHH CTOJI; OflH jKHmHHa; OHH nep.

I20

(b) Jjfca (for masculine and neuter nouns) and one (for
feminine nouns) are foUowed by the genitive singular:
Ana CTOJi; flse mionaa
T h e same apphes to 66a, 6 6 e ' b o t h ' :
66a CTOJia; 66e KMHaTbi
(c) T p a and l e T w p e (all genders) are also foUowed
by the genitive singular:
xpH nac; l e n p e yqaTejibHHiBa
Note: ipa qac can either mean 'three hours' or 'three o'clock*.

(d) The numerals 'five' to 'twenty', 'thirty', 'forty',

'fifty'... 'one hundred' are aU foUowed by the genitive
plural:
ceMib CTOJIB; mecTHajrnaTb TOCB; BceMbflecaT MHHyT

(e) Nouns foUowing compound numbers are governed

by the last numeral in the compound:
flBflqaTB OflHH py6jn>
TpHflnTB OflH KMHaTa
cpoK Be MHHyTBi (gen. sing.)
CTO cMbfleCHT HHTb pyjia
HHTbfleCHT flBHTb KHJIOMrpOB

Indeterminate Sentences
The 3rd person plural of the verb (without the pronoun) is often used in Russian to give an indefinite
meaning to a sentence. In English the verb is usuaUy
preceded by the pronoun 'they' (cf. French on,
German man), or the passive is used.
roBopT, I T O OH 66jieH.
B iHKjie H3yiajiH pyccKHH
H3biK.

121

It is s a i d (they say) that

he is ill.
Russian u s e d to b e studied
at school.

TEKCTM
1. MOCKBCKHH 300npK
MOCKBCKHH 3oonpK nem nonyjiapeH. 3oonpK
noceinioT H B3pcjrbie, H nrKJTBHHKH, H flra. 3flecb
bioT noceTHrejm no yrpM H nocJie ofla. IIIKJIBI
fljiaioT 3KCKypcHH B 3oonpK. BMcre c yneHHKMH
npHXflHT HX yHHrejiH. OcoeHHO MHro nocCTHTejieo
ber B 30onpKe no BOCKpecHBHM.
B 30onpKe Hoj^r 3Bpn, nranbi H pbibi co Bcex*
KOHflB 3eMjm. nocCTHTejm ocoeHHO HHTepecyiOTCH
CJIOHMH H JTBBMH, THTpaMH H BOJTKMH. H B3pCJTbie
H Ara Bcerfl JHOHT cMOTprB Ha oe3BHH.
MOCKBCKHH 3oonpK He TJTBKO JKHBH My3H,

io Tnce HayHHaa crmum, rfle paoTaror cryflHTbi.

OHH H3yqioT npHBb'raKH 3BepH. H pn 30onpKe ecTB
TKJKe KpyHCK IHKJTBHHKOB. H x yHOT HaJHOflTB
npHpfly, 3Bepa H rrnm H HM paccK3baiOT HCTPHH
O 3BepHX.
2.

H a dpyTJie
CerflHH BOCKpecHbe. MOCKBHHH HflyT Ha craflHH
JlHHMO. B TpH Hac yflCT (byTJTBHMH MaTH
M>Kfly KOMaHflaMH JlnaMO H CnapTK.
CyflBH flaT CBHCTK H e KOMHflbl BbixflHT Ha
none. KanHrHbi KOMHfl nonoiMioT pyKH, H nrp
HaHHHeTCH. Yac B npBbie MmryTM flanMOBUbi
3aHBioT roji B Bopra CnapTaK. AmiMOBirbi
npofloJDKioT ainy. H o cnapTKOBUbi mpiOT neHB
xopom. ^ p e s cpoK MmryT OHH 3aHBioT ron B
Bopra JlHHMo. B TOT MOMnr cyflBH flar
CBHCTK. npBan noJiOBHHa Hrpb'i KOHnerca. CiT
1:1.
^Ipe3 riHTHflnaTB MHHyT KOMHflbl CHBa BblXflHT
Ha none, H m p HammercH OIIHTB. Oe KOMHflbl
CMJio aTaKyiOT H npofloJDKioT BrpTb xopom.

* Gen. pi. of Becb.

122

HaKOHn flHHMOBnbi 3aHBioT em ron. TenpB

CqT 2 : i . Ho B nOCJlflHHe MHHyTM OflHH 3aurHTHHK
JlmiMo ocTaHBjiHBaeT MHH pyKMH npefl BopTaMH. IIlTpatpHH yflp B Bopra #HHMO! Tonil
MaTH Komierca co cnTOM 2:2.
ynPAMCHEHHH
1. Put the foUowing sentences in the plural:
(1) KHHra nejKHT B nnxadiy.
(2) Y Memi H buio TOBpmna.
(3) Ofl repHflOBJieHHM.
(4) Ha CTOJl H03K H BHJIKa, HO TapjTKH HCT.
(5) ^lejIOBK npHXflHT paccK3MBaTB HCTpmo.
(6) JIOM HaxflHTCH Ha epery perai.
2.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Write out the foUowing in fuU in Russian:

31 books.
(6) 18 hours 33 minutes.
48 houses.
(7) 62 minutes.
At 7 o'clock.
(8) 2 sisters and 2 brothers.
At 7.30.
(9) 44 roubles 5 copecks.
5 dictionaries.
(10) 15 roubles 3 copecks.

3. Translate into Russian:

(1) On Saturdays at seven o'clock we always go to the
cinema.
(2) It is said that he has three pens and six pencils.
(3) In the zoo I saw lions, tigers, elephants, wolves,
and apes.
(4) She has three towels in her room.
(5) In the cupboard there are many exercise books and
several books for reading.
(6) Is it far to Moscow ? No, only 25 kUometres.
(7) There are no dwelling places beyond the river,
but between the lake and the stadium there are
nearly fifty houses.
(8) When the judge comes everyone stands up. Unfortunately he is not very popular.
(9) Sergey went on reading the paper.
123

yPOK 18

CJIOBAPB
6aKaJia / . (no pi.) groceries
KycK m. (gen. KycK) piece
6HKa / . (gen. pi. 6H0K) jar, tin, JB3CT m. (pi. jrcTba) leaf
can
Mao little, few
6yfcujKa / . (gen. pi. oynanoK) Mfl m. honey
bottle
MHp m. peace
Bennm/. ham
OTflji m. department, section
BHH n. wine
nanapca/. cigarette1
BOHH/. (pi. BHHbi) war
n^Ka / . (gen. pi. nieK) packet
BCHOMHHTb I (BCnOMHH||K>, iraaTHTb II (ruiaiy, nuTmin.)
-emb) to recall, recollect,
to pay2
remember
HOKynTejib m. customer, purBXOflHTb II (BXOJKy, BXflHIHb)
chaser, buyer
to go in, enter
noKynTb I (noKyni|K>, -emb)
BbTXOfl m. exit, way out
to buy
racTpoHOMHqecKBH adj. delica- noKyriKa / . (gen. pi. noKynoK)
tessen (attr.)
purchase, parcel, thing bought
rpaMM m. gramme
npHJiBOK m. (gen. npajiBKa)
fleHBTH pi. (gen.flHer)money
counter (in a shop)
flpyrH adj. other; another
npoflaBTb I (npofla[|i6, -mb)
HKp/. caviare
to sell
KapMH m. pocket
npoflaBq m. (gen. npoflaBfla)
Kcca / . desk, till, cash counter
salesman, shop assistant KHJiorpMM m. (KHJI n. inde- npoflyKTbi m. pi. food stuffs,
clinable) kilogramme
provisions
KOJTac / . sausage (usually
cxap m. sugar
smoked)
cflia/. change (money)
KOHcpBbi m. pi. tinned goods
1
KpemcHH adj. (short form KpnoK, CHrapra/. cigarette
Kpemta, -o; -H) strong
narrapca is a Russian cigarette - i.e. with an empty cardboard
mouthpiece (MyiflurryK) some two inches long. A European-type
cigarette, without a mouthpiece, is a cnrapra.
, To pay for something is ruiaTHTb 3a +the ace.
124

CKJIBKO how much, how many

TOBp m. merchandise, goods
CTHTb II (CTHT, CTOHT) tO ' H/SBAf. (pi. flHbl) price
3
cost
qamKa/. (gen. pi. lmeK) cup
cnrraTb I (corr|io, -emb) to apjn>raK m. (gen, apjmraKa)
count; to consider4
ticket, label
3. CTHTb is used with the accusative of the amount a thing costs:
tJacb'i ciaT 20 py6jie. The watch costs 20 roubles. It can also
mean 'to be worth (while)' and can either be used by itself (He
CTOHT 'it's not worth it') or with the infinitive (CTHT pa60TaTb
'it's worth while working').
4. WhenOTBTTbmeans 'to consider', what you consider the object
to be goes into the instr.: SL corraio er repeM I consider.him (to
be) a hero.
BBipaHCHHH
flnaTb noKynKH
HflTH (XOflHTb) 3a nOKynKaMH
H T. fl.=H TaK flJiee
njiaTHTb B Kccy

to shop
to go shopping
and so on, etc.
to pay at the desk

CKOJUKO eMy aer ?

How old is he ?

rPAMMATHKA
i. Numerals (continued)
Cardinal numbers from ioo onwards are as foUows:
ioo
2OO
300
400
5OO
1000

do
flBCTH
Tpacra
leTbipecia
DHTbCOT
(OflH) Tbicjnia

600 mecTbcT
7OO CeMbCT
800 BoceMbcr
900 fleBHTbcor
73>ooo cMbflecaT i p a Tb'icn1H
97,000fleBHHCTOCeMb T&crpi
100,000 CTO Tb'lCjm
300,000 Tpacra Tem

2000 flBe Tb'lCHtffl

5OOO HHTb Tb'lCHq

21,000 flBflqaib ofla
Tbiopia
22,000
flBfloaTb
flBe
500,000 naTbcT Tb'ican
Tb'lCH^H
28,O00 flBflflaTb BCeMb Tb'lCHq
1,000,000 OflHH MHJIHHH
5,000,000 JTHTb MHJUmHOB
2,000,000 flBa MHJIJJHHa
100,000,000 CTO MHJUmHOB

125

In the 'hundreds', the second element of the numeral

-era, -CTa, -COT, is a derivative of CTO.
AU the above numbers are foUowed by th genitive
plural of the noun; when, of course, they occur in
compound numbers, then the noun is governed by the
last numeral of the compound:
flBcTH
flOMB
200 houses
Halb TbicHi Tpacra ipn flMa 5303 houses

2. Agreement of Predicate with Numerals and

Quantitative Substantives
When a numeral+a noun is the subject of a sentence,
the verb in most cases may be either in the singular or
the plural. In the past tense the verb, if used in the
singular, wiU be in the neuter.
B KJicce CHflHT (CHflHT)
HHTb yieHHKB.
Ha CTOJi jiexcaiTK (nexcano) Tpn KHHra.

Five pupils sit in the classroom.

There were three books
lying on the table.

In expressions of money, time, and age (in other

words where the numeral quality of the subject is
stressed), the singular only is used:
Y Her 6biJio oaTbflecHT
pyjie.
EMJIO naTb qacB.
EMy 6MJIO flBflflaTb flBa
rfla.
HaHy SbiJio TpfluaTb Jier.

He had fifty roubles.

It was five o'clock.
He was twenty-two years
old.
Ivan was thirty.

Note that in expressions of age the dative of the person is used

and that rofl, rfla is used for the singular, whereas ner, the
genitive plural of aero 'summer', is used with numerals instead
of roflB.

126

When the subject of a sentence is composed of a word

expressing an indefinite quantity (such as MHro
many', Mano 'few', CKJIBKO 'how many' and
HcKOJiBKO 'several') and a noun in the genitive
plural, then the verb, particularly if it precedes the
subject, tends to be in the singular, although it can be
used in the plural:
B Mara3HHe 6MJIO
jnoflft.

MHOTO

There were many people in

the shop.

Note that after numerals taking the genitive plural and after
HcKOJibKo 'several' and CKJUKO 'how many', qenoBK (genitive plural of qejioBK) is used, and not jnoflea. After MHTO and
Mano, however, jnoflu is used:
17 leaoBeK, 22 tiejioBKa
HcKOJitKO qeJioBK

17 people, 22 people
several people

When MHro or Mno, meaning 'much' or 'httle',

are used with the genitive singular, then the verb can
only be in the singular:
Ha CTOJi 6buio
xjia.

MHTO

There was a lot of bread on

the table.

Partitive Genitive
In order to express part of a substance in Russian the
genitive is used. Sometimes this wiU translate the
EngHsh 'some':
AaTe Mae BOJTW, BHH.
Cf. JJHTe MHe Bfly, BHH.

Give me some water, some

wine.
Give me the water, the
wine.

Note: flfi(Te) is the imperative of flaTb, which is what is known

as a perfective verb (see below, Lesson 19). The meaning is:
'give me once (not many times)'.
127

Several masculine nouns signifying divisible matter

(such as tea, sugar, etc.) have a genitive in -y or -K>,
which is used (as an alternative to the normal genitive
in -a, -a) when part of the whole is indicated. Common among these are ao, cxap, cup, Mfl:
aHTe MHe, noH<JiyacTa,
Ma H Mfly. (ia H Mfla)
qiiiKa Hio (ia)
KycK cxapy (cxapa)
KHJiorpMM cb'ipy (cbipa)

Please give me some tea and

honey.
a cup of tea
a lump of sugar
a kilogram of cheese

If, however, no idea of quantity is expressed ('the

colour of tea' for instance) or an adjective is used with
the noun ('a pound of soft cheese'), then only the
genitive in -a, - a may be used:
qena cb'ipa
CTaKa KpnKoro (gen. m.
sing, of KpenKH) qH

the price of cheese

a glass of strong tea

Plurals in -BH
Some masculine and neuter nouns have a soft plural in
-BH. The ftul plural declension of 6paT, for instance,
IS: pTBH, pTBeB, OpaTBeB, pTBHM, pTBHMH,
pTBax. SimUar to paT are JTHCT (JTHCTBH), nep
(npBa), flpeBO (flepBBa).
pyr (in which the r softens to 3 in the plural) and
MyiK, however, are stressed on the end in the plural
and have the genitive in -e:
flpy3B, flpy3a, flpy3fi, flpy3BM, flpy3Bi4MH,
flpy3Bax. SimUar is cbra, to which is added the
SUffiX -OB-: CblHOBBH, CMHOBeH, CblHOeM, CMHOBBHM.
Use of na in Indirect Questions
The particle na is used in the subordinate clause of an
indirect question to translate 'whether' or 'if'. The
subordinate clause is usuaUy put in the same form
128

(i.e. same tense and word order) as the original

question, as it would have been used by the speaker.
Thus in the sentence 'he was asking if she was at
home', 'if she was at home' becomes 'is she at home' flMa jm OH, which is preceded by 'he was asking':
OH cnpiiiHBaji,flMajm OH.
Oa He 3Her, fler au OH
Ha BOCTK.

She doesn't know if he's

going to the east.

TEKCT
' B Mara3HHe TacTpoHM
B MocKB qeHB MHro Mara3jH0B TacTpoHM.1
Y Hac na yjrnue Tnte ecTB OJIBHIH H KpacHBbht
racrpoHM. B Mara3HH Bc BpeMH BXHHT roKynTejTH. OHH BbrxflHT c noKyriKaMH B pyicx.
EnHa HnKOJieBHa Tnte ceirqc flnaer TBM HOKymai. OH Bcerfl xflar 3a noKynKaMH B TOT
Mara3HH.
B racrpoHMe MHTO OTflnoB. HajiBo OT
Bxfla npoflaiT MHCO, pby H flpyrne nponyKTM..
HanpBo OT Bxfla npoflaiT aionio, racrpOHOMHqecKHe TOBpbi, dppyKTM, BHH H T. fl.
3a npHJiBKaMH CTOHT npoflaBnjb'i. Ha npHJiBKax
nemt TOBpbi. BHCHT HpjrbraKH c nHaMH. Bce
BHflHT, CKJTBKO CTHT TOBp.
EjiHa HnKOJieBHa noflxflHT K npHjiBKy, rfle
npoflaiT KOJiacy H BeTmory. 3flecB yac CTOHT
HcKOJTBKO noKynTejieH. OHH noKyneT 800 rpMMOB
KOJTacb'i, flpyrH 500 rpMMOB BeTHHHb'i. Enna
HHKOJieBHa Tace epr 400 rpMMOB BerqHHb'i.
1. When the name of a place, a book, a ship, etc., is preceded by
an appellative noun ('the novel War and Peace'), then it always
remains in the nominative, no matter what the case of the appellative, B Mara3HHe FacrpoHM; KOJIO roc-rinnnnj MocKBs;
B poMHe BoHH H Map. Cf. B racrpoHMe; KOJIO
MCKBbT; B BoHH H Mpe.

129

noTM OH HflT 3a McnoM H cb'ipoM. OHU noKynCT

400 rpMMOB Mcna H KycK cb'ipy, naTb mm. H yrMJiKy
MOJIOK.

B oTfljie pb'ibi EnHa HnKOjieBHa noKynaer

HeMHro HKpbl H flBe HKH KOHcpBOB. HOTM OH
epr em flBa KHJI cxapy H flBe nmai uio. KHcercH, Bc. EnHa HnKOjieBHa ruiraT flHBrn B
Kccy, nojiyqeT H cqHTaeT cfliy H B03BpameTca 3a
noKymcamn. HOTM OH HflT K Bb'rxofly, HO TyT
BcnoMHHeT 0 narmpcax fljia prbeB H CMHOBfi.
CbfflOBBH e KypHT, XOTH OflHOMy TJTBKO CeMHflHaTB
H flpyrMy BoceMHflnaTB JICT. OH B03BpameTCH,
ruiTHT B Kccy 3a naimpcbi,' nonyneT HerMpe
niKH, BbrxflHT H3 Mara3HHa H Hflr c noKymxaMH
flOMH.

ynPAXKHEHHH

'

1. Answer the foUowing questions on the text:

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Kyfl xflHT EnHa HuKOJideBHa 3a noKymcaMH ?

^ T O npoflaiT B Mara3HHe racrpoHM ?
TfleCTOHTnpoflaBirb'i ?
^ T O noKynCT EjiHa HnKOjieBHa ?
HoqeMy OH noKynCT namipcbi ?

2. Put the words in brackets in the appropriate cases:

(1) y Hero biJio ceMBflecar ceMB (pyjn.) H Tpn
(KonHKa).
(2) noHtanycTa, HflH 3a (namipca pl.).
(3) .Hirre MHe KHJI (cxap), 400 (rpaMM) (na), 750
(rpaMM) (Konac) H mecrb (nm<a) (cHrapra).
(4) y MeHH HCT HH (paT pl.), HH (ceCTp pl.).
(5) B Mara3HHe cronno MHTO (qenoBK), HO Mno
(npoflaBn). HcKOJTBKO (nenoBK) noKynjm
(pb'ia).
(6) (OH) MJIO 23 (ron), Korfl MHe MHO 30 (ron).

130

Translate into Russian:

(i) How much does this sausage cost? One rouble a
kho? That's too expensive. Give me some ham
please.
(2) I had twenty-five roubles in my pocket this
morning. Now I have only fifty copecks.
(3) How much do these cigarettes cost? A packet
costs eighteen copecks. And how many cigarettes
are there in a packet ? Twenty.
(4) I did not know if he was working.
(5) How old is the captain of the team ? Only twentyone ? When wiU he be twenty-two ?
(6) It's not worth talking to him. AU that he sells is
very expensive (he sells everything very expensively). It's better to go to a big shop for your
shopping.
(7) Please give me a packet of tea^ a jar of caviare,
500 grammes of ham, and a piece of cheese.
(8) The customer pays at the desk.
(9) There were no leaves on the trees in the winter.
(10) Do you consider him inteUigent ?

131

YPOK 19

CJIOBAPb
6naroflapHTb II (6jiaroflap||io, MaTepnJi m. material
-ami) to thank
HanacaTb I pf. (Hanamy, naBecb, Bca, Bc; Bce pron. all
imnieim.) to write
Baaib I pf. (B03bM||y, -mb) to Hain. I pf. (HaqH||y, -mb,
take
past tense Hiaji, -, Haano;
BCTpTHTb II pf.
(BCTpiy
Hqajra) to begin
BCTpTHmb) to meet
Ha^HHaTb I (HaqHH|]io, -emb) to
Bb'mHCKa / . (gen. pl. Bb'nmcoK)
begin
excerpt, extract
HyjKHBiH adj. necessary
Bb'iynHTb II pf. (Bb'rya||y, -HUB) o6pa30BTbca I impf, and pf.
to learn (by heart)
(o6pa3yeTca) to be formed
rocyflpCTBO n. State
noJiaroflapHTb II pf. (no6naflan, mixed conj. pf. (am, flamb,
roflap||ib, -HHib) to thank
flacT, flaflHM, flaflHTe, flaflyT) noceTHTb II pf. (nocemy, ncto give
ceTHmb) to visit
flHCcepTnHH / .
dissertation, nocHflTb II pf. (nocHJKy, nothesis
CHflHiin.) to sit (for a while)
flOKJifl m. lecture, talk, paper,
HOcnTb II pf. (nocHjno, noreport
cnamb) to sleep (for a while)
aacMearbca I pf. (3acMe||iocb,
nocTpHTb
II pf. (nocrp|io,
-mbca) to laugh
-amb) to build
aacHyTb I pf. (3acH||& -mb) to
nparoTBHTb II pf. (nparofall asleep
T6BJHO, npHTOTOBamb) to preH3V*IHTb II pf. (H3yry, H3pare; to cook
fvumb) to study
' npoflTb mixed conj. pf. (see
KOHihepHHHa / . conference
aaib) to sell
KoiMaTb I (KOiw||io, -emb) to
npoHHTTb I pf. (npoiHT||io,
finish
-emb) to read
Kmnrrb II pf. (KHq|y, -mm.)
npb^THyTb I pf. (npbJTH||y, -emb)
to finish
to jump
KynHTb II pf. (Kyrunb, Kyimmb)
pyKOHHCb/. manuscript
to buy
132

cfljiaTb I pf. (cflJia||io, -ems)

to do
cecTb I pf. (can || y, -emb, past
tense ceji, -a, -o; -a) to. sit
down
CKa3Tb I pf. (cKajKy, CKacemb)
to say
co6Ka / . dog
coKpTb I (co6ap||io, -emb) to
collect

copTb I pf. (co6ep||y, -mb)

to collect
TMa/. theme, subject, topic
yHBTb I (y6HB||io, -emb) to
kill
yoHTb I pf. (ybflio, -mb) to
kill
yBafleib II pf. (yBHHty, VBHflamb) to see

BBipaxcHHH
He TJH.KO ... HO H ...
OJiaroflapTb 3a+ace.
BO Bp&ua...
BO BpMa BOHHb'l

not only ... but also ...

to thank for...
during...
during the war

rPAMMATHKA
i. The Aspects
(i) General remarks. It will have been realized by now that
with the verbs given so far in this book we can only
express a limited number of actions. Si noKynn, for
instance, can only mean 'I was buying' or ' I used to
buy'; it cannot mean 'I bought (once)' or ' I had
bought'; H yny noKynTB means ' I wiU be buying' or
'I wUl buy (frequently)'. This is because aU the verbs
given so far have been what is known as imperfective
verbs or verbs of the imperfective aspect ('aspect' is
merely a way of considering the action expressed by a
verb). Now nearly aU imperfective verbs have corresponding perfective verbs, which are used to express a
different type of action. UsuaUy the corresponding or
'pair'-verb in the perfective aspect is fairly similar to
the imperfective verb - e.g. iracTB - HauHcTB (pf.1);
npoflasTB - nponiTB (pf.).
I. Note: From now on all verbs in th perfective aspect will
have pf. written after them in the vocabularies.
133

(2) Differences in usage. Verbs in the imperfective aspect

are used to express:
(a) Habitual or repetitive action
MM KjKflbra aem, vanreaB
ra3Tbi.
SI nmrry onxy pa3 B HefljiK).

We used to read the

papers every day.
I write to my father once a
week.

(b) Continuous or uncompleted action

OH ofleBncH.
Si ttHTaio cecrp.

He was getting dressed.

I am reading to my
sister.

Note: a imio cecrp could of course, mean ' I read (frequently)

to my sister' just as a mmry oray could also mean 'I am writing
to my father'.
Verbs in the perfective aspect are used to express:
(a) Instantaneous action
OH VSHJI co6Ky.

He killed the dog.

(b) The beginning of an action

OH 3BCMeancH.

He began to laugh, he laughed, he

gave a laugh.

(c) The end or completion of an action

Mbi npoTOTjiH rasry.
We have read the paper (i.e.
we have finished reading
it).

Often, of course, the meaning of the perfective simply depends

on the meaning inherent in the verb itself. However we translate
OH aacMeajica ('he laughed', 'he burst out toughing') it will
only mean 'he began to laugh', and not 'hefinishedlaughing'.
Similarly OH npo*nrrJi Kmiry will mean 'he finished reading'
and not 'he began reading'. In order to translate 'he finished
laughing' or 'he began reading', a separate verb for 'finished'
and 'began' must be used+the infinitive of 'laugh' and 'read'.
34

(d) A certain time spent in an action. Certain verbs

prefixed with no- have the meaning 'to do a bit of...'.
Thus:
O H nocHflji co MHOH.
OH nocnji ncjie ycH-

He sat for a while with me.

(He spent a certain time
sitting with me.)
He had a sleep after supper.

Ha.

It must be noted that the verbs nocHfleib and nocn-n. do not

mean 'to sit down' and 'to fall asleep'. There are separate
verbs for these in Russian, both of which have an imperfective
and a perfective form: caflaibca (pf. cecrb) and 3acbmTb (pf.
3acHyTb). It must also be noted that if an action is habitual the
verb will always be imperfective. Thus, to translate 'he always
had a nap after lunch', nocnTb cannot be used; only cnaib 'to
sleep' is possible.

(3) Parts of the verb and aspects, (a) The Past Tense. In the
past tense either the imperfective or the perfective
aspect may be used, depending on the type of action it
is intended to express:
OH ySHBa co6Ky.
OH VOHJI coSny.

He was killing the dog.

He killed the dog.

(b) The Present Tense. In order to translate the present

tense in Russian, only the imperfective aspect can be
used, as aU actions in the present tense are continuous.
(c) The Future Tense. For an imperfective action in
the future, the compound future (6yfly, yseniB, etc.
+imperfective infinitive - see Lesson 13) is used:
% Syfly nHcTb ie6

I shall write to you often.

lCTO.

ncjie yjKHHa H 6yny

HHcTB HHCbMa.

135

After supper I shall write

(shall be writing) letters.

For a perfective action in the future, however, what

appears to be the present tense of the perfective aspect
is used:
SI y 6 b coSKy.
3BTpa a npoinTio
KHHry.

I shall kill the dog.

I shall finish reading the
book tomorrow (or I shall
have read t h e book t o morrow).

In order to decide which aspect to use in the future it

often helps to ask the question 'how many times?'
If once, then the perfective is usuaUy used; if many
times - the imperfective.
(d) The Infinitive. Both aspects of the verb can be
used in the infinitive, the choice often depending on
the answer to the question 'how many times ?'
SI x o i y noKynarb (impf.) KHHTH.
H x o i y KynHTb (pf.) co6Ky.

I want t o b u y books (i.e. o n

several occasions, many
times).
I want t o Ouy a dog (once
only).

After the verbs HamniaTb (Banra), KomiTB (KHTHTB),

and npoflOJDKTB (perfective rarely used), however,
the infinitive is only found in the imperfective aspect.
O H Ha^HHaer noHHMxb.
Mbi HqajiH iHTTb.
Bbi KH4HJIH imcTb
HHCbM ?
O H npoflOJDKn CMearb-

H e is beginning t o u n d e r stand.
We began reading.
Have you finished writing
the letter ?
H e went o n laughing.

Note: HatnraTb and KOOTib can also be used with direct objects
(TM KOOTHJI HHCbMO? 'have you finished t h e letter?'). T h e y can
also b e used reflexively (BOOHS Haajicb H KH^aaacb ' t h e war
began and ended').
I n the future tense of HaqTb an - H - is inserted: Ha<my, Ha^Hmb.

136

(4) The formation of pairs of imperfective and perfective

verbs. Many perfective verbs are derived from imperfective verbs by:
(a) adding a prefix. The most common prefixes are:
no-, c-, y-, 3a-, BBI-, npo-, npn-.
Thus, the perfective of CTPBTB is UOCTPHTB;
fljiaTb/cfljiaTb
HHCTb/HaHHCTB
BfleTb/yBHfleTi.
CMeianbca/aacMeHTbCH
y lTS/Bbiy ILUTb
IHTTb/npOIHTTb
rOTBHTb/npHTOTBHTb
(Note, however, noicynaTb/KyiiHTb)
Note: All perfective verbs with the prefix Bbi- have the stress on
the Bb'i- in all parts of the verb.

( b ) changing

the

suffix.

Imperfective

Perfective

H3VHTb
KOiraTB
nauTb
npraTb

H3y*THTb
KH1HTB

flair.
npbiTHyTb

S o m e t i m e s t h e last c o n s o n a n t o f t h e s t e m o f t h e v e r b
c h a n g e s w i t h t h e suffix. T h u s :
noceinaTb/noceiHTb
BCTpe^Tb/BCTpTHTb
Note that in all the examples given in (b), with the exception
of npb'rraTb/npb'rrHyTb, the imperfective is in fact formed from
the perfective and not, as in (a), the perfective from the imperfective.

137

Sometimes there is no corresponding perfective or

imperfective for a verb. In this case completely
separate verbs are linked together. Thus the perfective
verb paired with roBopHTb 'to say' is CKa3TB (the
perfective verb paired with roBopuTb 'to talk', however, is noroBopHTB 'to have a talk').
KTO Te6 CKa3ji, TTO OH
nocTpHJi TOTflOM?
O H HoroBopHH c Heft
Biep.

Who told you that he

built this house ?
He had a talk with her
yesterday.

A similar 'unrelated' pair is GpaTB/ssHTB 'to take'.

The student need not bother unduly at this stage about
the formation of pairs of verbs; he should simply try
to learn verbs as they come, in pairs.
2. Declension of Neuter Nouns in -MH
There are only ten neuter nouns ending in -MH, the
most common of which are HMH 'name' and spivta
'time'. They decline as foUows:
Nom., Ace.

Singular

Plural

HMH

HMeH&

Gen.

HMeHH

HMH

Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

HMeHH
HMeHeM
HMeHH

HMCH.M
HMeHMH
HMeax

TEKCT
AneKcH BJTKOB CflrcTBaHm-epecyeTCH HcrpHeH H BCCB
3T0T rofl OH nHcJi flHccepTinno. TMa er: KaK opa30BnocB pyccKoe rocyflpcrBO.
OH C HHrepcoM coHpn MaTepnajibi, torran HayqHbie
KHHTH. O H qcro nocerfln BHjmoTKy HMemi Hmma,
rfle OH nojryHn He TJIBKO Hyaarbie KHHTH H HtypHnbi, HO
H pyKomiCH. O H H3yHn MaTepHajrbi, fljiaji BbmHCKH.
^lcro OH paccKa3ban TOBpamaM, KaK Hflr para. Er
138

npoipccop B yHHBepcHTre coBroBan eMy, BHK nflo

paraTb. AneKco naronapHn er H CHBa coHpn
MaTepnji, mirn H rmcn. 3TO npoflOJDKnocb flnro.
*Ipe3 HcKOjrbKo McaneB AneKc copn MHTO
MaTepnjia. O H cKa3n npoqbccopy, HTO OH XHCT cflnaib
flOKJifl Ha KOHdiepemmn cryflHTOB. Bo BpMH flOKJifla
OH npo^HTn cryflHTaM BBHIHCKH H3 pyKomiceH. AOKnfl
biJi xopiiiHH. Bce cjiyuiajm c HarepcoM. Korfl OH
KHHHn flOKnfl, npoqbccop eMy CKa3n: <<Xopnraa
flOKnfl. Bbi neuh xopom H3yHHjm Bonpc, H TAia Bma
neHB HHTepcHaH. Ho KOTfl BBI KHHHreflHCcepTqmo?
AneKca 3acMeHJiCH, noJiaroflapHJi er 3a Trurbie cnoB
H CKa3n: He 3Hio, HO HafliocB KHHHTB e npe3 rofl.
ynPA)KHEHHfl
i. FiU in the blanks with one of the two verbs in brackets
in the past tense:
(i) B^iep H flnro ... ypK, H HaKOHn H xopom er
... (yHHTB, Bb'ryHHTB)
(2) O H Bcerfl MHe ... IIHTB pyno, HO cerflHH OH
... MHe TJTBKO Tpn pyJIH. (flaBTB, flaTB)
(3) OH HHKOTfl He ... MeHH, HO BHep OH MeHH ...
(JiaroflapHTB, noJiaroflapHTB)
(4) Korfl Mbi HHTjm eMy rmcBM, OH Bflpyr ...
(CMeHTBCH, 3aaMeHTBCH)

2.

FiU in the blanks with one of the two verbs in brackets

in the future tense:
(1) H Bcerfl ... Bac B onBHHne. (noceinTB, nocCTHTB)
(2) 3BTpa MBI B npBbra pa3 ... Tno. (BHflerB,
yBHfleTb)
(3) Korfl Bbi ... npBbrii ypK? 3BTpa. H ... ypKH
Ka<flbIH nOHefljTBHHK. (paTB, B3HTB)
(4) Si ... BeCB fleHB H 3BTpa H ... KHHTy flO KOHfla.
(inrraTB, npoHHTTB)
139

Translate into Russian:

(i) I had a talk with him yesterday and I told him that
I had kiUed the dog.
(2) When he began to read we aU sat down.
(3) I don't want to give it to you. You must buy it;
you must always buy everything.
(4) WiU you be reading the book tomorrow? Yes, I
hope to finish it by the evening.
(5) Have you coUected much material for your thesis ?
(6) On Thursday he jumped from an aeroplane. He
has now made twenty jumps since the autumn.
(7) When I meet Ivan I always teU him that I am very
fond of his sister.
(8) I wUl teU you what she wiU do tomorrow. She
wiU cook lunch, then she wUl sit down by the
window and wiUfinishwriting to you.
(9) WUl you give him a lesson tomorrow? No, I
haven't got time.

140

y p o K 20

CJOBAPi
BepHyTbca I pf. (BepHflycb, KHHOonepTop m. cameraman
KHHocTyflHH / . film studio
-mbca) to returni
Jimaflb / . (gen. pl. aomaa)
BHfl m. view; aspect
horse
BOOTH I pf. (BOHfl[|y, -mb) tO
HaBpx adv. upstairs2
enter
BbiJierTb I (BbiJieT||io, -emb) OinpBHTb II pf. (OTHpBJHO,
to fly off
oTnpBHuib) to send off
Bb'uieTeib II pf. (Bbaeay, Bb'i- oTnpBHTbca II pf. (oTnpjieTHmb) to fly off
BJHocb, OTrmBHmbca) to set
rop / . (nom. pl. rpbi) moun0ff3
tain, hill
OTT^fla adv. from there
rpHbiH adj. mountain (attr.), naciryx m. (pl. nacTyxH) shepmountainous
herd
flocrpHBaTb I (flocrpHBa||io, nepeBn m. (mountain) pass
-emb) to finish building
nepefljiaTb I pf. (nepefljia|io,
flOCTpHTb II pf. (flOCpfllO, -enn.) to remake, alter
-HHIB) to finish building
nepefljibiBaTb I (nepefljnva[|sa6bmTb I (3a6biB|]io, -emb)
K), -emb) to remake, alter
nepemicTb I pf. (nepenamy,
to forget
3a6b'rn. I pf. (3a6yfl||y, -emb) to
nepemmernb) to rewrite
nepenncbmaib I (nepenacbmaQforget
K), -emb) to rewrite
3anHcTb I pf. (3anamy, 3aniimemb) to write down, to mac m. peak
noSfla/. victory
record
sariHCbmaTb I (3anHCbTBa|io, noflHaTbca I pf. (noflHHMycb,
-emb) to write down, to
noflHHMembca, past tense:
record
Both BepHyTbca and B03BpaTHTbCH (B03Bpamycb, B03BpaTambca)
are used as the perfective of B03Bpam,Tbca 'to return' (either on
foot or by means of transport).
HaBpx (BHH3 - 'downstairs') implies motion. HaBepxy (BHH3^)
implies rest. OH noniji HaBpx 'he went upstairs'; OH atHBer
BHH3y 'he lives downstairs'.
OropaBHTbca (imperfective ompaBJiaTbca I) means 'to set off'
either on foot or by means of transport.

141

noflHHJiCH, noflHajicb, -cb;

rHCb) to climb, go up 4
noflUHcTb I pf. (noflraauy, noflHHmemb) to sign
HOflHHCbmaTb I (noflUHCbma||io,
-emb) to sign
noxaib I pf. (noflly, -enn.) to
go (not on foot)
HOHTH I pf. (noflfl|y, -mb, past
tense noma) to go (on foot)
noaerTb II pf. (noaeqy, nojierHmb) to fly
nocJiymaTb I pf. (nocnymaQio,
-enn.) to listen to
noTOMy <rro cj. because
HOXOflHTb II pf. (nOXOHC^, HOxflHmb) to walk a little
npHBe3TH I pf. (npHBe3||y, -enn.)
to bring (not on foot)
npHB03aTb II (npHBomy, npHB3amb) to bring (not on
foot)
npHflTH I pf. (npHflll^, -mb,
past tense npameji) to come
(on foot)

npHexa-rb I pf. (npHflBy, -emb)

to come, arrive (not on foot)
npHJieTib II pf. (npiuiei)
npHJieiHiub) to arrive (by
plane)
npoBecTH I pf. (npoBeflly, -enn.)
to spend (of time)
npoHTH I pf. (npoHfllly, -mb,
past tense npomji) to pass,
go byS
nycKib I (nycK|io, -enn.) to
let (go)
nycTHTb II pf. (nymy, nycrranb)
to let (go)
nyTenicTBHe n. journey
peinait I (pein||io, -enn.) to
decide
CKJIOH m, slope

CHHTb I pf. (cHHMy, CHHMeiHb) tO

photograph; to take off
copTbca I pf. (coepMca ...
coepyTca) to gather (intrans.)
cpeflH pr. (+gen.) among, between, in the midst of
3Kcneflamia/. expedition
acHbiH adj. clear

noflHHTbca (imperfective noflHHMTbca I) means 'to ascend', 'to

rise'; it can be used for climbing or for going upstairs. The opposite is cnycTHTbca (cnymycb, cnycTambca), cnycKTbca.
npoHTH (imperfective npoxoflHTb) means 'to go by' (on foot):
Mbi npoinjiH MHMO cea 'we walked past the village' - or'to pass'
(of time): npomji HcKOJibKo <iacB 'a few hours passed'. It can
also be used as a transitive verb meaning 'to go through', 'to
complete' (npoxoflHTb mKJiy, Kypc (course), ypK etc.).
CHHTb (imperfective CHHMTb). means either 'to photograph' or
'to take off' (OH CHHJI p3bi co croji, OH CHHJI nuiny).

142

TPAMMATHKA
i. Aspects (continued)
(a) The imperative. The imperative can be used in either
the imperfective or the perfective aspect, depending on
the type of action required.
tjHTHTe no-pyccKH Ka<-

Read Russian every day.

flblH fleHb.

Bbi HHHiere nncbMO? Hy,

nmnarel
CKajKHre MHe, mo Hflo
KyriHTb.

Are you writing a letter?

Well, go on writing I
Tell me what I've got to
buy.

HpoiHTHTe er nacbM,
H Bce yfler HCHO.

Read his letter and everything will be clear.

Note: Sometimes the infinitive is used to convey a peremptory

order:
He KypHTb.
No smoking.
BcraTt!
Stand up!

In order to convey an admonition or a request in the

3rd person ('let him go to Moscow'), the words
nycTB or nycnfi (themselves imperatives of nycTHTB,
nycKTB 'to let go') are used with the 3rd person
singular or plural of the present tense (imperfective or
perfective):
IlycTb (nycKaa) OH CHUT!
IlycTib OHH CKatyr!

Let him sleep (go on sleeping)!

Let them say!

To translate 'let us ...', the ist person plural of the

future of the perfective aspect is used without the
personal pronoun MBI.
IIoSjiaroflapHM er.
IocnM HeMHjKKO.

Let us thank him.

Let's sleep for a while.

Sometimes -Te is added, often for politeness' sake:

noroBopHMTe.
Let us talk a bit.
Although noroBopHM implies Tbi H a as subjects and noroBopHMie - BM H a, the two forms are frequently confused in
speech.

143

With HflTH and xaTB the ist person plural of the

present tense (imperfective) can be used:
EfleM!
HflM(Te) B pecTopH!

Let's go (on wheels)!

Let's go to a restaurant!

Note also the following additional ways of expressing exhortations:

JJaBfiCre) i a 8 tmrb.
JLiBH(Te) nocHflHM BMcre.
Tenpb 6j>fleM padrarb.

Let's have tea.

Let's sit a while together.
Let's work now.

(b) Negative imperatives. The negative imperative is

nearly always expressed by imperfective verbs, even
though a 'perfective' action is implied:
He roaopH eMy, TOJ Tbi
cfljian.
He flasaHTe e& aser\

Don't tell him what you

did.
Don't give her any money!

Only when a warning ('mind you don't ...') is implied can a

perfective verb be used in the negative imperative:
He 3a6#flb(Te)!

Mind you don't forget!

Note the ending in -b(Te) instead of -a(Te). This occurs in verbs

in which the stem of the infinitive is accented.
OTnpBHTb OTHpBb(Te); BCTpTHTb BCTpTb(Te).

(c) The formation of pairs of imperfective and perfective

verbs (continued). In the previous lesson it was shown
that the addition of a prefix to an imperfective verb
usuaUy makes it perfective. In the examples given the
prefixes added Uttle or nothing to the meaning of the
verb; they merely made the verb perfective.
Sometimes, however, a prefix may give a different
meaning to a verb. Ilepe-, for instance, often gives the
verb an idea of change, of re-doing something. Thus
when flaaTB has nepe- added to it (nepeflaaTB) it
not only becomes perfective but also changes its meaning to 'to re-do', 'to alter'.
144

Now if you want to use the imperfective aspect of

'alter' in Russian ('he is altering the house'), it is no
use simply removing the nepe- as this wiU only give
you 'do'. Instead an imperfective verb is derived from
nepeflaaTB. In this case it is done by adding the
suffix - u s a - . Thus we get the pair:

Cf.

nepeflaBraaTB (imperfective) /nepefljiaTB

(perfective)
nepenacBraaTB/nepenncTB 'to rewrite'.

This use of the suffix - u s a - (or -usa- after a vowel or

a soft consonant) is very common, not only with the
prefix nepe- but with other prefixes such as flo-, 3a-,
nofl-, which may also change the meaning of the verb.
Thus, flocTpHTb 'to finish building' has the imperfective opcTpHBaTB; 3anHcTb 'to write down'/
3anncBraaTB; noanncTB 'to sign'/noflnncBraaTB.
The Perfective of Verbs of Motion
In order to form the perfective of the verbs of motion
which have two forms in the imperfective (XOAHTB/
HflTH, JieTTb/jieTTb, 3flHTB/xaTB, B03HTB/
Be3TH, etc., see Lesson n ) , no- is simply added to the
second verb of each pair; HOHTH (contraction of no+
HflTH), noaeTTB, noxan, etc.
This does not alter the meaning of the verb (except in
so far as it impUes the beginning of the action; OH
nomji means 'he went' or 'he set off'):
Mbi no&flM B KHH.
OH nojieTji B MocKBy.
Korfl Tbi noflemb flo-

We will go to the cinema.

He flew to Moscow.
When will you go home ?

MH?

Note: (no)xaTb has no imperative; instead noe3JKH(Te) (from

the verb noe3JKTb, which is only found in this form) is used.
Note also: no- can be added to the indeterminate forms xoflarb,
jieraib, 3flHTb, etc.; it merely gives them the normal meaning
of no- ' to do a bit of... '. Thus, noxoflarb (pf.) means 'to walk a
Utile'.

145

3 Compounded Verbs of Motion

When it is required to give a verb of motion a particular direction ('to go away', 'to arrive', 'to fly off',
etc.) then an appropriate prefix is added either to the
first of the pair (XORHTB, nerATb, etc.) the result
being an imperfective verb (npHxoflHTb, BBineTTB)
(eaflHTb, however, is replaced by -e3a<Tb in compounds - npHesacxb)
or to the second of the pair (nnra, xaTB, etc.), the
result being a perfective verb (npHHT (npn+BOTH),
BBKieTeTfc). Thus the foUowing pairs of verbs are
formed:
Imperfective
Perfective
npHxoflHTib 'to arrive, come'
HPHHTH
BxoflHTb
'to enter'
BOHTHCBO+H/TTH)
npHe3cTb 'to arrive' (not on foot) npHexaxb
BbineT&Tb 'to fly off'
BbuieTerB
npHB03HTB 'to bring' (not on foot) npHBesxe
It must be understood that in these prefixed or 'directional' verbs of motion there is now only one form of
the imperfective (compare xoflnTb/HflTH).
H ajtaxoaxf, therefore, means either ' I come frequently' or ' I am coming'.
Note: As xaTb has no imperative, the imperfective imperative
must always be used in compounds. Eg. npHe3HcaH(Te).
4. Sequence of Tense in the F u t u r e
When a clause is introduced by cjin or Korfl and
the time implied is the future, then the future must be
used in this clause in Russian. This is confusing, as in
English the present is usuaUy found in the temporal
or conditional clause.
nofleT B JleanHrpfl, OH yBHflHT OTq.
CKajKH eMy TO, Korfl Tbl
yBHflHim. er.
146

ECJTH OH

If he goes to Leningrad he
will see his father.
Tell him this, when you
see him.

TEKCT
1

B ropx KaprihuiH
JleHHHTpflCKOH KHHOCTyflHH Hy>KHO 6b'inO CHHTB
rpHbie BHflbi. PeniHHH OTrrpBHTb SKcneflHrnno B
rpbi THHb-IIIHH. HjiaH nyTemcTBHH 6bin TaK;
B Me 3KcneflHUHH Bbinerar B KHprH3HK>, npoBeflr
flBa McHfla B ropx TaHB-IIIHH H noTM BepHrcH
B JleHHHTpfl. B SKCneflHUHH 6bIJI H H KOK KHHOonepTop.
Hma SKcneflHUHH Bbuierejia H3 JleHHHrpfla B
KOHfl MaH. Mbi npHJierenH B rpofl O p y e 2 H
OTiyfla <ipe3 flBa AHH OTnpBHjTHCB B rpw. CHaina
Mbi xanH Ha aBTOMOOHJiHX, noTM Ha nomanax. Si
HHKorfl He 3a6yfly nyTemcTBHH. KaK TaM KpacHBo!
M M noflHHJTHCB Ha nepeBn. Karate KpacHBbie BHflbi
CHHMjIH Mbi 3fleCB B HCHbie flHH! Mbi npOBeJIH B
ropx HcKOHBKO flHe cpeflH nacryxB. OflHjKflbi
ciofl npnexajm aprHCTbi H3 <3>pyH3e. nacryxH H HX
cMbH co6pjmcB Ha CKJiHe ropbi noaryniarb HX
nmie. Mbi THce cnymann HX. Onenb buio mrrepecHO
H KpacHBo.
Ebicrpo npoiHJi BpMH B ropx. Mbi castra HHK
noflbi, rpHoe 3epo HccbiK-KyjiB. Hma SKcneflHHHH npHBe3Ji npeKpcHBie rpHbie BHflbi na KHHO4>HJTBMa. Hsraer He Hflo b'uio nepeflnbaTb B
KHHOCTyflHH.
^Iepe3 rofl Mbi onHTB nofleM B rpw H npHBe3M
HBbi MaTepnn. 3TO nem, inrrepcHoe nyTemcTBHe.
i. KHPTH3HH - Kirghiz Soviet Socialist Republic in Central Asia;
it is one of the sixteen republics which make up the U.S.S.R.
2. <t>p#H3e (indeclinable) -^ capital of the Kirghiz Soviet Socialist
Republic. This town was renamed in 1935 in honour of M. V.
Frunze, a famous Soviet general who was born there.

147

1. Replace the verbs in the foUowing sentences with

their corresponding imperfective forms, retaining
the same tense.
(i) Mbi irpHxaJTH AOMH BnepoM H cna npefl
TeneBH3opoM.
(2) KTO npneflCT B rpofl Opyree ?
(3) OH nepermcaji nncBM H noflnncan er.
(4) OHHflocrpHjTHrpofl.
(5) Mbi He irpooflM MHMO HX flMa.
2. Answer the foUowing questions on the text:
(1) rioieMy pemHjm OTnpaBHTb SKcneflHrnuo B rpbi
TflHb-HIHH?
(2) CKJIBKO BpMeHH SKcraeflHHHH flonam 6bin
npoBecTH B KnprH3HH?
(3) Tfle HaxflHTCH rpofl <I>pyH3e ?
(4) KaK xajia sKcneflnna H3 <E>pyH3e ?
(5) Karate BHflbi CHHJI KHHOonepTop SKcneflmm?
3. Translate into Russian:
(i) Let's go to the cinema tonight.
(2) If he wants to go to Leningrad, let him go.
(3) Go to London in two weeks and spend six days
there. Then come back.
(4) Don't write his name down, but write down our
names.
(5) He went upstairs and slept for a little.
(6) If it is fine tomorrow we wiU aU go to the country.
(7) Who brought you aU that material from Moscow ?
(8) He entered the room and sat down.
(9) The expedition set off in the end of May.

148

yPOK 21

CJIOBAPB
BOCXHUlTbCa I (BOcxmn||iocb,
-embca) + instr. to admire, be
carried away by1
BCKpe adv. in a short time
BbiiiTH I pf. (Bb'rflly, -emb,
past tense Bbrmeji) to go out
3Keji3Haa flopra / . railway (lit.
'iron road')
saMeqTeJibHbiH adj. wonderful
H3BcTHbiH adj. (short form H3BTeH, H3BcTHa, -o; -BI)
well-known
HcnojTHHTb I (HcnoJma|K), -enn.)
to fulfil, carry out
KaHHa / . driving cab (in lorry);
cockpit (in plane)
Kapbpa/. career
K0Jix3HbiH (adj.) collective farm
(adj.)
K0MH03HT0P m. composer
KOHcepBaTpaa / . conservatoire,
academy of music
KOTpbra relative pron. which,
who

nepa/. opera
OTKpb'iTbca I pf. (oTKperca)
to be opened
neBfl m. (gen. neBu) singer
ncHH/. (gen. pl. nceH) song
DJIOXH adj.

bad

nofloTH I pf. (noflofljy, -mb,

past tense noflomji) to
approach, to come up to
noflyMaTb I pf. (noflyMaflio,
-emb) to think
nocTynHTb II pf. (nocrrynjnb,
nocTjnmm.) to act; to enter
npHHecT I pf. (npHHecQ^,
-mb) to bring (on foot)
npodJeccHoaJibHbiH adj. professional
nyJiHKa/. public
pflHO n. indeclinable radio
poflHTeJiH pl. (gen. poflerejieH)
parents
pojn. / . rule, part (in a play)
CBerTb I (cBeTer) to grow
light, to dawn
JIHCHH adj. fox's
CBo6flHbra adj. (short form
MJieHbKHH adj. small
cBo6fleH, CBo6flHa, -o; -BI)
MeflBjKHH adj. bear's
free
HapflHbra adj. folk (attr.),
cjryata/. service, work, employnational
HacrpoHHe n. mood, temper
ment
BocxmnaTbCH is one of the few verbs which takes a direct object
in the instrumental. It means to admire something intangible i.e. qualities, virtues, abilities. Jlio6oBTbca I (jno6^||K)Cb,
-embca), also+instr., is used for admiring physical qualities.

149

CMepKTbca I (cMepiceTca) to
grow dark
co6iuH adj. dog's^
COUTH I pf. (coHfllly, -mb,
past tense cornea) to go down
cpay adv. immediately
find
craTb I pf. (crHlIy, -enn.) to
become; to begins
TaKoii demonstrative pron. such
TajiHT m. talent
TpTHH num. third

ipyrma / . troupe, company

(theatrical)
TaajrbiH adj. heavy
yflOBJTbCTBHe n. pleasure
y3HTb I pf. (y3H||io, -emb (to
out; to recognize1
xgrjaca, \ (viS^prrn) tn fpi
like
leMOflH m. suit-case
HJIOKO n. apple

2. CoSiHH is frequently used for 'filthy', 'wretched' (lit. 'currish'): OH B coSibeM Hacrpomoi. He's in a foul mood.
3. CTaTb (imperfective craHOBHTbca) has two principal meanings:
(a) 'to become'. What the subject becomes normally goes into
the instrumental: OH cranflicropoM;(b) 'to begin' (usually the
perfective only). It is always followed by the imperfective
infinitive: OH d a n qnraTb.
4. yaHTb (imperfective y3HaBTb - y3Ha||io, -mb. Note the stress!)
means either 'to get to know', 'to find out' (SL ysa&a, ITO OH
6bin TaM. I found out that he had been there), or 'to recognize'
(Tbi He y3Haiin> MOW ? Don't you recognize me?)

Bupancana
Mbi C BMH ( = BbI H H) 1
^ j
MBI CTOOH ( = TbI H a) J
MBI c HHKOJieM
Nicholas and I
Mbi c HHM
he and I
(The verb in such cases is in the ist person plural: M M C TO66H
pa3TOBpHBajm. You and I were conversing.)
HcnojBHHTb pojn>
to play a part
With pleasure!
C yflOBJTbCTBaeM!
roBopHTb no pflHO
to talk on the wireless
nocrynHTb B yHHBepcHTT ) to enter the university
J to go to work
nocTynHTb na cjiyat6y
150

rPAMMATHKA
i. Declension of Adjectives
It wiU be remembered (see Lesson 7) that in Russian
there are three types of adjectives, 'hard', 'soft', and
the so-caUed 'mixed'. Provided certain basic rules are
remembered, no difficulty should be experienced with
adjectives. All are regular: there are no exceptions.

(1) 'Hard' adjectives. AU 'hard' adjectives, i.e. those

with the nominative masculine singular in - M H (or
-oM when the stress is on the last syUable - MOJiofl6a)
are declined in the foUowing manner:

Nom.
Ace.

Singular
Masc.
Fern. Neuter
HBbnt
HBaa HBoe
HBbra (HBoro) HByw HBoe

Plural
All Genders
HBue
HBbie (HBHX)

Gen.

HBoro

HBOH HBOTO

HBHX

Dat.

HBOMy

HBOH HBOMy

HBMM

Instr.
Prep.

HBblM
HBOM

HBOH HBBIM
HBOH HBOM

HBbUWH
HBUX

Note: (a) There is no distinction in gender in the

plural of adjectives.
(b) The accusative masculine singular and the accusative plural have alternative forms:
HOBbiH, HOBbie if the noun is inanimate (a Kynnn
HBbiM CTOJI, HBBie CTOjrbi);
HBoro, HBbix if the noun is animate (no matter
whether masculine or femiriine in the plural) (TBI
BHflen HBoro ynarena, HBBIX ynarenH, HBBIX
yHjareHBHrai, ?).
(c) There is an alternative form -OH for the instrumental feminine singular, but it is rarely found outside
poetry.
151

(d) The ending of the genitive masculine singular is

pronounced -vo. This appUes to aU adjectives, hard,
soft, or mixed.

(2) 'Soft' adjectives. Nearly aU soft adjectives are those

with the endings -HHH. They are few in number and
are declined as foUows:
Norn,
ACC.

Masc.
CHHHH
CHHHH

Gen.
Dat.

CHHero
CHHeMy

Singular
F e m . Neuter
CHHHH caaee
CHHKU0 CHHee

(cHHero)

Plural
All Genders
crne
CHHHC
(CHHHX)

CHHeH
CHHett

cimero
CHHeiwy

CHHHX
CHHHM

Instr.

CHHHM

CHHeH

CHHHM

CHHHMH

Prep.

CHH6M

CHHeH

CHH6M

CHHHX

It wiU be seen from the above that 'soft' adjectives are

in fact the same as 'hard' ones except that the hard
vowels, a, y, o, and BI are replaced by their corresponding soft ones (a, at, e, n).
There are one or two adjectives ending in -HH (not -mm) which
can also be termed 'soft'; they are declined like t h e ordinal
number Tpnrii ' t h i r d ' :

Nom.
ACC.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

Masc.
TpTHH
TpTHH
(Tplbero)
Tpibero
TpraeMy
TpibHM
TpTbeM

Singular
Fem.
Neuter
TpTbH
TpTbe
TpTbK) Tplbe
Tprbea
Tpibe
Tprbea
Tprbea

ipibero
iprbeMy
xprbHM
TprbeM

Plural
All Genders
TpTbH
TpTbH
(TpTbHX)
TpibHx
iprbHM
TpTbHMH
TprbHx

Adjectives of this type are mostly relative adjectives and are

derived from names of animals: MeflBaoH ' b e a r ' s ' (made of a
bear), JIHCHH 'fox's', co6iHU ' d o g ' s '.

I52

(3) 'Mixed' adjectives. These are of two types: (a) Those

with the stem ending in r, K, or x. These are declined
in exactly the same way as HBMH except that the
letter M is replaced by H. If the stress is on the end,
then the nominative masculine singular wUl end in
-6M (mioxA, flopora).
Thus pyccKHtt is declined as foUows:
Masc.
Norn.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

pyccKHH
PYCCKHH
(pyccKoro)
pyccKoro
pyCCKOMy
pyCCKHM
pyCCKOM

Fem.

Neuter

All Genders

pyccKaa
pyCCKVK

pyccKoe
pyccKoe

pyCCKOH
pyccKo
pyCCKOH
PYCCKO

pyccKoro
pyCCKOMy
pyCCKHM
pyCCKOM

pyCCKHC
py ccKHe
(pyccKHx)
pyCCKHX
pyCCKHM
pyCCKHMH
pyCCKHX

The interrogative pronoun KaKa and the demonstrative pronoun Taxon 'such' are declined in the same
way as pyccrara, roioxH.
(b) These with the stem ending in JK, n, m, or m,.
Again the letter w is replaced by H (xopmaa); the
letter o (when not stressed) is replaced by e. If the
stress is on the end, then the nominative masculine
singular wiU end in -on and the o of the other cases
will be retained throughout. Thus, xopmna and
60JIMHH are declined as foUows:
Singular
Nom.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

Masc.
xopmaa
xopiHHH
(xopmero
xopmero
xopmeMy
xopmHM
xopmeM

6ojn.mH
6ojn>mfi
6ojn>Hiro)
6ojn>mro
6ojn<m6My
6ojn>mHM
6ojn>mM

153

Fem.
xopmaa
xopmyH

oonbina
6ojn>myHj

xopmett
xopmett
xopmea
xopme

6ojn>m6S
6ojn,mH
ojitmH
6ojn>mH

Plural

Singular
Neuter

All Genders

Nom.
Ace.

xopmee
xopmee

Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

xopmero 6oabm6ro
xopmerny QojibmMy
XOpUTHM
6ojn>mHM
xopmeM OOJTbmM

6ojH>m6e
6ojn>me

xopnme
xopnnae
(xopnmx
xopmHx
XOpDTHM
XOpIHHMH
XOpUIHX

6ojibmHe
6ojn>mHe
60JIbIHHX)

6ojn>HjHx
6ojn.mHM
60JIMHHMH

6oJniKx

Note: When 'such' or 'so' are used with adjectives in

Russian, if the adjective is in the long form, then
TaKH, xanfl, Tane must be used:
MBI

HCHBM B

T&KM

We live in such a big town.

3Ta KHHra rasest mrrepcHBH.

This book is so interesting.

SOJJMHM rpofle.

When, however, the short or predicative form of the

adjective is used, then only rax may be used.
3 i a KHara iraK HHrepecBa.

This book is s o interesting.

Relative Clauses
In order to translate 'who', 'which' in a relative
clause in Russian, the relative pronoun KOTp&in is
used. It declines exactly like HBBIH (KOTP&H, KOT6paa, KOTpoe). Its gender in the singular is determinded by the noun it refers to:
tfenoBK, KoipwH TaM
CHflHT,...
H6J10KO, KOTpoe aejKno
Ha cToji,...

154

The man who is sitting

there...
The apple which was lying
on the table ...

Its case is determined by its function in the relative

clause:
^leaoBeK, KOTpoMy (dat.)
The man to whom I gave
an apple ...
a flan a&ioKo,...
3KfflflHBa, KOTpyio (ace.)
The woman you saw ...
Tbl BHflejI, ...
It can also be used with prepositions:
KHHra, o KOTpoii (prep.)
The book I was talking
about ...
a roBopaJi,...

In orderen translate 'whose' in a relative clause the

genitive of KOT6PMH is used and is usuaUy placed
second in theclause:
^eaoBK, cecrpy KOTOporo TM SHemb,...

The man whose sister you

know ...

Note that a relative clause in Russian is always preceded (and, if possible, ended) by a comma.
Do not confuse nanon 'which', 'what' with KOTOpbin.
The former is usuaUy confined to questions and
exclamations:
KaKyw mjiany Tbi HOCHJia ?
KaKH KpacHBbT BHfl!

Which hat were you wearing?

What a beautiful view!

KoTpWH, although sometimes used for questions

(e.g. KOTpbrH nac? 'what time is it?') is mostly confined to relative clauses.
The Reflexive Pronoun ce6a
As has been mentioned above (Lesson 12), the reflexive
pronoun ce5a, which means 'oneself', is. not found
in the nominative as it can never be the subject of a
sentence. It is declined as foUows:
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

ceSa
ce6a
ce6
coSH (CO6H>)
ceS

155

Ce5a can only refer to the subject of the sentence and

can be used to refer to any person, gender or number.
It can be used with prepositions as weU. E.g.:
OH Kynnn ce6 (dat.) (or
fljia ce6a) KHary.
Mbi roBopHjm o ceS.
Tbi BHflHmb ce6ji B 3pKane ?

He bought himself a book.

We were talking about ourselves.
Can you see yourself in the
mirror ?

Note particularly the expressions npHHecTH (npHBe3TH) c C06 'to bring with one' and B3HTB C CO6H
'to take with one':
ripaHecH KHHTH c C06H.
OH B3HJI c co6H naKr.

Bring your books with you.

He took the parcel with
him.

Impersonal Verbs
There are a few impersonal verbs in Russian which are
limited to the third person singular (and to the neuter,
if the verb is in the past). They usuaUy express a
phenomenon of nature, such as cBeTeT 'it is getting
Ught', cMepKjiocB 'it was getting dark'.
Sometimes a verb (usuaUy intransitive) when made
reflexive can be used impersonaUy with the dative of
the person to whom the action refers. The verb then
expresses an action which takes place independently of
the wiU of the person (e.g. MHe He pa60TaTCH ' I don't
feel like working'). A verb frequently used in this
way is XOTCTBCH:
MHe xoTaocb HOHTB B
TeTp.
EMy xieTca ecib.

I felt like going to the

theatre.
He is hungry.

As can be seen from the above examples there is Utile

or no difference from xoTTB (cf. H xoTn IIOHTH
B Teaip; OH xqer ecrb).
156

TEKCTW
OflHjKflbi B EOJTBIHM TeTpe inna nepa pyccKoro
KOMno3HTopa rnHHKH HaH CycHHH. POJTB HapflHoro repH HC^OJTHHH coBcM MonoflH a p r a c r ,
KapBpa KOTporo ^eHb HHrepcHa. C OJTBHIHM
yflOBJTBCTBHeM cjiyniajm er npeKpcHoe nmie H
BocxHmJiHCb er 3aMeHTenBHbiM TajiHTOM. BcKpe
HMH MOJioflro neBfl crajio mnpoK H3BcTHO B
crpaH. ^
O MOJioflM apTHcre, KOTpbiM Bce TaK BocxmnJTHCB, craJTH nHcTB B ra3Tax, roBopHTB n o pflao.
IlySnHKa y3Hjia, KaK OH cran apTHCTOM.
ncjie mKJibi OH Hnan paSrara Ha ncen3HOH
flopre. B 3TO BpMH OH eine He flyMan, HTO OH yper
npocbeccHOHjiBHBiM apTHCTOM; eM^ fla He xoTnocB
craTB npotpeccHOHjTBHbiM neBflM. H o B CBoGflHoe
BpMH OH *mcro nen B Kjryoe. O H nen pycocne HapflHbie ncHH, KOTpbie er TOBapmnH cnymanH c 6OJTBIIIHM yflOBJTBCTBHeM. B KjTye OH CKpO Clan H3BcreH, H HaKOHq er OTnpBHJTH B KOHcepBaTpmo
yHHTBCH n m n o . n c j ie KOHcepBaTpmi OH nocryrrHJi
B Tpynny EoJTBmro Teipa. TaK npefl MOJIOB'IM
neBflM OTKpbLJiaCb HBaH 5KH3HB.

n o e f l noflomji K CTammH. Monofl mDKeHp

MnxaHJi COKOJIB comn c TH>KjibiM qeMOflHOM Ha
iuiaT(ppMy H nomn K Bbrxofly Ha njiinaflB.
HCT JTH Ha nnm.aflH aBTOMoajiH H3 Konx3a? nofl^Maji OH.
MnxaHH xan K crpbiM poflHTenHM, KOTpbie
JKHJTH B KOJTX3e HBaH 3KH3HB, a OT CTaHUHH flO
flepBHH SB'UIO TpHflflaTB KHJTOMTpOB. O H Bb'mieii Ha
njim.aflB. TyT OH yBHflen npefl cofi crporo flpyra
BCKI, KOTpBTH CTOHJI KOJIO HBoro rpy30BHK.
Bca, 3flpBCTByo! - CKa3n OH.

157

 3flpBCTByH, Mama! He cp3y a ysan TCH. T B I

K poflHrejiHM ?
,H,a, H peiiiHJi noceTHTB OTfl H MaTB. A HTO TBI
fljiaemb?
Si c rpy30BHKM. Be3y B KOJTX3HBIH Mara3HH
p3Hbie TOBpbi. Mbi c TO66H nofleM BMcre. CaflHCb
KO MH B KaHHy.
OHH fljrro xana H Bc BpMH pa3roBpHBanH
MJKfly C06. yc cMepKnocb, Korfl rpjraoBHK cran
npH6jm>KTBCH K Konx3y.

ynPAiKHEHHfl
1. Put the words in brackets in the appropriate cases:
(1) B (EOJTBHIH TeTp) nenn HapflHbie apTHCTbi, o
(KOTpbie) H MHro cjnnian.
(2) Y MeHH HCT (CBOSflHOe BpMH).
(3) Mbi pa3roBpHBana c (TaKO HHTepcHbm ienoBK).
(4) He 6yflb B (TaKe co6m>e HacrpoHae)! EyflB B
(xopmee HacrpoHae)!
(5) HenoBK, c CMHOM (KOTpbra) Tbi roBopnn,
JKHBCT B (MneHBKHH flOM).
(6) P3BICTOHTB (CHHHH Ba3a).
(7) ^TO Tbl B3HH C (ce6fl) ?
(8) He jnoojn (nrfla), KOTpbie roBopHT TJTBKO O
(ceH).
(9) Tbi HHKorfl He craneim (Benaiam uesp).
2.

Insert suitable adjectives in the blank spaces:

(1) Si neHB jnoojn ... ncHH.
(2) Mbi Bce BocxamaeMCH ... apTcroM.
(3) Ha ... H6e CBCTHJIO ... cjnme.
(4) OH HOCHJia ... mjimry.
(5) O H Kyrrnn ce6 HcKonBKO ... KHHT.
(6) O H HHKorn He nen B TaKM ... Teipe.
158

Translate into Russian:

(i) I did not know that there are no new teachers.
(2) I did not recognize your Russian uncle when he
came up to me in the street.
(3) The book I bought yesterday seems a very good
one.
(4) Nicholas and I entered the university together.
(5) Have you brought with you the letter he wrote
you yesterday ?
(6) Which house do you five in ?
(7) It was growing light when the train approached
the station.
(8) Who is that wonderful woman who Uves in the
third house on the left? Oh, that's his sister. Do
you want to talk to her ?
(9) I feel like dancing tonight but I don't know who
to dance with.
(10) Don't think that the pubUc admires such bad
singing.

159

YPOK 22

CJIOBAPb
DorTbTH adj. rich
60THHOK m. (gen. sing. 6ofHHKa
gen. pl. 60THHOK) shoe
SpiOKH pl. (gen. 6pioK) trousers
BecJibiH adj. happy, gay, jolly
BbicTaBKa/. exhibition
racTyK m. tie
rop3flo adv. far, much
emBbffl adj. (short form flmeB,
flemeB, flnieBo; -bi) cheap
sanpc m. request, demand
H3HIHHHH adj. elegant, graceful
KOHHHO adv. of course
KOCTKJM m. costume, suit
KpMe pr. +gen. besides, apart
from
MarpHH / .
cloth,
fabric,
material; matter
MOflnb / . model
MOfleabp m. (dress) designer
Ha3HatiHHe . purpose, designation
HH3KHH adj. (short form HH30K,
HH3K, HH3KO; -H) low
6yBb / . footwear
oflMKfla/. clothes

OTBT m. answer
OTBTHTb II pf. (OTBiy, OTBnmn.) to answer
opHTHHJibHbiH adj. original
OTKpb'rnie n. opening; discovery
naJibT n. indeclinable (over)coat
nepqTKa / . (gen. pl. nepqTOK)
glove
nHflacK m. (gen. miflJKaK)
jacket
ruiTbe . dress, frock
nonpocHTb II pf. (nonpomy,
nonpcHmb) to ask, demand1
npocTa adj. simple
paoTHHua / . woman-worker
pa3HOo6p3Hbm adj. of great
variety, varied, various
cBTjuiH adj.
light,
lightcoloured
cKpwH adj. quick
cKpMHMH adj. modest
c03flTb mixed conj. pf. (see
flan., past tense c3flaa, co3flaa, c3flano; -H) to create
cnpocHTb II pf. (cnpomy, cnpcamb) to ask, to questioni

D o not confuse nonpocrb (imperfective npocaTb II) 'to ask', 'to

request' with cnpocHTb (imperfective cnpimiBaTb) 'to ask', 'to
question'. Compare the following sentences:
He asked me to leave the
O H nonpocHJi Mena BBIHTH H3
room.
KMHaTbI.
He asked me if I was going to
OH cnpocHJi MeH, fly aa a B
Moscow.
MocKBy

160

cyMOiKa / . (gen. pl. CJMOKK)

(hand)bag
Tp6oBaTejn>HbiH adj. demanding, exacting, particular
Tyduia / . (gen. pl. rydiejn.) shoe,
slipper

yflHbia adj. convenient, comfortable

(paeon m. fashion, style
ier m. (nom. pl. rmeT gen. pl.
nserB) colour^
iieHTpjn>HbTH adj. central

2. Ber 'colour' with its plural rmeT should not be confused with
rmeTK (gen. sing. irseiK) 'flower', which has as its plural
nBeTb'i, HBeTB.

Bbipancnna
Bc Somme

pa6TaTb Hafl+instr.
C KjKflbIM TflOM
B TO ace BpMa
B OTBT sa+acc. ...
3afljrro ap+gen. ...

more and more

to work at...
year in, year out; with each year
at the same time
in answer to ...
long before ...

TPAMMATHKA
i. Degrees of Comparison
(i) The comparative of adjectives. There are three types of
comparative adjective in Russian:
(a) The compound comparative (cf. Engsh 'more
stupid')
(b) The short comparative (cf. Enghsh 'stupider')
(c) The short comparative with adjectival ending.
(a) The Compound Comparative. This is formed by
using the unchangeable adverb 66nee ('more') +
the long form of the adjective in any gender, case, or
number.
66jir.ee KpacHsaa flepBHa
SJiee KpacHBbie aepeBba
Mbi iKHBM B 66nee HBOM
flMe.

a more beautiful village

more beautiful trees
We live in a newer house.

The adverb MHee 'less' can be-used in exactly the

same way:
MHee yMEatrtt cry fleur
161

a less intelligent student

(b) The Short Comparative. This is formed either by

adding - e e or - e n to the end of the stem:
KpacHBee (-eft), HOBe (-eis), yMHe (-e)
The stress on such comparatives is on the end if the adjective is
of two syllables, or as in the positive if it is of three or more
syllables (KpacaBee) with the following exceptions: xoaoflHe,
ropHae, Beceae.
or, if the stem ends in r, K, X, fl, or T, by adding - e and
softening the last consonant of the stem:
flopora - flopxce; pKHH - pie; THXHH - Tame; MOJioflfi MOJijKe; GorTMH - 6orie.
Some comparatives of this latter type are irregular:
e.g.
BbicKHH - Bb'nne; iimpKirii - mape;flemBbiH- neuiBjie;
xopmaa - jryqme; TIJIOXH - x#*e; Sojibiuo - 6ja>me;
MJieHbKHH - MHbme;flaaeKH-flJn>me,flaee.
The short comparative is used either predicatively:
3TOT rpofl em KpacHsee.

This town is even more

beautiful.

or as the comparative of the adverb:

OH Hflr cKope.

He is walking more
quickly.
It can only very rarely be used as an attribute :
I do not know of a man
SI He 3Hio qeJioBKa yitrae
er.
cleverer than he.
It foUows, therefore, that if a comparative precedes a
noun, the long form must be used. 'A quicker train' can
only be translated by 66aee CKOpbr ne3fl. CKope
ne3fl is impossible.
If the comparative is used predicatively, it is nearly
always preferable to use the short form (provided it
exists). In other words it is better to say OTOT ne3fl
CKope than STOT ne3fl jiee cKpbia. Certain
162

adjectives, however (such as those ending in -nneCKHH) have no short comparative forms - and, indeed,
no short forms in general. With them the long form
must be used on all occasions.
(c) The Short (Declinable) Comparative. There are
four pairs of adjectives with short adjectival comparative forms. They decline like ordinary adjectives:
66n&mHH 'greater' - MHBnraH 'lesser', 'smaller'
nymnHH 'better' - xynirraH 'worse'
BMCHiHH 'superior' - m'iamini 'inferior'
CTpmHH 'elder', 'senior' - jvuiaflmaa 'younger', 'junior'

Only the first pair are comparatives proper and must

be used when the comparative is required as an
attribute. E.g.:
Mbi HUIBM B 66n&meM
(inHbineM)
flMe.

We live in a bigger (smaller) house. -

(6nee 6OJTBIHH cannot be used).

The rest are reaUy superlatives ('best', 'worst',
'highest', etc.) which can also be used as comparatives.
Note that BBICIIIHH and HH3IHHH are not used to mean
'higher' and 'lower' in a physical sense; for these
jiee BbicKHH, 6jiee HH3KHH must be used when
required as attributes (e.g. 6onee BWCOKHH AOM 'a
taUer house'):
None of these forms is ever used predicatively.
There is a special short or predicative form in -e for
each:
66juf>ine 'bigger' - Memme 'smaller'
jryqme 'better' - xyace 'worse'
BUme 'higher' - HHMce 'lower'
erapnie 'older' - MOJiMce 'younger'
OH BMme H cTpme H
He is taller and older and
plays better.
HrpeT ayqme.
Note: 6jn>me and MHbme are also used as the comparatives of
MHTO 'much' and Mno 'little'; as such they are followed by
the genitive. Eja>me xjiSa 'more bread'.

163

(2) The object of comparison. In Russian the object of comparison is either

(a) introduced by the conjunction CM (preceded by a
comma):
H nolo xyMce,TOMHpima.
Moa KMHaia mpe, <ieM
Bina.

I sing worse than Irina.

My room is wider than
yours.

or (b) placed in the genitive:

Bbi Blme Mena.
OH yMHe e.

You are taller than I (am).

He is cleverer than she
(is).

With the short form of the comparative (b) tends to be

used more than (a), (a), however, must be used with
the compound comparative and when the objects compared are not in the nominative case:
OH HHTepecyeTca HCTpnea Sjibme, ieM OHTJTHHCKHM H3BIKM.

He is more interested in
history than in English.

It is also essential to use HCM when the object of comparison is 'his', 'hers', 'theirs', etc.
Hma KMrara Miame,
eM HX.

Our room is smaller than

theirs.

(Hma KMBHTa Mm>me HX would mean 'our room is

smaller than them').
Note: when the expression 'more than that of ...' is translated
into Russian ('the climate in England is worse than that of
Russia') the subject of the main clause must be repeated to
replace 'that': KjmMaT AHTJIHH xya<e, %M KJIHMET Foccaa.
Also that in order to qualify the comparative ('a little cleverer')
the prefix no- may be added to the short form: noyMHe, HOBMme.
And that to translate 'much', 'far' with the comparative, the
word ropsflo is used.
OH rop3flo yMHe Mena.
He is far cleverer than I.

164

(3) The superlative of adjectives. There are two kinds of

superlative in Russian.
(a) The compound superlative.
(b) The short (or suffixal) superlative.
(a) The Compound Superlative is formed by putting
before the positive form of the adjective cMun,
which declines itself like an adjective and agrees in
case, number, and gender with the adjective. .
civian CKyroaa Hiinnia
SI roBopHJi c cMbiM yiMHUM yqeHHKM.

the most boring woman

I talked to the cleverest
pupil.

There is no short form and no adverbial form.

Note: With the eight adjectives which have a short declinable
comparative (see above (i) (c)), the superlative is usually made
by adding caMbr to the comparative form: cMti jiyqmHH 'the
best'. To translate 'tallest' and 'lowest' (physically) cMbra
BbicKHH and cMbi HH3KHH must be used.

The compound superlative can also be formed by

putting the indeclinable Hanfjnee 'the most' before
the long form of the adjective.
3TOT cafl HanSnee KpacHBMH B rpofle.

This garden is the most

beautiful in the town.

It can also be used with an adverb:

HanSJiee KpacHBo njia
OjTbra.

Olga sang the most beautifully.

The object of comparison after a superlative is usuaUy

expressed by H3+the genitive plural:
cMbiH yMHbiH H3 CTyflHTOB

the cleverest of students

(b) The Short or Suffixal Superlative. This is formed

by adding - e a n i e n (or -aftnxaB, if the preceding
letter is xc, a, m , or ni) to the stem of the adjective.
165

Only adjectives which have a short comparative in -ee

or -e can have this type of superlative (HOBfirrma,
THmHuiHii), and not all of these. They are declined
like adjectives and there is no short form.
There is very rarely any comparative force in such
superlatives; they usuaUy express the absolute superlative. Thus, OHflopeniHHnejioBK means 'he is an
extremely kind man', 'he is the kindest of men'.
Sometimes Haa- can be added to this type of superlative to intensify the meaning. HaHflo6pmHH 'exceptionally kind'.

A frequent way of expressing the superlative in Russian

is the use of the comparative+Bcer or Bcex:
Si 66jTBme Bcer mrrepecyiocb HcropneH.
3TOT yqeHHK yMHe Bcex
B mKJie.

I am most of all interested

in history (lit. more than
anything).
This pupil is the cleverest
of all in the school (lit.
cleverer than all).

Relative Clauses after TOT, TO, Te, and Bce

In order to translate 'he who' and 'those who' into
Russian, TOT and Te are often used with KTO instead of
KOTpBi. After Te, KTO, the verb in the relative clause
is either in the singular or the plural.
TOT, KTO 3HeT TO, yMHbiH lejiOBK.
Te, KTO xner (XOTHT) noxaTb, flOJDKH MHe

He who knows this is a

clever man.
Those who want to go
must give me the money.

flaTb flHbl-H.

After see 'everything' and TO 'that', *rro is used.

Bce, TTo Tbi cKa3ji, npBaa.

Everything you said is the

truth.

'AU who' is translated in Russian by Bce, KTO. The

verb goes into the singular or the plural.
166

TEKCT
BecH. Cjnrne CBenir Bc apqe . B MocKB OTKpb'uiacB
Bb*iCTaBKa oflKflbi.
XyflHamKH crjTH roTBHTBCH K BBicTaBKe 3aflnro
flo e OTKpTHH. MoflejTbpbi 6jn.me Mcnna paoTana
Hafl MOfljiHMH. O H H H3jrqjm 3anpcbi nyjmKH, KOTpbie
craHBHTCH Bc TpSoBaTejTbHee c KngnaM rflOM. TaK,
HanpHMp, paTHHHbi OHHH dp6pHKH nonpocHjm H e n TpjIBHBIH flOM MOfljieH C03flTB HCKOJTBKO HBblX
(pacHOB oflKflbi fljiH pa6ibi, 6nee npocTbrx H yflHbrx,
MeM pHbme, H B TO Hte BpMH ojiee KpacHBbrx. B
OTBT Ha TOT 3anpc MOflejn>pbi c3flajm HcKOHBKO
(pacHOB njiTbeB H KOCTIOMOB, KOTpbie OBUTH rop3flO
yfl6Hee AJIH paTbi Ha <h6pHKe; paSTHHUbi THte
CHHTann, HTo OHH KpacHBee.
H a Bb'icraBKe nocerHTejiH yBHflejm IKUIBT, nnTBH H
KOCTlMbl H3 pa3H006p3HeHHIHX MaTpHH. KoHHHO, TaM
SJTbme oflKflbi J I H mmami,

neM AJIH MynciBH, XOTH

TaM 5biJiH nanbT, rnnracaKH, prrai H KocnMbi AJIH

MyjKHHH. Ofla<fla Ha Bb'icraBKe 6bui cMoro pa3Hoo6pa3Horo Ha3Ha^HHH H (pacHa: H ffjia flMa, H AJIH yjranbi, H
fljiH paSTbi, H fljiH TeTpa H BenepB.1 H n e r ofljKflbi
Tnte 6bum cMbie pa3Hoo6pa3Hbie: AJIH Monoflbrx n p q e
H CBerae, flJiH jnoflH nocrpme - TeMHe H CKpoMHe.
KpMe oflHtflbi, Ha Bb'icraBKe MJKHO 6bino yBHflerB
TaKHce m n a n b i , nepnTKH, cyMomoi, rjiciyKH, OVBB 60THHKH, Tydpjm, cMbrx H3HiHHbix H opHrHHanbHbix
rhacHOB.
1. The word Biep (pl. Beiep), apart from meaning 'evening', can
also be used for 'party'. The word BeqepHHKa likewise means
'party'.

ynPAXCHEHHfl
1. Put the adjective or the adverb in the foUowing sentences (a) in the comparative and (b) in the superlative
degree:
( i ) M b i KHBM B KpaCHBOM flMe.
(2) O H HflT bicrpo.

167

(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

3TOT nenoBK 6orT.

Si KyriHJi flemBoe MHCO.
y He yfl6m>ie H H3aumbie Tydun*.
TyT B TO KMHaTe XJIOAHO.
Mo 6paT BBICKHH.
y Her xopnme KHHTH.

2. Add a suitable second term of comparison to the

foUowing
(e.g. OH Bb'ime - OH Bbnue Memt or ieM H.):
(r) OH 66jn.me HHTepecyercH rpaMMTHKOH ...
(2) 3TOT ne3fl CMblH MAJieHHblH ...
(3) Tbi crpme ... ?
(4) O H KynHJi 6nee apratii rjicryK ...
(5) 3TOT MOAenBp rop3AO opHrmiaJiBHee ...
(6) O H jryqme HrpeT Ha poHJie ...
3. Translate into Russian:
(1) He who told you this is more inteUigent than I
thought.
(2) Eveiything he knows is interesting.
(3) This tie is far brighter than his.
(4) I am more interested in the theatre than in the
cinema.
(5) He asked me to go a Uttle quicker.
(6) Why do you think that dress designers wear
brighter clothes than factory workers ?
(7) I went to the shop but was unable to buy either
trousers, gloves, or a jacket.
(8) He asked me if cigarettes were cheaper in Russia
than in England.
(9) My elder sister has fewer dresses than you have.
(10) Every year he works more and more on the book
he started when he was twenty-two.
(11) She is the most inteUigent and at the same time
the most modest woman I know. Unfortunately
she is not at aU beautiful.
(12) What are you most interested in ?
(13) Mind you don't forget your bag and gloves.
168

YPOK 23

CJlOBAPb
KTOBbra 3an assembly hall
acrmpHT m. research student,
postgraduate student
ayflHTpHH / . lecture room;
audience
, 6accuH m. basin, pool
6auiHH / . (gen. pl. 6meH) tower
6opofl / . (ace. sing. 6pofly)
nom. pl. 6poflbi) beard
SoTamnecKHH adj. botanical
BeflyiuHH part, leading
B03BbIHlTbCH I (B03Bbim||lOCb,
-embca) to rise up
Bys m. higher educational institution1
remap m. hectare (10,000 sq.
metres, 2.471 acres)
ropoflK m. (gen. ropoflK) little
town
rocyflpcTBeHHbTH adj. state
(attr.)
necHTOK m. (gen.flecaTKa)ten*
flonHT m. university lecturer

jKHBonHCHbiH adj. picturesque

SaHHMTb I (3aHHM|io, -emb) to
occupy3
jia6opaTpHH/. laboratory
o6cepBaTpHH / . observatory
orpMHbm adj. huge
OTjj.ejH.HMH adj. separate
nMHTHHK m. monument4
HJiBaHHe . swimming
ruiomflKa/. (gen. pl. njiomflOK)
ground; cnopTHBHaa ruiomflKa sports ground, playing
field
njiHMH adj. (short form HOJIOH,
nojm, -6; -b'i) full
CKyjibrrrypa / . sculpture; statue
cnopTHBHbi adj.
sporting;
sport(s) (attr.)
CTojiHua/. capital
CTopoH / . (ace. sing. cropoHy,
nom. pl. CTpoHbi, gen. pl.
cTopH) side

i. By3 is an abbreviation formed from the initial letters of Bb'icmee

yqeHoe 3aBeflHHe 'higher educational institution'.
2. AecHTOK is not a numeral but a noun (like the English 'dozen')
meaning 'ten' (of identical things).
3. 3aHHMTb means either to occupy physically (OH 3aHHMeT Mo
Mcro 'he is occupying my place') or 'to interest* (nenA iein.
samiMeT 3TOT Bonpc ' I am very interested in this question').
4. nMHTHHK is followed by the dative of the person or thing the
monument represents: nMHTHHK nyiinonry.

169

TeppHTopHH/. territory
yiHbiH adj. learned. As noun
scientist, scholar
(paKyjibTT m. faculty
(pH3HtiecKHH adj. physical; physics (attr.)

XHMHqecKHH
adj.
chemical,
chemistry (attr.)
iiejibiH adj. whole, entire
aBJiHTbca I (aBJiaJiocb, -embca)
to appear; to beS

HBJiarbca, the first meaning of which is 'to appear', 'to present

oneself' (HBJIHTBCH B cyfl is 'to appear before court*) is also used
as a strong auxiliary verb 'to be'. When it has this meaning it is
followed by the instrumental: OH aBjiaerca flapKiopoM 'he is
the director'.

B&ipaxcHHH
B cMOM fljie
CaM CO66K) pa3yMeTca.

in actual fact, actually

It goes without saying.

rPAMMATHKA
i. Possessive Pronouns
The possessive pronouns MOH 'my', nam 'our', and
nea 'whose' are declined as foUows:
Singular
Fem.
MOH, Hma, q&H

Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

Masc.
MOH, Ham, qe
MOH, Ham, qett
(Moer, Hmero, vter)
Moer, Hmero, tn.er
MoeMy, HmeMy, qbeniy
MOHM, HmHM, I M I M
Mo'M, HmeM, <n>M

Nom.
Ace.

Singular Neuter
Mo, Hme, 1*8
Mo, Hme, Hb

Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

Moer, Hmero, m>er

MoeMy, HmeMy, q&eM^
MOHM, HmHM, TOHM
MoM, HmeM, qtM

Plural All Genders

MOH, HlHH, IQ.H
MOH, Himi, H.H
(MOJ&X, Hurax, q&Hx)
MOHX, HmHX, 'IbHX
MOHM, HtOHM, MbHM
MOHMH, HlHHMHj tJbBJUH
M0HX3 Hurax, MbHx

Nom.
Ace.

170

MOH>, Hmy, q&K)

Mott, Hmett, *ns.eH

MOH, Hme, <qbea
Moa, Hmea, *ne
Moa, Hmea, . e

TBOH 'your' ('thy') is declined like

Bam 'you' is declined like Bam.

MOJ

As with adjectives, there are alternative forms for

the accusative masculine singular and the accusative
plural:
MO, MOB if the noun is inanimate (OH BHfleji MOB
flOM, TBOH KHHTH).
Moer, MOBx if the noun is animate (no matter
whether masculine or feminine in the plural) (OH
BcrpeTHJi Moer flpyra, Hmiix flpy3n).
The instrumental feminine singular of aU pronouns
also has an alternative form -era which is rarely found
outside poetry.
*IeB 'whose' is almost exclusively used for questions
and indirect questions:
SI He 3Hio, Ha ibM Mcre OH
CHflHT.

I don't know whose place

he is sitting in.

It is only very rarely used to translate 'whose' in a

relative clause; instead, the genitive of KOTOpua is
used, see Lesson 21.
The Reflexive Possessive P r o n o u n CBO
The reflexive possessive pronoun CBOH, which is
declined like MOB, must be studied very carefuUy. It
means 'one's own', like suus in Latin, and refers
usuaUy to the subject of the sentence, whether this be
' I ' , 'you', ' h e ' , 'we' or any other person - in other
words, it replaces 'my', 'your', 'his', 'our', etc.
when ' I ' , 'you', ' h e ' , etc., are the subject of the
sentence:
SI 3a6b'iJi CBOH
flHbrn.
T u jnoSmiib CBOK pflHHy?
O H npHHc CBOH> KHHry.
M H yoHjm CBOK) co6Ky.

171

I have forgotten m y money.

Do y o u love y o u r country ?
H e brought his book.
W e killed o u r dog.

In the preceding sentences remember that CBOH, whUe

it refers to the subject, does not qualify it. In
fact, it may be used in any position (e.g. with the
direct or indirect object, after a preposition, etc.) provided it does not qualify the subject:
O H jKHBT B CBOM
T H nnieiHb CBoeMy
ry ?

flMe.
flpy-

He lives in bis (own)

house.
Are you writing to your
friend ?

Do not be misled by the fact that 'his', 'her', etc., in

Enghsh, whUe it may refer to the subject of the
sentence, may none the less qualify the subject of a
subordinate clause. In this case CBOH may not be used.
Thus in the sentence, 'he says that his sister is in
Moscow', 'his' must be translated by er, because it
qualifies the subject ('sister') of the clause: OH roBOpHT, rro er cecrp B MocKB.
Try to remember these two rules:
(i) CBOH must refer to the subject of the nearest verb.
(2) CBOH must never qualify the subject of a sentence.
Now in certain cases, even when CBOH satisfies the
above two conditions, it need not necessarily be used.
When the subject of the sentence is a, MM, or BM, it can
be replaced by MOH, Bam, or am;
M B I npHHecJiH HIIIH (or

We brought our books.

CBOH) KHHTH.

When TM is the subject, however, it is almost obgatory to use CBOH:

T M qHTemb CBOK> (not
TBOK>) KHHTy ?

Are you reading your book ?

When the subject of the verb is in the 3rd person, however, then it is obligatory to use CBOH (provided, of
course, it refers to the subject); er, e, or ax would
mean 'somebody else's'. Thus, HBH ynji CBOHJ
coaKy means 'Ivan kiUed his (Ivan's) dog'; HBaH
yHJi er coaKy would mean 'Ivan kiUed his (Nicholas's) dog'.
172

If it is possible to omit the reflexive pronoun in

Russian without spoiling the sense of the sentence,
then omit it. Thus, to translate 'she loves her mother'
there is no need to put in CBOK>. OH moom" MaTb is
quite unambiguous.
Note: There are of course one or two occasions when
the above rules are broken and CBOH may qualify the
subject of the sentence. CBOH may, for instance, be
used to stress ownership in y MeHH, y Te6 phrases:
Y HaC eCTb CBOH ROM B
flepBHe.

We've got our own house

in the country.

It is also used in one or two set phrases such as:

OH y Hac CBOH qejioBK.

CBOH pyoamKa 6jnbKe K

Tjry.

KTO TaM 6yfleT? TOJOKO

CBOH.

He's one of us, one of the

family, one of the boys.
One's own shirt is closer to
the body (i.e. I'm all right,
Jack).
Who'll be there? Only
close friends (relations,
etc.), no outsiders.

Demonstrative Pronouns 5TOT and TOT

The demonstrative pronoun 5TOT is dechned as
foUows:
Norn.
Ace.
Gen.
Dot.
Instr.
Prep.

TOT

Singular
Fem. Neuter
ra
TO

TOT

Ty

Masc.

TO

(Toro)

Plural
All Genders
TH
TH
(THX)
THX

Toro

TOH

TOTO

TOMy

TOH

TOMy

THM

TOH

THM

THM
THMH

TOM

TOH

TOM

TBX

TOT, Ta, TO 'that' is dechned in the same way except

that B is replaced throughout by e (i.e. Te, TOMH,
etc.).
TOT, apart from being used in conjunction with KTO
to translate 'he who' (see Lesson 22), is used to translate 'that (yonder)', often in contrast to STOT 'this
(close by)':
3Ta KHHra MOH, a Ta
(KHara) TBOH.

This book is mine, and

that one is yours.

Note that OAHH, OflH, OAH 'one' is declined like TOT; the H in
OflHH disappears in all other cases and the stress is on the last
syllable.

Determinative Pronouns caM, CMBIH, aecb

CaM '-self' is declined like TOT (caMor, caMOMy,
etc.). The stress, however, is always on the end,
except for the nominative plural (CMH) and the
instrumental plural (caMBMB), and there is an alternative form of the accusative feminine singular (caMO
and, more commonly, caMy).
CaM is used to add emphasis, usuaUy to personal
pronouns denoting human beings. It generaUy foUows
the personal pronoun or noun it adds emphasis to; but
it may be placed in any position in the sentence to give
particular stress.
SI caM TO cfljiaio. (or H
TO cfljiaio caM)
CaM npoipccop CKa3Ji
TO.

Mbi cMH nofleM.

OH yxaji c caMHM vqaTejieM.

174

I shall do it myself.
The professor said this hlmself.

We ourselves will go.

He left with the teacher
himself.

The deteiminatiye pronoun CMWH, which declines

like HBbia and retains the stress throughout on the
first syUable, apart from being used to form the
superlative (COMBI HBBTH) is also used for emphasis,
but for emphasis of inanimate nouns. It usuaUy
precedes the noun it stresses:
C O M M E rpofl qeHb KpaCHBbi.
O H paSTaer c CMOTO
yrp.

T h e town itself is very

beautiful.
H e has been working right
from the morning.

Note that when it is required to emphasize a noun and that noun

is qualified by an adjective, then caM must be used to avoid confusion with the superlative:
caM ueHTpanbHoe 3flHHe

the central building itself

(cMoe ueHTpJibHoe 3flHHe would mean ' t h e most central

building')

CMBiH is also used to emphasize TOT and TOT:

TOT cMMH lanosK
ara cajviaa KHHra

that very man

this very book

With TOT ce 'same' it can also be used for stress:

O H jKHBT B TOM ce (cMOM)
flMe.

H e lives in the
s a m e house.

(very)

Becb 'aU', 'whole' is dechned as foUows:

Nom.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

Masc.
Becb
Becb
(Bcer)
Bcer
BceM^
BceM
BcM

Singular
Fem. Neuter
BCH BCS
BCK> Bc
Bce
Bce
Been
Been

Bcer
BceM^
seem
BCM

Plural
All Genders
Bce
Bce (Bcex)
Bcex
. BceM
BCMH
Bcex

N.B. T h e preposition o with BcM, Bceii, Bcex can also become

060 (cf. 060 MHe). '

175

Becb can mean either 'whole':

BecBflOM6bui nJioH.
OH xoflHJi no aces KMaaie.

The whole house was full.

He walked up and down the
whole room.

or, in the plural, aU , every':

npaxoflHUH co acex KOHHOB cTpaHbi.

They came from all ends of

the country.

The neuter singular Bc and the plural Bce can also

mean 'eveiything' and 'everybody':
Bce roBopHT, ITO OH XOpom noT.
OH BceM HHTepecyeTca.

Everyone says he sings

well.
He is interested in everything.

The Compound Pronoun flpyr flpyra

In order to translate 'one another' flpyr flpyra is
used. Only the second element is dechned, and that
like a noun. There is no distinction for gender:
Ace.
pyr npyra
Gen.
pyr flpyra
Dat. flpyr flpyry
Instr. flpyr flpyroM
Prep.
pyr flpyre

The case is determined by the verb or by a preposition.

Thus, in 'we love one another' the accusative or genitive form is used; in 'we give one another presents' the dative. If a preposition is used ('they were talking
about each other'), then the preposition goes between
the two elements (flpyr o flpyre):
OHH pa3roBpHBaioT npyr
C flpyroM.

Bbi jno6HTe flpyr flpyra ?

176

They are talking to one

another.
Do you love one another ?

TEKCT
M O C K B C K H H rocyflpcTBeHHbrn yHHBepcHTr HMemi JIoMOHCOBa HBJIHCTCH BeflyUQM CpeflH BCeX COBTCKHX
BySOB.
y m m e p c H T e T 3aHHMeT HcKOHBKO 3flHHH. C i p b i e
3flmiH HaxflHTCH B cMOM nHrpe MoCKBbl, HeflajieK OT
KpeMJia. HBbie 3flHHH yHHBepcHTTa HaxoflHTca n a
BbicKOM 6 e p e r y MocKBb*i-peKH, Ha JlemmcKHX r o p x .
3 T 0 njTblB yHHBepCHTTCKHH TOpOflK, KOTpblH 3aHHMer TeppHTpHio B TpHcra flBflqaTB reKrpoB. 1 B STOM
ropoflK HcKOJTBKO flecHTKOB 3flaHHH. H a njimaflH
MKfly HHMH CTOHT nMHTHHK JIOMOHCOBy. I l o CTOpOHM
6ojn>mro SaccHHa, npefl 3flHHeM (pH3HHecKoro H
xHMHHecKoro (paKyjrBTTOB, mecTB cKynBirryp pyccKHX
yqHbrx - (pH3HKOB H XHMHKOB.
B HBbrx 3flHHHX yHHBepcHTra MHro ayflHTpHH H
jiaopaTpH. B CMOM rnBHOM 3flHHH, KpMe ayju*TpHH, HaxflHTCH KTOBbiH 3aji Ha 1 5 0 0 HeHOBeK,1 Kjry,
cnopTHBHbie 3ajn>i.
^aCTb yHHBepCHTrCKHX 3flHHH 3aHHMlOT KBapTHpbl
fljiH npoqSeccopB H flonaroB yHHBepcHTTa. B Tex ace
3flHHHX eCTB H yflOHbie OTfljTBHbie KMHaTbl flJIH CTyflHTOB H acmipHTOB..
H a TeppHTpHH ymmepcHTeTa orpMHbiH 6oTaHHHecKHJ cafl H ocepBaTpHH, cnopTHBHbie imoinflKH H
acceHbi flJIH ruiBaHHH.
CaM neHTpjiBHoe 3flHHe M T Y , 2 BMcre c S i i m e a ,
B03BbmiCTCH Ha TpHcra ceMHfluaTB MTpoB 1 Hafl M o CKBH-peKOa. C 6mHH OTKpBmeTca rrpeKpcHbiH B H A
Ha BCK) CTonany.
1. Note the idiomatic use of prepositions with numerals in the
following cases:
TeppHTpHH B 320 reKTpoB
an area o f 320 hectares
KTOBMH 3ui Ha 1500 nejioan assembly hall t o seat
BK
1500 people
3flHHe B03Bbnnerca Ha
The building rises to a
317 MeTpoB.
height o f 317 metres.
2. MTV=MOCKBCKHH rocyflpcTBeHHbra VHHBepcHTT.

177

ynPASKHEHHH
i. Put the words in brackets in the appropriate case:
(i) Ha (m>) Mcre BBI CHfljiH co (ce Bnm) TOBpnmajHH?
(2) 3a (STOT)CTOJIMcHflji naen; 3a (TOT) - MnxaHJi.
(3) M B I BHep rOBOpHJTH o (BC TO).
(4) ^ T O OHH fljm (flpyr flpyra) ?
(5) Amie XHCTCH (caiwa) CKa3TB MHe 06 (TO).
(6) npefl (cMaa) nrameo Bce cryflHTbi Bbnnjni H3
ayflHTpHH.
2.

Insert either caM or cMbiH in the appropriate case,

gender, and number:
(1) EH ... xoTjiocB cjiymaTB JiKinno.
(2) C ... yrp MBI paSoTajTH.
(3) ... acceH HaxflHTCH npefl STHMH 3flHHHMH, a
... cnopTHBHbie ruiom.flKH 3a HHMH.
(4) O H yHHTCH B TOM ate ... KJicce, KaK H.

3. Insert CBOH, or, if this is impossible, a suitable

possessive pronoun in the blank spaces:
(i) Mbi HflM K ... flpy3BHM.
(2) O H roBopHT, HTO ... ora, 6neH.
(3) OjTbra He 3HeT, HTO ... Mync paccK3biBaer o ...
HCH3HH.
(4) GrapHK, KOTpbrii CHflHT H HHTeT ... KHHry, 6paT
... flHflH.
(5) T M nojryHHJia nncBM OT ... Mya<a?
4. Translate into Russian:
(1) My aunt and my uncle were talking to each other
about everything they could think of.
(2) Ever since morning he's been working in his
study.
(3) He bought his suit and his shoes in London.
178

(4) In actual fact he doesn't know whose bed he

slept in yesterday.
(5) She said that her uncle would spend two weeks
with her.
(6) I learned from the professor himself that the
university was closed.
(7) Everybody knows when she's in the swinmiing
bath.
(8) We've got our very own flat in London. Right in
the centre too.
(9) In the same faculty there are three professors.
(10) I can't say that I'm particularly interested in
this problem.
(11) This man's a professor, that one's a lecturer, and
the one with the beard is a postgraduate student.

179

y P O K 24

CJIOBAPfc
OHTbCa II (6ol|K>Cb, -HmbCH)
+gen. to fear
Bejiocnnfl m. bicycle
BeJiocHneflHCT m. cyclist
BMcro pr. (+gen.) instead of
B03BpamHHe n. return
BbieSJKTb I (Bbie33K||lO, -emb)
to ride out, drive out
Bb'rpacTH I pf. (Bb'rpacT||y, -emb,
past tense Bbipoc, -aa, -no;
-jm) to grow up
rocTHTb II (romy, rocTHmb) to
stay, be on a visit
rpynna/. group
ryflK m. (gen. rynK) hoot,
hooting; horn, hooter
rycTH adj. thick
fljio n. (pl. fleji) matter, business, affair

flMHK m. little house

3a6THTbca II (3a6?ycb, 3a6THmbca) to worry, take care
of, trouble
3aexaTb I pf. (3afl||y, -enn.) to
visit, call on 1
3aq m. (gen. 3ana, pl. 3HUbi)
hare
HMrb I (HM II K), -enn.) to have 2
jiecHHK m.
(gen. jiecHHK)
forester
MeflBflb m. bear
HaflocTb pf. (HafloM, Haflomb,
see ecib) to bore 3
Hafljiro adv. for long*
Ha3fl adv. back, agos
HapymTb I (Hapym||io, -emb)
to break, disturb

3axaTb (imperfective 3ae3H<Tb) K+dative means ' to call on someone', 'to visit' (by some form of transport). For visiting on foot
3aHTH (3axoflHTb) is used. 3axaTb, 3OHTH 3a+instr. means to call
for (and fetch) someone:
OH 3amji 3a MHOH.
He called for me.
HMrb 'to have' is rarely used to express simple possession - for
this y MeHH, y Tea, etc. are used. It is, however, used in certain
fixed formulas, such as HMrb yflOBJibCTBHe 'to have the pleasure';
He HMTb HHKaKro nDHHTHH 'to have no idea'; HMrb qecib 'to
have the honour'; HMrb npBO 'to have the right'; HMrb Mcro
'to take place'.
HaflocTb is usually used impersonally with the dative. Mae
Haflojio ... means 'I am bored, sick of ...'. It can have a subject
(OH MHe Haflona) or can be followed by an infinitive: MHe Haflono CMorprb Ha Her.

l8o

HeoJKHflaHHO adv. unexpectedly

HHKaKH pron. none, no, none
... whatever
HHKyfl adv. nowhere
HHMft pron. nobody's
OKHMHTb II pf. (OKmi|y, -HHIb)
to "finish (off)
OCTaHOBHTb II pf. (OCTaHOBJUO,
OCTaHBHHIb) tO Stop
OCraHOBHTbCH II pf. (ocraHOBjncb, ocTaHBambca) to stop
(intrans.)
ociaTbCH I pf. (ocrH||ycb, -embca) to stay, remain
OTKpMTbiH adj. open
oxra/. hunt, hunting
oxTHTbca II (oxiycb, oxTHHibCH) to hunt
oxoTHHK m. hunter
noHHTHe n. idea, understanding,
conception

nocjiTb I pf. (noniJi||K>, -mb)

to send
nocMOTpen. II pf. (nocMoipio,
nocMTpHmb) to look
npBO . right
npoxaTb I pf. (npofl||y, -enn.)
to go by (not on foot), to drive
by
npoaojKHTb II pf. (npojio>K||y,
npojijKHHib) to lay (of roads)
coBT m. advice
cTpiiiHbiH adj. terrible, dreadful, frightening
Taur / . taiga (wild forest
district)
THnnma/. quiet, silence
yoerTb I (y6er|io, -enn.) to
run away
lecTb / . honour
mocc n. (indeclinable) highway
motbp m. driver

4. Hafljrro means 'for long' when the intention of spending time is

understood (see Lesson 13).
O H yxaji HaflJiro.

He has gone away for a long time.

5. Ha3fl (or TOMy naa&a) is used after expressions of time in the

accusative to mean 'ago'.
HefljHO (TOM)>) BS3fl

a week ago

BbipanceHHH
CaflHTbCB (ceCTb) B aBTOM06HJH>
HH aa <rro
(HH 3a MTo He nofly)
HaTb ryflK
HflTH (xoflib) Ha OXOTy

to get into a car

not for anything
(I won't go for anything;
nothing would make me go)
to hoot the horn
to go hunting '

181

rPAMMATHKA
I, Negative Pronouns and Adverbs
(a) The negative pronouns BBKT and HHIT.

HBKT

'nobody' and H H I T 'nothing' are dechned in exactly

the same way as KTO and IT (see Lesson 16).

When they are used with a verb, no matter what case
they may be in, the negative particle EC is always
inserted before the verb.
OH HsraM He mnepecyeTca.

He is interested in nothing

When a preposition is used with HBKT or H H I T ,

it goes between the particle a a and the declinable
pronoun KTO or nro, the three parts being written
separately.
Mbi HH c KeM He roBopanH.

We talked to nobody.

Note that the accusative of HOTT is usually the same as the

genitive mroero. This is because it is usually the object of a
negative verb and negative verbs tend to be followed by an
object in the genitive. If, however, HHTT is governed by a
preposition taking the accusative, then the accusative is HHTTO.
OH HH 3aCTOHe rciaTHT.

He pays for nothing.

(b) The negative pronouns BBKaKft and HHien. H H KaKfi 'no' and aanfi 'no one's' are dechned like
KaKH and l e . The same rules of usage apply to them
as to BBKT and HHIT. HmxaKOii is used to stress
the negation:
OH HH aa KOKHX Beiepx
H 6bui.

He didn't go to any parties

a t all.

OH He XTCT Hirater coBra.

182

He doesn't want anyone's

advice.

(c) HKTo and HITO. These two pronouns, which are

dechned like KTO and HTO (the stress always falling
on the first syllable) differ in meaning according to
case.
In the nominative they have a positive meaning: 'a
certain' and 'something'. Both are rare. HKTO is
nowadays only found in conjunction with proper
names: HKTO nerpB 'a certain Petrov'; whereas
HiTO is mostly reserved for the expression avro
sppe+gen. 'something in the nature of...'.
In all other cases they have a purely negative meaning, 'nobody' and 'nothing'.
As they are reaUy contractions of He-ecT&-Kor
(nKoro) He-ecTB-ier (nnero) etc., they have the
meaning of 'there is nobody, nothing' and are used in
conjunction with a dative (MBC Hnero ... 'for me
there is nothing ...') and an infinitive (MHe Hiero
nocnTb 'for me there is nothing to send', or, in
idiomatic Enghsh: ' / have nothing to send'). A second
He cannot be used with the verb.
HBHy Hiero fljiatb.
MHe HxoMy an. KHary.

Ivan has nothing to do.

I have no one to give the
book to.
(cf. SI HHKOMy HeflawKHry - I give the book to no one).

This construction can be used in the past and future

simply by adding GBIJIO or SyfleT (usuaUy immediately after Hiero, HKOro, etc.):
EMy Hiero SMJIO (yfler)
CKa3Tb.

He had (will have) nothing to say.

W h e n a preposition is used, it is inserted between t h e

He a n d t h e pronoun proper; t h e stress falls entirely o n
BO. T h u s :

183

HaM H o leM 6b'rao TOBOpan..

EMy H K KOMy HJJTH.

We had nothing to talk

about.
He has no one to go to.

Note that the accusative of Hiero is the same as the genitive

Hiero (HaM Htro flnaTb), except when it is governed by a
preposition taking the accusative. E.g.
EMJ H 3a TTO HJiaTHTb.
He has nothing to pay for.

Of course, often the dative is omitted:

H o iCM roBopHTb.
Hiero
flJiaTb.

There is nothing to talk about.

There is nothing to do.

In one idiom, even, the verb is also left out: H 3a TTO ('don't
mention it') which is a contraction of BaM H 3a MTO jiaroflapHTb MeHH - 'you've nothing to thank me for'.
Note: occasionally HKOMy can be used impersonally in the
sense 'there is no one to ...':
HKOMy TO cflaaTb.

There is no one to do this.

Hnero is sometimes used idiomatically with the meaning

'there is no need to ...', 'there is no point in ...':
Hqero 3a6THTbca o HSM.

There's no need to bother

about him.

(d) The negative adverbs aeaorpa., arfle, BKyfla. These

adverbs, which are contracted forms of He - ecTbKorfl, etc., are used in exactly the same way as
BKoro and anero - i.e. with datives and infinitives:
HaM HKoroa quran..
Ceprio Hroe 6b'uio CH-

We have no time for reading.

Sergey had nowhere to sit.

flTb.

Amie HKyfla 6yfler HATH.

HKorfla pa3roBpHBaTb.

Anna will have nowhere to

goto.
There's no time for talking.

Note that occasionally HKorfla has a positive meaning 'once

upon a time':
TaM HKorfla KHJI MOH
Once upon a time my
6paT.
brother lived there.

184

These adverbs must not be confused with HHKorfl,

Harne, and BHKyfla, which are used in straightforward negative sentences and require the negative
particle with the verb. Cf.
Mbi HHKorfl He iHTeM.
Cepra HHxfl He CHflen.
Amia HHKyfl He nonui.

We never read.
Sergey sat nowhere.
Anna didn't go anywhere.

Ordinals
Ordinals from ist to oth are as follows:
ist
2nd
3rd
4th
5th

npBbiS
BTOpH
TpTHH
jeTBpTbra
nHTBTH

niecTa
Cefl&MH
BOCbMH
fleBHTfint
fleCHTbH

6th
7th
8th
9th
oth

n t h is oflBBBaflnaTbih. The ordinals from 12th to

19th are formed in the same way as n t h - the soft sign
at the end of the cardinal is replaced by an adjectival
ending -MB.
The ordinals 20th, 30th, etc., are as foUows:
20th
flBaflflTbIH
30th TpHflflOTbrii
40th copoKos
50th HHTHfleCHTblB

60th UieCTHfleCHTbTfl
70th CeMHfleCHTblH
80th BocbMHflecTbra
90th fleBHHCTbIH

100th is cOTbriS and 1 oooth is TBICH^HBIH. The intervening hundredths and succeeding thousandths are
formed by prefixing -CTMH and -Tbica^Hbi with the
genitive of the cardinal (flnyx-, tp'x-, aeTbipx-,
HHTH-, IIieCTB-, CeMB-, BOCbMH-, fleBHTH-).

Thus BHTBCTBIH is sooth; flByxTbica^HbiH is

2000th.
In aU compound ordinal numbers above 20th (172nd,
57th, etc.) only the last element (2nd, 7th, etc.)
185

becomes an ordinal proper; the preceding elements

(170, 50, etc.), as in English, remain cardinals. Thus:
flBflqaTb BTopa - 22nd
CTO cMbfleCHT BocbMii - 1 7 8 t h

AU ordinals are dechned like adjectives (for the

declension of TpTHH, see above, Lesson~2i) and, of
course, agree in case, gender, and number with the
noun they qualify:
B

TpHflaaTb

mecTM

in the 36th house

flMe

BTb'icHMafleBHTbcTmecTbflecHT npBOM rofly

in 1961

(Nte that this is t h e only way i n Russian of saying

' i n such and such a year'.)

TEKCT
OflHHCflbi H , KaK HHJKeHp, noxaji Ha BOCTK. 3 T O 6b*mo
B TbicHMa fleBHTbcT fleBHTOM rofly. Si OKOH^HJI CBOH
fleji n npefl B03BpamHHeM AOMH peiiiHJi 3axaTB B
Tary K O/THOM^ jiecHHKy-oxTHHKy. IIHTB JICT Hasfl H

rocriiii y Her H BMcre c HHM xoflHJi Ha oxiy. Hmcorfl,

HHTfl H HH C KeM MHe H BIJIO TaK HHTepCHO OXTHTBCH,
KHK C HHM B TaHr.
K necHHKy Hflo 6b'uio xaib OT rpofla noHTH flBcTH
KHJIOMTpOB. Er flMHK CTOHJI B Taor, HeflaJieK OT
mocc. Ca>KycB B aBTOMoHjn. H ny.
CHa^jia flopra HflT Mncfly 03paMH. H o BOT mocc
BxflHT B rycTH Jiec. H H ^ T He Hapymer er THHiHHb.
HeMHHtKO crpmHo! KKCTCH, HH 3a TTO He ocrHeiiiBCH
3flecB HaflJiro OHH. PaccKa3BiBaiOT, *rro ecTB Mecr B
jiecy, rfle HejiB3H HH npoirrH, HH rrpoxaTB.
Iocc HeflBHO 3flecB npoJiojKHJm, H B npBoe BpMH
3Bpn HHKor He 60HJTHCB, HH OT Koro He yerjm:
CBo6flHO ryjifljiH 3ixbi H 6um flwe MeflBflH Ha
mocc. OflH>Kflbi Bbmien H3 nca MenBflB, ocTaHOBHJicH

186

na mocc - H HH C Mcra! Illothp flan OflHH ryflK, flpyrH

- nocHjrbHe,* TpTHH - em CHjn>He.t HEWT He noMorano. Hiero 6b*inofljiaTB.HaKOHq, Bc TO, KercH,
eMy Haflono, OH em pa3 nocMOTpn Ha aBTOMOHJib,
peniHJi, HTOflnaTBSB'IJIO Hiero, H nomn B crpoHy.
Ho TenpB Ha flopre H 6BJJIO HHKaKHx 3aneB, HHKaKHX MeflBfleH. TJTBKO flyT aBTOMOHjm H MOTOinhorbi.
Bflpyr H BHH<y rpynny BenocHnenHCTOB. PHBme H HHKorfl He BHfleji 3flecB HHKor Ha Benocnnfle.
Jiec HeoHdflaHHO KOHqercH. H Bbie3>Kio Ha OTKpbrroe
Mcro.flMHKanecHHK HCT. BMcro Her npeflo MHOH
OJTBHIH 3aBfl. Haneo H HanpBo AMHKH caflMH, a
fljrbme fJonBineflOM,umpKHe yjraqbi. B Taure Bbipoc
MonoflH rpofl.
* a little louder

t still louder

ynPAXCHEHHH
1. Answer the foUowing sentences in the negative:
(i) O KOM Bbi rOBOpHJTH BUep ?
(2) *IeM Tbi BOCxmflemBCH ?
(3) Kyfl OH nomn ?
(4) KaKyK) KHHiy OH HHraeT ?
(5) ^IBK) mnany OH HCHT?
(6) O HBHXflpy3BHXOH 3a6THTCH ?
(7) Ha HTO Tbl CMTpHmb ?
2. FUI in the blank spaces with one of the negative pronouns or adverbs given in brackets:
(1) Korn H npHmJi, ... H Sbuio flMa. (mncor,
HKoro)
(2) O H ... He CHfln. (HH C KeM, H c KeM)
(3) Mne ... roBopHTb 06 TOM. (Hmcorfl, HKorfla)
(4) Mbi... He nonuTH. (HHKyfl, HKyfla)
(5) O H ... He HHTepecoBncH, HO HejrB3fl CKa3TB, HTO
eMy ... Sbuio HHTepecoBTBCH. (mraM, HneM)
187

3. Write out the foUowing in fuU:

(i) The 27th street.
(2) The 133rd house.
(3) In the 4th house.
(4) In 1961, 1925,1815.
(5) The 300th book.
4. Translate into Russian:
(1) He caUed for me three days ago in his car.
(2) Have you nowhere to go ?
(3) The old man never talks about anyone or to
anyone.
(4) Fear no one and you wiU have nothing to be
afraid of.
(5) You don't seem to have a clue about this affair.
(6) He went away for a long time a year ago.
(7) There's no point in sitting in the hbrary; let's
go to the cinema.
(8) She never takes care of her house.
(9) On the fifth day he decided to return home.
(10) I'm sick of listening to her singing.

188

y P O K 25

CJIOBAP
Ha3BaHHH Mcanea

Names of t h e months

HHBpb January
(ipeBpjib February
Mapr March
anpjib April
Man May
mom. June

mjn. July
BrycT August
ceHraSpb September
OKia6pb October
HOflSpb November
fleK6pb December

AU the months are masculine. Except at the beginning

of a sentence they are always written with a smaU letter.
The stress is on the last syllable throughout in HHBpb (i.e..
HHBapH), (peBpjTB, CeHTHpB, OKTHpB, HOflpb, fleKupB.
On the rest it is the same in the oblique cases as in the
nominative. Note that 'in January', etc. is B + prep. B HHBap, B HiHe, etc.
HTb I (6b [| to, -inb) to hit, to
strikei
BeK m. (pl. BeK) century; age
BcHTb II (Bmy, Bcmnb) to
weigh (intrans.)
BbicoT / . (pl. BbicTbi) height
Bb'iexaTb I pf. (Bb'ieflly, -emb) to
leave, to drive away from ...
rjiBHbiH adj. main, chief, principal
AepeBHHHbiH adj. wooden
HpBHOCTb/. antiquity
3Be3fl/. (pl. 3B3flbi) star

KMeHb m. (gen. sing. KMHH, pl.

KMHH, gen. pl. KaMHH) stone
KJIOKOJI m. (pl. KOJioKOJi) bell
KOJioKJibHa / . (gen. pl. KOJIO-

KJieH) bell-tower
KpeMJiBCKHH
adj.
Kremlin
(attr.)
aevb I pf. (aAry, jiibKemb, past
tense Jir, jierji, -JI; -Ji) tolie down
MejiflHH / . melody, tune
MHJumH m. million

BHTb 'to strike', 'to hit' has as its perfective yflpHTb (II yflp||io,
-Hmb); when it means 'to strike' (of a clock) then the perfective is
npoSHTb. Note that the imperative of Barb is 6eH(ie).

189

Ha3BTBTbCH I (Ha3MB|lOCb,
-embca) to be called, to be
named 2
OTJJHTb I pf. (OTOJIbllK), -mb,
past tense TJIHJI, OTjma,
TJHUIO; -jm) to cast, to mould
nepepbiB m. interval, break;
nepepbiB Ha o6fl lunch break
noBToparb I (noBiopaflio, -emb)
to repeat
noflHjKHe n. foot (of hill,
statue)
H3AHO adv. late
H0K3baTb I (noK3bma||io,
-enn.) to show
njraoqb / . midnight 3
noiTH adv. almost
nOHBJIHTbCH I (nOHBJIH |lOCb,
-embca) to appear, to make an
appearance

nymKa / . (gen. pl. nymeK)

cannon
cmb'nnHbra adj. audible''
co66p m. cathedral
cocraBJMTb
I
(cocraBjiH||io,
-enn.) to compose, form
coxpaHHTbCH II pf. (coxpaH||ibcb,
coxpaHambca) to be kept
CTpaHHua / . page
cTpjiKa / . (gen. pl. CTpJlOK)
hand (of clock or watch)
THHa/. ton
TpeyrJTbHHK m. triangle
yKpenjiHHbiH part, fortified
ycTaHOBHTb II pf. (ycraHOBJHb,
ycTaHBHHib) to set up
xojiM m. (gen. xojui pl. XOJIMJJ)
hill
uapb m. (gen. napApl..mp) Tsar
THCJi n. (pl. mcna, gen. pl.
mean) date, number

2. Ha3bTBTbCH 'to be called' (pf. Ha3BTbca - Ha30Bycb, Ha30Bmbca) is usually followed by the instrumental of what the
subject of the verb is called (cf. Ka3Tbca, HBjiHTbca).
3. In the oblique cases of njrao^b, y (always stressed) is inserted
between the JI and the H (nojiyHotm, nojryHO^bio, etc.).
4. The short form of CJIMIHHMH (cj'imeH, cnbinm, CJTb'imHo;
cnb'mrHbi) is frequently used to translate 'one can (could) hear ...';
what one can hear becomes the subject of the sentence (cjib'nueH
(6bui) KJioKOJi). In the negative the neuter form is used impersonally + the gen. (He CJIMIHHO (6b'uio) KOJIOKOJK).

BbipaHcana
until this time, to the present day
from ... to ... (with expressions of
... ao-rgen.
time)
from ... to ... (and inclusive of)
c ...
no + ace.
to sleep soundly
KpnKO cnaTb
KoTpbrii l a c no BumM qacM ? What's the time by your watch ?
to go to bed
jieib cnaTb
flo eux nop
OT"\+gen.

190

TPAMMATHKA
i. The Declension of Cardinal Numbers
In Russian aU (ordinal numbers decline. A certain
amount of difficulty may be experienced by the student
at first, owing to the fact that both the numbers and
the nouns to which they refer decline, the nouns in
the plural (except after 'one'). In other words the
cardinals are treated in the oblique cases like plural
adjectives, though their endings are not adjectival.
It wUl perhaps be simpler to take the numbers individuaUy, or by groups.
(a) OflBB
As has already been mentioned (Lesson 23), oflHB,
ofln, oflH is dechned like TOT, with a mobUe n
disappearing throughout, except in the nominative
masculine singular. It agrees in case and gender with
the noun, which is always in the singular: B OABM
flMe; c oflHH HceHiiniHOH; n BHHcy onnor yneBmc.
OflHH also has a plural (OHHE, OAHHX, etc.) which is used with
nouns which have no singular (e.g. OAHH wacb'i - 'one watch').
It can also be used as a plural pronoun meaning 'alone' (uist as
it can in the singular):
OHH npiniiJiH OAHH.
OH BbiiiiJia OflH.

They came alone.

She went out alone.

(b) JJsa (flBe), TpH, leTbipe

These are dechned as foUows:
Nom.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

HBa(flBe)
fBa(HBe)
IflByx
HByx
HBYM
flBVMfl
flByx

TpH
PrpH
\ipex
Tpx
TpM
TpeMH
TpX
I9I

leTijpe
fienpe
iierupx
lerbipx
leTbipM
^erbrpbMji
lerwpx

AU the above when in the nominative or (except with

nouns denoting human beings) in the accusative are
foUowed by the genitive smgular: flBa crona, Heripe
KHHTH, TpH COaKH, flBe flepH.

In the oblique cases (gen., dat., instr., prep., and, with

nouns denoting human beings but not animals, the
accusative) the noun will be in the same case as the
numeral and in the plural: paysiA flOMiun; TpM
pyjiHM; flyx, leTBipx aaaajaa (ace, or gen.);
TpX MHHyT.
Note that there is no differentiation for gender, except in the
nominative and accusative of flBa which has a feminine form
flBe.
0 6 a 'both', however, distinguishes gender throughout:
Nom.

Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

Masc. Neuter
66a

Fern.
6e

j6^

|O66HX

IpoHX

06HX
06HM
06HMH
06HX

o6ax
oSuM
o6HMH
o6nx

The same rules apply to 6a (6e) as to flBa (flBe),

Tpn,.and qeTb'ipe: O6HX AOMB; o6HMH KHHraMH;

o6HM ccrpaM.
(c) IIHTB - flBflnaTb, TpannaTb
FIHTB declines as foUows:
Nom., ACC.

DLHTb

Gen., Dat., Prep.

HHTH

Instr.

iiHTbK)

AU the remaining numbers between 5 and 20, as weU as

30, decline in the same way. BceMb, however, has
a 'mobe e' which is replaced in the gen., dat., and
prep, cases by a soft sign (BOCBMB), but is retained in
the instrumental (aoceMBK).
192

The stress is on the end except for 11-19 inclusive,

where it stays where it is in the nominative (-rpaapnaTbio, BOceMHaflnara).
The same rules apply as above in (b), except, of course,
that in the nominative and accusative the noun is in
the genitive plural.
The foUowing paradigm may help:
Nom., Acc. flBeaaflnaTB py6afi
Gen.
flBeHannaTH
pySaa
Dat.
flBeHfluaTH
pyjiHM
Instr.
flBeHfluaTbK
pyjiHMH
Prep.
flBeHfluaTH
pyonax
Note that there is rarely any distinction between the nominative
and the accusative, even when the noun is animate and denotes
a human being. Thus
SI BHHCy IIHTHafltiaTb HIHHH (cf. H BHJKy Tpx JKHIflHH).
This also applies to compound numbers:
H BioKy flBflflaTb flBe HtBTUHHbi (not flBa/maTH ABVX
JKHJJJHH).

(d) JlBflnaTb OflHH - TpBflnaTb flBHTb

Both elements decline. After 21 and 31, no matter what
the case, the noun is always in the singular:
c TpHfluarbib OAHHM AOMOM with 31 houses
With aU other numbers from 22 to 39, in the obhque
cases, the noun wUl be in the plural.
Thus: flBaflnaTB Tpiw flOMM (dat.); TpnnnaT
fleBHTHflOMx(prep.).

(e) CpOK,fleBHHCTO,CTO
AU the oblique cases of these numerals end in -a:
copoK (N.B. stress); CTa; fleaaHCTa.
Thus CTaflOMMH(instr.); copoK niecTB flOMM
(dat.), etc.
193

(f) HflTbflecBT, mecTboecBT, cM&flecaT, BceMbflecaT

Both elements decline in the foUowing manner:
Norn., Ace.
Gen., Dat., Prep.
InStr.

HHTbflecHT
naTHflecHTH
ULHTbMfleCHTblO

Thus:
CeMHfleCHTH TIHTHflOMB(gen.)
BoceMBKtflecHTBH) TpeMH pyfMiHMH (instr.)

(g) IJhtcTB - flCBHTbCT

Again, both elements decline, but this time CTO is
dechned as though it were a plural:
Norn., Ace.
Gen.
Dat..
Instr.
Prep.

flBCTH
flByXCT

flsyMcraM
flBVMHCTaMH

HByxcTx

HHTBCOT
HHTHCT
HTHCTSM
HHTblOCTaMH
HHTHCTax

(h) Tbica^a - MBJIJIBB

As both Tica^a and MHJIJIHH are really nouns and
not numerals and are dechned like nouns (with the
exception of the instrumental of Tbicsraa - Tbrcaqbio),
they are always foUowed by the genitive plural of the
noun, no matter what case they may be in. Thus:
c AByMfl TbicaqaMH pyS/ia
with 2000 roubles
(Cf. CflByMHTHCHMaMH naTbK) py6jiHMH)

2, Expressions of Time
(a) To denote the hours in Russian, the cardinals (oflBB,
nna, TpH, etc.) + nac (nac, aacB) are used.
Thus:
flBa iac
ceMb qacB
nac

'two o'clock'
'seven o'clock'
'one o'clock'
194

'At...' is translated by B+accusative:

B TpH lac
'at three o'clock'
To translate 'in the morning, afternoon, evening, or night' after
expressions of time, the genitives yip, AHH, Bqepa, H*m are
used, not the instrumentais.
Note that wac, when preceded by 2, 3, or 4 has the gen. sing, in
nac. Otherwise the gen. is qca (qrBepTb qca).

(b) To translate 'so many minutes past the hour', cardinal numbers+MHHyTa (MTOT/TM gen. sing., MHIT/T
gen. pl.) are used for the minutes, and the genitive
masculine singular of the ordinal of the following hour
for the hour. Thus:
jxHTb MHHyT BTopro
flBflna-nbflBeMHHJTH
OflHH aagnaToro

Five past one (lit. 'Five

minutes of the second hour')
Twenty-two minutes past ten

'Quarter past' is nTBepTb (or riHTHflnaTB MHHyT):

lTBepTB Tpraero

a quarter past two

'Half past' is nonoBBaa:

nojioBHua npBoro

half past twelve

To translate 'at ...', B+the accusative is used (except

for 'half past', which is either B nonoBHHe (prep.)
mecrro, or plain nominative: nonBima mecrro 'at
hah" past five').
Note that the ordinal of a number+iac implies the whole of the
preceding hour. Thus, B HHTOM nac$ means 'between four and
five'.

(c) To translate 'so many ininutes to the hour',

6e3+the number of minutes in the genitive precedes
195

the hour which is expressed by a cardinal in the

nominative:
6e3 n a m (MHHyr) flcarb Five to ten
'Twenty-five to six
6e3 flsafluaTH HHTH (MHHyT) mecTB
6e3 lTBepTH vac
a quarter to one
B is not used to translate 'at'. Thus, 6e3 flByx MHHyT mecn.
means either 'two minutes to six' or 'at two minutes to six'.

(d) In order to ask 'what time is it ?' the Russians use the
expression Kovopraa TOC? or, coUoquiaUy, CKJIBKO
BpMeHH?. 'At what time?' is B KOTOPOM iacy or,
coUoquiaUy, BO CKJIBKO ?
3. Dates
To indicate the date of the month, use the neuter form
of the ordinal foUowed by the month in the genitive.
The noun IHCJI 'date' is understood.
HBToe (tiHCJi) Maa

the fifth of May

To translate 'on such and such a date', the genitive

of the ordinal is used:
flBaflnaTB TpTBero neKaSpa

on 23 December

In order, therefore, to ask 'on what date?' the expression KaKro (sometimes KOTporo) HHoi ? is used.
If the year is given after the month, then the year (or
rather the ordinal of the year) goes into the genitive:
ipHflilToe Ma ^
ipHflflaToro Man > ncinafleBHTbcTBoceMHflnaToro rfla
B Me
J
(cf. B Tbiorqa fleBHTBCT BOceMHafluaTOM rofly
1918 ' - see Lesson 24).
Note the following abbreviations used:
7-e (ceflbMe) Ma
5-ro (miioro) moHH
1961-H r. (npBbiH rofl)
XV B. (nHTHaflUaTblH BeK).

196

'in

TEKCTfcl
KpeMJiM B flpBHocTH Ha3bjiacB neHTpanBHaa
nacTB rpofla, yKpennHHaH creHMH H 6UIHHMH.
KpeMJTHCTjTHnOHBJIHTBCH B OflHHHaflHaTOM Bene.
MOCKBCKHH KpeMjn> Hnaim crpHTB B Tb'icnna cro
riHTBflecHT mecTM roAy-1 O H HaxflHTCH Ha fiepery
MoCKBb'l-peKH, H3 BblCKOM XOJIM, H COCTaBJIHCT
TpeyrjrbHHK. Ha KKflOH H3 Tpx cropH TpeyrnBHHKa ceMB 6meH, H HH OflH H3 THX ceMH 6meH He
noBTopHCT flpyryio; Bce OHH p3Hbie. K ceflBMMy
HOHpa Tb'icaqafleBHTBcTTpHflflaTb ceflBMro rfla
Ha rorrri rjiBHbix 6nrHHx ycraHOBHjm orpMHbie
3B3flbI, KOTpbie CBTHT HIBK),
CHanna crHbi MocKBCKoro KpeMJiH 6b'um flepeBHHHbiMH. B TiJicHqa TpHcra uiecTBAecflT ceflBMM
rofly nocrpmm crHBi H3 6Jioro KMHH. HBbie
crHbi, KOTpbie coxpaHHjmcb flo cnx nop, nocrpnna
B KOHq nHTHflqaToro BKa.
norHTejTH npoxAHT npe3 Bopra 3a crHbi
KpeMJiH. OHH ocraHBJTHBaiOTCH y KOJIOKJIBHH BaHa
BejTHKoro.2 3 y KOJIOKOJIBIHO crpHnH noiTH cro ner,
c TbicHHa nHTBcT rufroro rAa no Tb'icana niecmCTBIH rofl. BbicoT e KOJIO BOCbMHflecHTH MrpoB.
Y noAHHOiH KOJIOKJIBHH HaHa BejiHKoro CTOHT
UapB-KJioKOJi H HapB-nynrKa. HapB-KnoKon BcHT
Kono flByxcT TOHH. IfepB-nyiiiKy OTJDIJIH B Tb'icflna
nHTBcT mecTbflecHT BOCBMM rofly. JLTH inecTHflnaToro Bna TO bin orpMHaa rryiiiKa.
HarepcHbiM ' naMHTHHKOM apxHTeicrypbi nerb'ipHannaToro - rorrajmaToro BCKB HBJIHIOTCH KpeMnBCKHe coSpw - ycnHCKHH, BjiaroBmeHCKHH H
ApxHrejiBCKHH.3
1. Normally dates are written in figures in Russian as in English;
in this passage, however, they are written in full for practice.
2. Ivan III, Grand Prince of Moscow from 1462 to 1305.
3. The Cathedrals of the Oormition (Assumption) of the Mother
of God, of the Annunciation and of the Archangel.

197

2.

Bqep. y> n3flH0. Ha yjmnax MOCKBU craHOBHTca

MHBme mofla, Mmsuie CJIBIIIIHO aBTOMOHJiBHBix
ryAKB.

^lacb'i Ha KpeMnBCKOH ume noK3baK)T HOJIOBHHy ABeHfluaToro H flBa p3a HrpiOT Mennmo
qTBepTH qca. npHjncKeTCH nnHOHb. BOT 6ojn>mH
crpnKa y>K noK3Baer 6e3 qTBepiH flBeHflnaTB.
npomn Tpn lTBepTH ABeHflflaToro qca.
Qcpo njraoHB. Bojitman crpnKa npHGnHHcaercH
K ABeHAflaTH. BOT y>K 6e3 IIHTHflBeHfluaTB... 6e3
flByx MHHyT ... 6e3 OHH. npomn nerbipe HrBepra
lca.
Korfl B MocKB nacbi 6BIOT IIJIHOMB, Ha flpyroM
KOHfl CCCP, BO BjiaflHBOCTKe, yac yTpo. ^aci
npoHjm ceMb. *Iepe3 flBa nac, Korfl yfler flBHTB
nacB yrp, flm BO BjiaflHBOCTKe noSnyT B urKJiy, a
MOCKBCKHe flrn 6yjjyT em Kpmco cnaTB. Korfl BO
BjiaflHBOCTKe JICTOM Mncfly ncoM HflByMHB Mara3HHax ber nepepbm Ha ofl, B MocKB 30JioTb'ie
CTpnKH noKa3biBaioT mecrb nacB.
ynPAiKHEHHfl
1. Answer the foUowing questions:
(i) KoTpbra nac no BumM nacm. ?
(2) KoTpbr nac noK3biBajm OHH lrBepTb nca
TOMy Ha3fl ?
(3) KoTpbm Hac yfler ipe3 Tpn lTBepTH lca ?
(4) B KOTpoM nacy BM BcraTe H 3BTpaKaere?
(5) B KOTpoM qacy BM yjKHHaere H jioHorrecb cnaTb ?
(6) KaKro MHCJi yfleT Bain cnflywinHH ypK ?
(7) KaKro HHCJi BBI Kyimjm ry KHHry?
2. Rewrite the foUowing sentences in fuU:
(1) Y Her 30 pyna 15 KoneK.
(2) Mbi yxajTH B O-M qacy 23-ro Mpra 1961-ro
rfla.
198

(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

H3 7~H flHea OH paooraer 6 AHea.

*ITO Tbl CflJiaJI C 3THMH l6 pyJIHMH ?
B OTHX 217flOMaxHoyT 2132 MenoBKa.
Mbi roBopHJTH 0 4 pyJiax 25 KonHKax.

3. Translate into Russian:

(1) In both these books there are more than five
hundred pages.
(2) At seven o'clock in the evening on January the
third we arrived by plane in Moscow.
(3) In 1955 I left London; I had nothing to do there.
(4) Why was Ivan III caUed Ivan the Great? I
haven't the sghtest idea. I don't even know in
which century he Uved.
(5) At ten minutes to six in the evening he lay down
on the sofa and feU asleep.
(6) During the lunch break the clock struck hah7 past
two and the workers decided to return to the
factory.
(7) On what date and in what year did you finish your
book ?
(8) This suitcase weighs about ten kUogrammes; it's
too heavy for the aeroplane.
(9) Is it true that four famines Uve in these four
rooms?
(10) Please send a car at half past eight tomorrow
morning.
(11) In September there wiU be a conference in
London. WiU you be there ? No, I have no time
for attending (visiting) conferences.

199

yPOK 26

CJIOBAPb
AflMHpanrHCTBO n. Admiralty
6jiecTTb II (Jiemy, 6flecTHmb)
to shine, sparkle
6jiecTHHiHH
adj.
brilliant;
sparkling
BejiHKOJinHbiH adj. (short form
BejTHKOJineH, BejiHKOJinHa,
-HO; -HBI) magnificent '
BHHMHHe n. attention
BnaflTb I (Bnafl||io, -emb) to
fall into, flow into (of a river)
BneiaTJiHHe n. impression
rpflocTb / . pride
rpaHHTHbiH adj. granite (attr.)
flBopq m. (gen. ffBopna) palace
fljibTa/. delta
fljTHHHbra adj. (short form aaHeH,

fljuuma,

HJTHHHO; -BI)

sajraB m. gulf, bay

saMTHTB II pf. (3aMny, saMTHmb) to notice
3acrTb I pf. (3acTH||y, -emb)
to find in; to take unawares
3HMHHH adj. winter (attr.)
H3yMHTejn>HbiH adj. amazing

KOJioHHana/. colonnade
jicTHHna/. staircase
MeHHTb I (MeHSjio, -enn.) to
change
HacToaiuHH adj. present; actual;
genuine
o6pa30BTb I (o6pa3y|io, -emb)
to form1; to educate
ocHOBib I pf. (ocHy||ib, -nn.)
to found
ocrpoB m. (pl. ocrpoB, gen. pl.
OCTPOBB) island

nepercJiBTb II pf. (nepeicJIJK), -Hnn.) to enumerate

ne^Taib I (neqTa||io, -enn.)
to prints
nojiojKHHe n. position, situation
noJiyKpyr m. semi-circle
nojryqHTb II pf. (nojryqy, nonynnnb) to receive
npH6jm3HTejn>HO adv. approximately
npHBJieKTb I (npHBJieK||io,
-emb) to attract
npHMpHO adv. approximately

06pa30BTb (as well as its reflexive o6pa30BTbca) is one of the

few verbs in Russian which can either be imperfective or perfective.
2 . neiiaTb (with its perfective HaneqTan. and oTneqiaTb) can mean
'to type' as well as 'to print'. It is often followed by HB nmyiiieH
Mammce 'on the typewriter'.
200

coeflHHHTb I (coeflHHaQio, -emb)

to join, to unite
ipyflHTbca II' (TpyjKycb, rpyflHmbca) to toU, to labour
TpyflHuiHHCH adj.
and- noun
toiler, worker, working
yKpamTb I (yKpam|io, -emb)
to adorn, beautify
yM m. (gen. yM) mind, intellect
snxa/. epoch

npHMBTKTb
I
(npHMbIK||K>,
-enn.) t o adjoin, t o border o n
npOHSBOflHTb I I (npOH3BO]Ky,
npoH3Bnjmib) t o produce
npocnKT m. avenue
npHMOii adj. straight
p a c t a I ( p a c r | y , - m b , past tense
p o c , -Ji, - J I ; -jni) t o g r o w
CHJibHbiH adj. (short form cHJieH,
CHflbH, CHJibHo; -bi) strong
cmepibf. death

BbipaxcHHa
Ha TOH Heflne
Ha TOO Heflne
Ha npiiuioH Heflne
Ha 6j>flymeH (cJiflyiomeH) Heflne
B TOM rofly, Mcane
B npHiJioM rofly, Mcafle
B 6yflyineM rofly, Mcaiie
HpoH3BOflHTb BneqaTJiHHe H a +
acc....
npHBJieKTb BHHMHHe
HOflHHMTbCH "I
,
cnycKTbCH
jnoacTHime

this week
that week
last week
n e x t week
this year, m o n t h
last year, m o n t h
next year, month
to mike an impression on .
to attract the attention
to go up (down) the stairs

TPAMMATHKA
i. Active Participles
The active participle in Russian is a verbal adjective,
that is to say, it is a form of the verb with an adjectival
ending.
There are only two types of active participle in Russian
- the present participle and the past participle; the
latter can be formed from either the imperfective or
perfective verbs. There are no future participles; the
present participle, therefore, can only be formed from
verbs in the imperfective aspect.
201

(i) Formation of the active participles, (a) The Present

Participle. T h e present active participle is formed by
replacing the final - T of the third person plural of the
present tense with -iipm. Thus the present participle
ofHHTTBis:
<mTio(T) + maa - *m?&ionys&
of rmcTB - nBmy(T) + wp& - nniiiyITIHH
of roBOpHTB - roBOpa(T) + m n a - Toaopawaa.
There are no exceptions to this rule.
As participles are in fact verbal adjectives, they decline
like adjectives. They are perfectly regular and decline
like xopiiiHH.
Thus the accusative feminine singular of HHTioiHHH is
qHrKHuyio; the instrumental plural - HHTKHUBMB,
and so forth.
The present participle of reflexive verbs ends in -ca,
no matter whether the preceding letter is a vowel or a
consonant. Thus (from BcrpenaTBcn) - BcrpeiioineMCH (prep. masc. sing.), BCTpeHiom,HMHca (instr.
pl.), etc.
The stress on present participles is usuaUy the same
as it is in the 3rd person plural of the present tense.
There are, however, a few exceptions (e.g. KypflnrHH,
TpyflHinHHCH).
Do not forget that the present active participle cannot
be formed from a perfective verb.
(b) The Past Participle. In order to form the past
active participle, remove the final -n (if there is one) of
the past tense (masculine singular) and replace it with
BEDtt.
Thus (npo)HHTTB wUl have as its past participle:
(npo)^HT(jl) + BniHH - (npo)^HTaBTHHH
(no)roBopHTB - (no)roBopa(ji) + BiiiHH - (BO)rOBOpBBmBB.
202

If the past tense does not end in -a, then simply add
-man to the mascuhne singular form of the past tense:
(npH)HecTH - (npn)Hc+mHH - (npH)HcmHH
(irpH)Be3TH - (npH)B3 + mHH - (BpB)a3maa
The past participle of reflexive verbs always ends in
-ca. Thus BCTprHBurHHca, BCTperHBHiaHca, etc.
There are a few exceptions to the above rules, notably:
HATH - BnfllHHH.
BeCTH - BflniHH.
(2) Use of the active participle. The active participle, both
present and past, is, as in Enghsh, that part of a verb
which has the function and construction of an adjective, in that it is always used to qualify a noun.
The active participle is most frequently used to replace
a relative clause. In the sentence 'The woman who
is reading the newspaper is my aunt', the words 'who
is' can be removed in Russian, as in Enghsh, and
'reading' becomes a participle, or verbal adjective,
agreeing in case (here nominative), gender (here
ferninine), and number (here singular) with the noun
('the woman') it qualifies. Thus:
JKHiflHHa, iHTiomaa
ra3ry, Mo Tra.

The woman (who is) readine the newspaper is my

aunt.
(=H<HmHHa, KOTpaa tarrer...)

Note that the participial clause, like the relative clause,

is separated from the main clause by commas.
Now if 'the woman' is in another case - e.g. ' I talked
to the woman (who is now) reading the paper' - then
the participle 'reading' must agree in case with
'woman':
H roBopHJi c HtemoHHOH,
HHTiomeH ra3Ty.
203

I talked to the woman

reading the paper.

Sirriilarly, if the noun qualified by the participle is

in the plural, then the participle wUl also be in the
plural:
H He SHio HtmnBH, mI do not know the women
TKuimx ra3TBi.
reading the papers.
As for t h e tense of t h e participle (i.e. present, imperfective past or perfective past), it is usuaUy t h e same as
it would be in a relative clause. T h u s i n t h e sentence:
lenoBK, IHTIOIIIHH KHHTy, MOH flpyr - ' t h e m a n
reading th e book is m y friend', IHTIOIIIHH replaces
KOTpbTH IHTaeT.
In th e sentence: lenoBK, BBTanniBH KHHTV, MOH
Apyr - 'the man who was reading the book is my
friend', naTasniHH replaces KOTPBIH varan; and
in the sentence: nenoBK, nponiiTaBirm KHury, MOH
flpyr - 'the man who had read the book is my friend',
npoiHTOBimiH replaces KOTPBIH npoiiiTaji.
Note that in the last two cases a participle cannot be used to
replace the relative clause in English.
Sometimes the active participle precedes the noun it
qualifies, in which case no commas separate it from the
noun:
cnanrae
flera
sleeping children
HeflBHO npHexasniH
a student who arrived
cryfleHT
recently
But in general a participle, particularly one which is
foUowed by an object of more than one word (mraIOIHHH KHHry, npHxaBinnH Ha TOH Heflne), tends to
come after t h e noun it qualifies.
Often participles are used purely as adjectives, such as
BIBIIIHH ' f o r m e r ' ' e x - ' (BIBMJHH ytimejn, 'an ex-

teacher'); SaecTHiiiHH 'sWning' or 'brUUant' ( 6 n e CTHUIH CHer 'glistening

snow'; JICCTHUIHH yM
'brilliant
mind'); inlmymBH in t h e expression
n n n i y i i i a a ManmHKa 'typewriter';
HacToam,HH
'present', 'actual', 'real' ( B HacToanicc BpMH 'at
the present time'; TO HacToaiiiaa BAKa 'this is
204

real vodka'). Note that the imperfect verb HacroAn. has

ceased even to exist.
In some cases what were originaUy participles are now
used as nouns, e.g. HacToaniee 'the present';
yflyuiee 'the future' (cf. npmjioe 'the past');
TpyflHiiiHHca 'worker, toUer'; KyparoHH 'a smoker'
(arH flJIH Kypflmnx, BarH flJIH HeKypainHX 'a
smoker' and a 'non-smoker' on the raways). In the
last two cases, TpyflaurHHca and KypHiinm can, of
course, be used as participles as weU.
The foUowing observations on the use of participles
should be borne in mind:
(a) The active participle can never be used as the
complement of the verb 'to be' (e.g. ' I am sitting',
'he was playing' etc.).
(b) The short form of the active participle is practically never found in modern Russian.
(c) The active participle is rarely used in speech; it
is nearly always replaced by a relative clause. It is
a bookish form and should not be used to excess.
(d) In order to translate expressions like ' I saw him
working', ' I heard her playing' etc. it is better to
avoid a participle and to use the foUowing construction with KaK:
SL BHfleJi, KaK OH pa6Taji.
SL cjibrmaji, KK one arpna.
SL He aaMTHJi, KSK OH
Bomji.

I saw him working.

I heard her playing.
I didn't notice him coming in.

After 3acraTb 'to find in', 'to catch', 'to take unawares', however,
the participle may be used (in the instrumental and not preceded
by a comma):
I found him talking to her
SL 3acrJi er roBopamaM
in my room.
c Hea B MoH KMHaTe.
Si 3acrJi e cHflthneH B
I found her sitting in my
MoM KaHHre.
study.
It would be better to avoid a participle, particularly in speech:
Si 3acraji er B Mon KMHare; OH roBopHJi c He. SL 3acrji e B
MoM Ka6HHre.

205

2o Inversion of Numerals and Nouns

If a numeral is placed after the noun which it governs,
the result is an approximate number:
EMy ner cpoK.
Y oTn 6MJIO pyjie n a n . flecHT.

He is about 40.
My father had about 50
roubles.

By this method one can often avoid using OKOHO

('about') which has to be foUowed by the genitive of
the numeral and the noun. However, another way of
avoiding putting the numerals into an obhque case is
to use the adverbs npH6jm3HTenBHO and npHMpHO
both of which mean 'approximately'.
If there is a preposition with the numeral and noun,
then, if inversion takes place, the preposition wiU
remain immediately before the numeral.
MBI HmeM KHJioMTpax
B HHTHflecHTB OT MOCK-

We live about 50 kilometres from Moscow.

Bbi.

TEKCT
JleBHBrpfl
Ha cBepo-snafle1 CCCP, Ha eperx mnpKOH peim
HeBb'i, BnaflaroiueH B <PHHCKHH 3anHB,2CTOHTOAHH
H3 cMbrx KpacHBeiiiHx ropoflB MHpa - JleHHHrpfl.
TpoA 3TOT ABa p3a MCHHJI CBO Ha3BHHe. Or
napa, ocHOBBmero er, OH nonynnn npBoe Ha3BBne
nerepypr; B -nJicHna AeBHTBcT HCTb'rpHaflnaTOM
rofly OH nojryqHJi Ha3Bmie nerporpfl, a B TiiCHqa
fleBHTBCTflBaflnaTBneTBpTOM rofl^, ncne CMpra
JlHHHa - JleHHHrpfl.
1. The intermediary points of the compass are:
cBepo-3nafl
north-west
cBepo-BOCTK
north-east
K>ro-3nafl
south-west
ibro-BOCTK
south-east
2. 4>HHCKHH 3ajiHB - the Gulf of Finland.

206

n e r e p y p r Hian CTPHTBCH B Tb*iCHHa ceMBCT

TpiBeM rofly. O H poc neHb bicrpo H CKpo cran
rpflocTbio Bcefl POCCHH. O H npoH3BflHT H3VMHTejn.Hoe Bne^aTnHHe H CBOHM nononcmieM, H apxaTeKTypOH 3flHHH, H CBOHMH fljnHHblMH IUHpKHMH
yjIHflaMH, H OrpMHblMH IUIOIflaflflMH, H KpaCHBblMH
nMHTHHKaMH. ninpKan HeB, Hecyman CBOH Bflbi
B Mpe, rpaHHTHbie eper, KaHnbi, MocTb'i, coeflHHHBDimie ocrpoB Ajnvrbi HeBb'i H e eper, qeHB
yKpamioT rpon.
TnaBHaH ynnqa JleHHHrpfla - HBCKHO npocnKT,
HaHHHromHHCH y AflMHpajrrHCTBa, 3aMeqTejn>Horo
3AHHH snxH n e r p npBoro. 3 T O nrapKaa irpaMn
yjiHna, Beflymaa K BOK3ny.
npeKpceH Ka3HCKHH cop 3 c KonoHHfloo, o6pa3yrom,eH nonyKpyr. KpacHBo 3AHHe HnnoTKH
HMemi CajrrbrKOBa-IHeApHH,4 BejmKonneH npHMbiKroiHHH K HBCKOMy npocnKTy 3HMHHH popea? c
yKpamiomHMH er cKynBrrrypaMH, 3aMenTeJieH TeTp
HMemi nyiHKHHa. B JleHHHTpAe TaK MHro n p e KpcHbrx nMHTHHKOB apxHTeKTypbi, npnBneKionrHX
BHHMHHe noceTHTejiH, *rro Hejn>3H HX Bce nepemcJTHTB.
3. The Kazan Cathedral, or the Cathedral of the Virgin of
Kazan, is named after the celebrated ikon of the Virgin of
Kazan.
4. Mikhail Yevgrafovich Saltykov-Shchedrin (1826-89) was a
novelist and satirist of some merit. His real name was Saltykov; his pen-name - Shchedrin.
5. The Winter Palace was formerly the residence of the Tsars.
ynPAJKHEHHH

i. Replace the relative pronouns and verbs in the relative

clauses with participles:
(1) O H B3HJI KHHry, KOTpaa neacna Ha croji.
(2) Od)HflHHTKa, KOTpaH npHHecji MHe K<pe,
ueHB KpacHBaH.
207

(3) O H roBopHn c cecrpH, KOTpaa ye3Hcna na

ypn.
(4) Ara, KOTpbie CHHT y Hac B AMe, BcerA
3acbmiOT iem, pHo.
(5) Ham AOM CTOHT Ha yjoine, KOTpan BeAr K
B0K3jry.
(6) OH npHxaji c ne3AOM, KOTpbr npnmji 6e3
ABafluaTH mecTb.
(7) Y qenoBKa, KOTpbin Hanncn TOT poMH,
OJiecTHrnHH yM.
(8) Tbi BHflejia ra ManeHBKHe ocrpoB, KOTpbie
opa3yiOT nonyKpyr B Mpe ?
(9) Mo 6paT, KOTpbm He KypHJi B rrpmnoM rofly,
TenpB KypHT namipc TpHAflaTB B ACHB.
(10) 3Here nn BBI HMH HmHHbi, KOTpaa OTneHTana io Ha romiymeH MauiHHKe ?
Form the present and past active participles from the
foUowing verbs:
Be3TH, B03HTB, paTB, HaJHOATB, nCTTB, ryjiHTB,
TpyAHTBCH, HamniaTBCH, OnecrCTB
Translate into Russian:
(1) The man selling wine at this counter has twice
been to prison.
(2) Children sitting at table ought not to speak so
much.
(3) Have you heard about the bridge joining both
sides of the bay ?
(4) I'm afraid to say that you've not got a briUiant
mind.
(5) When she was about twenty she used to make a
strong impression on men.
(6) Did you notice your sister coming in last night ?
(7) The old man going up the stairs has got a bottle
of vodka in his bedroom.
208

(8) Please don't smoke; this carriage is for nonsmokers.

(9) Last week he was in Moscow; this week he is in
London; next week he wiU be in Leningrad.
Where wiU he be next year ?
(10) BuUdings which usuaUy impress visitors do not
attract me.

209

YPOK 27

CJIOBAPB
EeccapSHa/. Bessarabia
BoccrHHe n. uprising, rebellion
BcrynHTb II pf. (BCTyrun, Bcryimnib) to enter; BCTymiTb na
npecTJi to come to the throne
Bb'nnn-b I pf. (Bbinb||io, -emb)
to drink (up)
HeKa6pHCTOT.Decembrist
3aKHMHTb II (3aKH<i||y, -mnb)
to finish, to round off
saKpb'iTb I pf. (3aKp6||io, -emb)
to shut
saHHTb I pf. (3aHM||y, -mb, past
tense 3HHJi, -, 3HHJio; 3HHjm) to occupy
saneprb I pf. (3anp||y, -mb,
past tense 3nep, -Ji, 3nepjio; 3nepjm) to lock
HHOCTpHHbiH adj. foreign
Ka3HHTb II pf. (Ka3H|K), -HHIb)
to execute
KpHTHK m. critic
jm6epJibHbiH adj. liberal
jiHuH m. Lyceum (high school
in pre-Revolutionary Russia)
MHHHCTpcTBO n. ministry; M H HHCTpCTBO HHOCTpHHMX flejl
Ministry of foreign affairs

Mbicjib / . t h o u g h t

HaiiTH I pf. (Hafifllly, -mb, past

tense HamJi) to find
HanjiHHTb II pf. (Hanjffi[|io,
-mm.) to fill
o6pa30BHHe ri. education
mecTBO n. society
oflTb I pf. (oflH||y, -emb) to
dress, to clothe
OKOHTiHHe n. termination, ending; OKOiraHHe ymmepcHTra graduation
OTKpb'rn. I pf. (oTKpJio, -emb)
to open
omHKa / . (gen. pl. ornafJOK)
mistake
nepeBecTH I pf. (nepeBefl|y,
-mb) to translate; to transferi
nHcTejn. m. writer
noflaBHTb II pf. (noflaBjn, noflBHmb) to crush, to suppress
nOflHHTb I pf. (nOflHHMJ>, nOflHHMemb, past tense nflHHJi, -,
nflHHJio; nflHHjm) to raise,
to lift, to pick up
noKa3Tb I pf. (noKa)K)>, noKJKenib) to show

nepeBecTH (imperfective nepeBOflHTb) can mean either 'to translate' from (c+gen.) one language to (Ha+ace.) another; or 'to
transfer', 'to move': ero nepeBejm Ha flpyre Mcro - 'he was
transferred to another job'.
210

noHHTB I pf. (noHMjfo -mb,

past tense nHan, -, nHajio;
-H) to understand
Hopa3HTb II pf. (nopajKj>, nopa3Him>) to strike, to astonish
noTepHTb I pf. (noTepa|io, -enn.)
to lose
HOTjnryTb I pf. (noTmry, noTHHemb) to draw, to drag
HOOT m. poet

npaBHTejibCTBO n. government
npecTJi m. throne
npHBecTH I pf. (npHBeflllJ, -enn.)
to bring (leading on foot)
npHBJiqb I pf. (npHBaeKj>, npHBJieHnib ... npHBJieKyT, past
tense iipHBJiK, -Ji, -JI; -JTH)
to attract2
npHflBpHbiH adj. court (attr.);
as noun courtier
npHKa3Tb I pf. (npHKaiKy, npHKHtemb) to orders
npHHaflJiejKTb II (npHHafljie>K||y, -jtuib) to belong
npoKOJiTb I pf. (npoKOjno, npoKJiemb) to puncture

pa3pemHTb II pf. (pa3pemjy,

- E m ) to permit?
peBojHOHHHHbiii adj. revolutionary
pyKOBOflHTejTb m. leader
ceji n. (pl. cjia) village
OKCTb I pf. (cOJKTy, COHOKmb
... COHORT, past tense OKr,
cojKTJi, -6; -H) to burn 2
CHirpb/. Siberia
cocjiTb I pf. (COHIJI||K), -mb) to

exile
cnacTH I pf. (cnac||j>, -enn., past
tense cnac, -ji, -JI; -JTH) to
save
CTHx m. (gen. crnxa) verse;
CTHXH verses, poetry
cyTKH m. pl. (no sing., gen.
, cyTOK) period of 24 hours
ooateT m. subject
yMepTb I pf. (yMp||y, -mb,
past tense yMep, -ji, yMepjio;
yMepjra) to die
qpcKHH adj. tsarist, tsar's
mHHa/. tyre
3Hi(HKJionflHa / . encyclopedia

There are a few verbs in Russian of the first conjugation with

infinitives ending in -TO. In the present tense of these verbs the
ist person singular and the 3rd person plural end in either -ry,
-ryr, or -KV, -KVT; the r and the K change to JK and 1 in the.2nd
and 3rd person singular and the ist and 2nd person plural. In the
past tense the ending is -r, -r-Jia, -rjio; -rjm; or -K, -KJia, -KJIO;
-Kim.

Among the r type verbs are MO<H>, (c)ceHb, j i c a (with a change of

vowel in the present tense and in the imperative - jiary, jiaHtemb;
jiHr(re)). Among the K type verbs is (npH)BJiqb.
IIpHKa3Tb (imperfective npHKaabmaTb) and pa3pemHTb (imperfective pa3pemTb) are followed by a dative and an infinitive: OH
npHKa3Ji eMj> Bbrihn H3 KMHaTbi - 'he ordered him to leave the
room'; OH pa3penrji eM^ ocrTbca - 'he allowed him to remain'.
They can be used impersonally in the passive (eM^ 6bino npHK3aH0, eMj> 6J3U10 paapemeH).
211

TPAMMATHKA
I. Passive Participles
The passive participle in Russian is, like the active
participle, a verbal adjective. It has an adjectival ending and can be used attributively in the long form or
predicatively in the short form.
Again, there are two types of passive participle in
Russian - the present passive participle, which can
only be formed from imperfective verbs, and the past
passive participle which is formed almost exclusively
from perfective verbs. The present passive participle
is very rarely found in coUoquial Russian; the past
participle is very frequently found both in speech and
in literary Russian.
Formation of Passive Participles
(a) The present passive participle. The easiest way to form
the present passive participle is to add -MH to the ist
person plural of the present tense: thus the present
passive participle of anraTb is iHTeM + bm - THTeMMH; Of rOBOpHTb - rOBOpHM + blH - rOBOpHMbTH. The only exceptions to this rule are verbs in
-aaOTb which have the present passive participle in
-asaeMUB, not -aMbia (flasaeMbr). The stress is
normally the same as in the ist person singular of the
present tense. Thus: moOHM+biH - jnooHMbrn (JHO6JHO); nnaTHM+biH - nnaTHMbni (nnaiy).
A few verbs which have the ist person plural ending in -M
change the to an o in the participle:
BecTH - BeflM - BeflMbm
HecTH - HecM - HecMbrii
These, however, are few in number.

Note that several verbs in Russian have no present

passive participle, notably nacTB, para, UHTB, nerB,
KJiaCTb.
212

The present passive participle is dechned exactly like

an adjective ending in -bm (HHTeMaa, HHreMUMH,
etc.); the short form is the same as the short form of the
adjective, except that the stress is always the same as
in the long form. E.g. miraeM, HHreMa, qirreMO,
HHTeMbl.
(b) The past passive participle. This unfortunately is more
comphcated than the present participle, and, as it is
far more widely used, it must be studied with great
care.
There are two groups of past passive participle: those
formed with the suffix -T-; and those formed with the
suffix -HH-.
Participles with the suffix -T-. The foUowing verbs
have a past passive participle ending in -TUB: AU
verbs with the infinitive in:
- y n > (noTHHyTB noTjirrvTMH)
-bITI. (3aKpMTB - 3aKpbTbla)
-OTB (npOKOJITb - npOKnOTUH)
- e p e r b (3anepTB - s n e p T B r a )

AU monosyUabic1 verbs in -HTB or -eirb:

BbHIHTB BBULHTBTH
OflTB - OflrUH
yHTB - yHTBIH

AU verbs which have an unexpected H or M throughout

the present/future tense:
HaqTb (Hatory, Haramb) - na^aTbiii
3aHHTb (3aMy, 3aHMmb) - 3aHaTBiH
CHHTb (CHHMy, CHHMemb) - CHHTMH .

As can be seen, aU the above types of verbs form their

past passive participles by replacing the infimtive
I. And, of course, their prefixed Compounds B-mrrB, o-nn,, etc.

213

ending - T B with -TBXH (with the exception of -epcrb

verbs which lose their final -e-).
The short form is similar to the short form of an
adjective (yST, ySaia, y6To; yHTbi).
Participles with the suffix -aa-, AU other verbs - the
vast majority - have a past passive participle ending in
-HHbiH. They may be listed as foUows:
(i) Verbs of conjugation I ending in - a i t or -HTB.
These simply replace the - T B of the infinitive with
-HHBIH:
npo^nrrTb npo^HTaHHLiH
flaTB - flHHblH
noTepaTB noTpHHHbia
HamicTB HanHcaHHbiii

(2) Verbs of conjugation I ending in -CTB or -3TH.

These replace the -y of the ist person singular of the
present/future tense with -HHbiH:
npHBe3TH: npHBe3(y)+HHbiH - npHBe3nnbia
npHBecT: iroiefl(y)+HHbiH - rrpHBeflHHbXH
npHHecTH: npHHec(y) + HHbrii - npHHecHHWH

(3) Verbs of conjugation I ending in -n. These

replace the -enib of the 2nd person singular of the
present/future tense with -mabia:
npHBJiib: npHBJieM(nib) + HHbm - npnBJieqcHHbiii
OKeiI.: COHOK(mb)+HHbIH - COXCHCHHBIH

(4) Verbs of conjugation II in -HTB and -era. These

form the participle by replacing the -y or -H> of the
ist person singular of the present/future tense with
-HHbiH or, if the stress comes earlier, -CHHBIH:
BCTpnrn.: BCTpH(y) + eHHbra - BcxpeieHHUH
KynHTb: Kynji(i) + eHHbiH - KynneHHbi
pemTb: pem(y) + HHbm - pemHHbia
no6jiaroflapHTb: no6jiaroflap(io)+HHbiH - no6aaroflapHHBIH.

The only exception is yBHfleHHBi.

214

The short form of aU participles ending in - HHBIH is

different from the adjectival short form'in that it is
reduced to one H (-Ha, -HO; -Bbi). Thus the short
form of noTpHHHbiH is: noTpan, noTpana,
BOTOpnao; noTpnBM.
The stressing of the past passive participles is difficult but the
following rules may be of guidance:
In verbs ending in -yit, -OTB, and -epeTb, and in the na^ib 3aHHT type verbs, the stress moves back one syllable from its
position in the infinitive: noTHHyrbm, npoKJioTbr, 3nepTbiH,
H^aTbnt, sHarbTH.
In verbs with a past passive participle in -aHHMH and -HHHBIH the
stress is one syllable behind the a or H: npflaHHbra, noTpaHHbm, npoqHTaHHbTH.
In verbs of conjugation II with the participle ending in -HHBIH
the stress is where it is in the 2nd person singular of the present/
future tense. Thus, KynjiemibiH (cf. Kyranub); pemHHBTH
(cf. pemmb).
As for the short forms, the stress tends to be very capricious.
If, however, the participle ends in -HHbri or -HHbift (flHHbiH),
then the stress in the short form will always be on the last syllable:
pemH, pemeH, pemea; pemeHb'i.
.flaH,flaH,flaH;await.

2. The Use of Passive Participles

(a) Present passive participles are very rarely used,
especiaUy in the short form. Their use is almost
exclusively attributive and can always be replaced by a
relative clause:
KHHra, HHTeMaa BcMH,
The book being read by
tieHb HHTepcHa.
all is very interesting.
(KHHra, KOTpyio Bce vmeao-i, ^em. HarepcHa)

It can precede a noun, just as the active participle can:

B ne^iaeMOH HM CTaib
MHTO omHoK.

215

In the .article being typed

by him there are many
mistakes.

(b) The past passive participle can either be used, in the

long form only, as an attribute, in which case it agrees
with the noun it qualifies:
B OTnetnVraHHOH HM eraTb HeT OHIHBOK.

In the article typed by him

there are no mistakes.

It can, of course, foUow the noun it qualifies, in which

case it is separated from the main clause by commas:
OKH, OTKpb'rroe HM, B H xflHT Ha Mr.
A He BHfleJi nHCbM, nojiyqeHHoro TO6H Bqep.

The window opened by

him looks south.
I did not see the letter
received by you yesterday.

Of course, in all the above examples a relative clause

could just as well be used:
Si He BHfleJi rracbM, KOTpoe TBI nojiyqji Bqep.
or it can be used, in the short form only, as a complement of the verb 'to be':
Mou oifl 6bui V6HT THrpOM.
3Ta KHHra 6yfleT n p o i TaHa BcMH.
JlBepb aauepT.

My father was killed by a

tiger.
This book will be read by
all.
The door is locked.

It must be remembered that in such cases the long form

cannot be used.

3. Collective Numerals
CoUective numerals from 2 to 10 are: flae, Tpe,
nTBepo, rotrepo, mcrepo, cMepo, BCBMepo
(flBHTepo,flcHTepo).Only the first three are found
frequently in modern Russian. The last two are more
or less obsolete.
216

J^Be and lrBepo decline as follows:

Nom.

flBe

Ace

l**66

Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

\flBOHX
flBOHX
flBOHM
flBOHMH
flBOHX

ACe

qeiBepo
fiTBepo
qeTBepb'jx
qeiBepbTX
qeTBepbiM
qeTBepb'iMH
qeTBepbJX

Tpe decUnes like AHe; the remainder Uke lTBepo.

The obhque cases are very rarely used.
The use of coUectives is restricted to the foUowing:
(i) with plural nouns which have no singular flBe,
rpe, and lTBepo must be.used in the nominative or
accusative. They are foUowed by the genitive plural
of the noun: flBe cyTOK 'two days and two nights';
Tpe BopT 'three gates'; lTBepo naca 'four
watches'.
For numbers above four, cardinals can be used (mecTB
Bopr). In the obhque cases, cardinals are normaUy
used (flByMH cynoMH, Tpx BppTax, etc.).
(2) with groups of men or children: nae fleTH 'two
children'; n r s e p o cojiflT 'four soldiers'.
(3) for certain impersonal expressions: Hac 6buio
Tpe 'there were three of us'; Mbi Bce nrBepo 'aU
four of us '.

TEKCT
AneKcaHflp C e p r e B H i I l y I U K H H
AjieKcHflp CepreBHq IlymKHH - BenHHHmHH pycCKHH nOT, 5KHBIIIHH B npBOH nOJIOBHHe fleBHTHflnaToro BKa.
O H nojiyMHH o6pa30Birae B jmnee, HaxoAHBmeMCH
KOJIO rierepoypra, B IlpcKOM Cen (Tenpb r p o n
217

nyiiiKHH). Em. B flrcTBe OH Hqaji rmcib CTHXH, H

jume HM buio HanHcaHO MHTO CTHXB. O H CKpo
npHBjiK K ce6 BHHMHHe noTOB KyKBCKoro1 H
JlepHcBHHa2 H HHcarena KapaM3HH,3 KOTpbie buin
nopaweHbi H3yMHTeJTbHbiM er TanHTOM.
B 1817 rofl& ncne OKOirqHHH mma., OH nocrymiji
Ha cjryHcy B MnHHcrepcrBO HHOCTpHHbix AeJi. O H
npoflOJKKn ITHCTB, HO CTHXH, HaiIHCaHHbie HM B 3T0
BpMH, b'um HanjTHeHbi nHepnBHbiMH H peBOJnoflHHHblMH Mb'lCJIHMH. MHTeMbie BCMH, er CTHXH
crjiH ^eHb nonyjiHpHbiMH, CJIHIHKOM nonyjiHpHbiMH
B

Ana npaBHTenBCTBa. OH 6BIJI cnacH KVKBCKHM,

KapM3HHbiM HflHpKTopoMjuana: OH 6bui ccjiaH He

B CHfJHpb, a Ha ior. lcne Tpx ner, npoBeflHHbrx B
CKyHHOM rpofle KHunmeBe, CTonne Eeccapna,
OH 6bin nepeBeflH B nee HurepcHbiH rpofl
Oflccy. Ho OH TaM ocrncH Henjiro. B 1824 rofl^
napb npHKa3n eM^ OTnpBHTBCH B ceji MnxaanoBcKoe,4 npHHaAJiejKaBmee poAHTejiHM nora. B M H xnnoBCKOM OH npoBJi Ana rfla. 3flecB OH 3aKHHHji
nbcy BopHC ToflVHOB, HnaTyio HM B flerap
1824 rfla; CKKKCT e B3HT H3 HcrpHH POCCHH. O H
Tnce npoflOJDKn 3flecb paraTB Hafl POMHOM
EBrmm OHnni. B TOM poMaHe B ciHxx,
3aKHHeHH0M TJIBKO B 183O TOfly, nOK3aHa JKH3HB
pyccKoro mecTBa Tor BpMeHH. KpHTHK BenHHCKHH5 Ha3Bnfi poMH SHHHKJionflHeh pyccKo
KH3HH.
1. Vasily Andreevich Zhukovsky (1783-1852) - one of the leading pre-Romantic poets of the early nineteenth century.
2. Gavriil Romanovich Derzhavin (1743-1816) - the greatest
poet of the eighteenth century, famed mainly for his odes.
3. Nikolay Mikhaylovich Karamzin (1766-1826) - leading
Russian historian and novelist of the late eighteenth century
and early nineteenth century.
4. The village of Mikbaylovskoe is in north-west Russia, in the
district of Pskov.
5. Vissarion Grigoryevich Belinsky (1811-48) - famous. Russian
critic and thinker.
6. aasBiii, to call.
218

B fleitap 1825 rfla yMep napb AjieKcHnp I. Ha

npecTJiflJDKeH6BUI BcrynHTb er paT Hmtona.
Ho 14-ro fleKapa b'uio HOAHHTO B nerepypre
BoccrHue, H3BcTHoe nofl HasBamieM Boccrime
fleKapHcroB. BoccrHae MJTO noflBJieHo. ITHTB

pyKOBOAHTejieH BoccrHHH b'um Ka3HeHbi, flpyrne

b'um ccjiaHbi B Cnoapb. B nncn Ka3HHHbrx, a
TKHce cpeflH OTnpBjieHHbix B Cnoapb fleKapHcroB
6b*mo MHro Apy3a nynnama. Hpomn HcKonBKO
McnneB ncjie BoccrHHH. nymKHH irpHxan B
MocKBy. HapB pemn cAnaib H3 Her npHABpHpro
nora; eMy B'IJIO pa3pemeH HCHTB B MocKB.

ynPAJKHEHHH
1. Replace the relative pronouns and verbs in the relative
clauses with present or past passive participles:
(1) KHHry, KOTpyio Bce mrraiOT, MHCHO Kymm. B
3TOM Mara3HHe.
(2) He 3Hio, rne AeHBrn, KOTpbie B H noiepanH.
(3) nacryx rrpmiec AOM coKy, KOTpyio OH cnac.
(4) MnBHHK, KOTporo MOH cecrp npHBen cerflHH
B mKOJiy, HaiBT HeflaneK OT Hac.
(5) B imcBM, KOTpoe OH HanHcn oiny, MHro
OIIIHOK.
2. Put the foUowing sentences in the passive, using a past
passive participle in the short form (e.g. OH yHn
coKy - coKa bui ynra HM):
(1) npaBHTejrBCTBO cocjijio HX B CHHPB.
(2) KTO nocjin er Ha BOion ?
(3) 3aKpB'ijm H 3nepjm ABepB.
(4) MOH TTH 3aHHJi er Mcro.
(5) Bce rrpoHHTajm ry craibib.
(6) O H peimin Bonpc.
219

(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)

OHH mroer He Kynjra.

KToeofln?
n r p I ocHOBJi nerepypr.
O H yac Hnan KHry.

3. Give the past passive participles, long and short forms

(masculine only) of the foUowing verbs: npoHHTTB,
HanncTB, B3HTB, HOHHTB, nepeBecrn, pan>, npopib,
yHTb, BCTpTHTB, npHKa3TB, OTKpb'lTB, BbUTHTB,
npHBe3TH.
4. Translate into Russian:
(1) When I passed her flat yesterday I noticed that
the windows were open.
(2) Have you seen the books which are being sold in
this shop ?
(3) For two days and nights he was very UI.
(4) When he returned he found that his tyre had been
punctured.
(5) My sister had four children and my mother had
ten.
(6) Those who sleep soundly usuaUy go to bed early.
(7) Which novels have been translated into English
from Russian ?
(8) When you go downstairs please shut the window
and lock the door.
(9) How many mistakes are there in the letter typed
by her ?
(10) I have got aU the novels written by Dostoevsky.

220

yPOK 28

CJIOBAPb
6jiro cj. thanks to the fact that
ojiaroflapa pr. (+dat.)
thanks
to; ojiaroflapa TOMy *rro cj.
thanks to the fact that
6oji3Hb / . illness
BjKHbiH adj. important
BBHfly pr. (+gen.) in view of;
BBHfly Tor *rro cj. in view of
the fact that
BocTpjKeHHbrii adj. enthusiastic, enraptured
BcflBHK m. rider, horseman
BcraTb I pf. (BCTH||y, -enn>) to
get up
Bb'lCTpejIHTb II pf. (BbICTpejl|lO,
-mm) to shoot, to fire
flyjrb/. duel
eflB adv. & cj. barely, scarcely
HceHHTbca II pf. or impf, (memocb, jKHHiiibCH) to marry1

cj. for
HHTpra/. intrigue
MflHbiH adj. copper
HafljKfla / . hope
HasBib I pf. (Ha30B|]y, -ns.) to
call, name
Ha3bmTb I (Ha3Bm||io, -emb)
to call, to name
Ha^aJio n. beginning
HeHaBHflerb II (HeHaBHHty, HeHaBHflHnn.) to hate
OKa3ibCH I pf. (oKaacycb, OKjKeiHbCH) to turn out to be, 2
to prove
oKpcTHocTb / . (usually in pl.)
surroundings
onpaBflTb I pf. (onpaBfl|K),
-emb) to justify
OTHomHHe . attitude, relation
H6O

2KeHHTbca is only used of a man marrying a woman (HteHHTBca Ha

+prep.), or of two people getting married (OH JKCKHJICH Ha He.
OHH HteHHjmcb). For a woman marrying a man the expression
Bb'iHTH (imperfective BbixoflHTb) sMVHt aa+ace. is used; 3MyjK
may be omitted (OH Bb*muia 3a Hero). 'Married to' is either
HteHT Ha+prep, or 3MyateM 3a+instr. (OH acenT Ha Hen. OH
3MyHteM 3a HHM).
Note that jKemiTbCH, pHHTb, poflHTbca, and cocTOjrrbca are all
either imperfective or perfective.
0Ka3TbCH (imperfective 0K3bTBaTbCH) is used either impersonally (oKaaajiocb, *rro ... ' h turned out that ...r) or with a
subject and a complement in the instrumental: ero HanjKflbi
OKa3aJBCb onpBflaHHbiMH.

221

OTpajKTb I (oTpajKQio, -emb)

to reflect
oTTor HTO cj. because
0Tb3fl m. departure3
nepexaTb I pf. (nepefl|y, -emb)
to move*
nepnofl m. period
nBecTb / . tale, story
noBTopHib II pf. (HOBTOPUK),

-arm.) to repeat
noK cj. while; noK... He cj. until
noMa/. poem
noHBHTbCH II pf. (noaBjncb,
noHBHDjbCH) to appear
npjKfle nen cj. before
npHTJiacHTb II pf. (npHTJianry,
npHTJiacHmb) to invite
npoflojDKHHe n. continuation

npoH3BeflHHe n. work, production; in pl. - works

pHHTb II pf. or impf. (pH|io,
-mm) to wound
poflHTbCH II pf. or impf, (poHt^Cb, poflambca) to be born
cocTOHTbca II pf. or impf.
(cocTOHTca, cocToTca) to take
place
ccbuiKa/. exile
TaK KaK cj. as
TBpiecKHH adj. creative
TparflHH / . tragedy
yxaTb I pf. (yflfly, -enn.) to go
away3
yncTb I pf. (ynafllly, -mb, past
tense ynaji) to fall
xojipa/. cholera
iTSbi cj. in order to

Note that the noun 'departure' is 0Tb3fl, whereas the verb to

depart, to leave' is yxaib (imperfective ye3H<Tb).
nepexaTb (imperfective nepee3H<Tb) means either 'to cross (by
some form of transport)' - nepexaTb (ipe3) peKy (the preposition is optional), or 'to change one's place of residence' 'to move
from one place to another' - nepexaTb B HOBMH AOM.
BbipaHcHHH
^leM 6jnvme OH ^mrca, ieM The more he studies the less he
MHbme OH noHHMeT.
understands,
iei 6jibme, TeM jryqme
the more the better
KpMe Tor
furthermore, besides

TPAMMATHKA
I. Subordinate Clauses introduced by Conjunctions
(i) Adverbial clauses of time. So far we have had only one
conjunction used for introducing a subordinate clause
of time - Korfl.
222

Other conjunctions (and compound conjunctions)

used with clauses of time are:
(a) BOK 'whUe'. When noni means 'whUe', the verb
in the subordinate clause is always in the imperfective aspect. The tense, of course, can be either past,
present, or future:
IIOK OH cnaji, H tarrn.
tjHTii, noK a pa6iaio.

While he slept I read.

Read while I am working.

(b) noK ... Be 'until'. He immediately precedes the

verb which is in the perfective aspect (past or future
tense):
OH CHflji y MeHH, HOK H
He KOOTHJI pa6raTb.
ToBopH c Hen, noK a He
npHfly.

He sat with me until I

. finished working.
Talk to her till I arrive.

Sometimes, in conversation, the He can be omitted:

CHflH, noK H npiifly.
Sometimes the words no Tex nop ('until that time') are added to
the main clause preceding the temporal clause introduced by
noKa ... ae
CHflH Tyr flo Tex nop, nox H He npHfly.

(c) Bpxcfle neM 'before'.

rjpjKfle leM OH CKateT
HaM, a xony noroBoparb
c T06H.

Before he tells us, I want

to have a talk with you.

If the subject of the main clause is the same as that

of the subordinate clause, npncfle leiw is usuaUy followed by an infinitive:
IIpiKfle ieM cecTJb, OH
nflHHJi KHry co cTOJi.

223

Before sitting down, he

picked up a book from
the table.

(d) c Tex nop KaK 'since' (ht. 'from those times

when').
ripouiJi MHTO BpMeHH,
c Tex nop KaK OH y-

A long time has passed

since she went away,

xajia.

(e) ncne Tor KaK 'after'.

IlcJie Tor KaK OH BepHyjica, OH HceHHJica.

After he returned he got

married.

(f) eflsa ... KaK 'barely' 'scarcely'; KaK (or nnnn)

TJIBKO 'as soon as'.
EflB OH TO cKa3n, KHK
OH yMep.
KaK TJIBKO H y3Hio o6
TOM, a ie6 CKaaty.

He had barely said this

than he died.
As soon as Ifindout about
this, I'll tell you.

Often it is possible (and desirable) to avoid a subordinate

clause introduced by a conjunction by using a preposition and a noun. E.g.
o KOHq o6fla ...
npefl HmHM OT&3fl0M

before we finished lunch ...

just before we left...

ncne OKOBTO&HHH
BepcHTra ...

after I (he) had graduated ...

VHH-

(2) Adverbial clauses of cause. The most common conjunctions introducing subordinate clauses which explain
the reason for an action are:
(a) noToiwy I T O , OTTOI- BTO 'because'. There is
very Uttle difference between the two. OTTOI*6 I T O
means more 'as a result of the fact that' and is frequently used in negative sentences:
On npHe3)KeT, noToiwy
She is coming because
^TO OH xieT ie6a BHshe wants to see you.
flCTb.
OrTor rro men floatflb, Because it was raining we
Mbi He MorJHi ryjiHTb.
couldn't walk.
224

Like OTTor ITO are BBUfly Tor *rro 'in view of the
fact that' and ojiaroflapa TOMy ITO 'thanks to the
fact that' - both bookish rather than coUoquial expressions:
BBHfl^ Tor I T O flHpKTop In view of the fact that
6JieH, HTKjia yfler 3athe headmaster is ill, the
Kpb'rra 3BTpa.
school will be closed tomorrow.
Eaaronapa TOMy *rro
Thanks to the fact that
mKJia 3aKpb'rra, HUM He
the school is closed, we
have not got to work.
Hflo 3aHHMTbCH.
Sometimes, in conversation particularly, 6jiaroflapa TOMy no
is replaced by 6jiro:
Ejiro norfla xopmaa,
Thanks to the fact that the
MJKHO KynTbCH K&7Kweather is fine, we can
Hbr
fleHb.
bathe every day.
Note that, with noTOMy ITO, if it is required strongly to emphasize the reason for a particular action, a pause may be made in
speech before the ITO, particular stress being laid on the word
noTOMy:
OH He npHflT noiOMy,... Tro e OTn. yMep.
In writing, <no is preceded by a comma if this particular stress is
required.

(b) TaK KaK 'as'. This conjunction is frequently used

in written and spoken Russian. It is somewhat less
heavy than noTOMy HTO;
TaK KaK 6bTJio n3flao, a
As it was late I decided to
peuiHJi ocrTbca y HHX.
stay with them.
Note that if there is a comma between TaK and KaK, the meaning
is 'so ... as' 'just... as':
SI HanHcji JIHCBM TBK, KSK
I wrote the letter just as
Tbi xoTn.
you wanted.

Cf. TaK ... HTo 'so ... that':

Ebijio TaK pHo, qro HHKOTO H buio Ha yjnmax.

It was so early that there

was no one on the
streets.

Like TaK KaK is 60 'for' 'as' - a word, however,

confined almost exclusively to literary Russian.
225

(3) Adverbial clauses of purpose. In order to express aim or

purpose in Russian, the conjunction HT66BI (or, more
rarely, *TO6) (sometimes pua Tor iT6bi)+the
infinitive is used,, provided the subject of the subordinate clause is the same as the subject of the main
clause ('he said this in order to impress me' - 'he said
this in order that he might impress me'). H T S M is
always preceded by a comma, unless, of course, it comes
- first in the sentence:
O H npHTJiacHJi MeHH, H T 6 6 H V3HTb o TBoM 3flopBbe.

He invited me i n order t o
find
out about your
health.

Sometimes, generaUy when the main verb is a verb of

motion, H T 6 6 H may be left out and the infinitive (not
preceded by a comma)foUowsthe main verb:
M B I npHuiJiH
SojTbHro.

noceiHTb

We've come to visit the

patient.

If the subject of the subordinate clause is not the same

as that of the main clause, then I T 6 6 M must be followed by the past tense:
Si npHTJiacHJi HX, TODBI I invited them s o that it
n
5biJio
cjrmKOM
wouldn't b e too boring.
CKjVmo.
H T S B I OH HHHJI ( I T S B I

OH Mor HOHHTB) TO,

Bbi flOJDKHbi eMy Bc
noBTopHTb.

In o r d e r t h a t h e should

understand this, you

must repeat everything
to him.

U s e o f rofl a n d jiTo with N u m e r a l s

In order to translate 'year(s)' after numerals, rofl
(gen. sing, rfla; pl. rflbi or rofl, roflM, roflMH,
roflx) is used for aU occasions except when the genitive
plural is required. Thus:
flBa rfla; qerb'ipe rfla;
TpHHfltraTbio rofliwH (instr.) etc.
226

When the gemtive plural is required (i.e. after 5, 6, 7,

etc., in the nominative or genitive case; after 2, 3, or 4
in the genitive case) then aro (ht. 'summer') must
be used:
HHTb n e r

HBa/maTH BOCMH jrer (gen.)

Tpx aer (gen.)
Note that the genitive case can be used in this way to describe a
person's age:
XteaflnaTH jier OH nocrynnji
At twenty he entered the
B VHHBepcHTT.
university.
HeJioBK jier copoK
a man of about forty
This 'genitive of description' with numerals cannot be used for
anything except expressions of age.

The only exceptions to the above rules concerning the

use of rofl and jio with numerals are (a) expressions
denoting decades, eras, in the genitive:
qejioBK copoKOBbK roflB

- a man of the forties

(b) the genitive plural after two ordinals in the

genitive:
ncjie HHTOro H mecrro
roflB

after the fifth and sixth

years

TEKCT
AneKcBflp CepreBHi IlyniKHH (npoponxcaae)
ncjie Tor KaK riyuiKHH BepHyncH H3 CCMJIKH, OH
blJI BOCTpJKeHHO BcrpieH B MocKB. Ho OH He
onpaBfln Haflatfl Hmcona I, TaK KaK OH He cran
npHABpHbiM noTOM. B Banane TpHfluTbrx roflB
nyuTKHH jKeHHJicH H BCKpe nepexaji B nerepypr.
Er oTHomHHH c napM CTaHOBHJrHCb Bc xynce. n p a ABpHbie HeHaBHflena er. Hx HHTPHTH npHBena er
K flyjm c MOJioflb'iM d)paHqy3CKHM orhnnpOM JSjasrcoM, nocTynHBnrHM Ha cjryjKy K napib. JlyjTb
COCTOHJiaCB 27 HHBapH 1837 tfla B OKpCTHOCTHX
227

Herepfiypra. npBbiM 1 Bbicrpennji JlaHTc, H n y m KHH, npncfle HBM OH Mor caM Bbicrpejnm., ynn Ha
CHer, THHcen pHeHHbra. KaK TJIBKO er npHBeaaH
flOMH, Bce B neTepypre y3HjrH o TOM, HTO2 OH
pHeH. Y flMa, rfle OH JKHJI, flem H HOHB CTOHJIH

Tb'lCH^H JHOflH, npHXOAHBmHX y3HTB o 3flopBBe

moHMoro HMH nora. *Ipe3 nna AHH OH yMep.
3a 3 rflbi c 1828 no 1837 nyiHKHH Hanncn MHro
npeKpcHbrx irooH3BeflHHH. Er nosMbi riojrrBa4
H MAHbiH BflHHK5 oipamioT Bnonsie crpaHHnbi pyccKo HcrpHH H noKa3biBaiOT OHHor H3 er
jnoHMbrx repeB - nerp BenHKoro. B Haijie cemi
1830 rna nymKHH nepexan B CCJI BJIAHHO;
naroflapn TOMy HTO noHBHJiacb xonpa B OKpcrHOCTHX, OHflJDKeH6bUI OCTTbCH TaM TpH MCHOa.
3 T H TpH McHUa 0Ka3jTHCB 3aMeHTejTbHO TBpHeCKHM
nepHoflOM fljia nora. ilon OH TaM n o m , OH Hanncn
THKHe npOHBBeflHHH, KaK nBeCTH BjTKHHa,6
TaK Ha3bmeMbie MneHBKHe TparflHH7 n JIMHK B
KonMHe.8 KpMe Tor, KorA OH JKHH B BJiAHHe, OH
3aKHHHH pOMH B CTHXaX EBrHHH OHrHH, KOTpbm
MHrne9 cmrraioT cMbiM BejrHKOJinHbiM H3 Bcex er
npOH3BeflHHH.
1. Note the instrumental: 'D'Anthes was thefirstto shoot.'
2. Note the expression ysBATb o TOM, <rro ... 'to find out about
the fact that...'.
3. 3a+ace. of words denoting time means''during'.
4. Part of the poem describes the battle of Poltava (1709) between the Swedes and the Russians, who were commanded by
Peter the Oreat,
5. Pushkin's great poem The Bronze Horseman, describing,
inter alia, the flood of St Petersburg in 1824 and Falconet's
statue of Peter I.
6. The Tales of Belkin are five short stories; they are among
Pushkin's most successful ventures into prose.
7. The 'little tragedies' are four short psychological dramas
written in verse.
8. The Little House in Kolomna is a poem dealing with the lives
of everyday people in St Petersburg.
9. Note that MHTO can be used as an adjective in the nominative
plural to translate 'many people'.
228

ynPAHCHEHHH
I. Replace the pronominal expressions in the foUowing
sentences with adverbial clauses.
(e.g. ncjie ofla - ncne Tor KaK OH ndoflan ...)
(i) OH Bbmuia 3Myac flo er B03BpamHHH.
(2) C e OTb3fla H H 6MJI B KHH.

(3) ncne OKOHHHHH yHHBepcHTTa OH cran AKTOpOM.

(4) BBHfly 6on3HH OH He Mor ITOHATH cerAHH.
(5) BjiaroAapH powab Tra Aima He MJKCT ^namaTb
y Hac.

2. Insert either roA or nro in the appropriate case and

number in the blank spaces:
(1) O H CHAn 3 ... B TiopbM.
(2) MOH cbiH BepHrcH npe3 12 ...
(3) ncne Anyx ... raK HCH3HH OH yxan.
(4)"nymKHH poAHJiCH B 1799 ...
(5) O H 6bin lenoBK ABaAflTbix ...
(6) 3a CTOJIM CHAJia H<mnHHa ... naTHflecHTH.
(7) O H ABVMH ... crpm Memi.
(8) O H HCHJI 3Aecb 6jn>me ipx ...

3. Translate into Russian:

(1) Don't get up until he orders you to get up.
(2) The earner I go to bed at night the more work I do.
(3) As you're off to Moscow tomorrow you can take
this letter with you.
(4) My brother got married last year. My sister
married two years ago.
(5) Do you know who Anna's married to? Yes, she
married my brother.
(6) I'm telling you this because I love you.
229

(7) In order to find out about his health you've got to

go to the hospital.
(8) Sergey had barely left the room when Elena
Ivanovna started crying.
(9) The match wiU not take place today in view of
the bad weather.
(10) Talk to me whUe I'm sitting here. I hate it when
you look at me and don't talk,
( n ) WhUe reading the paper the old man feU asleep.
(12) They aU got up after finishing lunch.
(13) My typewriter is so old that it doesn't work.

230

YPOK 29

CJIOBAPb
3HH/. Asia
apxHBOT.archives
66ymKa / . (gen. pl. 66ymeK)
grandmother
6eHrjn>CKHH adj. Bengal, Bengali
fleflymKa OT. (gen. pl. flflymen)
grandfather
flejieruHH/. delegation
HoexaTb I pf. (floflly, -enn.) to
reach, to go as far as 1
ApBHHH adj. ancient
EBpna/. Europe
eBponHCKHH adj. European
HtypHajiHCT m. journalist
3aBH3Tb I pf. (3aBHJKy, 3aBHHtemb) to tie up ; to establish,
to start
3aHHTepecoBTbca I pf. (3anHlepecyfliocb, -embca) (+instr.)
to become interested in
3HaKMHTbCa II (3HaKMJHOCb,
3HaKMHmbca) (c+instr.)
to
make- the acquaintance of;
to familiarize oneself with

H3o6pa>KTb I (H3o6pa>K|]io,
-enn.) to depict, to portray
HHflHHCKHH adj. Indian
H H A H H / . India

Kyneia OT. (gen. Kynn, pl.

Kynub'i) merchant
MaB30Jin m. mausoleum
Mjma adv. silently
MoxraaTb I I (MOJwfly, -fern.) to
be silent
MbiTb I (M6[|IO, -enn.) to wash
Hapfl m. people
HecMorp Ha pr. (+ace.) in
spite of
HxoTH adv. unwillingly
oncHbiH adj. dangerous
OHHCHHe n. description
OHHcTb I pf. (omimy, oiiHmenn.)
to describe
oTHcTH I pf. (oTHecU^, -mb) to
take away, back
OTHOCHTb I I (OTHOmy, OTHCHHIb)
to take away, back
napjiMeHT m. parliament

i . T h e imperfective of floxaib, floeaiKib, is frequently used as a

negative gerund followed by op+gen.: He floe33Ka flo - 'just
before reaching' (OH ocraHOBHJica, He floe3jKa (flo) MOCKBBT note that the flo can be omitted). If the subject of the sentence is
on foot, then He floxofla (flo) (from floxoflHTb, AOHTH) is used.

231

noroflHTb II pf. (noroiKy, noroflHDTb) to wait2

noflOHtflaTb I pf. (noflojKflUft
-mb, past tense noflOHtflaa, -,
noflOHcflJio; noflOJKfljra) to
wait?
n03HaKMHTbCH II pf. (n03HaKMJHOCb, no3HaKMHmbca)
(c+instr.) to make the acquaintance of
noKHHjrn. I pf. (noictefly, -enn.)
to leave, to abandon3
npeflCTaBHTejib m. representative
npHHHMTb
I
(npHHHM||lO,
-enn.) to take, to receive, to
accept
npHHHTb I pf. (npHMy, npaMemb, past tense npKHHJi, -,
npHHajio; npHHHjni) to take, to
receive, to accept
npKpfla/. nature
npojKHTb I pf. (npo)KHB||y,
-mb, past tense npjKHJi, -,
npOHOUio; npJKHjm) to live 4
nyTemcTBeBHHKOT.traveller
pa6THHK m. worker, workman;
Hayrabra pa6THHK research
worker, scientific worker
pan m. (pl. paflb'i) row, series,
number, quantity
enfla adv. in a sitting position

cK3oiHbra adj. fabulous

CJIOJKHTb II pf. (cJIOHty, CJIJKHmb) to fold
coBepmTb I (coBepm||io, -emb)
to complete, to perform, to
accomplish
coBepuiHTb II pf. (coBepmfly,
-HHib) to complete, to perform,
to accomplish
coBpeMHHHKOT.contemporary
coBpeMHHbiH adj. contemporary, modern
cpflHHH adj. middle, central;
medium, average
crapTbCH I (cTap||iocb, -embca)
to try
CTa adv. in a standing position
cyflHTb II (cyjKy, cyflHrm.) to
judge
TaJiHTJTHBbTH adj.
talented,
gifted
THH m. type, kind
THnorp4>Ha/. printing press
ToprBbiH adj. trade
(attr.),
commercial
TpyflHbiH adj. difficult
THHyTb I (THHy, THHemb) to draw,
drag
ryflo n. (pl. lyfleca, gen. pl.
lyflc) miracle
mpdiTOT.type, print

noflOHCflTb (impf. jKflaTb) usually takes the genitive of the

object (although it can be followed by an accusative of feminine
nouns). noroflHTb, which has no imperfective, is more colloquial
and is always used intransitively (i.e. it cannot govern an object),
mostly in the imperative (norofla(Te)!) and the gerund (norofla).
IIoKHHyTb (impf. HOKHflTb) 'to leave' is a transitive verb and can
be followed by an object denoting a person, place, or thing: OH
noKHHyji eiry; OH noKHHyji MocKBy; OH noKHHyji CBOIO paSTy.
The verb ocrBHTb (impf. ocraBJiHTb) is used in a similar way.
npojKHTb is a transitive verb meaning 'to spend a certain time
living'; it is followed by the amount of time in the accusative (OH
npHCHJi TaM HeflJHo). Note that Horn., which may be considered
the impf. of npojKHTb, can be used in the same way.

232

Bbipa^cnHH
He TjibKo ... HO H ...
KaK MJKHO 6jn>me
KaK MJKHO CKope

not only ... but also ...

as much as possible
as quickly as possible '

TPAMMATHKA
i. The Gerund
The gerund in Russian is a verbal adverb. It corresponds to the EngUsh verbal form ending in -ing
(singing, shouting, lying), but it never describes a
noun; it only describes an action.
There are two types of gerund in Russian, the present
and the past gerund.
(i) Formation of gerunds
(a) Present Gerund. The present gerund is most
easy formed by taking the 3rd person plural of the
present tense (imperfective aspect) (HHTOIOT, npMOT), removing the last two letters (vara-, nepnc-)
and adding -a, or, if the stem ends in ne, % m, or
ni> adding -a (*nrrH, flepxca). The only exceptions
to this rule are verbs ending in -anara, which have
the gerund in -asn (paaaa).
The present gerund of reflexive verbs ends in -ci.
Thus:
roBopHTb: roBop(HT)+a - rosopa
qyBCTBOBaTb: qyBCTBy(lOT) + H - ^yBCTByH
BCTpeiibCH: Bcrpe<i(iOTCH)+acb - Bcxpeqacb
CMeTbca: CMe(iTca)4-HCb - ciweacb
cjjjb'nnaTb: cJib'mi(aT)+a cngama
Spaib: 6ep(yr)+H - epa
Be3TH: Be3(yx)+H - BC3
Note that some verbs in Russian have no present gerund or a
present gerund which is very rarely used. For example: 6nrb,
HHTb, nerb, Hceqb, xaib, HacTb, THHyTb (and all verbs ending
in -HVTb).

233

As for the stress, it is the same as on the ist person

singular of the present tense:
CMOTP w - cMOTpa (cf: CMTPHT)

Kypib - Kypa (cf. KypaT)

There are a few verbs in Russian with the gerund ending in
-yra, -K)HH. Except, however, for 6yflyra (from 6bm>) 'being',
these forms are archaic and are only used to give an effect of
archaism. The gerund npimeBaKWH, used in connexion with
the verb jKHib - 'to live in clover ' - is now used quite frequently,
but purely as an adverb.

(b) Past Gerund. The past gerund, which is limited

almost entirely to verbs of the perfective aspect, is
formed in the same way as the past active participle,
the ending being -B or -BIHH (the latter being shghtly
less common) for verbs with a past tense ending in -a.
Thus: npoHHTB(niH); noroBopiB(mii); npoflas(nra). Reflexive verbs of this type, however, only
end in -Biimcb in their past gerund.
If the past tense does not end in -JI, then -HIH must be added to
the masculine singular form of the past tense:
npHHecTH: npuHec + nm - npHHcmH
npHBe3TH: npKB3+mH - npHBeaum
jieqb: jir+mH - jirmH
(but npHflTH - npHmflmH)
These forms are not found very frequently; they are usually
replaced by a present gerund formed from the perfective aspect.
Thus in order to avoid the archaic and shghtly cacophonous
npHB3niH, npHmflmH etc., the forms npie3H (npaBe3(yT)+a),
npHflH (npHfl(yT)+a), etc., are used. This type of past gerund
formed from the present perfective tends, in modern Russian,
to be restricted to verbs of motion; verbs of seeing and hearing,
however, can also have this form as an alternative form (ycufnna
- ycjnmaB(inH); yBHfla - yBHfleBara)). There are as well one
or two idiomatic expressions in which present gerunds formed
from perfective verbs are used, such as:
OH CHflHT cnowa pyKH.
HeMHro norofla
234

He sits in idleness (lit.

having folded his arms).
After a little while (lit.
having waited a little)

(2) Use of gerunds. Gerunds can only be used to describe

an action or a previous verb; they cannot be used, as
participles can, to describe a person.
It foUows, therefore, that a gerund replaces a clause
made up of a verb and a conjunction. In the sentence
' I asked him a question while I was doing up my
laces', 'while I was' can be removed in Russian and
'doing up' becomes a gerund, or a 'verbal adverb',
describing how I asked the question.
Thus a gerund can replace:
(a) a temporal clause - 'having read the paper (=after
he had read), he had supper'.
(b) a causal clause - ' I read this book wishing (=
because I wished) to know more about the subject'.
(c) a conditional clause - 'studying Russian (=if you
study), you may understand the Russians'.
It is frequently used in the negative to translate 'without doing something', thus avoiding a clumsy subordinate clause introduced by 6e3 Tor, Hro(6bi) ...
Haraer He 3aMea, OH
Bcraji.

Without noticing
thing he got up.

any-

The subject of the gerund must always be the same as

the subject of the main clause: e.g. 'having said this
(=when Olga had said this), Olga left the room'. It is
impossible to use a gerund when the subjects are
different: in the sentence 'Olga having said this, / left
the room', 'Olga having said this' must be rendered by
'when Olga had said this'.
There are, however, one or two idiomatic usages of the gerund
in which this rule is broken:
(i) Sometimes when the main clause contains an impersonal
expression (Hyuoao, MJKHO, etc.) a gerund may still, though
illogically, be used:
IIpo^HTB KHHry, Hyaaio
Having read, this book you
e oTHecTH B 6H6jmoiKy.
must take it back to the
library.

235

(ii) Some gerunds are used more or less as prepositions, e.g.

cyan no+dot.
judging from (from cyflHTB)
HecMOipa Ha+ace.
in spite of (cf. HecMorpa Ha
TO, ITO ... 'in spite of
the fact that...')
beginning with ...
HatTHHaa c+gen.
KOHoaa+instr.
ending with ...
npHHHMa (npHHHB) BO taking into consideration ...
BHHMHHe ...
With these expressions it is not necessary that the subject of the
main verb and the gerund should be the same, e.g.
Cyna no BceMy, BM crpme
Judging by everything you
Mena.
are older than me.

As for the question of whether the present or past

gerund is used in Russian, the foUowing remarks
should be borne in mind:
(a) The present gerund is used to describe an action
which goes on at the same time as the action expressed
by the main verb. The tense of the latter can be
present, past, or future; the aspect imperfective or
perfective. Thus:
OH noT, ryjiHH B npKe.
(=Korfl OH ryjiaer)
OH neji, ryjuta B npKe.
(=KOTfl, noK OH ryjiaji)
OH ynji, ryjiaa B npKe.
(=Korfl OH ryjiHJi)
OH 6yfleT neib, ryjiaa B nipKe.
(=Korfl OH 6yfler ryjiaib)

He sings walking in the

park.
He used to sing walking in
the park.
He fell down while walking in the park.
He will sing walking in
the park.

(b) The past perfective gerund is usuaUy used to

indicate an action which precedes that expressed by the
main verb. Again, the latter may be in any tense or
either aspect:
TJpoTOTaB KHHry,
OH JIOJKHTCH cnaib.
OH Jir cnaTb.
OH jiHjKer cnaTb.

Having read the book

( he goes to bed.
< he went to bed.
I he will go to bed, etc.

236

Often the difference between the present and the past gerund is
very slight Cf.
Bofla B KMHaTy, OH CHHJI
Having entered the room
mjiibiy.
he took off his hat
(=Korfl OH BomJi)
Entering the room he took
Bxofla B KMHaTy, OH CHHJI
mjiany.
off his hat.
( = KOTfl OH BXOflHJl)
The second example implies that the action expressed by the two
verbs is simultaneous.

From the above examples it wiU be seen that the

gerundial clause may precede or foUow the main
clause, from which it is separated by a comma or
commas.
Only occasionally, when the gerund has lost its verbal force and
is used purely as an adverb, will ft follow Or precede the verb
without a comma. In some cases such adverbs have an unexpected stress ^--MJraa 'silently'; nata, CHAH, CTH 'in a
lying, sitting, standing position' (cf. croa, the gerund proper
of CTOHTb); HxoiH 'unwillingly '.

The Declension of Russian Surnames, Patronymics, and Possessive Adjectives

Russian surnames ending in -OB (or -es) and -HH are
dechned in the foUowing manner:
Norn.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

Singular
Masculine
neTpB
rieTpBa
nerpBa
nerpBy
neipBbiM.

nerpBe

Plural
Feminine Masc. and/or Fem,
tleBa
HHKHTHHbl
tjeBy
tJeBOH
*IeBOH

tleBOH
tleBOH

HHKHTHHBIX
HHKHTHHBIX
HHKHTHHblM
HHKHTHHMMH
HHKHTHHblX

Surnames ending in -CKHH (OonHCKHH, MammBCKHH) are declined exactly like adjectives.
Christian names and patronymics are declined like
nouns. Thus the dative of EnHa HBHOBHa rierpBa
would be nHe HBaHOBHe rierpBo.
237

Note that the so-called 'possessive' adjectives in Russian-are

declined in the same way as surnames ending in -OB or -HH
(except that the prep. masc. sing, ends in -OM). These adjectives,
formed usually from the diminutives of Christian names
(CauiHH from Cama, diminutive of AJieKcaaflp; CepJKHH from
CepjKa, diminutive of Ceprn) or from nouns of kinship
(ccTpHH, 66ymKHH,flflymKHH,6pTHHH, etc.), are used to
denote possession:
ccrpHRa KMHSTa
my sister's room
B 66ymKHHOH KHre
in grandmother's book
In modem Russian the genitive (and even dative) masculine
singular ending is often adjectival - 66ynn<HHoro, 66ymKHHOJty.

TKCT
JIpBHHH KynBTypa MHOHB, e TanHTjrHBBra Hapfl n
neHB oraTan npnpfla Bcerfl HHTepecoBnH n n p n BJieKjTH npeflCTaBHTeneH pyccKoa KynBTypBi.
E m B mecTHflecHTBrx roflx X V Bica pyccKHH Kynri
H3 rpofla T s p H AdiaHciu HHKHTHH, 3a 30 neKflo
BcKo n a Tina., coBepmnji nyTemcTBHe B Hapvao.
noKHHyB B 1466 rofly ApenmoK T e p b , OH floxan flo
HHflHH, H3BCTHOH er COBpeMHHHKaiW KaK CKa30HHaH
CTpana nyflc. Cy/ra n o e r onHcmno, nyremcTBHe buio
neHb TpyflHoe H oncHoe.
3aBH3B TOprBbie OTHOmHHH C HapflaMH HHflHH,
AtpaHacHH HHKHTHH H3yHHJi HX Kyjuvrypy H 3aMeqTenBHyio apxHTeKTypy crpBix HHflHHCKHx ropoflB. Bo3BpaIflHCB flOMOH B I472 TOPy, OH ^Mep, He flOe33KH flO
TepH. HirrH 060 BcM 3TOM B e r npoH3BeflHHH
"XoKflHHe* 3a TpH MpH", Mbi BHflHM, HTO AdpaHacHH
HHKHTHH BIJI He TJTBKO TajiaHmHBBiM micTejieM, HO H

HeBB HHTepcHbiM qejioBeKOM.

CoBpeMHHbm HHflHHCKHH imcaTenB XaflHd AxMfl
A66c, 3aHHTepecoBBmHCB nyTemcTBHeM AdiaHcHH
HHKHTHHa, pemHJi onHcaTB er AJIH KHHOipHJiBMa. I 1 H CTejTB npHOUI HCKOJIbKO BpMeHH B KaJTHHHHe, KHK
Ha3biBeTCH Tenpb rpofl Tepb, 3HaKMHCB c er
apxHBaMH, asyna. KOCTiMbi X V Bna, ecflyn c HaynHblMH paTHHKaMH.
* voyage (archaic)
238

B XVII BKe coBepnniJi nyremcTBHe B HHAHIO flpyro

nyremcTBeHHHK - IepcHM JlSefleB. O H c3flan B .
-KanBKyrre TeTp eBponHCKoro THna, B KOTpoM ntcbi
mim Ha eHrjiBCKOM H3bm. Bo3BpaTHCb B POCCHIO,
JlSefleB ocHOBan npByio B EBpne ranorpcbmo c
eHrjiBCKHM inpHdyroM.
PyccKHe xyflHorHKH XIX BKa neab mirepecoBanHCB
HHflHen. JJ,Ba p3a nocernn HHflHio H3BcTHbiH pyccKHH
xyfloKHHK BeperflrHH. KjKflbm pa3 B03Bparnncb, OH
npHB03HH HBbie KapTHHbi. Ocemio onBme BneHararaie npoH3BflHT er KapTHHbi: MaB3ona Tafl
Maxna H BcflHHK B JJ^ariype. HaqHHH c 1950
rfla, HHflHK) nOCeTHH H pflfl COBTCKHX XyflKHHKOB,
KapTHHbl KOTpblX H3o6pa>KaK)T COBpeMHHyK) 5KH3HB
HHflHHCKOrO Hapfla, BHflbi ropOflB, nMHTHHKH apXHTeKTypbi H CKyjnrrrypbi. B HHAHH TH<e buio nraro
COBTCKHX rmcTeneH, VHHbix, HcypHanHcroB H apTHCTOB.
He TJTBKO nocemioT HHflHio coBrciaie noceTHTenn;
B POCCHK) tlcTO H npHe33KK)T npeflCTaBHTenH HHflHHCKOrO
Hapfla, xyflHamKH, iracarenH, apTHCTbi. HeflBHO npnxana B CCCP fleneraima napnMeHTa HHflHH. HpOBeflH
HCKOnBKOflHeB MOCKB, HHflHHCKHe rCTH COBepmHJTH
onune nyTemcTBHe no CoBrcKOMy Coi3y. nocerHB
Bonrorpafl, OHH noxann B CpflHHHO A3mo. ncne
Toro OHH b'um B Kpbmy H Ha KaBKa3e. HOTM OHH
noxann B JleHHHrpfl, npn<fle nei BepHyTBcn B Hamno.

ynPACHEHHfl
1. Replace with gerunds the verbs and conjunctions in the
subordinate clauses of the sentences given below:
(e.g. Korfl OHH nana MHe fleHBra, OBH noonaroflapHJia
MeHH - flaB(mH) MHeflHBTH,...)
(1) Tan KHK on He 3Her TBoer npeca, OH He Monter
HanncTB Te.
(2) ncne Tor KaK OH orBmn Ha Bce Bonpcbi,
HcypHanHCT yxan.
239

(3) H nocemn nonHorKy K&Kflbin nem., Korfl a

paTan Hafl HBOH KHHTOH.
(4) MjuvoiK 3acMencn, KaK TJTBKO OH BOiun B
KMHaTy.
(5) Korfl BBI nyTemcTByeTe no HHAHH, BBI Bcerfl
BCTpenere HHTepcHbrx moflH.
(6) Mbi OCTaHOBHnHCb B MneHBKOH rOCTHHHfle,
Korfl MBI floxann flo rpofla.
(7) noieMy flra He cMeiTCH, noic OHH rapioT ?
(8) KaK TnBKO OH oflncn, OH cnycTHncH no ncTHHfle.
2. Replace the gerunds in the foUowing sentences with
subordinate clauses made up of a conjunction and a
verb:
(i) tlHTH er nocnflHHH poMH, H 3aaryn B Kpcne.
(2) 3aHHTepecoBBuiHCB pyccKo HcropneH, OH HOxan B CoBrcKHo C013.
(3) npHBe3H eflOMH,OH nonpocHJi e npnxaTB Ha
cnnyipinHH flem..
(4) EyflyHH yMHbiM, OH HH cnBa He CKa3an.
(5) O H Monnn, nonccb cnaTB.
(6) HarmcB iracbM, OH noflr rynHTB.
3. Give the present and past (perfective) gerunds of the
foUowing verbs:
npHxoflHTB; MbiTb; JKHTB; OTHOCHTB; naroflapHTB;
HHcTB; npHBOflHTB; cnbnuaTB; cjiymaTb.
4. Translate into Russian:
(1) Talking to him, I suddenly understood why aU
his friends left riim.
(2) Taking everything into consideration, I ihink the
government is right.
(3) Why do you work standing up ? Because it's much
easier than working (use infinitive) sitting down.
(4) Let's wait for the Lavrins. They must have left
their house by now and it's not far from them to
us.
240

(5) Reading this book I was struck by the description

of Anna Pavlova.
(6) Do you realize that all these people sitting here
and talking to each other are members of parliament ?
(7) Having got as far as Tashkent we decided to
return to Leningrad.
(8) Judging from her books, your grandmother must
be a remarkable woman.
(9) Having completed their journey through Central
Asia the delegation returned to India.
(10) I have been waiting for twenty-five minutes;
when you are going to bring me the soup ?
(11) The representative of the Soviet Union wants to
make your acquaintance.
(12) WhUe studying Russian you must try to learn as
many words a day as possible.
(13) After finishing the university he began to work in
the Foreign Office.

241

yPOK 30

CJIOBAPb
aJH>nHHH3M m. mountaineering
aflbnHHHCTCKHH m. mountaineer-

ing (attr.)
6acKei6ji m. basket-ball
6e>i<ib mixed conj. (6ery, 6eH<HDTb, 6e3KHT... 6eryT) to run 1
SojibmHHCTB n. majority
6opTbca I (6opiocb, 6penibca)
to struggle
6pHTHCKHH adj. British
BepBKa / . (gen. pl. BepBOK)
rope
BpHTb II (Bp|K>, -mnb) to
believe
BH3a/. visa
BOJiefi6ji m. volley-ball
BocxojKflHHe n. ascent
BbTpaTb I pf. (Bb'i6ep||y, -enn.)
to choose
BbmojmHHe
.
fulfilment,
carrying out

BbmoflHATb I
(Bbmjm|io,
-emb) to carry out, to fulfil
Bb'ipa3HTb II pf. (Bb'ipajKy, Bb'lpa3HHib) to express
raynbiH adj. stupid
rpaHeqa/. border, frontier*
rp&Jia/. rowing
flOBJibHO adv. rather; sufficiently, enough
flocTaBJiib I
(flOcraBjiH||iOj
-emb) to deliver; flocTaBjiirrb
yflOBJH>cTBHe +dat. to give
pleasure to
HceJimie n. desire, wish
jKejiTb I (eJi||io, -enn.)
(+gen.) to wish, to desire
3B0HHTb II (3BOH||K), -HHIb)
(+dat.) to ring (up), to telephone
HTp/. (pl. Hipbi) game

EextTb can be considered either as the defimte, directional form

of SraTb ('to run about') with the meaning 'to be running (in a
specific direction)' - OH 6ex<Ji B cafl 'he was running into the
garden'; or as a perfective: OH emn B cafl 'he ran into the
garden'.
Note the expressions:
xaTb 3a ipaHny
(ace.) 'to go abroad' (lit.
'beyond the frontier')
jKHTb 3a rpaHBHe'H
(instr.) 'to live abroad'
(lit. 'beyond the frontier')
(gen.)
'to
come
from
npHxaTb H3-3a rpaHHirbi
abroad' (lit. 'from beyond the frontier')

242

KaTTbCH I (KaT|iocb, -embca)

to go for a drive, ride*
KOHbKH pl. (gen. pl. KOHBKB)

skates
Jirepb m. (pl. Jiarepa, gen. pl.
jiarepa) camp
jisaib II (jiHty, Ji3mnb) to climb
jirKHH adj. (short form jiroK,
Jiei-K, Jierrc; aeno) easy
JUSDKH/. pl. (gen. JTBDK) skis

Mpica / .
(gen. pl. MpoK)
(postage-) stamp
McraocTb / . locality, place
HacTHBaTb I (HacTHBa||io, -emb)
to insist 4
HOBHMK m. (gen. HOBHtat, pl.

HOBJMKH) novice, beginner

oKsbaTb I (oK3biBa||io, -emb)
to render, to afford
ocobiH adj. special
OTBcHbht adj. steep, sheer
OTflOXH^Tb I pf. (OTflOXH|#,
-elm.) to rest
OTcwfla adv. from here
nepeflBHTTbca I (nepeflBHr||locb, -embca) to move (intrans.)
noSeflHTb II pf. ist pers. sing.
not used, noeeflmin., past. pass,
part. no6ejKflHHbiH) to conquer

noflTOTBKa / .
preparation,
training
nOSBOHHTb II pf. (n03B0H||K>,
-mm.) to ring (up), to telephone
noji3HbiH adj. (short form noJi3eH, nojiaHa, -o; -BI) useful
nMomb/. help
nonyjiapHOCTb / . popularity
nocTpaflTb I pf. (nocTpafl||io,
-emb) to suffer; nocrpaflaBHTHH injured
noxfl m. expedition, excursion;
campaign
npefljiarTb
I
(npefljiar|io,
-enn.) to suggest, to offer
npefljiojKHTb II pf. (npefljiOHty,
npeflJijKHmb) to suggest, to
offer
npeflcraBHTb II pf. (npeflCTiBJHO, npeflCTaBHuib) to present; npeflcraBHTb ceS to
imagine
npoBOflHTb II (npoBOJK^, npoBflHmb) to spend (time); to
conduct, to hold (a competition)
pflocTb/. joy
pa3 m. times

3. KaiTbca (pf. noKaTTbca) means 'to go for a pleasure ride' (no

direction implied) - in a car, on horseback (BepxM), in a boat
(Ha jiflKe), etc.
4. HacTHBaTb is followed by w+prep.
(a HacraHBaio na OTBere).
. The perfective Hacrorb means 'to achieve something by insisting' OH HacroHJi Ha BbmojmBHH
'he insisted on the work
pa6Tbi
being carried out (and it
was carried out)'.
5. Pa3 is used with numerals to translate ' 2 , 5, 10, etc. times'. The
gen. pl. is the same as the nom. sing. (mm. pa3, HcKOJibKo pa3,
MHTO pa3; cf. Tpa psa). It is also used in counting for 'one'
(pa3, flBa, Tpn, qerbipe ...). Note also the expression em pas
'once again*.

243

paccTOHHHe . distance
CKan / . (pl. CKjiBi) rock
CJiyHHTbca II pf. (cnynHTCH,
cjiynaTCH) to happen6
co6npaTbca
I (co6Hp||iocb,
-embca) to gather, to assemble ;
to be about to, to intend9
cocTHsHHe n. competition
TpooBaHHe n. demand
TpooBaTb I (Tp6y||io, -enn.) to
demand

yBejiHnaTB I (yBejnrqHBaio,
-enib) to increase
yHTH I pf. (yHfllly, -enn., past
tense ymji) to go away
yxoflHTb II (yxoaty, yxjmmb)
to go away
yqcTBOBaTb I (y<icTBy||K>,
-enn.) to take part
xoioxn m. hockey

6. In order to translate 'to happen to', cjiyqaibca (impf. cjryiTbCH)

c+instr. is used:
^TO cjiyqjiocb c HHM ?

What's happened to him ?

7. Co6npTBCH (pf, co6pTbca) is frequently used with the meaning

'to be on the point of...' or 'to intend to ...':
OHH co6HpJmcb yTii, KOTfl ...
A He co&Hprocb BOTH B TeTp.

They were just about to

go when ...
I don't intend to go' to the
theatre.

BbipancHHH
roBopHTb HaflByxH3bn<x
to speak two languages
roBopHTb Ha aHTJiHHCKOM H3bH< to speak in EngUsh
(cf. roBopHTb no-aHTJiHHCKH) (cf. to speak English)
HOflHHMTbCH H Topbi
to climb mountains
OK3bmaTb (pf. OKa3Tb) npByio to give first aid
nMomb

HBa-ipH,
flBe-ipH
KaTTbca Ha KOHbKx
xoflHTb Ha jHjKax
Ha OTKpbiTOM B3flyxe

two or three
to skate
to ski
in the open air

244

TPAMMATHKA
1. The Conditional Mood
The conditional mood in Russian is formed simply by
adding the particle 6M (sometimes, after a vowel, 6)
to the past tense of the verb (imperfective or perfective
aspect):
H (npo)iHTJi 6M
Mbi BCTHJiH SKI
OH 6bui 6 M

I would read (have read)

we would get up (have got up)
she would be (have been)

The conditional mood expresses a hypothesis, an

action which might have taken place, which might be
taking place or which might take place in the future.
In other words, it assumes that you understand, or wiU
in fact add, 'if such and such a thing were to (have)
happen(ed)\
There is only one tense in the conditional in Russian,
though this may express present, past, or future condition in English. Thus H ySan 6M coKy can mean:
(a) I would have killed the dog.
(b) I would kill the dog (today).
or (c) I would kill the dog (tomorrow).

BBI need not necessarily foUow the verb (although it

generaUy does); it may foUow any other word in the
sentence, if it is required to emphasize that word.
Thus:
H 6 M yoHJi co6Ky.

I would kill the dog.

2. Conditional Clauses
In a simple conditional sentence, when real, nonhypothetical condition is imphed, both clauses are in
the indicative:
Earn a yBHHcy TBOKJ cecTpy, a flaM en uHCbM.

245

If I see your sister I will

give her the letter.

If, however, the sentence is hypothetical, then the

verb in the main clause wUl be in the conditional
(H flan 6bi e HHCBM ' I would give her the letter') and
the verb in the secondary clause wiU be introduced by
cjm 6 M (never separated) and wiU be in the past
tense (cjin 6 M a ysapen ... 'If I were to (if I
should) see ...').
ECJIH 6 H OH noflOHCflji,
Had he waited she would
OH oTKpbuia 6bi flBepb. have opened the door.
(or: 'were he to wait she
would" open the door')

These two constructions, the hypothetical and the

non-hypothetical, must not be mixed up - in other
words, if one clause has a 6 H in it, then the other
clause must have one too.
Note: Sometimes cjra (6BI) can be omitted, the verb corning
first in the clause:
noflOHCfln 6bi OH, OH OTKpb'iJia 6bi flBepb.
noflojKflr OH, OH OTKper flBepb.
Often the main clause in a conditional sentence is introduced by
the particle TO (cf. English 'then'):
Earn Bbi jiMHTe My3bn<y,
TO H coBTyio BSM HOHTH
Ha KOHflpT.

If you like music, (then) I

advise you to go to the
concert.

Sometimes earn 6bi+past tense (or earn+future) can be

replaced by the 2nd person singular of the imperative of the verb
followed by the subject in the nominative:
~~* .
Eyflb a HOTOM, a imcji 6bi
Were I a poet I would write
o 3B3flax.
about the stars.
YMpik TH 3BTpa, ITO CO
If you die tomorrow, what
MHOH 6yfleT ?
will happen to me ?
ECJIH 6 M can be used to express a desire or a wish in an exclamatory sentence:
Earn 6BI (TJIBKO) OH npnIf only he were to cornel
mJil

246

Use of HT6N with the Past Tense

It has already been mentioned (see Lesson 28) that in
adverbial clauses of purpose, in which the subjea of
the verb is not the same as that of the main verb,
HT66M+the past tense must be used:
*IT6M HHKT He 3nan 06
TOM, Hflo MOjrqTb.

So that no one should

know about this, we
must be silent.

nT6bi+the past tense can also be used:

(1) to express a wish or demand. After intransitive verbs
expressing a wish or demand, iTM+the past tense
must be used:

SLxo*sf

SI xoTji 6M,
MHe xoTnocb 6M,
SI xcenio,
SL Tp6yio,

IT65M

I want

BM

I would like I you to eat

I more.
I desire
J
I demand that you eat
more.
I insist on your doing
this.

6ojnvme
erra.

SL HaeraHBa (na TOM),

W 6 6 M BM TO Cflejiama.

It follows, of course, that <rr6bi+the past tense will be used

after the verbal nouns anamie 'wish', ip6oBaHHe 'demand':
OH Bbipa3Hji HceJiaHHe, tn6bi OH ymji.

He expressed a desire that

she should go.

*lT6bi+the past tense can also be used after such transitive

verbs as (no)npocHTb, npHKa3Tb, but it is more usual for them
to be followed by an object and an infinitive, e.g.:
OH noirpocHJi er (npnKa3Ji eMy) yore.

He asked him (ordered him)

to go away.

After npefljiojKHTb 'to suggest', either construction is possible:

OH npefljiojKHJi, <rro6bi Mbi~i
ynuiH.
>He suggested that we should go.
OH npefljiojKHJi BUM yiH. J

247

(2) after verbs of fearing and doubting.

H 6oK)Cb, I T 6 5 M (KaK 6M)
OH He upmuuia.

I'm afraid
come.

she

might

(cf. SL 6oK)Cb, TTO OH npHflT. I'm afraid she-will come. SL

oiocb, ITO OH He npHflT. I'm afraid she won't come.)

HTDBI BOHH

Jro'BOHHa

I d 0 u b t tf a w a r wiU b e g m

'

Ha^HTCH.

(3) after certain verbs in the negative. After such expressions

as H Hefl^Maro,He Bpio, He nMmo, HenB3H CKa3aTB,
etc., there is a tendency to use vrobi+the past tense,
rather than HTo-f-the indicative. E.g. :
HeJTbSH CKa3Tb, rr66bi OH

YOU can't say he's stupid.

6bui rjiyn.

4. Concessive Clauses
A concessive clause in Russian is usuaUy introduced
by the conjunction XOTH - the verb of the clause being
normaUy in the indicative:
XOTH MHe flna Bfey, MHe
He pa3pemHJTH xara.

Although they gave me a

visa they didn't let me
go.

It can also be introduced by an interrogative adverb or

pronoun (rfle, Kyn, ITO, KTO, KaKa, etc.) in
conjunction with the particle HH and the verb in the
conditional:
r e 6 M OH HH CHflji, OH
Hiraer He BHfleJi.

Wherever he sat, he saw

nothing.

Sometimes, but not so often, the verb is in the indicative (present, past, or future tense, without 6bi) .
TJio OH HH CKHter, cjiyma
ero.

248

Whatever he says, listen to

him.

Indefinite Pronouns and Adverbs

Indefinite pronouns and adverbs ('anybody', 'somewhere', etc.) can be formed in Russian by adding
various particles to the interrogative pronouns KTO,
ITO, KaKH, lefi, or to the interrogative adverbs
Korfl, rfle, Kyfl, oircyfla ('whence'), KaK.
(i) The most common of these particles are -TO and
-HHyflb, which are added to the end of the pronoun
or adverb. The distinction between the two is confusing at first.
(a) -TO gives the pronoun or adverb the meaning of
'some-(one, where, how, etc.)'. It indicates ignorance,
but not indifference, on the part of the speaker or
writer, a definite but yet unknown object or person.
It is usuaUy confined to the past or present tense.
KTO-TO men no yjmne.
Tfle OTii? OH Kyfla-TO
nomn.
OH npHB3 Kaicyio-To
KHHTy H36H6jiHOTKH.

Someone (I don't know

who) was walking down
the street.
Where's father? He's gone
somewhere.
He brought some book
from, thehbrary.

Note that KaK-TO and Korfl-To can have the meaning 'once',
'one day'; cf. oflHaiKflbi.
KaK-TO pHO yrpoM.

One day early in the morning.

(b) -HH6yflb (usuaUy unstressed) also gives the pronoun or adverb the meariing of 'some-(one, where,
how, etc.)', but lends an indefinite flavour, often
implying ignorance and indifference. It is mostly
confined to the future.
Bb'i6epHre
^rr-HHSynjb
fljia ce6a.
ripHxoflHTe K HaM KorflHHSyflB.

249

Choose something for

yourself.
Come and see us sometime.

Whenever it is required to translate the indefinite

pronoun or adverb 'any-(one, where, etc.)', in the
present, past, or future, then -HHyflb (or less commonly -JIH6O, which imphes complete freedom of
choice) is added:
Bbi Kor-HHSyflb Bcipeqajm Ha BOK3jie ?

Were you meeting anyone

at the station ?

Beware of using -mi6yflb in a negative sentence to translate

'any-'; 'he did not see anyone' must be translated OH hmcor He
BHfleJi.

(2) The particle Ke- can be added to some pronouns and

adverbs, this time in front of them. It gives a meaning
of distribution. Thus, KC-KT means 'one or two
people'; Ke-ii 'a thing or two' 'one or two things';
Ke-rfl 'here and there' 'in places' etc.
MHe HyjKHo BaM Ke-Tr
CKa3Tb.
Ke-rfl cufljm jnbfla.

I've a thing or two to tell

you.
Here and there people
were sitting.

Ke-KK means either 'badly', 'slackly', 'slovenly', 'haphazardly':

Fa6ra 6wji Ke-KK cfljiaHa.
or 'with great difficulty', 'just':
OHH Ke-KK flonur aofl.

The work was done haphazardly.

They just (with difficulty)
managed to get here.

Note that if a preposition governs Ke-Ki or Ke-vr, then it

will separate the Ko and the pronoun:
OH Ke c KeM noroBopji.
He chatted to one or two
people.

(3) H (always stressed) can be added to KTO, nTo,

KOTpMH, Korfl, and CKJIBKO to express indefiniteness. HKTO, HiTo, and HKorfla, in the
positive meaning of 'someone', 'something', and
'once', have already been discussed (see Lesson 24).
250

HKOTopbifi can either be used in the singular to

mean 'certain', 'some' (cf. KaKH-ro):
B HKOTopoiw paccTOHHHH i at a certain distance
OH npoBJi HKOTOpoe
He spent a certain time
BpMH TaM.
there.
or in the plural to mean 'some (not aU)':
HKOTOpBie H3 MOHX spySome of my friends were
3ft 6b'um raM.
there.
HKOTopue 3flHT 3a rpaSome people go abroad.
HHiry.

HcKonbKO means 'some' 'several'

quantity': HcKOJibKo pa3
several times '

'a

certain

In the obhque cases it is declined (as are MHTO and

like an adjective:
OH roBopHT Ha HecKOJibKHx
He speaks several lanH3biKx.
guages.
(cf. OH roBopHT Ha MHTHX H3biKx.
Ha CKJIBKHX H3bncx OH roBopHT )

CKJIBKO)

6. Adjectives and Numerals

When an adjective qualifies a noun foUowing the
numerals 2, 3, and 4 (and, of course, 22, 34, 73, etc.)
it usuaUy goes into the genitive plural when the noun
is masculine or neuter:
flBa onbnrx croji
two big tables
leTb'ipe MajieBBKHx OKH
four small windows
When the noun is feminine, however, the adjective
goes into the genitive or nominative plural:
TpHMHeHbKHxl
TpH MneHBKHeJ

Bmtat

'

three Bte girls

"

With feminine substantivized adjectives the nominative plural

only is normally used:
l e T b ' i p e CTOJiBbie

25I

In the obhque cases, whether the noun is masculine,

feminine, or neuter, the adjective foUows the case of
the numeral and the noun:
c TpeMH MOJioflb'iMH cojifl-

with three young soldiers

laMH

With numerals which take the genitive plural of the

noun, the adjective wUl also be in the genitive plural:
flBfloaTb mecTb
pyccKHx KHHT

HBUX

twenty-six
books

new

Russian

TEKCT
KncflbrH rofl MHro COBTCKHX jnofle ompannHeTCH
npOBOflHTB CBOH OTTiyCK B rpbl.
Ha KaBKa3e ecTB nenb KpacHBoe Mcro - TnBepfl.
BbicoK B ropx HaxflHTCH OOHBIHH anBimncrcKH
nrepB. Orcibfla oTKpbmercH npeKpcHbn BHA. BoKpyr
nrepH rycTbie, 3enm>ie nec. TpaB Ha cicnHax npican,
MHro p3Hbrx imerOB, a Bb'mie nencHT CHer. Bbuio 6BI
TpyflHO ce npeflCTBHTb nee HomoimcHoe Mcro.
HKOTopbie npHe3>KioT B THBepfl^, HTM npcro
oTfloxHyxB cpeflH BenmconenHoh rpHo npnpflbi, HO
6onbnmHCTB npHBneKeT ciofl rpHbi cnopr. HOBHHKH, Hcenaronnie 3aHHMTBCH anBirHHH3MOM, nonyqaioT
B nrepe HyjKHyio nonroTBKy. OHH yqaTcn nonHHMTBCH
H ropbi, n3aTb no CKnaM, XOAHTB no CHry, okasbrnaTb
npByio nMomb nocrpaflBirrHM. ECJTH 6 M cnopTCMnbi
He npoxoflHnH TaKH noflTOTBKH, HM TpyflHO buio bi
CiaTB HaCTOHIHHMH anbimHHCTaMH.
Korfl KT-HHyflB noflHHMeTCH B npBbht pa3 H
ropy, OH 3HaKMHTCH c McTHocTBio. CnopTCMHbi, ync
HMioiinie noflroTBKy, BbmonHHiOT pnn HBBIX ynpancHHHH, ynaTCH nepeflBHrTBCH no BepBKe Hafl peKH,
noflHHMTBCH no OTBCHbiM CKnaM H coBepmioT nee
TpyflHbie H BbicKHe BocxojKflHHH. HHorfl anbnHHHCTbi
flOJDKHb'i opTBCH c norflofi; HO TO yBenHHHBaer yflo252

BnBCTBHe, KOTpoe flocTaBJiaer cnopr. Ecnn 6bi B ropx

Bc b'ino npcro n nenc, TO H bino 6w TOO pflOCTH
noflbi, KOTpaa bmeT y anbrnnmcTOB, coBepumBnmx
TpyflHoe BocxoHtflHHe. CMoe BaHoioe - TO mraer He
oitrBCH. Ecnn anbrnnmcT GOHTCH, HTM BOCxoncflHHe
He oKa3nocB CHHUTKOM TpyflHbiM, TO OH ynt noencflH,
flnce npjKfle neM OH orapaBnaercH.
Ebrcrpo eryT AHH B anBnHHHCTCKOM nrepe. Te, y
Koro KOHqercH myac, noKHflioT nrepb c concanmieM.
Bce XOTHT, HTbl THflBe-TpH3aMeHTenBHBrx H He3a6biBeMbrx Heflnn noBropHnncB B ynymeM rony.
*
Ho KpMe anbirnHH3Ma coBrcKHe mbpa mnepecyiOTCH
BcMH BHflaMH cnpTa. B 3HMHHe flHH MHnie OTirpaBJIHKJTCH B noxflbi Ha nbDKax, KaTioTCH Ha KOHBKax,
HipiT B xoKKn. KaK TnbKo craHBHTCH Tenne, Ha
OTKpbrroM B3flyxe HanmiiOTCH nrpbi B (pyrn, a TaioKe
B Bonen, acKeTn H Tmc Ha OHBIHHX peKx,
03paX H MOpHX CnOpTCMHBI 3aHHMK)TCH imBaHHeM H
rpneo.
CnopTHBHbie rnecTBa 3a6THTCH o TOM, <rr6bi
COCTH3HHH irpOBOflHJTHCB HO BCeM BHflaM CnpTa. OcOH
norrynpHOCTBio nnB3yiOTCH y coBrcKoro Hapfla dpyTnBHbie cocTH3HHH. TbicHMn mop noceifliOT craflHHbi, Kann 6bi HH bin norfla.
CoBrcKHe cnopTCMHbi H KOMHflbl lcro sflHT
B flpyrne crpaHbi, nrbi yqacraoBaTb B cocTH3HHHx 3a
rpaHHne. HHocrpHHbie cnopTCMHbi TH<e ncro npHe3H<K)T B CoBrcKHO C013; rfle 6bi Maran HH HMnn
Mcro, HX Bcerfl npHHHMiOT H BcrpeqiOT c pflocrBio.
ynPAHEHHH
1. Put both clauses of the foUowing sentences into the
conditional mood:
(1) Ecnn noHflerflOJKflB,H He Bbiny.
(2) ByflyT y MeHHflm>rH,n Te nyiijnb ry KHHry.
(3) JlTH Mryr KynTBCH, cnn norfla xopman.
253

FUI in the blank spaces with either -TO or -Hnoynb:

(i) CKHHCH MHe *rro ... o ce6.
(2) OH yBHflen KOTO ... B necy.
(3) Tfle ..., Korfl ... H no3HaKMnncH c noTOM.
(4) B TOM ropf Mbi nofleM Kyfl ... 3a ipaHnqy.
(5) Bbi mrrnH Kaime ... KHHTH 06 TOM ?
(6) BbiepHTe rro ... flna cen.
(7) K coHcanmuo HTO ... cnyqHnocb c MOHM aBTOMOjieM.

(8) Bbi b'inn Korfl ... B CoBrcKOM Coi&3e?

Write out the foUowing in fuU:
(1) Thirty-three new houses.
(2) Four blue hats.
(3) Twenty-one Soviet stamps.
(4) He speaks five foreign languages.
(5) With three large black dogs.
Translate into Russian:
(1) I don't want you to go, but I must teU you that
it's rather late.
(2) Whatever happens take someone with you.
(3) If only you would give me a visa so that I could
go to the Soviet Union!
(4) Are you afraid of me? No, I'm only afraid you
might do something stupid.
(5) People who speak four or five foreign languages
are useful wherever they Uve.
(6) Did you row (translate: occupy yourself with
rowing) when you were at the university ?
(7) How many times must I teU you that the British
delegation does not intend to go anywhere today ?
(8) I suggest that we stop in this hotel for a few days.
(9) He told me to buy him several EngUsh stamps.
(10) I can't skate and I don't like skiing.
(11) Have you ever been to Omsk?
254

(i2) I insist on your learning a few words every day.

(13) Ask your best friend to teU you why you are not
*.,
popular.
(14) If anyone telephones say that I've gone to the
cinema or that I'm watching television.
(15) Did you read any good books last year ?

255

yV\&<AAiJtA*M.

GRAMMATICAL TABLES*
THE NOUN
I. GENDER OF NOUNS
Masculine
(a) AU nouns ending in a consonant or -3:
CTon, cryn, AOM, nenoBK,
na, repH
(b) Many nouns ending in -B:
ynirrenB, HHBpb, cnoBpB, MeflBflB, pynB
(c) A few nouns ending in -a and -H denoting animate
beings:
MyjKHHHa,flflfln,flflyuiKa.
Feminine
(a) Most nouns ending in -a and -a:
KHHra, muHHa, Tern, HHHH
(b) AU nouns ending in -HH:
(paMHJTHH
(c) The majority of nouns ending in -B, including all
ending in -CTB (with the exception of TOCTB):
HOHB, pflOCTB.
y an
* The various tables are not by
any means exhaustive. It is hoped that they will
is aatguide and a reference.
prove useful to the student as

256

Neuter
(a) AU nouns ending in -o or -e:
OKH, none
(b) AU nouns ending in -He or -he (-B):
3flmie, 3Hmie, BOCKpecHBe, pyjKB
(c) AU nouns ending in -MH:
BpMH, HMH.
2 . DECLENSION OF NOUNS
i.

Masculine Nouns
Singular
Nom.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep,

don
cron
CTon
crony
CTonM
crone

rep
repH
repH
repK)
repeM
repo

aBTOMOHJTb
aBTOMOHnb
aBTOMOHJIH
aBTOMOHJUO
aBTOMoHneM
aBTOMOHne

Note: (a) T h e accusative of animate masculine nouns is the,

same as the genitive; that of inanimate masculine nouns is the"
same as the nominative. This also apphes to the plural. "
(b) Masculine nouns ending in -a and -H are declined like feminines (see below) and have a separate accusative form in -y and -10.
(c) When the noun ends in JK, q, q, m, or rq, the instrumental
is -OM if the stress is on the end, -eM if the stress is not on the
end:
HOJKM, OTflOMJ TOBpBTfleM, MCHUeM

(d) The instrumental singular of nouns in -b is -M when the

stress is on the end:
CJIOBpb - CJIOBap'M

(e) Some nouns have a prepositional ending in -y (always

stressed), when a preposition indicating place where ( B or Ha) is
used:
B Jiecy, Ha nojry
(f) A few nouns have a partitive genitive ending in -y, -10 (see
Lesson 18).
257

I. Masculine Nouns: Plural

Nom.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

CTOJib'i
CTonbi
CTonB
CTonaM
CTonaMH
CTOJix

repH
repeB
repeB
repHM
repHMH
repHX

aBTOMOHJTH
aBTOMOHHH
aBTOMOOnne
aBTOMOOHJIHM
aBTOMOHJIHMH
aBTOMOHJIHX
Note: (a) If the last consonant of the noun is r, K, X, JK, I , m.
or rq, the nominative plural ends in -H:
npKH, TOBapHIUH

(b) For rules governing the genitive plural, see Lesson 17.
(c) Some masculine nouns have the nominative plural ending
in - or -A (flOM, yinrrejw, raaa). The other cases are regular,
with the exception of rjia3 - gen. pl. of rjia3.
(d) A few masculine nouns have a plural ending in -tA (flpyr,
6paT). The genitive is -beB (if the stress is not on the end) or
eft (if it is). The other cases are -bHM, -bHMH, -bux.
Note that the plural of CMH is CbmoBbfl (-ft, -bHM, -bHMH,
-bax).
(e) A few masculine nouns have a genitive plural which is the
same as the nominative singular:
rjias, cojiflT, 6OTHHOK
(f) Nouns
plural:
Nom.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

ending in -aHHH, -HHKH are declined as follows in the

aHTJTHqHe
aHTjnrqH
aHTJnraH
aHTJnrqHaM
aHrjnraHaMH
aHTjarqHax

Like aHTJnrqHHH are declined rpajKflaHHH (pl. rpiKflaHe),

KpeCTbHHHH, and XpHCTHaHHH.
(g) Nouns ending in -HOK, denoting usually the young of
animals, have the plural in -ara, -Ta (gen. -HT, -aT, dat. -HTaM,
-TaM etc.):
TeJiHOK - TeJiHTa

Note that pe6HOK, which in the singular means 'child', in

the plural (peforra) means 'lads', -'fellows', and does not
necessarily imply children.

258

2. Feminine Nouns
Singular
ra3ra
Nom.
Ace.
ra3Ty
ra3Tbi
Gen.
ra3re
Dat.
ra3roH
Instr.

(K>)
Prep.

ra3Te

HHHH
(haMHJTHH
HHHH) 4>aMHnHio
HHHH diaMKnHH
HHHe
(JpaMibiHH
HHHeH 4>aMHnHeH
(eio)
(eio)
HHHe
(haMHnHH

HacTb
qacTB
lCTH
lcTH
HcTBK)
HCTH

Note: (a) If the stem ends in r, K, X, , i , m, or m, then the

genitive singular ends in -H: KHHra - KHHTH.
(b) If the stem ends in , q, q, m, or rq, then the instrumenta
singular ends in -eft (-eio): Kpbnna - Kpb'imeH(eio).
(c) Declined like HHHH are nouns in -bH (craTbH, cyflbji). The
soft sign follows the last consonant of the stem throughout, but
disappears in the genitive plural, which is craTft, cyfleft.
(d) Marb andflon>have in all cases (except the nominative and
accusative singular) the stem Maiep-, floqep-.
Plural

Norn.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

ra3rbi
ra3Tbi
ra3r
rasraM
ra3raMH
ra3Tax

HHHH
HHHB
HHHB
HHHHM
HHHHMH
HHHHX

(paMHnHH
HCTH
lCTH
(paMHnHH
dpaMHnHH
nacro
(paMHnHHM
qacTHM
(paMHJIHHMH HaCTHMH
(paMHHHHX
HaCTHX

Note (a) If the noun is animate, then the accusative plural is the
same as the genitive plural.
(b) If the last letter of the stem is r, K, X, , *i, m, or rq, then
the nominative ends in -H (KHHTH).
(c) If the stem ends in two or more consonants, a 'mobile
vowel' (e, , or o) is usually inserted between the last two
consonants: BHJiKa - BHJIOK; 3eMJiH - 3eMjn>.
Sometimes the last consonant, even though originally soft,
hardens in the genitive plural: CTHH - cTeH.
(d) Nouns ending in - b , -*n>, or -mb have the dative, instrumental, and prepositional cases in -aM, -aMH, -ax:
HOtO. - HO<lM, HOqMH, HOlX
(e) A few nouns in -H have gen. pl. in -eft: Tra - TTeft.
(i) A few nouns have the instrumental plural in -bMH:
jimaflb - jiomaflbMH
flTH - flebTMH

259

3> Neuter Nouns

Singular
Nom.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

cnBO
cnBO
cnBa
cnBy
cnBOM
cnBe

Mpe
Mpe
MpH
MpK)
MpeM
Mpe

3flHHe
3flHHe
3flHHH
3flHHK)
3flHHeM
3flHHH

HMH
. HMH
HMeHH
HMeHH
HMeHeM
HMeHH

Note (a) A few neuters ending in -qe and -rqe (nojioiHqe,

Hjrmqe) are declined like CJIBO in the singular, except for the
instrumental in -eM.
(b) Neuters in -be and -b are declined like Mpe, a soft sign
following the last consonant of the stem (pyxae, pyntbH, pyjKbio
etc.).
"

Plural
Norn.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

cnoB
cnoB

MOpH
MOpH

CJTOB

Mop

cnoBaM

MOpHM
CnOBMH MOpHMH
MOpHX
CJIOBx

3flHHH
3flHHH
3flHHH
3flHHHM
3flHHHMH
3flHHHX

HMeH
HMeH
HMH
HMeHaM
HMeHaMH

HMeHx

Note: (a) If the stem ends in two or more consonants, then a

'mobile vowel' is inserted between the last two consonants in
the genitive plural:
OKH - KOH

(Note the gen. pl. of Hftq - HHO)

(b) Nouns in -qe and -rqe are usually declined like CJIBO in the
plural.
(c) Nouns in -be and -b are declined in the plural like Mpe
with a soft sign following, the last consonant of the stem. The
genitive, however, is -nft (KHHH) (exception - pyb - pyjKeft).
(d) A few neuters have soft endings in -bH (-beB, -bHM, -bHMH,
-bHx):

nep - npbH
flpeso - qepBbH
(e) A few neuters have the nominative plural in -H:
H6JIOKO - HSJIOKH

xo - fam (ymft, ymM, ymMH, ymx)

260

THE ADJECTIVE
i. Hard Adjectives
Singular
Masculine Feminine

(a)
Norn.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

(b)

HBbr
(HBblH
IHBOrO
HBOrO
HBOMy
HBblM
HBOM

Gen.
Dat.
Instr.

MascuUne
MonoflH
jM0JI0^H
iMonoflro
Monoflro
MonoflMy
Monoflb'iM

Prep.

MonoflM

Nom.
Acc.

Neuter

HBaH

HBOe

HByiO

HBOe

HBOH
HBOH

HBoro
HBOMy

HBOH(OK) ) HBblM

HBOH

HBOM

Plural
AU Genders
HBbie
/HBbie
IHBblX
HBbR
HBblM
HBbIMH
HBBIX

Singular
Plural
Feminine Neuter AU Genders
Monofln Monofle Monoflbie
Monoflyio Monofle { MOJIom ? e
^
iMonoflbix
Monofl Monoflro Monoflb'rx
Monofl MonoflMy Monoflb'iM
Monoflh Monoflb'iM Monoflb'iMH
(OK))

Monofl

MonoflM MOJioflb'rx

These are the only two types of hard adjectives.

There are no exceptions to the rule.
Note that the accusative masculine singular and the
accusative plural are the same as the nominative when
the noun qualified by the adjective is manimate; and
the same as the genitive when the noun is animate. This
apphes to aU adjectives.
261

2.

Soft Adjectives

(a)
Masculine
Norn.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

Cb)

Singular
' Feminine

Neuter

CHHHH

cHHee

CHHKXO

CHHee

CHHeH
CHHeH
CHHea(eio)
cHHea

cHHero
CHHeMy
CHHHM

CHHHH
fCHHHH
IcHHero
CHHero
CHHeMy
CHHHM
CHHM

Nom.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

TpTHH
0

{^J
LTpTBero
TpTBero
TpTBeMy
TpTBHM
TpiBeM

CHHHe
fCHHHe
ICHHHX
CHHHX
CHHHM
CHHHMH
CHHHX

Feminine

Plural
Neutei AU Genders

TplBH

TpTbe

Singular

Masculine

CHHeM

Plural
AU Genders

TpTBH

l ^ " 1
iTperBHX
TpTBea
TpTBero TpTBHX
Tprbea
TpTbeMy TprbHM
TpTBeH(eK>) TpBHM TpTBHMH
TpeTBe
TprBeM
TpiBHX
TpTBIO

TpTbe

Like CHHHH are dechned aU soft adjectives ending in

-HH. Like TpTHH - most relative adjectives derived
from the names of animals.

Nom.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

Masculine

Singular
Feminine

MeflBHOiH
MeflBjKHH
MeflBHO>ero
MeflBHO>eMy
MeflBKBHM
MeflBHO.eM

MeflB)KBH
MeflB>KBIO
MeflBHo>eH
MeflBjKBen
MeflBjKBea(Beio)
MeflB>KLeH

Neuter
MeflBntBe
MeflBncbe
MeflBHO>ero
MeflBno>eMy
MeflBno>HM
MeflflejKBeM

The plural is as the previous table for aU genders.

262

3 Mixed Adjectives
Singular
Masculine Feminine

(a)
Norn.

Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.

PYCCKHH

Neuter

Plural
AU Genders

pyccKHe
fpyccKHe
M
pyccKyio pyccKoe
IpyccKoro
IpyccKHx
pyccKoro pyccKOH pyccKoro pyccKHx
pyCCKOMy pyCCKOH pyccKOMy pyccKHM
pyccKHM pyccKo pyCCKHM pyCCKHMH
pyccKaa

pyccKoe

CCKra1

(OK>)

Prep.

pyccKOM

pyccKOH pyCCKOM

pyCCKHX

Luke P^CCKHH are dechned aU adjectives whose stem

ends in r, K, or x; those with the stress on the end have
-OH for the nominative masculine singular only
(flopor).

(b)
Nom.

Singular
Masculine Feniinine
xopniHH xopman

Neuter

Ace

xopmee
xopmee
xopmyio

Prep. xopmeM

xopmen
xopmea
xopmeh
(ero)
xopme

/x0PmH
Ixopmero
Gen. xopmero
Dat. xopmeMy
Instr. xopiuHM

Plural
AU Genders

xopmne
fxoP^e
IXOpIHHX
xopmero xopmnx
xopmeMy xopnmM
XOpHTHM XOplHHMH
xopmeM

xopimix

Like xopiiiHH are dechned aU adjectives with t h e

stem ending in nc, n , m , o r rq a n d with t h e stress n o t
on t h e last syllable.
If t h e stress is o n t h e last syllable (Sonbinn) then t h e
first e of t h e ending throughout is replaced b y o
(onBine, onbmMy, OOJTBHIM, OJTBUIOH etc.).

263

4. The Short Form of Adjectives

The short form of the adjective is obtained by dropping
the ending -bra, -OH or -HH in the masculine singular
and by adding -a, -o, -w, or -H in the plural (see
Lesson 8).
If the stem of the adjective ends in two consonants,
then a 'mobUe vowel' is inserted between them in the
masculine singular only. The foUowing rules govern the
choice of vowel:
(a) If the adjective ends in -HbiH and the preceding
consonant is a sibhant (nt, H, m, or in) or 6, B, p, 3,
M, H, p, c, or T, then -e- (or --, if the stress shifts to
the end) is inserted:
Hy>KHbIH - HyjKeH
AHHHHbr - flflHHeH
yMHbr - yMH

(b) If there is a soft sign between the last two consonants, then it is replaced by -e- in the short form of
the masculine:
jraepnbHbra - nnepneH
(c) In aU other cases an -o- is inserted between the
last two consonants (unless the penultimate consonant
is a sibilant and the stress is not on the end):
KpelTKHH - KpnOK
THHOXHH - T&KeK
(Note, however, csTJibjft - CBreji; Trurbift - Tneji)
It must be stressed that these rules only apply to the short form
of the masculine singular. N o mobile vowel separates the last
two consonants of the stem in the feminine and neuter singular
or the plural short forms.

264

THE PRONOUN
I. Personal Pronouns
H
Nom.
Ace., Gen. MeHH
MHe
Dat.
MHOH(K>)
Instr.
MHe
Prep.
Norn.
Ace, Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

Reflexive
Ace, Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

Tbl

OH - OH OH
(H)er
(H)e
(H)eMy
(H)eh
TO66H(IO) (H)HM
(H)e(io)
Te
HM
Hen
TeH
Te

Mbi
Hac
HaM

Bbi
Bac
BaM

OHH

HMH

BMH

(H)HMH

BBC

Bac

HHX

(H)HX
(H)HM

ceji
ce
CO6H(KJ)

ce

Note that the pronouns OH, OH, OH, OHH are preceded by H
when governed by a preposition.

2. Interrogative and Negative Pronouns

Nom.
Acc.
Gen.

KTO HTO
Koro rro
Koro ler

Dat.
Instr.

Kom.y veiny HHKOM^

KeM nem
HHKM

Prep. KOM

HM

HHKT

mprro

HHKOI-
HHKOTO

HHHT (mrqer)

mraer
HHHeM^
mrqM

HH (O) KOM HH (o) HM

Note that when HHKT or HH^T are governed by a preposition,

then the preposition separates the two elements (HH y KOTO, HH o
qM, HH 3a tiro).

265

3- Possessive Pronouns
(a)
Masculine
Nom.
MOH (Ham)
[MOH (Ham)
Ace.
IMoer (Hmero)
Gen.
Moer (Hmero)

Singular
Ferninine

Neuter

MOH (Hma)

Mo (Hme)

MOK) (Hury)

Mo (Hme)

Mon (Hmen)

Moer
(Hmero)
MoeMy
(HmeMy)
MOHM
(HmHM)
MOM
(HmeM)

Dat.

MoeMy (HmeMy) Moo (Hmea)

Instr.

MOHM (HlHHM)

Prep.

MoM (HmeM)

MoH(iq)
(Hame)
Moa (Hmea)

Plural AU Genders
Nom.

MOH (Haiira)

Ace

/ M0H (HmH)

Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

IMOHX (Hunix)

MOHX (Hnmx)
MOHM (HnniM)
MOHMH (HaiIIHMH)
MOHX (HmHx)

Like MOH are declined TBOH and CBOH.

Like Ham is dechned Bam.

The possessive pronouns er, e, and tax are not declined.

(b)

Singular

Masculine Ferninine
Nom.
ne
HBH
faeH
Ace.
qbio
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

iHBer
^Ber
HbeMy
HBHM
HBM

HBe
Hbeh
HBe(io)
HBeH

266

Plural
Neuter AU Genders
iBe
HB
Hber
HbeMy
HBHM
HBM

HBH
flBH
WHX
HBHX
1BHM
HBHMH
1BHX

4> Demonstrative Pronouns

Masculine
Nom.

Ace.
Gen.

TOT (TOT)

Singular
Feminine

Neuter

era (ia)

TO (TO)

(^(rar)
fry v fa)
TO v(TO)
lToro (Tor)
* '/
'
Toro (Tor) TOH (TOO) Toro (TOF)

Dat.

TOMy (TOMy) TOH (TO) TOMy (TOMy)

/sw.

THM (TCM)

TOH (TOS) THM (TCM)

Prep,

TOM (TOM)

TOH (TO) TOM (TOM)

(OK) (K>)

Plural
AU Genders
Nom.
TH (Te)
Ace

{ T H ( TC )

ITHX (iex)

Ge.

THX (ex)

>a.
Instr.
Prep,

THM (KM)
THMH (TMH)
THX (ex)

5. Determinative Pronouns
(a)
vlasailin
BeCB
Nom.
fBeCB
Ace.
iBcer
Bcer
Gen.
BceMy
Dat.
Instr. BceM
Prep. BCM

Singi lar
Ferrnine

Neuter

BCH

Bc

BCK>

BC

Bce
Bcea
BceH(io)
Bcea
267

Bcer
BceMy
BceM
BCM

Plural
AU Genders
Bce
/Bce
iBcex
Bcex
BceM
BCMH.
Bcex

(b)

Singular
Masculine Feminine
Nom.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

caM
fcaM
IcaMor
caMoro
CaMOM^
CaMHM
CaMM

caiw
caM^
(caMo)
caMH
CaMH
CaMH(K))
caM

268

Neuter
caM
caM
caMor
CaMOM^
CaMHM
CaMM

Plural
AU Genders
CMH
fcMH
IcaMHx
caMHX
CaMHM
CaMHMH
CaMHX

THE NUMERAL
I. Cardinal Numbers
Norn.
Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

Masculine

Feminine

Neuter

OflHH
f OflHH
loflHor
oflHor
OflHOM^
OflHHM
OflHM

OflH

OflH

oflny

OflH

OflH
OflH
OflH(K))
OflHH

oflHor
OflHOMy
OflHHM
OflHM

OflHH also has a plural OAHH (declined like

is used to mean 'alone'.
Masculine
Neuter
Nom.
flBa
88
Ace. J
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.
Nom., Ace.
Gen.
Dat.
Instr.
Prep.

Feminine
Be
W*

flsyx
flByx
ByM
flByMH
flByx

TpH
fTpH
iTpx
Tpx
TpM
TpeMH
Tpx

TH)

which

nerbipe
fneTbipe
Inerbipx
nerbipx
nerbipM
HeTbipbMH
nerbipx

riHTB
HHTH
HHTH
TIHTBIO

riHTH

Like nHTb are declined all the numbers from 6 to 20,

and 30.
269

Nom., Ace. cpoK

njrrbflecjrr
Gen.
copoK nHTHflecHTH
Dat.
copoK nHTHflecHTH
Instr.
copoK miTBiflecHTBK)
Prep.
copoK nnrnflecHTH
Like copoK are declinedfleBHHcTOand cro.
Like nHTbflecHT are dechned 60, 70, and 80.
Nom., Ace.
flBcTH
Gen.
flByxcT
Dat.
flByMcrM
Instr.
flByMHCTaMH
Prep.
flByxcrx
Nom., Ace. qeTbipecTa
Gen.
HeTbipxcT
Dot.
HeTbipMcraM
Instr,
HeTbrpBMHCTaMH
Prep.
nerbipxcrx

TpHcra
Tpxcor
TpMcrM
TpeMHcrMH
" Tpxcrx
HHTBCOT
IIHTHCT

rurracTM
riHTbiocrMH
nnTHcrax

Like nHTBCT are declined 600, 700, 800, and 900.

Tbicjrqa and MHJIJTHH are declined like nouns. TbiCHHa, however, has an alternative instrumental
singular ending in -bio - Tb'iCHHBio (cf. TbicnneH).

Ordinal Numbers
Ordinals are declined in exactly the same way as
adjectives.

270

T H E VERB
I . FIRST CONJUGATION

Imperfective Aspect
Infinitive: maraTb
Present Tense Past Tense

Future Tense

HHHTaiO

H^ny
Tbi yflemb
OH S

Tbi wreiin.
OH '"j
OH >HHTer
OH J
Mbi HHTeM
B M iHTeTe
OHH HHTlOT

H THTan, Tbimrran, a
OH MHTn
OH HHTna
O H HHTano
Mbi "I
Bbi >HHTnH

OHH J

OH >6yfler
OH J
Mbi yfleM
Bbi yflere
OHH yflyT

HHTTB

Imperative: mrrH(Te)
Conditional: H HHrn(a) bi, Tbi tnrrn(a) 6 b i , e t c .
Participles: act. prs. HHrroinHH
act. past larrBmHH
pass. prs. HHTaeMbr

G e r u n d : prs. mrrH

271

Perfective Aspect
Infinitive: npOHnraTb

Past Tense

Future Tense

HnpQqHTn, -a
Tbi npoHHTn, -a
OH npoHHTn
OH npoqHTna
OH npoHHTno
Mbi "j
Bbi >npOMHTnH
OHH J

H npoHHTio
Tbi irooHHTemB
OH "
OH >npoHHTer
OH J
Mbi irpoHHTeM
Bbi ITOOHHTeTe
OHH npOHHTlOT

Imperative: nponHTH(Te)

Conditional: H npoHHTn(a) 6bi, Tbi rrpoHHTn(a) 6M

Participles: act. past npoHHTaBimm

pass, past npoHHTaHHbra

Gerund: past npoHHTB(mH)

Note: In the same way are conjugated many verbs with the infinitive ending in -HTb (lepHTb, ryjiHTb) and -erb (yMrb).
272

2. SECOND CONJUGATION
Imperfective Aspect
Infinitive: crpHTb

Present T e n s e

Past Tense

Future Tense

HCTpH)
Tbl CTpmilB
OH "j
on ^crpHT
OH J
Mbi CrpHM
Bbi CTpHTe
OHH CTpHT

H crpHn, -a
Tbi crpHn, -a
OH crpHn
OH crpnna
OH crpHno

Hyfly
Tbl yflemb
OH 1
OH fyfler
OH J
MBI yfleM
B M yflere
OHH yflVT

Mbi "|

Bbi fCTpHJTH

OHH J

..

Imperative: CTpoB(Te)

Conditional: H crpHn(a) 6BI, Tbi CTpaji(a) bi

Participles: act. prs. crTpHmH

act. past crpHBmHH
pass. prs. crpHMbiH

Gerund: crpH
273

CrpHTB

Perfective Aspect
Past Tense
H nocrpHn, -a
TBI nocrpHn, -a
OH nocrpHn
OH nocrpHna
OH nocrpHno
Mbi "I

Bbi >nocrpHnH
J

OHH

Future Tense
H nocTpK

Tbi nocrprauB
OH 1
OH >nocTpHT

OH J
Mbi nOCTpHM
Bbi nocrpHTe
OHH nocrpHT

Imperative: nocTpCre)

Conditional: H nocrpHn(a) 6w, Tbi nocrpHn(a) bi

Participles: act. past nocrpHBuiH

pass, past nocrpeHHbra

Gerund: past nocTpHB(mH)

Note. In the same way are conjugated most verbs of

conjugation II ending in -HTb and -erb; there are a few
conjugation II verbs ending in -HTB (OHTBCH) and -aTB
(nejKaTb) which conjugate in the same way.
274

3 . REFLEXIVE VERBS
Imperfective Aspect (Conjugation I)
Present Tense

Past Tense

H ofleBaiocB
TBI OfleBeiUBCH
OH ")
OH WeBeTCH
OH J
Mbi ofleaeMCH
BBI ofleBeTecb
OHH OfleBlOTCH

H ofleBncH, -acb
TBI OfleBncH, raci
OH OfleBncH
OH ofleBnacb
OH ofleBnocb
Mbi "j
BM
>ofleBnHCB
OHH J

Future Tense
nyfly
Tbi yflenrb
OH "]
OH Mjyfler
OH J
Mbi ^fleM
B H yflere
OHH oyflyr

OfleBTBCH

Imperative: OfleBncH, ofleBHrecb

Conditional: H OfleBncH (-acb) 6bi, Tbi oneBncH (-acb)

bl

Participles:

prs. ofleBroiniracH
past OfleBaBHTHHCH

Gerund: ofleBncb
275

4- MIXED- CONJUGATION
Infinitive: encn.
Present: ery,' endonb, endrr; OKHM, eHdrre, eryT
Past: ejKn, eHcna, eHcno; eHcnn
Imperative: Sern, erlrre
Participles: prs. eiyumn; past encBniHH
Gerund: none

Infinitive: flan. pf.

Future: pam, flaim., flacr; naflHM, flflirre, naflyr
Past: flan, flan, flno (and flan); flnn
Imperative: flail, flTe
Participles: act. past flaBiim; pass, past flmibia
Gerund: past flaB(nra)

Infinitive: ecrb
Present: eM, enn., ecr; enM, ep&re, eflr
Past: en, na, noj nn
Imperative: emb, nn/re
Participles: act. prs. eflHinHH; act. past Biima
Gerund: none
Infinitive: XOTTB
Present: xo*ry, xqeiin., xner; XOTHM, xoTHre, XOTHT
Past: xorn, xoina, xoTno; xoTnn
Participles: prs, XOTHIUHH; past xoTeBiira
Gerund: none
276

5- MISCELLANEOUS VERBS
The foUowing verbs often present difficulties to the
student at first:
Infinitive: 6pan> I
/
Present: 6ep, epiub, epT; epM, epre, ep^r
Past: pan, pan, pno; pira
Imperative: epn, epnre
Participles: act. prs, ep^nrafi; act. past pBumS
Gerund: epH
Infinitive: brrb I
Future: yny, yfleinB, yfleT; yfleM, yflere, yflyT
Past: Bin, bin, bino; bura
Imperative: ynb, oynbre
Participle: past OB'IBHIHH
Gerund: ynyHH
Infinitive: Be3TH I
Present: aesy, Be3mb, Be3r; Be3M, Be3re, Be3yr
Past: B3, Bean, Be3Ji; Bear
Imperative: Be3H, Be3HTe
Participles: act. prs. Besannst; act. past ssasaa
Gerund: Be3H
Infinitive: Beere I
Present: aepy, Beflnn, BeflTj BeflM, Beflre, Beflyr
Past: Ben, Ben, Ben; Ben
Imperative: Benn, Benre
Participles: act. prs. Befl^nran; act. past Bflurao;
pass. prs. BeflMbra
Gerund: Befl
Infinitive: B3HTb I pf.
Future: B03BM& B03BMmB, B03BMTJ B03BMM, B03BMTe, B03BMyT
Past: B3HJI, B3Hn, B3nno; B3HHH
Imperative: BO3BMH, B03BMHre
Participles: act. past B3HBUIHH; passive past B3HTbm
Gerund: B3HB(mH)
277

Infinitive: BcraBTB I
Present: Bcraio, BcraemB,

Bcrar;

BcraM, BCTare,

BcraiT

Past: BraBn, BcraBna, BcraBno; BcraBnn

Imperative: BciaBH, BCTaBnTe
Participles: prs. Bcrsabaja; past BcraBBiiiHH
Gerund: BcraBaH
Similarly conjugated are nmkrb (and all its compounds) and
ysHaBTb.

Infinitive: 3flHTB II
Present: 3H<y, 3flmnB, 3flHr; 3flHM, sflHTe, 3flHT
Past: 3flHHj 3flnna, 3flnno; 3nnnH
Imperative: 3flH, 3flHTe
Participles: prs. 3flHmHH; past esjamum.
Gerund: 3flH
Infinitive: xaTB I
Present: fly, eflemt, fler; peM, flere, flyr
Past: xan, xana, xano; xann
Imperative: (no)e3>KH, (no)e35KHre
Participles: prs, flymn; past exannran
Gerund: none
Infinitive: nce^B I
Present: nay, Horuib, HOKr; noKM, Hcncre, n a y r
Past: ncr, m a , Ha"no;.HrnH
Imperative: JKTH, JKTHTe
Participles: act. prs, aymn; act. past rarely found
Gerund: none
Infinitive: HTb I
Present: JKHB^, nammb, Homer; namM,
ytamfr
Past: enn, nmn, >KHJIO; JKHJTH
Imperative: HCHBH, Homme
Participles: prs. HB^nrah; past HCHBHIHH
Gerund: JKHBH

278

nomre,

Infinitive: 3a6brrb I pf.

Future: 3a6yfly, 3a6yfleinb, 3a6yfler; 3a6yfleM, 3a6yflere,
3a6yflyT

Past: 3a6bin, 3a6^ina, 3a6bino; 3a6b'mH

Imperative: 3a6yflB, 3a6yflbTe
Participles: act. past 3a6b'iBHraB; pass, past 3a6brrbiH
Gerund: 3a6biB(iiiH)
Infinitive: 3aHHTB I I pf.
Future: 3aMy, 3aoMiiiB, 3aHMr; 3aoMM, 3aMTe,
3aM^T

Past: 3HHH, 3aHHJi, saanno; 3HnnH

Imperative: 3aHMH, sanMirre
Participles: act. past 3aHHBiiiH; pass, past 3aHHTbi
Gerund: 3aHHB(nra)
Infinitive: HflTH I
Present: Hy, nflnib, HflT; HflM, HflTe, apfs
Past: men, mna, mno; HMH
Imperative: HflH, nnre
Participles: prs. Hflyiirao; past mfluimi
Gerund: HflH
Infinitive: Kjiacrb I
Present: KiKmy, Knaflmb, KnaflT; KiiaflM, Knaflere,
Knaflyr
Past: Kjian, Kjijia, Knano; KJEUTH
Imperative: Knanja, loranere
Participles: act. prs. KJianyiuHO; act. past KJiBuiHH
Gerund: KnaflH
Like Kjiacrb is conjugated (y)nacTb

Infinitive: neiB I pf.

Future: nary, n&Keinb, nancer; nmem, nntere, naryr
Past: nr, nera, nern; neran
Imperative: JIHT, nrre

Participle: past nruran

Grund: nenmi

279

Infinitive: MOHB I

Present: morf, Mncenn., Monter; MxteM, Mntere, MryT

Past: Mor, Morn, Morn; Moran
Imperative: not used
Participles: prs. Morymno; past MruraH
Gerund: none
Infinitive: MBITB I
Present: MIO, Memb, Mer; MCM, Mere, MIOT

Past: Mbin, Mb'ina, MMJIO; MBUTH

Imperative: M, MHe
Participles: act. prs, MIOIHHH; act. past MBIBUIHH
Gerund: MH
Like MbiTb is conjugated KpbiTb, which is usually found in the
compounds 3aKpb'rn> and OTKpb'rrb
Infinitive: HanTb I pf.
Future: Hamry, HamtinB, HamiT; HamiM, HaHHre,
Ha^nryT
Past: Hnan, Hanan, Hnano; Hnann
Imperative: nawrn, Haimrre
Participles: act. past HaqaBmna; pass, past HanaTbra
Gerund: HaiB(mH)
Infinitive: HecTH I
Present: Hecy-, Hecinb, Hecr; HecM, Hecre, uecyr
Past: Hc, Hecn, Hecn; Hecnn
Imperative: HecH, HecHTe
Participles: act. prs. He<ymHH; act. past Hcumn;
pass. prs. HecMbr
Gerund: Heat
Infinitive: nerb I
Present: noi, noniB, noT; noM, noTe, noiT
Past: nen, nna, nno; nenn
Imperative: n, nonre
Participles: act. prs. noibiiniH; act. past nBuraH
Gerund: none
280

Infinitive: HHTB I
Present HBIO, raim., m>r; ntM, nbere, HBIOT

Past: min, nnn, mtiio; mura

Imperative: ne, nfire

Participles: act. prs, miiimfi; act. past inniHH
Gerund: none
In the same way are conjugated 6Hib (past tense,- / . 6ftJia, however) and three other monosyllabic verbs in -HTB.

Infinitive: nneaTB I
Present: nmoi, nniomB,

runor;

nmoM,

nmoTe

nmoiT

Past: nneBn, nneana, nneano; nneBnH

Imperative: nrno, nmonre
Participles: act. prs, nmoioirran; act. past rraeBaBiim
Gerund: IIJIIOH

Iirfiiutive: noHTH I pf.

Future: nony, nonflnn., nooflr; noftflM, nooflre,

aopyr
Past: nomn, nomn, nonm; nomnn
Imperative: noHflH, nonflare
Participle: past nomflurao
Gerund: noflH

Infinitive: noflHHTB I pf.

Future: noflmuvry, noflHHMemB, noflHHMeT; noflHHMeM,
noflHHMere, noflHHMyT
Past: nflHHn, noflHsuia, nflHHno; nflHHjra
Imperative: noflHHMH, noflHHMHTe
Participles: act. past noflHHBimiH; pass, past nflHHTbra
Gerund: noflHHB(iira)
Infinitive: noHHTb I pf.
Future: noamy, noHMmb, nooMr; nouMM, nonMre,
noMyT
Past: nHHn, noHHn, HHHHO; nmum
Imperative: noMH, noHMirre
Participles: act. past noHHBmHH; pass', past nHHTbr
Gerund: noHHB(ura)
281

Infinitive: pacra I
Present: pacr& pacrmB, pacrT; pacrM, pacTre, paciyr
Past: poc, poena, poen; poena
Imperative: pacTH, pacrare
Participles: prs, paciyuraa; past penran
Gerund: not used
Infinitive: cecTB I pf.
Future: cany, cnflemB, enfler; cnneM, caflere, enflyr
Past: cen, cna, cno; cnn
Imperative: CHflB, caflBTe
Participle: past cBiiraa
Gerund: ceB(mn)
Infinitive: cnaTB I
Present: mmo, mniub, uinT; mnM, mnre, innioT
Past: enan, cnna, cnno; cnna
Imperative: mna, Hinirr
Participles: act. prs. mmHnr; act. past cnaBuran
Gerund: none
Mainly used in its compound nocjiTb.
Irifinitive: CMCHTBCH I
Present: CMOCB, CMenrBCH, CMercH; CMeMCH, CMeTecB,
CMeiTCH
Past: cMeitncH, CMeanacB, CMennocB; CMeAimcB
Imperative: CMHcn, CMarecB
Participles: prs. CMeK^iiracn; past CMeHBinircH
Gerund: CMCHCB
Like CMeflTbCH is conjugated HanflTbCH; the stress, however, is
on the e throughout.

Infinitive: cnaTB II
Present: enmo, errann., CITHT; CTTHM, cnHTe, CTIHT
Past: enan, cnaji, cnno; cnann
Imperative: cmi, cmrre
Participles: prs, CTIHIUHH; past cnBiiraH
Gerund: none
282

Infinitive: craTb I pf.

Future: craHy, crHemb, crHeT; crHeM, crHeie, CTHyT
Past: cran, crna, crno; crna
Imperative: cram., crinvre
Participle: past crBiiraH
Gerund: ciaB(um)
Like craTb are conjugated Bcraib and on-n. (onHy, oflHemb ...)

Infinitive: yMeprB I pf.

Future: yMpy, yMpnn,, yMpr; yMpM, yMpTe, yMpyT
Past: yMep, yMepn, yMepno; yMepna
Imperative: vMpn, yMpHTe
Participle: past yMpnraa
Gerund: yMprun
>

Like yMeprb is conjugated 3anepTb.

Infinitive: nyBCTBOBaTB I
Present: nyBCTByio, nyBCTByemb, nyBCTByeT; qyBCTByeM,
nyBCTByeTe, qyBCTByioT
Past: nyBCTBOBan, nyBCTBOBana, nyBCTBOBano; nyBCTBOBana
Imperative: HyBcray, HyBCTByaTe
Participle: act. prs. HyBcrByronnra; act. past HyBCTBOBaBiiraa; pass. prs. HyBCTByeMbr
Gerund: nyBCTByn

So conjugated are all verbs in -OBaTb and -eBaTb (if the last consonant of the stem is a sibilant) with the exception of 3H.opBaxbCH
(3jj,op0Baiocb, SAopBaembCH...).

283

6. CHANGES OF CONSONANTS IN VERBS OF THE 1ST

CONJUGATION
T h e foUowing changes of consonants take place in certain
verbs of conjugation I. T h i s only affects t h e present tense,
the imperative, and the present participle (very few verbs
of this type have a present gerund or a present passive
participle). T h e past tense is formed from the infinitive.
3 - Ht: CKa3Tb - ataaty, atntemb ... a t a n t y r
c - m: iracTb - irauiy, mmieuib ... itiniryT
K - a: nnKaTB - n n i y , nnaemb ... nnayT
7. CHANGES OF CONSONANTS IN VERBS OF THE 2ND
CONJUGATION
T h e foUowing changes of consonants take place in certain
verbs of conjugation I I . This only effects the i s t person
singular of the present tense and, if there is one, the past
passive participle.
6 BA3n -

6n: moHTb - jnoojn, jnmin. ... JHOHT

BJI: crBHTb - CTBjno, crBamb ... CTEBHT
Ht: xoflTb - xonty, xflamb ... xflar
Ht: B03HTB - BOHty, B3HUTB ... B3HT
n n : KynarB *- Kyrrar, Kyrramb,.. Kyrorr

c - m: HOCHTB - Homy, HCHIIIB . . . HCHT

C I - m.: necrrb - neirr^, necramb ... neeritr

T - n: nnaTHTb - n n a i y , iinTHmb ... nnTHT

284

KEY TO THE EXERCISES

ypK i
( i ) JLOM Tyr. (2) MOCT iaM. (3) BOT OM. (4) BOT MOCT. (5) BOT

jiMna, CTyjij CTOJI. (6) IlpTa TBM. (7) ILraH TJT. (8) 3 T O
KpTa. (9) BOT Bjira. (10) KanJi Tyr. ( n ) MOCT iaM. (12) 3 T O
MocKB? (13) BOT JleHHHrpfl. (14) 3 T O KJiacc. (15) 3 T O
Kpia? (16) ,H,OM H peit iaM? (17) BOT CJIBO MOCT.

ypK2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)

3 T O KJiacc ? fla, H H aafo ypK anecb (Tyr).

TaM 3an. M O H 6pai lOpa nor TaM.
3 T O KpTa. BJira 3flea>. JLOB TBM.
OH HflTflOMH,H H Hfly flOMH.
rfle B3a ? OH 3flecb. Tae MOH KHHra ? OH TaM.
GrynHT roBopHT no-pyccKH. O H roBopjr: M O H OTn, XHMHK.
Tae noT xop (rfle xop nor)
3 T O MOH KapTHHa ?
3 T O KapTHHa. BOT 6yxra H axra. Mod 6 p a i TOBOPHT: 3TO
Aura.
Moft OTn; TOBOPHT no-pyccKH. O H 4>H3HK.
BOT d>p3a: MOH cecrp - cryflHTKa.

yp6K3
(1) M O H CHH - HHHteHp. O H paTaer TyT. 3 i o MOH cecTp.
(2) BOT KpTa. 3 T O FOCCHH ? Aa. 3 T O JleHHHrpfl. BOT MocKB.
BOT peK MocKB (MocKB-peK). 3 T O <rro (rro ro ?) Peit
HJTH KaHn ? Kaisji.
(3) Bam oin, HHTeT no-pyccKH? JIa,.OH <nxrer xopom (xopom tmraer) H OH TOBOPHT no-pyccKH. M O H Maib He roBopr
no-pyccKH.
(4) H e Bam oiii noT; Bam 6paT noT.
(5) Bma TTH - Bpaq? H C T , OH HHHteHp; MOH 6pai Txte
HHJKeHp.

(6) KTO TaM ? 3 T O Bma cecrp. Osa noT.

(7) BOT Hme njie H BOT Ham aom. 3 T O 3an. BOT Bma KMHaTa.
(8) 3 T O TOBpmn, HBaHB. Bbi diHSHK HJIH XHMHK, TOBpmn
lBaHB ? SI He <pH3HK H H He XHMHK. SL Bpaq. H H npocpccop.

285

ypK 4
() 3 T O MOH KHra H ro MOH KHHra Tace (ro THte/TiOKe MOH
KHHra). Bbi noHHMere TO ?
(2) Bma cbaMHjmH - HBaHB ? SL SHio, I T O Bma cecrp - Bpa
HHKHTHHa H ITO OH Bpaq.
(3) Korfl OH HHTer no-aHTJiHHCKH, OH i m e T neta xopom;
HO Korfl OH qHTer no-pyccKH, OH qin-eT nnxo. H o OH
noHHMeT, MTO H roBopw.
(4) HaH rieTpB He pyccKHH, XOTH er draMHJnui - nerpB. O H
He roBopHT H o s He noHHMeT no-pyccKH.
(5) M O H HteH SHer, t n o Bma e n noT q e m xopom (qem.
xopom noT).
(6) Bam CMH ync HHXteHep ? ^ T O OH flnaer ? O H ym paSTaer ?
(7) Korfl MBI pa6TaeM, Mbi TOBOPHM TJHJKO HO-PJ7CCKH; MBI He

rOBOpHM nO-aHTJIHHCKH.
(8) r e Bam cnoBpb ? SL He 3Hio. KTO 3Her, rfle OH ? SI apxsao,
ITO Bbi 3HeTe.
(9) 3 T 8 Benn. - KapaHflm? - TOBOPHT yqArejib. - H e r , r o
nep, - roBopHT BSHH.

ypK5
. (1) BOT 6H6jTHOTKa. MyHoaHbi qHTaior rasTbi; HtmnHHBi
' qHTlOT KHHTH.
(2) MyjKqmibi - am-jupiHe ? JJ,a, aHrjnwHe. OHH - H3yqK)T
pyCCKHH H3MK.
(3) BOT pyccKan. OH yMer roBopnib no-aHTJiHHCKH H n o 4>pamry3CKH. OH Tnce noHHMeT HCMHJKKO no-HeMnKH,
cjm Bbi roBopHTe MfljieHHO.
(4) Hm yqHTejn. - pyccKHH. O H coBTCKHH rpaKflaHHH. O H
naT pyccKHH ypK cerflHH.
(5) 3 T O He poMH, a cnoBpb. Bbi 3HeTe, KaK no-pyccKH 'dictionary* ? Aa, HO H He 3HK>, KaK 6TO no-HeMnKH.

y pK 6
2. HHTH, qHTHTe; pa6raH, pa6TaHTe; rraniH, mnimTe; non,
nure; Hfl, HfliTe; CHAH, CHflHTe; cjiymau, cJiymaKre; OTBeqH,
OTBeqHTej Hrpa, m p o r e .
3. () tJbH 3TO KHHTa ? - MoH.
(2) ^Ib TO HHCbM ? - E.
(3) ^ e f i STO cnoBpb ? - Er, a He TBOH.

4. (1) Kyfl Bbi HflTe ? Bbi HflTe Ha ypK ? Her, Mbi HflM AOMH.
(2) Bw fljiaeTe ycnxH? - cnpaimmaeT MOH 6paT. ITOTOM,
Korfl H OTBeiio, OH cjiymaeT.

286

(3) OrBeqHTe no pyccKH ! He caymanre, Korfl OH roBopr, ITO

xopom roBopftn. TABKO no-aHraftacKH.
(4) SL BHHty, MTO BBI He nftmeTe. noHtnyficTa, mmiftre, Bce!
HeT, He roBopft, HBn! Ilnm ABKTHT, B 6wcTpo!
(5) Korfl BBI oBbacHeie npBBAO, H noHHMio Bc, T r o BBI
roBopHie. Ho Korfl BBI roBbpHre obicrpo, H HeBc noHBMio.
nojKnyficTa, roBopare MflneHHO, nenb MAneHHO.
(6) ^TO flnaer er cecrp? Kyfl Bfli e HflH? (^ITO er
cecTp flnaeT? Kyfl e flna HflT?) OH HflT Tyfl. O H
Hfli Tyfl. OHH Bce nafi Tyfl.
(7) Xopom! Tenpb BM fliaeie ycnxn. HeT, a pa6raio
nnxo. BBI He nomiMere. SL ne yMio y w r b cnoB. SL ne
3Hio, <n>H TO KHBra.

ypK7
1. KaKH Sojibuia ramra!
3 T pyccKoe CABO.

Hma flopora pflHHa.

Er xopinBB aBTOMo6BJrb.
HX CHHHH TeTpflb.
2. KaKe 6ojn.mfte KHHTH!
3 T H pyccKHe cnoB.
Hnm floporfte pflHHBi.
Er xopnme 8BTOMO6BAH.

HX CBHHe TeTpflB.
3. (1) 3flpBCTByHTe, HBH HBHOBBq! *ITO BBI flnaeTe? Onaib
CMrpBTe TeneBsop? H KypHre? a. TeneBB3op ^eHb
XOpHTHH.
(2) MOH (paMHAHH - BpyH; Mo BMH - JKOH. BOT MOH ceMb.
3TO MOH oiq, a TO MOH ccipbi.
(3) xibn TO. (ra) HBaa ^pHan TeTpflb H *n>H TO (ra)
KpCHbie KapaHflanni? SL ne SHio. Ho a 3Hio, ITO" CBHHH
pynKa H 3onoTe nep MOH, a He Bnm.
(4) ^ITO flnaer Bma cerna ? (ITO Bma ceMba flnaeT ?) CerflHH
np3AHHK. OH Bce CHflHT BMcTe flMa. MOH orq OTflbixer. M08 6paT Kypnr H CMrpBT TejieBH3op. MOH cecrp
immer micbM. MOH Mail. HHrer Htyprin. MOH crpan Tra
naKpbiBeT Ha CTOJI. KaKH KapTHHa!

y P K s
1. (1) y Mean. (2) y HHX. (3) y He. (4) y Hac. (5) y Her.
3. (1) O H qeHb nBOK B cen, HO OH eni He yMeT nnBaTb. O H
xier njiBaTb ? ,0A, xier. O H mb6HT cnopr.

287

(2) KaK 3flecb TeMH! H KaK XJIOAHO! SL ne Mory <nrrTb H He

MOry HHCTb.
(3) AOHCflb HflT, a H flJDKeH CHflTb flMa. MJKHO HTpTb B
mxMaibi, nojKnyBcra ? Her, Hernia. SL xony HATB ryna-rb.
, (4) KaKa y Bac p y w a ? y MeHH qpHaa pyqjxa; nep - 3onoTe.
(5) SL AK)6JIK) CMOTpTb TeneBH3op, Korfl TCMH. H O cerflHH
y MeHH 60JIHT rjia3 H rpno. SI y/naio, <rro a 6neH. SL omuen
cnaTb.
(6) PeK TaK nrapoK, HTO HenbsH BiifleTb Aec.

ypKQ
1. (1) KTO inrfl ? (2) Moft cecrp 6bin B MocKB. (3) y s a c
6bin KHBra. (4) Jlfl Ha peK Tan. (5) Mbi venb jno6ftnB
ryjiTb. (6) O H HflonjKHb'iSbijin paTaib. (7) Henb3 6MJIO
KypBTb. (8) TaM 6MJIO XJIOJTHO. (9) d o n n a xopmaa
norfla.
2. (1) cBepe. (2) 3eMJi. (3) MocKB. (4) KMHaie. (5) KomipTe.
(6) (pyTOne. (7) KomipTe. (8) d>yr6n.
3. (1) Ebuio ieHb xnoflHO Btiep. CHer mn. yjK 3HM.
(2) Korfl a 6bin B MocKB, y MeHH 6bin aBTOMo6ftnb. y Bac
TJKe 6bin aBTOMo6ftjn>? HeT, HO Korfl Mbi 6bura Ha lore,
y Hac 6blA HBWH COBTCKHH aBTOMOHJIb.
(3) M o a cecrp flonnoi 6bui MHTO pa6TaTb, Korfl OH 6bin
Ha cBepe. OH Bpaq, H Bce 6b'um 6onbHb'i.
(4) H e roBopftre o KnMaie Ha cBepe CCCP. SI 3nao, I T O TaM
xnoflHO, H a He xoqy 6bm> B Mcie, rfle Bcerfl xnoflHO.
(5) KaKa y Her 6bui pymca? KpcHaa BAH qpHaa? SL ne
3Hw. ^ T O TO jie>KJio na cron B KMHare, rfle BW CBflnH ?

y p K 10
1. (1) yrny. (2) mKa<py. (3) KMHaTe. (4) cfle. (5) cany. (6) BHAKy. (7) MocKBy. (8) nce. (9) nony. (10) yrTejia.
2. (1) nejKHT, nejKna. (2) nejKHT, nejKn. (3) JKHBT, jKHJi.
(4) paTaeT, pa6Tan. (5) enflai, CHflnH. (6) neiKy.
neiKn. (7) CTOHT, AOKAT; croana, nejKna.
3. () Eb*ino JKpKO, H Mbi CHfljm B cany B m u m a o .
(2) M B I HtBBM B JleHBHrpfle, rfle y Hac 6ojn>ma KBapiBpa.
y Hac B KBapTirpe ecib kyxHH, cronBaa, cnnbHH H Ka6nHT.
y MeH B KaHHTe ecib (CTOHT) nftcbMeHHbiH d o n . O H CTOHT
Ha KOBp B yrny.
(3) Eiinvre, noKnycra. SI saso, I T O BBI xoTftie ecTb. HeT, a
He xovy ecu., xony mirb. BOT ropainaft cyn. Embie.
(4) M o i OTn fler Ha BOCTK. noreMy? O H JKHJI Ha rre, HO
Tenpb OH jKHBT Ha cBepe. 3Hjm JJH B U , *ITO TamKHT er
JHo6ftMbi rpofl ?

288

(S) Bbi BHflHTe odiBHHHTKy? CMOTPHT! OH HaKpBTBer Ha

cTon. Tenpb OH miaflr HOJKH H BBAKB Ha CTOA. ABymKa
BanpBO ? HeT, TO MOH cecrp. *ITO oa flnaeT 3flecb ? OH
JKHBT 3fleCb. OH He OlJjHHHHTKa.

ypK i i
. () HAy. (2) 3flHT. (3) B3HM. (4) Ben. (5) secT. (6) nerBM.
(7) XAHT. (8) flemb. (9) Homy. (10) Be3r. ( i l ) neTioT.
2. (1) M u Bcerfl 3flHM Ha Karat3 KJKflbift rofl, HO B TOM rofly
MM fleM Ha y p n .
(2) KyA fleT cn-apftK ? SL afmsao, *rro OH fleT B M o c r a y . IIOTM
OH neTHT B AHrnmo.
(3) 'rfpea l a c a Be3y Te6a HA aBTOMOOftjie B OHJraoTKy.
(4) notrranbH xan Ha (ppitry Ha MOTouftKJie.
(5) neTpBbi 3flHT KjKflbrft rofl Ha KaBK3 B B3HT cecrpy
Tyfl.
(6) 3BTpa a netry Ha BOCTK. Bbi ncro nereTe ? fla, H iem.
inojuo AerTb.

ypK 12
1. (1) BcraT, BcraBn. (2) CHHM, cnjm. (3) npocbmeMCH, BCTaM,
yMbrseMca, ofleBeMca; irpocbmnncb, BCTaBnn, yMbmnBCb,,
OflesnHCb. (4) 3flopBaeTca, BCTpenaeMca; 3flopBancH, Bcrpeqjmcb. (5) CMeTca, cMeanca. (6) coMHeBiocb, coMHeBncH.
(7) runoT, CMeTca; nneBn, cMeanca.
3. (1) riop BcraBTb, ofleBibca B yMbTbca.
(2) Korfl OTKpbmeTca My3fi ? H He 3Hio. JlroM OB orapbiBeTca pHO yTpoM B 3aKpbeTca paO BiepoM.
(3) BqepoM OH yuamaer; HOTM OH JIOJKHTCH Ha ABBH B HHTeT
ra3Ty. O H JIOJKHTCH cnaTb pHO H BCTaT pHO.
(4) Cerqc HAT aomab. AOJKAI. Bcerfl BflT 3HMH. M B I He
MjKeM HATH ryjiHTb. MJKHO TaHneBTb ? (MW MJKeM Tamj,eBTb ?) HeT, He Ha KOBp.
(5) nojKnyftcTa, caflTecb. SI x o i y 6ecflOBaTb. H o H He xoqy
SecflOBaTb. Bbi Bcerfl roBopftre o ce6.
(6) t i r o OH KJiaflr Ha CTOA i SL jryMaio, TOJ OH KjianT Tyfl
KHftry.

ypK 13
I. (1) - , 6bin, 6yAeT. (2) qHTemb, tmraJi, 6yAemb qurrb. (3)
nrenib, mrru, 6yflemb wazib; mmry, nncn, 6yny micra.
(4) flaTe, flaBjni, yflere flaBib. (5) ecib, 6bui, 6j>fler.

289

2. () AHBH, Te6a, KMHaTe. (2) POCCBK), neflmo, Mcnq. (3)

Aianoo. (4) jnntrejiH. (5) necy, cfle.
3. (1) Bbi 6yneTe nyBCTBOBaTb ce6 ^ein. xopom qpe3 Mcan,
ftjjH flHte <ipe3 Heflnto.
(2) y MeHH 6yflei ypK B cpfly, H B leTBpr H flnjKeH 6yfly
cnymaTb nKinno y "Bac B nncne.
(3) Bce TB mflB 6yflyr r y n a n . 3BTpa B ncy, HO H He 6ynj.
SL fly B JleHHHrpfl cerflHa BqepoM Ha Heflmo.
(4) B KaKHe n a B M 6yfleTe pa6TaTb} SL ne pa6Taio Tenpb;
a OTflbrxio. Xopom, Bbi 6yflere BO BTPHHK B KJiye npn
3aBfle ? HeT, CJIHIHKOM cicyqHO TaM; H xony TamteBTb Becb
flem. H Becb Bqep. Bbi He xoTHTe cjrymaTb jieranno o MapKcB3Me ? HeT, He x o i y .
(5) SL flyMaio, ITO OH He CJIMIHHT, mo BBI roBopftie. roBopftre
rpMKo, H, MHter 6BiTb, OH Gfaer noHHMTb. SL ne Mory
roBopHTb rpMKo; y MeHH rpno 6OAHT.

yp6n 14
1. (1) B , a s , Ha. (2) Ha, c, Ha. (3) Ha, c, B . (4) Ha, OT. (5) KOJIO.

(6) B3, B, c, Ha.

2. (1) orna, JKHBT, yjmne. (2) yqftnca, yqHTenbHBrrbi. (3) 3flHHa,
HaxflHTCH, Kynbiypbi, TflBixa. (4) paeoraer, yrp, Biepa.
3. (1) C BecHbi H jrqycb B yHBBepcHTTe. SL B3ynio pyccKHH H3BTK,
H KJKflbift flem. H y i y ypK.
(2) M B I 6yeM JKBTB HeflaneK OT HHTH Ha yjnme rpbKoro,
KOAO 3flHBa, rfle TBOB AHAA pa6ran.

(3) Korfl Mbi 'CMTpBM TeneBBSop, H O6BTTHO cBHcy KOAO

flBpH. JJ[o Koim H BCTaw H BbTxojKy H3 KMHaibi. SL 6ep
KHHTH CO CTOJl KOAO OKH H HAy B CUaJIbHK) H ^HTlO.
(4) B KaKft flenb MJKHO yfler Hflrft B KHH ? B leiBpr ?
Xopom, H He pa6iaio B nerapr.
(5) napoxfl HflT B nHTHBrry. SL fly B JleHHHrpfl na Mcan.
MHe HAO yfleT MHTO <nxrTb o CCCP. Bbi 6bum B POCCHH ?
fla, flaBH. SL pa6Tan TaM flnro.
(6) Korfl jnflH TamryioT Becb Biep H CJIHHIKOM MHTO mvioT,
OHH OBTTHO qyBCTByioT ce6 nnxo s a cnflyionnai flenb.
(7) Pas B Mcan H nojryqio mtcbM OT cecrpw. Oa yqerenbHBna B mKne KOAO MamBrorpcKa.

y p K 15
1. (1) yrorejanmibi, KHHTH. (2) floiKfl, caMOAra. (3) mroero.
(4)flKTOpy,BaM. (5) HHcrpyKTOpy. (6) 3flHHio.

290

2. ()
(2)
(3)
(4)
3. ()
(2)
(3)

y JlBflbi H 6bino naparmia.

O H HHKorfl He i u r e r rasrBi ncne sBipaKa.
SL ne BBHty HH cecrpBT, HH 6pTa.
HojKH B BHJTKH He Ha CTOJl.
y MeHH HHKOrfl H 6bIAO HHflMa,HH KBapTHpbl.
KTO Memer Te6 paSrarb ?
K cojKanHHio, MOH flna JIOKHT B 6oJH.Hftne, B MOH Tra
CHflHT B TiopbM. SL noceinio Moer aato pa3 B Befljno, HO
r n o noceinTb Hejn.3H.
(4) H3-3a flojKfla Henb3H 6raTb no cny cerflHa.
(5) KTO TOT qejiOBK 6e3 nuinbi noflxflHT K smeft cecrp?.
E MyjK ? IIoneMy OH HHKorfl He HCHT m n a n y SHMH ?
(6) SI Hafliocb, HT y^HTeAK) He XJIOAHO. SL 3Hio, I T O B Kncce
He iKpKo, HO He CJODHKOM nnxo AAH 3HMBI.

ypK 16
1. () KHBTOfi, OTA. (2) KeM, HaMH, H M H .

2. ()
3. ()
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

(3) qeM. (4) peKft,

njieM. (5) Heft, aM, Te6. (6) TapnKy.

KiKeTca^ Ka3nca. (2) cnyjKHT, cnyjKHA. (3) aarepecyiocb, HBTepecOBnca. (4) eflHM, na. (s) flejKBT, nexcn.
(6) uflr, mn.
ECAH HHKT He flOBJieH HM HAH er pa6TOH, OH flJDKeH
cHflTb flMa.
Korfl OH roBopnn c e 6ptOM o norfle, OH yc nuia AOMB.
nojKnyftcTa, Hflftre 3a flKTopoM flo o6fla. SI nyBCTByio
ce6a ^eHb nnxo.
M o n 6flHbift flpyr 6bui y6ftr cojiflTOM, Korfl OH 6BUI B
AdppHKe.
^eM TBI ob'nmo nftmeim. - KapaHflmM BJIB pj^ncoft ?
SL cjryniaji npodpccopa c HHTepcoM. O H , Ka3jiocb, roBopftn
yMH. O H yMeT roBopftrb.
CHanna OH 6bui conflTOM, HOTM BpanM. O H 6bin yMHbiB
lenoBK.

ypK 17
1. (1) KHHTH neatT B mKacbx. (2) y Hac H 6bino TOBpamea.
(3) Onrb'i repeBflOBnbHBiHMH. (4) H a crojix HOJKH H BBJTKB, .
HO TapnoK HeT. (5) JIKJAH npaxAHT paccKsbaTb ncrpaa.
(6) AoM HaxflHTCH Ha 6eperx peK.
2.. (1) TpflnaTb oflH KHHra. (2) CpoK BceMb AOMB. (3) B ceMb
qacB. (4) B nonoBBae BocbMro (nojioBftna BocbMro, B ceMb
TpftflnaTb). (5) narb cnoBapft. (6) BoceMHfluaTb HacB TpflnaTb Tpn MHHyrbi. (7) meCTbflecHT flBe Mmryrbi. (8) ffpe cecrpj

291

B flBa 6pTa. (9) CppK leib'ipe pyna narb Konew. (10) IHTHflnaTb pyOJift Tpn KonftKH.
3. (1) n o cy66iaM B ceMb nacs 1 Bcerfl XAHM (sana) B
KHH.

(2) roBopHT, qTO y Her TpH pymai H mecib KapaHflamft.

(3) B 3oonpKe a Bftflen AbBB, rarpoB, CJIOHB, BOAKB B
06e3bHH.
(4) y He B KMHare Tpn nojioTenna.
(5) B HTKadjy (ecrb) MHTO TeTpfleft H HCKOAbKO KHHT fljia
irroM.
(6) AaneK n a flo MOCKBI ? Her, TJH>KOflBaflnaTBnom. KBJIO-

MrpoB.
(7) 3a peKB HeT JKBABTA, HO Meatfly 3epoM H craflHHOM ecrb
nomft naTbflecar AOMB.
(8) Korfl npHXflBT cyflba, Bce BcraiT. K cojKajiHHio, OH He
ieHb nonyjiapeH.
(9) Ceprft npoAOJDKji vmih ra3Ty.

ypK 18
2. (i)py6jifi, KonBKH. (2) nannpcaMH. (3) cxapy (-a), rpMMOB, nio (-H), rpMMOB, KojiSacbi, n^eK, cHrapr. (4) 6pTbeB,
cecTp. (s) moflft, npoflaBqB, lenoBK, piy. (6) eMy, rfla,
ner.
3. (1) CKJIBKO CTBT ia KOJi6ac? Py6nb K H A ? 3 T O CAHTHKOM

flporo. flftie MHe BerqaHBT, nojKJiyftcia.

(2) y Mena 6MJIO flBfluaib narb pyjie B KapMane cerflHa
yTpoM. Tenpb y Mena TJIBKO narbflecar KoneK.
(3) CKJIBKO CTHT r a nanapCBi (carapTBi)? Himca CTHT

BoceMHflnaib KoneK. H CKJIBKO namrpc (cnrapi) B nqKe ?

JJ^nnaib.
(4) SL ne 3Haji, paSran AH OH.
(5) CKJJJ>KO ner KamrraHy KOMHflbl? TJIKO ABAnaxb OflHH
ron? Korfl eMy yfleT ABnnan.flBa?
(6) He CTHT roBopHTb c HHM. O H npoflaT Bc qein. flporo.
Jlyimie HflTft (xoABTb) B SOJIBHIH Mara3ftH 3a noKymcaMH.
(7) noacnyocra, nAre MHe nmcy i a , 6HKy HKpbi, naibcT
rpMMOB BeTqaHBj H KycK cb'ipy (-a).
(8) noKynTenb nnraT B Kccy.
(9) H bijio jmcTbeB Ha flepBbHx 3HMH.
(10) T B I cnarenn. er yiHHBiM ?

yp6xc 19 1. (1) yrn, Bbiynan. (2) aas&a, an. (3) ojiaronapftjia, no6naroflapftjia.' (4) aacMeancH.
2. (1) 6fay nocenrTb. (2) VBBABM. (3) B03bMre, 6yfly 6paTb.
(4) yfly qBTTb, npotnrrio.

292

3. (i) SL noroBopBA c HUM B<iep H ocasn eMy, qro a yftn coKy.

(2) Korfl OH aqan naraTb, MBI Bce cjm.
(3) SL ne xo*ry ara er Te6e (H He xo*ry Te6e er naib). T B I
flJDKeH er Kynftn.; TblflJDKeHBcerfl Bc noKynTb.
(4) BBI oyfleTe vxrTb Knftry sBTpa? a, H Hafliocb Ksnarb
(npoiHTTb) e K Bqepy.
(5) BBI copAH MHTO Maiepana flna flnccepTanaa ?
(6) B lerBpr OB npbn-iryji c caMonTa. O H C ceHR cfljian flBflAaTb npbDKKB.
(7) Korfl fl Bcrpeijo HBaa, H Bcerfl eMy roBopib, m o a
qeHb jnojnb er cecrpy.
(8) SL BaM CKaaty, *ETO OH cflnaeT 3BTpa. OH npHroiBHT
o6fl, HOTM OH cfleT y OKH a KHIHT micTb BaM.
(9) Bbi flaflftre eMy ypK 3BTpa ? HeT, y Mena HeT BpMeHH.

ypK 20
1. (1) npBe3)KJTH, caflftjiHCb. (2) 6yflCT npne3>KTb. (3) nepenftcbiBan, noflmicMBaji. (4) flocTpaBana. (5) ByfleM npoxoflHTb.
3. (1) noBflMCre) (nflM(Te)) B KHH cerflHH BqepoM.
(2) ECAB OH xqer noxan> B JleHHHrpfl, nycTb (nycKaft) OH
(no)Aer.
(3) noe3a<ftTe B JIHAOH ipe 3 flse Heflna a irooBeflftre TaM
mecTb flHeft. noTM BepHarecb.
(4) H e 3anftcbmaaTe er HMemi, HO 3anHniHTe a n m HMeH.
(5) O H nomA HaBpx H nocnn (HCMHOTO).
(6) ECAH yfler xopmaa norfla sBTpa, MBI Bce noneM B
flepBHio.
(7) KTO npHB3 Te6 Becb TOT MaTepnn B3 MOCKBBT ?
(8) O H Boniji B KMHaTy a ce.
(9) SKcneflHOBH OTnpBHnacb B Koim Ma.

ypK 21
1. (1) Bojn>mM TeTpe, KOTPMX. (2) CBO6AHOTO BpMeHH. (3)
TaKHM mnepcHbiM lenoBKOM. (4) TaKM co6ibeM HacipoHEH,
xopmeM HacrpoaBB. (5) KOTporo, ManeabKOM flMe. (6)
CHHeft B3e. (7) CO6H. (8) jnoflft, ce6. (9) BenBKBM neBnM.
3. (x) SL ne SHan, *rro HCT SBbrx yraTena (BHKaKBx HBBTX y n i Tenfi HCT).
(2) SL ne y3Hn Bmero pyccKoro aan, Korfl OH noflomn KO
Mae aa ynaqe.
(3) Kara, KOTpyio a Kynftn Bqep, KaJKeica Mem. xopmefi.
(4) M B I c HHKOJieM (HHKOJJ4H H H) nocrynftjm BMcre B ynaBepcBTr.

293

(5) BBI npHHecjift (npHBesn) c coSft nacbM, Koipoe OB

Hanncn BaM Biep ?
(6) B KaKMflMeBbi JKHBTe ?
(7) CBeTno, Korfl ne3fl noflomn (noflxoflan) K CTBnHB.
(8) KTO ia 3aMeqTenbnaH minma, KOTpaa acanr B TpTbeM
flMe HanBo ? Ax, TO er cecrp. Xoiftie na BBI (no)roBOpBTb C Heft ?
(9) Mne xrcrca TaHneBTb cerflHa BqepoM, HO ae 3HK>, c
KeM TamieBTb.
(10) He AyMaftTe, m o ny6nHKa BOCXHUIACTCH TaKBM nnoxHM
naaeM.

yp6K 22
1. (1) 6jiee KpacHBOM, cMOM KpacftBOM (KpacBBemeM). (2)
bicTpe, 6biCTpe Bcex (Haa6nee bicrpo). (3) Borate, cMbift
6orTbm (6oraTamHH, orqe Bcex). (4) nee nemBoe, cMoe
euiBoe (flemeBamee). (5) 6nee yfloHBie H 6nee H3amHBie,
cMbie yflHBie H cMbie H3jhnHbie. (6) xonoAHe, xoAOflHe
Bcer (HaHOjiee xnoAHo). (7) Bbnne, caMbiH BbicKHfi (Bbinie
Bcex). (8) Jiyqmae, cMbie jryqnme.
3. (1) T T , KTO CKa3n BaM TO, yMHe, neM a flyMan.
(2) Bc, nro OH 3HeT, BHTepcHO.
(3) 3TOT rncryK rop3flo apne, M er.
(4) SL 6jn>me mnepecyiocb TeipoM, neu KHH.
(5) O H nonpocHA MeHH HTB no6biCTpe.
(6) TLoneiAf Bbi flyMaere, rro (noqeMy no-BmeMy) MOfleAbpBi
HCHT jieeftpKVK)ofliKfly, qeM paSqne Ha (b6paKax ?
(7) SL nomn B Mara3aa, HO He MOT KynfiTb HH 6piOK, HH neplioK, HH imajKaK.
(8) Oa cnpocftji MeHH, emBJie JIH nanapcbi (caraprBi) B
Poccftn, tiM B AHTAHB.
(9) y Moft CTpmeft cetrrpbi MBbme nnTbeB, neM y Te6a.
(10) C KJKflbiM rflOM oa pa6Taer Bce 6jn>me (6jn>me a
6nbme) Han KHHTOH, Korpyio OH Hqaji, Korfl eMy 6HJIO
TJIBKO flBflnaTb flBa rfla.
(11) OH cMaa yMHaa H B TO e BpMH cMaa CKpMHaa Humaa, Korpyio a saio. K coHOjiemno, OH coBcM (flaneK) ae
KpacBBaa.
. (12) MeM Bbi 6Jn>me Bcer HHTepecyCTecb ?
(13) He 3a6yflbTe cyMo^nm a nepiioK.

ypK 23
I. ( ) qbM, BCMB BUTBMB. (2) TBM, TeM. (3) BCM TOM. (4) APJT
flpyry. (5) caMft, TOM. (6) cMoft.

294

2. () caMft. (2) caMor. (3) cMbrii, cMB. (4) cMOM.

3. (1) CBOHM. (2) er. (3) e, CBoa. (4) CBOKJ, er. (5) cBoer.
4. (1) MOH Tra a MOH flftfla TOBopana flpyr c flpyroM 060 BcM,
o iM OHB MOTAB noflyMaTb.

(2) C cMoro yrp OH pa6TaeT B (CBOM) KaimTe.

(3) O H Kynftn (CBOH) KOCTKJM a (cBoft) 6OTBHKB B JIHflOHe.

(4) B cMOM flne OH He 3HeT, Ha <n>eft nocrna OH enan Bnep.

(5) On CKa3na, *rro e flafla npoBeAT flBe Hefljm c nen.
(6) SI ysnin OT caMor npodpccopa, ^TO yaBBepcnrT 3aKpbrr.
(7) Bce 3HK>T, Korfl OH B accaae.
(8) y BAC ecrb CBOH KBapTftpa B JIHflOHe. H B cMOM uHTpe.
(9) B TOM a<e cMOM (baKyjibTTe ecrb Tpa npotpccopa.
(10) SI ne Mory CKa3Tb, m o H oc6emio Harepecyiocb TOH
npo6nMoft.
(11) 3TOT HenoBK - npodiccop; TOT - flonar, a TOT C 6oooflft acnHpHT.

ypK 24
1. (1) SI HH o KOM He roBopftji Biep.
(2) SL nwiM ne Boonmiiocb.
(3) O H HHKyA He nomn.
(4) O H He arreT HBKaKft KHHTH (OH HmcaKH KHHTH He iHTCT).
(5) O H HH^bH niJianbi ae BCHT.
(6) O H HH O <IBHX Apy3bax He 3a6TBTCa.
(7) SL HH Ha TO He CMOTpi.
2. (1) HHKor. (2) au c KeM. (3) HKorna. (4)'HHKyfl. (5) mraM,
HqeM.
3. (1) ABflftaTb ceflbMa ynmia. (2) CTO TpftflnaTb TpTHH AOM.
(3) B CTBpTOM flMe. (4) B TCOTa fleBaTbcr inecTbflecaT
npBOM rofly, B Tbioma fleBTbcT ABaflnaTb HATOM rony, B
Tbicana BoceMbcT naTHfluaTOM rony. (s) TpxcTaa KHftra.
4. (1) OH 3axaji 3a MHOH Tpa flan TOMy Ha3fl Ha CBoM asTOMOHJie.
(2) BaM HKyna HATH ?

(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)

CTapftK KHKOTA He TOBOpBT HH O KOM, HH C KeM.

HHKOT He 6Hca, H Te6 Hiero 6yneT 6oHTbca.
Bbi, KJKCTca, He RMeTe BBKaKro HOHHTHH 06 TOM flne.
O H rofl TOMJ> Ha3fl yxan aaflnro.
Hiero cnflTb B 6a6naoTKe; noftflM B KHH.
Oa HHKorfl He 3a6THTca o CBoM AMC
Ha nftTbift Ae. OH pemftn BepsyTbca AOMH.
MHe Haflono cjiyinaib e nBae (cnymaTb, KaK oja noT).

295

ypK 25
2. (1) y Her TpftflnaTb pyA naTHAnaib KoneK.
(2) Mbi yxajm B mecrM lacy flBflqaTb TpTBero Mpra TBICBTO
AeBHTbcT mecTbflecftT npBoro rfla.
(3) H a ceMft flHeft OH paraei mecTb flHeft.
(4) *ITO TBI Cflnan c OTHMB mecTHaflnaibio py 6JIHMH ?

(5) B rax flsyxcrax cejitHfluaTB flOMx JKBByr flBe TMCHUH CTO

TpftflnaTb flBa nenoBKa.
(6) M B I roBopftjm o nerarpx pyjix ABaflqaTft mrra KonHKax.
3. (1) B o6nx rax' KHftrax 6Abme naracT crpaHftn,.
(2) B ceMb qacB Bnepa iprbero HHBapa Mbi npnneTnH B
MOCKBJV.

(3) B TBicirqa fleBaibci naTboecaT IMTOM rony a Bb'iexan B3

JIBfloaa; MHe H^ero 6b'uioflnaTbTaM.
(4) IloqeMy HBH Tpraft Ha3bmancn HBOHOM BenBKBM ?
riOHHTHH He BMK). SL flaJKe He 3HK>, B KaKM BKe OH JKHJI.
(5) Be3 flecar ntecTb Biepa OH nr Ha AHBH B 3acnyn.
(6) Bo BpMH nepepBa na o6fl nacb'i npoSftjni nonoBftay
Tprbero, H pa6qae pemana BepayTbca Ha <p6pHKy.
(7) KaKro (KOTporo) qacn H B IOKM roAy B M KHMBAB
CBOK) (Bmy) KHary ?
(8) 3TOT qeMOflH scaT KOJIO flecaiH KHnorpMMOB; OH cjimKOM Tanten AJIH caMonra.
(9) IIpBfla n a , m o qerb'rpe ceMbft JKHB^T B rax lerarpx
KMaaTax ?
(10) nojKjryucTa, nonuiftie aBTOMo6BJn> B nonoBBHe fleBHToro
3BTpa yTpoM.
(11) B ceHTHp 6yfler KOHipepmma B JIHflOHe. Bbi 6yflCTe
TaM ? HeT, MHe HKorfla noceniTb KOHtpepemraH.

ypK 26
1. (1) JiejKBmyio. (2) npaaecmaH. (3) ye3:Bmefi. (4) cnmnae.
(S) Bejrymen. (6) npHmnnmM. (7) HanHcBmero. (8) o6paaylonnie. (9) KypftBnnrft. (10) ome^aiaBme.
2. Besynmfi, B3nmfi; B3anmft, B03ftBumft; fiepynmfi, SpBuma;
Hajnoflionmfi, Ha6jnoflBmHft; neraniaft, jieTBmHft; rynaionjHft, ryjiHBnmft; TpyflJnHftca, TpyflftBHmftca; Ha^HHionmcH,
Ha^HHBniHHca; necrftmaft, necrBmaft.
3. (1) MenoBK, npoflainniH BHH sa THM npanaBKOM, flBa psa
CHflfl B TKjpbM.
(2) Ara, cHflHnjjHe sa CTOHM, He ojijKHb'i roBopftrb TaK MHTO.
(3) Bbi cmmana o Mocr, coeflBHfnom.eM 6e crpoHbi yxtbi ?
(4) SL 6OKKS> CKasTb, HTO y Bac HCT necramero yii.

296

(5) Korfl eft 6b'uio nen: annntb (npH6jm3HTejn.HO ABnnaib ACT,

KOAO flBafluaTH ACT), OH npoH3BOAHJia CHAbHoe BneqaTJiHHe Ha MyjKqHH.
(6) Tbi 3aMiHn, KaK TBOH cecrp Boimi B<iep BiepoM ?
(7) y crapKK, noAHHMionierocH no AcTHune, ecib 6yrb'DiKa
BflKH B cnjibHe.
(8) nojKjryHCTa, He KypHie; TOT BarH AAH HeKypHinHx.
(9) H a npuiJioH Hefljie OH 6bin B MocKB; na TOH Heflne OH B
JIHAOHe; na cnflyromen Heflne OH yfleT B JleHHHrpfle.
Tfle OH 6$aer B 6flyineM ron^ ?
(IO) 3flHHH, KOTpbie o6blqHO HpOHSBOflHT BneqaTnmie Ha
HoceTHTeAeH, He npHBneKioT wenn.

ypK 27
1. (1) wreMyio BcMH. (2) noTpHHHBie BMH. (3) cnacHHyio HM.
(4) irpHBeflHHbia Moft cecrpii. (5) HanficaHHOM HM onry.
2. (1) OHH 6MJIH ccJiaHbi npaBHTenbcTBOM B CnfiHpb.
(2) KeM OH 6biA ncJiaH Ha BoraJi ?
(3) Bepb 6bin 3aKpbrra H 3anepr.
(4) Er Mcro SMJIO 3HHTO Moa Treft.
(5) 3 i a craTbH 6bm npotraraHa BcMH.
(6) Bonpc 6bin pemH HM.
(7) Hiraer H 6buio KyruieHo HMH.
(8) KeM OH 6bin OATa ?
(9) neTep6j>pr SbiA ocHBaH nerpM npBbiM.
(10) Kuftra yjK 6bui HanaT HM.
3. npoiHTaHHbrft, npowraH; HanHcaHHbnS, Hanncn; B3HTMH,
B3HT; nHHTbrft, nHHT; nepeBeflHHbifi, nepeBeflH; flHHbift,
fl"aH; npflaHHbni, npnaH; yuHTbm, VOHT; BCTpqeHHbm, BcrpqeH; npHK3aHHbift, npHK3aH; orapbiTbift, o n c p t n ; Bbnnribm,
Bb'nnrr; npHBe3HHbiH, npHBe3H.
4. (1) Korfl H npoxoflHJi MHMO e KBapTHpbi Bqep, a samrna,
trro e mia 6b'iAH OTKpb'iTbi.
(2) Bbi BHflejm KHHTH, npoflaaeMbie B TOM Marasime ?
(3) Jb3e cyTOK OH 6bin ieHb 6neH.
(4) Korfl OH BepHyncH, OH Hamen, ITO er mima 6bin npoKjioTa.

(5) y Moft cecrpbi 6MJIO lTBepo fleift, a y MTepH - flcjrn..

(6) T e , KTO KpnKO cmrr (Kpmxo crnnnjae) o6bnmo AOHtrcH
pHO.
(7) KaKiie pOMHbi Gitan nepeBefleHb'i c pyccKoro (H3bTK) Ha
aHTJIHHCKHH
(8) Korfl Tbi cnycTHmbCH no ncTHmie, nontnycra, saKpa
OKH H 3anpn flBepb.

297

(9) CKABKO OTABOOK B HHCBM, omeiiTaHHOM (HaneiTaaHOM)

K?
(lO) y MeHH BOS pOMHbl, HanHCaHHbie AoCTOBCKHM.

ypK 28
1. (1) npjKfle TCM OH BepHyncH. (2) c Tex nop KaK OH yxana.
(3) ncne TOT KaK OH OKOJOTHA yHHBepcHTT., (4) BBnny t o r
TTO OH 6bin 6AeH. (5) 6jiaroflapH TOJMy I T O (6nro) flOHtflb HflT.
2. (1) rfla. (2) neT. (3) Aer. (4) rofly. (5) TOAB. (6) neT. (7)
roflMH. (8) Aer.
3. (1) H e BCTaBfiTe, noK OH He npHKjKeT BaM BcraTb.
(2) ^eM pHbme H nojKycb cnaTb, ieM 6nbme H pa6iaio.
(3) TaK KaK Tbi flemb 3BTpa B MocKBy, Tbi MHcenn. B3HTB C
co66ft 3T0 nncbM.
(4) M O H 6paT HceHHncH B npmnoM rofly. M O H cecrp Bbnnna
3aMyjK flBa rfla TOMy Ha3fl.
(5) 3Here AH BBI, 3a KeM Aima 3MyjKeM ? a, OH Bb'niwa
sMyjK 3a Moer 6pia.
(6) SL Te6 roBopib io, noTOMy TTO H teSA JDO6JIK).
(7) MTbl (flJIH TOT tlTBl) y3HTb O eT 3fl0pBbe, TBI flOJDKH
HflTH B 6onbHHny.
(8) EflB Ceprft Bb'mieji H3 KMHaTBi, KaK EnHa HBHOBHa
sanjiKaJia.
(9) M a r c He COCTOHTCH cerflHH BBHAy nnoxfi norflBi.
(10) FOBOpH CO MHOfi, nOK H TyT CHJKy. Si HeHaBHJKy, KOTfl Tbl
CMrpHUTb s a Memi H He roBopnn..
(11) IIoK OH <nrrn Easry, crapHK 3acHyji.
(12) O H H Bce Bcrnn ncne o6na.
(13) M O H nmnyrqaH ManmHKa TaKfl crpan, m o He pa6TaeT.

ypK 29
1. (1) He 3HH TBoer npeca. (2) OTBTHB(nni) Ha Bce Bonpcbi.
(3) pa6Tan Hafl HBOH KHBTOH. (4) BOHAH B KMHaTy. (s)

nyremcTByfl no. HHAKH. (6) floxaB(nm) AO rpofla. (7) nrpn.

(8) oflBuracb.
2. (1) Korfl H turrji ... (2) TaK KaK OH 3aHHTepecoBncH ...
(3) Korfl (ncne TOT KaK) OH npjiB3 ... (4) TaK KaK OH yMH ...
(5) Korfl OH AOJKIUICH ... (6) KaK TJibKO OH ramoner ...
3. npHxoAH, npHAjt; MH, Bb'iMbmCnm); JKHBH, npQJKHB(mH);
OTHOCH, oTHecn; 6jiaroflapa, no6naroflapHB(mH); - , HamicB
(mu); npHBOflH, npHBeAH; cminia, ycjiinnaB(nni) (ycjiwina);
cnyman, nocnymaB(nm).
4. (1) ToBopH c HHM, H Bflpyr nHHA, noqeMy Bce er flpy3bH
noKHHyjiH er.

298

(2) IIpHHHMH (npHHHB) BC BO BHHMaHHe, H OTHTlO, 4X0

npaBHiejibCTBO npBO.
(3) noieMy. Tbi pa6raemb CTH? noroMy Tro TO rop3flo
nrie, nen paSTaTb CHAH.
(4) AaBH noflOHtflM JlaBpHHb'rx. OHH, HOJDKH 6biTb, yjK
BbiexaAH H3flMa,H HeflaneKOT HHX AO Hac.
(5) x terH Ty KHry, H 6bin nopaaH onHcmieM AHHBI IlBJioBOH.
(6) noHHMere JJU Bbi,. i r o Bce ra jnbfln, CHflaunie 3necb H
pasroBpHBaiomHe flpyr c flpyroM, <uiHbi napjiweHTa ?
(7) floxaB flo TamKHTa, Mbi pemnn BepHyroca B JleHHHrpfl.
(8) CyflH no e KHraM, Bma 66ymKa, AOJDKH 6brn>, 3MelTenbHaH HtHnmHa.
(9) CoBepniHB nyrejuecTBHe no CpAnefi ASHH, flejiernHH
Bepuyjiacb B HHAHIO.

(10) SI fly yjK flBaflqaTb mm. MHHyT; Korn Bbi npHHecre MHe
cyn?
(11) IIpeflCTaBHTenb CoBrcKoro C o i o s a x i e i no3HaKMHTbca
CBMH.
(12) H3yqH pyccKHft asb'iK, BbiflOJDKHbicrapTbCH yroTb KaK
MJKHO 6jn>me cnoB B flemv.
(13) OKHtnm(mH) yHHBepcHTr, OH Hqan pa6TaTb B MHHHerpcTBe HHocTpHHBix flen.

ypK 30
1. (1) ECJIH 6 H nomnflOJKflb,H He Bb'nnen 6BI.
(2) Ebijm 6bi y MeraiflHbrH,H ie6 icynan 6BI iy KHry.
(3) Ara MOTAH 6bi KynTbCH, cjm 6bi norfla 6bin xopmaa.
2. () 1T-HH6yflb. (2) KOT-TO. (3) Tfle-TO, KOTfl-TO. (4) KyflHHTJyflb. (5) KaKe-HHyAb. (6) Tr-HHyAb. (7) TTO-TO. (8)
KOTfl-HHOyflb.
3. (1) TpHAflaib Tpn HBbix AMa.
(2) ^eTb'ipe CHHHX (cHHHe) niJiHnbi.
(3) JJJBflqaTb oflH coBTCKan MpKa.
(4) OH TOBOpHT HA HHTH HHOCTpHHMX H3bTKX.
(5) C TpeMfl 60JH>mHMH <lpHbIMH co6KaMH.
4. (1) SL ne xotry, Tr66bi TM ymn, HO H AOJDKCH Te6 CKa3Tb, Tro
(yjK)flOBOAbHOH3flH0. '
(2) MTO 6BI HH cnyqenocb, B03bMHTe Kor-HH6yAb c coft.
(3) Ecnn 6bi TJH.KO BBI MHe flnn BH3y, <n?6bi H MOT noxaib
B CoBTCKHB COK>3!
(4) T B I 6OHBH>CH MeHH ? HCT, H TJIBKO fioiocb, qrSbi (nan 6BI)
TBI He cflnan tjrr-HH6yAb raynoe.
(5) JIiflH, KOTpbie TOBOPHT Ha qeibipx HJIH JTHTH HHOCTpaHbix
H3bntx, non3Hbi, rfle 6BI OHH HH JKHAH.
(6) BBI 3aHHMAHCb rp6jien, Korfl Bbi 6b'um B yHHBepcHTre ?

299

(7) CKAbKO pa3 HflJDKeHBaM CKa3Tb, w o 6pnTHCKaa flenerinia HHKyfl He coHpeiCH cerflHa (HHKyfl He coSapeTCH (no)xaTb) ?
(8) SL npeflnario, irobi MBI ocraBOBBABCb (H npennario ocraHOBHTbCa) B 3TOH rOCTHHHHe Ha HCKOAbKO flneft.
(9) O H CKa3Ji MHe KynHTb eMy HCKOAbKO aHTjmftcKHX MpoK.
(10) SL He yMio KaTTbCH Ha KOHUtx H H He AIO6JTK> xonfirb Ha
JliDKaX.
(11) BBI Korfl-HHyflb MJIH B OMCKe
(12) SL HacrHBaio (Ha TOM), <rr6bi Bbi ywm
HCKOAbKO CJIOB
KjKflbIH AeHb.
(13) nonpocHTe Bmero Jiyqmero Apyra CKa3Tb BaM (cnpocHTe
Bmero nyqmero flpyra), noneMy Bbi He nonyjiapHbi.
(14) ECAH KT-HH6yAb n03B0HT, CKaiKH, MTO H nOUlJI B KHH,
HAH 1TO H CMOTpi TejieBH30p.
(15) Bbi un-ami KaKHe-BH6yAb xopnme KHHTH B npmnoM
roAy ?

300

VOCABULARIES
Russian-English Vocabulary
All Russian words occurring in this book can be found in
the Vocabulary. Numbers in brackets refer to the lessons
in which the words or phrases occur.
Nouns The gender of nouns is indicated by the letters m.>
/., or n. If the noun has a 'mobile vowel' - e, , or o in the
last syllable which disappears in the declension (e.g.
OTn - OTn) this is indicated by the genitive singular and
the nominative plural given after the noun:
orn m. (gen. o-ni, pl. oiqb'i)

If there is any peculiarity, irregularity, or difficulty about

any part of the declension of a noun, such as the nominative
plural of a masculine noun in -, or a difficult genitive
plural, then this is indicated in brackets. E.g.
6paT m. (pl. 6ptbH, gen. pl. 6prc.eB)
AepBHH/. (gen. pl. oepextnb)
rpofl m. (pl. ropofl)

If the stress on a masculine noun throughout its declension

is different from the nominative, then usually the genitive
singular and the nominative plural are shown in brackets:'
CTOA m. (gen. cron, pl. CTOJTM)
If the stress shifts to the end in the plural only, then only
the nominative plural is given in brackets:
nntad) m. (pl. mKadib)
If the stress shifts to the end only in the oblique cases of
the plural (i.e. all cases except the nominative), then this
is shown by the genitive plural only:
BOJTK m.

'

(gen.

pl. B O J I K B )

' '.

: 3*

Any peculiarity in the stressing of feniinine nouns is also

shown in brackets. Thus:
6opofl/. (ace. 6pofly; pl. 6poflbi, gen. pl. 6op6fl)

implies that the stress is on the last syllable, except for the
accusative singular and nominative plural. If the stress
shifts in the plural only, then this is shown by the nominative plural:
3Be3fl/. (pl. 3B3flbl)

The same applies to neuter nouns.

Verbs Immediately after the verb the conjugation is shown
by the Roman figures I or II, or by the words mixed conj.
If the verb is perfective, the letters pf. follow this. Then in
brackets are given the first and second person singular of
the present (or future, if perfective) tense. The stress and
the stem ending will be the same, unless indicated, as in
the 2nd person singular for all the remaining parts of the
tense. Thus:
KynBTb I I pf. (Kymn, Kymum.)

will have the 2nd person plural Kyrrare.

Any irregularity, difficulty or stress problems in the past
tense are shown immediately after the present tense. Thus:
HaqTb I pf. (HaqHfly, -mb past tense nian, naian, Hnano;
-B)

If the ist or 2nd person singular of a verb are not found or

rarely found, then the 3rd person is given. This is always
the case with impersonal verbs. E.g.:
CBerib I (cBeTer)

If a transitive verb takes any other case except the accusative, this is shown after the verb in brackets: (+gen.),
(+instr.).
302

Adjectives The short forms of the adjectives are given

only if they present any difficulty, such as the insertion of a
mobile vowel in the masculine or change of stress, and are
in common use.
All other parts of speech are indicated by the abbreviations
which can be found on p. xxiii.

303

RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
A
a is)j. but; and
aBTOMoHjib (5) m. car, motor
car
AflMHpajiTacTBo (26) . Admiralty
flpec (5) m. address
A3HH (29)/. Asia
KTOBMH 3an (23) m. assembly
hall
ajn>miHH3M (30) m. mountaineering
ajibnHHHCT (8) m. mountaineer
anbnHHBCTCKHft (30) adj. mountaineering (attr.)
aHrnHHCKHH (5) adj. Enghsh
aHTABnaaHH (4) m. (pl. anrjiHMse) Englishman
aHWDraaHKa (4) / . (gen. pl.
aHTJnwHOK) Englishwoman
AHTAHH (2) / . England

anneiHT (15) J. appetite

apiHCT (12) m. actor, artist, performer, artiste
apxHB (29) m. archives
apxHTKTop (13) m. architect
apxBieKT^pa (13) / . architecture
acnnpaHT (23) m. postgraduate,
research student
aiana (17)/. attack
aiaKOBaxb (17) I impf. and pf.
(afaKj>||io, -enn.) to attack
ayAHTpHH (23) / . lecture room;
audience
acJjHnia (13) / . bill, poster
AdipBKa (16)/. Africa
aspoflpM (15) m. aerodrome

E
66ymKa (29) / . (gen. pl. 66ymeK) grandmother
6aKaAH (18)/. groceries

6anKH (14) 1. balcony

6HKa (18) / . (gen. pl. 6HOK)
jar, tin, can
6acKer6A (30) m. basket-ball
6accfiH (23) m. swimming bath,
pool
6amHH (23) / . (gen. pl. 6ameH)
tower
6raTb (8) I (6ra||io, -enn.) to
run (about)
6flHbiB (9) adj. poor
6eJKTb (30) mixed conj. (6ery,
6ejKHmb ... 6eryr) to run, to
be running
6e3 (15) pr. (+gen.) without
6flBia (7) adj. white
6eHTajn.cKHH (29) adj. Bengal,
Bengali
6per (10) m. (pl. 6eper) bank,
shore
6ecflOBaTb (7) I (6ecfly|io;
-enn.) to converse, to chat
BeccapaHH (27)/. Bessarabia
HOAHOTKa (5)/. library
6HTb (25) I (6b||io, -enn.) to hit,
to strike
6naro (28) cj. thanks to the feet
that
6naroflapBTb (19) I I (6naroflap ||K), -mt) to thank
6naroflapH (28) pr. (+dat.)
thanks to, owing to; 6naronapji TOMy ITO (28) cj. thanks
to the fact that
6necrTb (26) II (6nenry, 6neCTHmb) to shine
6necTHTUHft (26) adj. brilliant
6AB3KO (14) adv. near
6orTBiH (22) adj. rich
60a (10) 1. battle
66nee (22) adv. more
6on3Hb (28)/. illness
6oflTb (8) II (60JIHT, 6onjrr) to
ache

6oAb (15) / . pain

6ojTbBHna (15) / . hospital
6oJibKK (8) adj. (short form
6JieH, 6onbH, -; -w) ill,
sick
Somme (15) adj. bigger; adv.
more; 6ojn>me He no longer
6ojttinHHCTB (30) . majority
6ojn>niH (7) adj. large; Eojibnift TeTp (14) Bolshoy
theatre
6opoa (23) / . (ace. 6pofly, pl.
poflbi gen. pl. 6opfl) beard
6opoTbCH (30) I (6opibcb, 66pembCH) to struggle
6oTaHiwecKHH (23) adj. botanical
60THHOK (22) m. (gen. 6oTHBKa,
gen. pl. 60TBHOK) shoe
6oHTbCH (24) II (6o|K)Cb,-HmbCH)
to fear
6paT (2) m. (pl. 6pTbH, gen. pl.
SpTbeB) brother
6paTb (10) I (6ep||y, -mb, past
tense 6pan, -, -o; -n) to take
6pBTHCKHB (30) adj. British
6pK>KB (22) pl. (gen. 6pioK)
trousers
6yAynj.ee (26) . future
6yflymHa (26) adj. future
oyib'tmca (18) / . (gen. pl. 6yTbiAOK) bottle
6yxTa(2)/. bay
6bmib (13) I (6bm||io, -enn.)
to be (frequently); 6breeT
(9) it happens
6b"iCTpo (6) adv. quickly
6biTb (8) I (6yfl||y, -enn.) to be

B, BO (9) pr. ( + acc, +prep.) in,

at; to, into
BarH (14) m. (railway) carriage
BjKHbiH (28) adj. important
B3a (2) / . vase

BHHaa (10) / . bathroom

Bam, Bma, Bme; Bnm . (3)
pron. your
BBHfly (28) pr. (+gen.) in view
of; BBBAV Tor ITO (28) cj. in

view of the fact that

Bflpyr (17) adv. suddenly
BeflyiuBB (23) part, leading
Be3Tii (11) I (Be3||y, -mb, past
tense Ba, Be3n, -JI; -JTH) to
carry, to drive, to bring, to
draw
BeK (25) m. (pl. BeK, gen. pl.
BeKB) age, century
BenBKHH (16) adj. (short form
BejiHK, -, -6; -H) great
BeJiHKOJimibiH (26) adj. magni. ficent
BenocBnfl (24) m. bicycle
BenoomeflHCT (24) m. cyclist
BepBKa (30) / . (gen. pl. BepBOK) rope, string
BpHTb (30) II (Bp||K>, -HTOb) tO
believe
BepByTbCH (20) I pf. (BepH|^cb,
-embca) to return
BepxM (30) adv. on horseback
BecnbD (22) adj. cheerful, gay
BcHTb (25) II (Bmy, BcHnn.)
to weigh (intrans.)
BecH ( 9 ) / . (pl. BCHbi) spring
BecHft (12) adv. in spring
BecTH (11) I (Beflly, -mb, past
tense Ba, Ben, -; -ft) to lead,
to conduct (on foot)
Becb, BCH, Bc; Bce (19) pron.
all, every
Bemim (18) / . ham
Biep (12) m. (pl. Beqep)
evening; (22) party
Be^epftHKa (22) / . (gen. pl.
BeqepHHOK) party
B*iepoM (12) adv. in the evening
Bemb (3) / . (gen. pl. Benifi)
thing

306

B3pocjn.ni (17) adj. (also used as

noun) grown-up, adult
B3flTb (19) I pf. (B03bM||y, -mb,
past tense B3BJI, -, -o; -H) to
take
BHfl (20) m. view; species
BHfleTb (6) II (BHHty, BHflHmb)
to see
BH3a (30) / . visa
BHJnta (10) / . (gen. pl. BHJIOK)

fork
BHH (18) n. (pl. BHHa) wine
BHCTb (13) II (BHHiy, BHCHDTb)
to hang (intrans.)
BJie3Tb (15) I (BJieslio, -emb)
to climb in
BMcre (7) adv. together
BMcTO (24) pr. (+gen.) instead
of
BHH3 (20) adv. down(wards)
BHHsy (20) adv. below, downstairs
BHHMHHe (26) n. attention
BOfl (1) / . (ace. Bfly, pl. Bflbi)
water
BOflHTb ( i l ) II (BOJKy, BJTHmb)
to lead, to guide (on foot)
BOBBpaTHTbCH (20) II pf. (B03Bpamycb, B03BpaTHmbCH) to
return
B03BpaniTbCH (l6) I (B03Bpam||iocb, -eiHbCH) to return
B03BpamHHe (24) n. return
B03BbimTbCH (23) I (B03Bbnn|locb, -embCH) to rise, to tower

up

B03flyx (13) m. air; aa OTKPMTOM

B3flyxe (30) in the open air

B03HTb ( i l ) II (BOJKy, B3Hmb)
to carry, to drive, to convey
BOHH ( 1 8 ) /. (pl. BHHbi) war
BOHTH (20) I pf. (BOHfl||y, -mb,
past tense BomJi, Bonui, -6j
-H) to enter, to come in
B0K3Ji (11) m. station
BOKpyr (14) pr. (+gen..) around

BOJiefi66ji (30) m. volley-ball

BOJiK (17) m. (gen. pl. BOJTKB)

wolf

BJIOCBI (8) pl. (gen. pl. BOJIC)

hair
Bonpc (15) m. question
BopTa (17) pl. (gen. Bopr)
gate; goal
BOCKpecHbe (13) n. Sunday
BoccTHHe (27) n. uprising
BOCTK (9) m. east

BocTpjKeHHbiH (28) adj. enthusiastic, enraptured

BOCXHmTbCH (2l) I (BOCXHm(|wcb, -embCH) (+instr.)
to
admire, to be carried away by
BocxojKflHHe (30) n. ascent
BOT (1) particle here (is), there (is)
BnaflTb (26) I (BnaflUio, -enn.)
to fall into
BneiauiHue (26) . impression; npoHSBOflHTb BneqaTjiHHe (26) to make an impression
Bpar (14) f. (gen. Bpar, pl.
Bpara) enemy
Bpai (3) m. (gen. Bpa<i, pl.
BpaMji) doctor, physician
BpMH (4) . (gen. BpMeHH, pl.
BpeMeH) time
Bpfle (24) in the nature of
BcflHHK (28) m. rider, horseman-,
Bce (6) pr. pl. everybody
Bc (6) pr. . everything
Bcerfl (8) adv. always
BCKpe (21) adv. soon, shortly
after, in a short time
BCnOMHHTb (18) I (BCnOMHH||K), -enn.) to remember, to recall, to recollect
BcraBib (12) I (BCTa||k>, -mb)
to get up, to stand up
BcraTb (28) I pfi. (BciBly,
-emb) to get up, to stand up
BCTpTHTb (19) II pf. (Bcxpqy,
BCTpTHiiib) to meet

BcrpeqaTb (12) I (BcrpeioQio,

-enn>) to meet
BCTpetiibCH (12) I (BCTpei||rach, -embCH) to meet (one
another)
BCTyrmTb (27) II pf. (Bcrymnb,
BCTyninnb) to enter; to join;
BCTynETb Ha npecTJi (27) to
come to the throne
.Bciofly (9) adv. everywhere
BTpHHK (13) m. Tuesday
BTopn (24) rami, second
By3 (23) m. (=Bbicmee yqSHoe
saBeflHHe) higher
educational institution
Bxofl (13) m. entrance, entry
BXOflHTb (l8) II (BXOHty, BXflHmb) to come in, to enter
Biep (9) adv. yesterday
BBI (3) pron. you
BbrSpaib (30) I pf. (BBT3ep||y,
-emb) to choose
BBie3HCTb (24) I (Bbie3HC|lO,
-emb) to leave, to drive out,
to go out
B&exaTb (25) I pf. (BteflUy,
-enn.) to leave, to drive out,
to go out
BBTHTH (21) I pf. (Biftflly, -emb,

past
-o;

tense Bb'nneji, Bb'muia,

- H ) to

go

out;

B&BTH

3MyjK 3a +acc.
(28) to
marry (of a woman)
BbinerTb (20) I (BBUier||K>,
-enn.) to fly out, away
BBUiereTb (20) II pf. (BB*uiery,
Bb'meTHnn.) to fly out, to
leave (by plane)
BmreKa (19) / . (gen. pl. BBTHHCOK) extract

BBtaHTb (27) I pf. (BbTHbllO,

-enn.) to drink (up)
BBTOonHHTb (30) I (BbmOJrHH[|K>,
-emb) to fulfil
BBrpa3HTb (30) II pf. (BB'rpajKy,
Bb'ipa3Hmb) to express

BBrpacTH (24) I pf. (BBipacrlly,

-emb, past tense Bb'ipoc, -jia,
-jio; -aa) to grow up, to
spring up
BbicKHH (8) adj. tall, high
BBICOT (25) / . (pl. BbICTbl)
height
Bb'icraBKa (22) / . (gen. pl.
' Bb'icraBOK) exhibition
Bb'icrpejiHTb (28) II pf.

(BB'I-

crpefl|io,-Hnib) to shoot, to fire .

BMCHiHH (7) adj. higher, highest,
supreme
Bb'ryqHTb (19) II pf. (Bb'ryq|y,
-Hrm.) to learn (by heart)
Bb'ixofl (18) m. exit
BblXOflHTb (14) II (BblXOHty,
BBIXflHmb) tO gO OUt; BblXOflHTb Ha (14) to overlook;
BbixoflHTb 3MyjK sa (+acc.)
(28) to marry (of a woman)

r
rasera ( 2 ) / . newspaper
rJicTyK (22) m. tie
rap (13) m, garage
racTpoHOMiOTecKHH (18) adj.
delicatessen (attr.)
rfle (2) adv. where (place);
rfl-jm6o (30) anywhere; rflHHyflb (30) anywhere; rfl-ro
(30) somewhere
remap (23) m. hectare
repH (4) m. hero
rjiBHbrii (25) adj. main, chief
rjiaa (8) m. (pl. rna3, gen.. pl.
rjras) eye
rjrynbm (30) adj. stupid
FOBOpHTb (2) II (roBop[|ib, -Hmb)
to say, to talk
rofl (10) m. (pl. rflbi or rofl,
gen. pl. roflB) year
rojioB (8) / . (ace. rjioBy, pl.
rjioBbi, gen. pl. TOJIB) head
rjioc (12) m. (pl. rojioc, gen.
pl. TOJIOCB) voice

rop (20) / . (ace. ropy, pl.

rpBi) hill, mountain
pflOCTb (26) / . pride
rop3flo (22) adv. far, much
rpjio (8) . throat
rpHbiH (20) adj. mountain
(attr.)
rpofl (11) m. (pl. ropofl) town
ropoflK (23) m. (gen. ropoflK,
pl. ropoflK) little town
ropHHHH (10) adj. hot; fervent
rocTHHHua (13) / . hotel
rocTHTb (24) II (romy, rocrmb)
to stay with; to be a guest
focTb (4) m. (gen. pl. rocifi)
guest
rocyflpcTBeHHbHi (23) state
(attr.)
rocyapcTBo (19) . State
TOTBHTb (13) II (rOTBJUO,
roTBHmb) to prepare, to
cook
rpajKflaHHH (5) m. (pl. rpJKflaHe) citizen
rpaHtflHKa (5) / . (gen. pl.
rpajKflHOK) citizen(ess) ,
rpaMM (18) m. gramme
rpaHHTHBifi (26) adj. granite
(attr.)
rpaHHua (30) / . frontier; H3-3a
rpaHHObi (30) from abroad;
3a rpaHHneii (30) abroad
(place); sa rpainnry (30) abroad
(direction)
rpJiH ( 3 0 ) / . rowing
rpMKO (6) adv. loudly
rpysoBHK (11) m. (gen. rpy30BHK, pl. rpy30BHKH) lorry,
truck '.
rpyrraa (24) / . group
rynK (24) m. (gen. ryflK, pl.
ryflKH) hooting; horn
ryjiHTb (8) I (ryjiH|io, -enn.) to
walk; to go for a walk
ryciH (24) adj. thick, dense

a
a (1) particle yes
AaBTb (2) I (fla||i, -mb) to
give; flaBib ntcy (13) to
put on a play
flaBH (14) adv. a long time ago
flHte (5) adv. even
flaneK (11) adv. far
flabme (11) adv. further, farther
flaTb (19) mixed conj. pf. (am,
flann>, flacT, flaflHM, flanre,
flairyr) to give
flaib see flaaaTb
jjsa-TpH, HBeiTpn (30) num. two
. or three
flBepb (12) / . (gen. pl. mepn)
door
flfcopn. (26) m. (gen. flBopn, pl.
flBopnb'i) palace
flBOHKa (11) / . (gen. pl. aBOieK) Uttle girl
flByniKa (7) / . (gen. pl. aBymeK) girl
-flflymKa (29) m. (gen. pl.
flsymeK) grandfather
fleKa6pHci (27) .Decembrist
fljiaTb (4) I (flJia||io, -enn.) to
do, to make
flnaibCH (16) I (fljiajjiocb,
-embCH) to be made; to become
flefleramra ( 2 9 ) / . delegation
fljio (24) . (pl. flen) business,
affair
fljibTa ( 2 6 ) / . delta
Hem. (4) m. (gen. ana, pl. flHH,
gen.pl. ane&) day
flmsTH (18) pl. (gen. aner, dat.
fleabrM, instr. aenhcwn,prep.
flHbrx) money
flepBHH (13) / . (pl. flepBHH,
gen. pl. flepeBHb) village;
country
flpeBO (14) . (pl. flepBbH, gen.
pl. flepBbeB) tree; wood

flepeBHHHbTH (25) adj. wooden flOMHK (24) m. little house

nepHtaTb (14) II (aepHty, flp- AOMH (2) adv. home(wards)
flopra ( 1 1 ) / . road
jKHnn.) to hold
flecHTOK (23) m. (gen. flecHTKa, floporH (7) adj. dear; expensive
flocK (1) / . (pl. flcKH, gen. pl.
pl.flecHTKH)ten
flocK) board, black-board
flTH (11) pl. (ace. gen. eTfi,
dat. flTHM, instr.
aerbtsn, flOCTaBJIHTb (30) I (flOCTaBJW|lO,
-enn.) to deliver; flocraBJurrb
prep. flTHx) children
yAOBJn>CTBHe (30) to give
flTCTBo.(io) . childhood
pleasure
flemBbnl (22) adj. (short form
flnieB, flemeB, flmeBo; -BI) flOCTpHBaTb (20) I (flOCTpnBa|]w, -emb) to finish building
cheap
flOCTpHTb (20) II pf. (flOCTp|lO,
HHBH (10) m. sofa
-Hun.) to finish building
HHKTHT (6) m. dictation
flHpKTop (23) m. director, head flOXOflHTb (29) II (flOXOHtf,
flOxflHDTb) to reach
jTHCcepTnHH ( 1 9 ) / . dissertation,
flonHT (23) m. university lecthesis
turer
fljmHHbni (26) adj. (short form
flJIHHeH, flJTHHH, flJTHHHO; flotn. (3) / . (pl. fliepn, gen. pl.
flo^epfi) daughter
flJIHHHbl) long
ApBHHH (29) adj. ancient
An (15) pr. (+gen.) for, for the
ApBHOCTb (25) / . antiquity
sake of
flpyr (7) m. (pl. apysb, gen. pl.
HHM (12) adv. in the daytime
flpy3fi) friend
HO (14) pr. (+gen.) before, till;
flpyrft (18) other, another
as far as
flyMaTb (4) I (flyMa|io, -enn.) to
floopbm (13) adj. good, kind
think
flOBJnvHO (30) adv. sufficiently,
flyJib (28) / . duel
enough
flHflH (3) m. uncle
flOBJu>HbTH (16) adj. satisfied
floe3>KTb (29) I (floe33K|io,
-enn.) to reach
E
floxaib (29) I pf. (floflUy, -enn.) Espna (29) / . Europe
to reach
eBponHCKHfi (29) adj. European
flOJKflb (8) m. (gen. aoxcaA, pl. eflB (28) barely, scarcely
flOHtflfi) rain
fly see xaTb
flofiTH (29) I pf. (flOHfllly, -mb, 3flHTb (11) II (3jKy, 3flHmb) to
past tense flomji) to reach
go, to ride, to drive
flOKJifl (19) m. report
earn (5) cj. if
flKTop (9) m. (pl.flOKTop)doc- ecu. (10) mixed conj. (eM, emb,
tor (not necessarily medical)
ecT, eflHM, eflHie, eflfli; past
fljrro (9) adv. for a long time
tense en) to eat
flJDKeH,flOJDKH,-; -l (8) xaTb (3) I (fl||y, -enn.) to go,
must, ought, have to
to ride, to drive
flOM (1) m. (pl. flOM) house, em ado. yet; still; more; also,
too
home
310

3K
ajib (13) adv. it is a pity; nan
Htajib! What a pity!
pKHH (10) adj. hot
flam (29) I (jKflHy, -mb), past
tense. HCflaji, -, -o; -H) to wait
HtejiHHe (30) . desire, wish
HteiiaTb (30) I (jKeji||io, -enn.)
to desire, to wish
H<eji3HaH flopra (21) / . railway
HceH (4) / . (pl. HcHbi) wife
HceHHTbCH (28) II impf, and pf.
(jKemOCb, . HtHHHIbCH)
to
marry (of a man)
jKHUTHHa (5) / . woman
Hteib (27) I (jKry, HOKmb ...
Htryr past tense mr, rjia,
JKTJIO; jKTjm) to burn
JKHBH (17) adj. alive, live,
hving
HCHBoncHbiH (23) adj. picturesque
JKHSSB ( 4 ) / . life
jKHjiimie (17) . dwelling (place)
HTb (10) I (H<HB||J>, -mb, past
tense JKHJI, -,. -; -H) to JJve
HtypHn (7) m. magazine
HtypHajTHCT (29) m. journalist

3
3a (16) pr. (+acc,
+instr.) behind, beyond; at; for
3a6THTbCH (24) H (3a66rycb,
3a6THmbCH) to take care
3a6bTb (20) I (3a6biB||K>,
-enn.) to forget
3a6b'iTb (20) I pf. (3a6yfl||y,
-enn.) to forget
3aBeflHHe (23) institution
3aBfl (2) m. factory, works,
plant
3BTpa (11) adv. tomorrow
3BTpaK (12) m. breakfast
saBTpaicaTb (12) I (3BTpaKa||io,
-emb) to have breakfast

3aBH3Tb (29) I pf. (SaBHJKy,

3aBHJKenn.) to tie up; to start
3afl6jrro (22) adv. long (before)
3ae3HcTb (24) I (3ae3)KJio,
-emb) to call on
3aexaTb (24) I pf. (3afl||y, -enm)
to call on
3aHHTepecoBTbCH (29) I pf,
(3aHHTepecy||iocb, ^emscn) to
become interested
3aHTH (24) I pf. (3aHfl||& -mb,
past tense aamji) to call on
3aKHMHTb (27) II pf. (saKHJy,
-mm.) to finish, to round off
3aKpbmTb (12) I (3aKpBIB[|K>,
-emb) to close
3aKpbB3TbCH (12) I (SaKpBTBeTcn) to be closed
3aKpbTn. (27) I pf. (3aKp6|io,
-enn.) to close
3an (2) m. hall
3ajiHB (26) m. bay
3aMTHTb (26) II pf. (saM*ry,
3aMTHmb) to notice
3aMe<iTejn>BbTH (21) adj. wonderful
3My>K see Bbira
3MyjKeM (28) adv. married (a
woman)
3aHHMlb (23) I (3aHHM||K>,
-enn.) to occupy; to interest
3aHHMTbCH (l6)
I
(3aHHM)|iocb,' -embca) to study, to
be engaged . in, to be busy
with
aaHHTb (27) I pf. (3aHMy, -enn.,
past tense 3&BSW, aansuii,
3HflJio; -H) to occupy
3nafl (9) m. west
3anepTb (27) I pf. (3anp|y,
-mb, past tense snep, 3anepji, 3nepjio; -JTH) to lock .
3aimcTb (20) I pf. (3aimniy, sanmemb) to write down
3anp6c (22) m. inquiry, request,
demand

sacMeHTbCH (19) I pf. (sacMeJibcb, -mbCH) to laugh

3acayTb (19) I pf. (3acH||&
-mb) to fall asleep
sCTTb (26) I pf. (3acrH|y,
-emb) to find (in)
sacbmTb (12) I (3acbm||io,
-enn.) to fall asleep
saxoflHTb (24) II (3axojKy, 3axflHmb) to call on
sarflHTHHK (17) m. defender;
full-back (in football)
sann (24) m. (gen. sauna, pl.
3fiubi) hare
3Be3fl (25) / . (pl. 3B3flbi) star
3Bepb (17) m. (gen. pl. 3Bepfi)
(wild) animal
SBOHHTb (30) II (3B0H||K>, -HUH.)
to ring; to ring up, to telephone
Sflmie (13) . building
3flecb (2) adv. here
sflopBaTbCH (12) I (3flOpBa||iocb, -embca) to greet,
to exchange greetings
SflOpBbe (12) . health
3flpBCTByH(Te) (5) how do you
do? hullo!
aejiHbiH (9) adj. green
3eMJiH (3) / . (ace. 3MJHo, pl.
3Mjra, gen. pl. 3eMjn>) earth,
land
3picajio (12) . (pl. 3epitaJi,
gen. pl. 3epKn) mirror, looking-glass
3HM (9) / . (ace. 3HMy, pl.
3HMbi) winter
3HMHHH (26) adj. winter (attr.)
3HMH (12) adv. in winter
3HaKMHTbCH (29) II (3HaKMJnocb, 3HaKMHinbCH) to make
the acquaintance
SHHHe (4) . knowledge
3HaTb (4) I (3H |j K), -enib) to know
30J10TH (7) adj. golden

30onpK
(=3oojiortPiecKHH
napK) (17) zoo
3y6 (8) m. (gen. pl. sy6B) tooth

H
H (1) cj.
H6O (28)

and
cj. for
HTp (30) / . (pl. nrpbi) game
HTpTb (6) I (Hrp|K>, -enn.) to
play
HflTH (4) I (Hfl||y, -nib, past
tense men, nuia, nino; num)
to go (on foot)
Hfly see HATH

H3 (14) pr. (+gen.) from, out of

H3BcTHbiH (21) adj. well-known;
certain
H3-3a (15) pr. (+gen.)
from
behind; because of
H306pajKTb
(29)
I (H306pa>Kj|K), -enn.) to portray
H3yMHTeJD>HbTH (26) adj. amazing
HsyqTb (5) I (H3yq||io, -enn>)
to study (trans.)
H3yrHTb (19) II pf. (H3yry,
H3ynHHib) to study (rros.)
H3HnTHbm (22) adj. elegant
HKp (18)/. caviare
HAH (3) cj. or
HMrb (24) I (HM ||M, -enn.) to
have; lunn. McTo (24) to take
place
HMH (4) . (gen. HMeHH, pl.
KMen, gen. pl. m&n) name,
Christian name
HHflKHCKHH (29) adj. Indian
HHAHH (29) / . India

HHJKeHp (3) m. engineer

HHora (16) adv. sometimes
HHocrpHHbiH (27) adj. foreign
HHcrp^KTop (15) m. instructor
HHTepc (16) m. interest
HHTepcHbr (8) adj. interesting

HHTepecoBbCH (16) I (HHiepecy||iocb, -embCH) to interest

oneself (in), to become interested
HHTpnra (28) / . intrigue
HCHOAHHTb (2l) I (HCHOJIHH||K),

-enn.) to fulfil, to carry out

HcrpHH (16) / . history; story

KBapTpa ( 1 0 ) / . flat
KHJi (18) . (indeclinable) kilogramme
KHJiorpMM (iS) m. kilogramme
KHJiOMrp (17) m. kilometre
KHH (14) . (indeclinable) cinema
KHHoonepTop (20) 1. cameraman
KHHOCTyflHH (2o) / . film studio
KJiacc (1) m. class(room); class
KJiacTb (10) I

K (15) pr, (+dat.) to, towards

Ka6HHa (21) / . driving cab (in
. lorry), cockpit
KaHHr (10) m. study
KaBK3 (9) m. Caucasus
KjKAbn (11) adj. each
Ka3TbCH (16) I (Kautycb, KHtembcn) to seem
Ka3HHTb II pf. (Ka3H||K>, -Him.)
to execute
KaK (6) adv. how; cj. as, like;
KaK-TO (30) somehow, sometime; KaK TJU.KO (28) as soon
as; KaK MJKHO 6Abme (29) as
much as possible
KaKH (7) pron. what, which;
icaKH-AHo (30) any; KUKH-

Hn6yflb (30) any, some; KaKH-TO (30) some

KMeHb (25) m. (pl. KMHH,

gen. pl. KaMHH) stone
KaHn (1) m. canal
KanuTn (17) m. captain
KapaHflm (3) m. (gen. KapaHAam, pl. KapaHflamn) pencil
KapMH (18) m. pocket
KpTa (1) / , map
KapTHHa (2) / . picture
Kapbpa (21) / . career
Kcca (18) / . desk, till, cash
counter
KaTTbCH (30) I (KaT||lOCb,
-embCH) to go for a ride,
drive; KaTTbCH Ha KOHbKx
(30) to skate

(KJIBAIJ, -mb,

past tense Kuan) to put (horizontally)

KJiHMaT (9) m. climate
KJiy (13) m. club
KHHra (2) / . book
KOBp (10) m. (gen. KOBp, pl.
KOBPM) carpet

Korfl (4) adv. when; Korfl-ro

(30) sometime, once; KorflHHyflb (30) sometime
Ke-rfl (30) adv. in places, here
and there
Ke-KK (30) adv. anyhow
Ke-qi (30) pron. one or two
things
K0ji6ac (18) / . (pl. KOJTcbi)
sausage (usually smoked)
KAOKOA (25) J. (pl. KOJIOKOJl)
bell
KOAOKJH.HH (25) / . (gm. pl.
KonoKJieH) bell-tower
KOAOHHfla (26) / . colonnade
K0AX3 (11) 1. collective farm
K0Jix3HbtH (21) adj. collective
farm (adj.)
KOMHfla (15) m. team; order,
command
KMHaTa (2) / . room
KOMno3HTop (21) m. composer
KOHii (14) m. (gen. Komi, pl.
KomTb'i) end
KOHqHo (22) adv. of course
KOHcepBaTpHH (21) / . conservatoire, academy of music

313

KOHcpBBi (18) m. pl. tinned

goods
KoHdjepeHUHH (19) / . conference
KOHnpr (9) m. concert
KOHwaTb (19) I (Komt||io, -emb)
to finish
KomiTbcH (19) I (KOOTfllOCb,
-embCH) to finish (intrans.)
KmiHTb (19) II pf. (KHq|y,
-mm.) to finish
KHHHTbCH (19) II pf. (KH<l||yCb,
-mnbcH) to finish (intrans.)
KOHLKH (30) pl. (gen. KOHbKB)
skates
KoneKa (15) / . (gen. pl. KOneK) copeck
Konb (17) . (gen. pl. Komm)
spear
Kocrp (13) m. (gen. Kocrp, pl.
KocTpb'i) camp fire
KOCTIM (22) m. suit, costume
KOTpbrfi (21) relative pronoun
which, what
K(pe (16) m. (indeclinable)
coffee
KpacHBBnt (7) adj. beautiful
KpcHbfi (7) adj. red
KpeMJiBCKHH (25) adj. Kremlin

(attr.)
KpeMJn. (14) m. (gen. KpeMJiH)
Kremlin
KpnKHH (18) adj. strong, sound
Kpcjio (to) . (gen. pl. Kpceji)
arm-chair
KpeCTbHHHH (5) m. (pl. KpeCTbHHe) peasant
KpHTHK (27) m. critic
KpMe (22) pr. (+gen.) besides;
KpMe Tor (28) furthermore
KpyjKK (17) f. (gen. KpyjKK,
pl. KpyjKKH) circle, group
Kpb'nna ( 5 ) / . roof
K 10 (3) pron. who; KT6-HH6yflb
(30) pron. anyone, someone;
KT-TO (30) pron. someone

Kyn (6) adv. whither, where;

Kyfl-HHfjyflb (30) anywhere,
somewhere;
Kyfl-TO
(30)
. somewhere
KyjttTypa ( 1 4 ) / . culture
KynTbCH (13) I (Kyn||iocb,
-enn.cn) to bathe, have a bath
Kynn (29) 1. (gen. Kyrm, pl.
Kynubi) merchant
Kyrnrn. (19) II pf. (Kyrunb,
Kymmn.) to buy
Kypfirb (7) II (Kypio, KypHun.)
to smoke
Kypc (20) m. course
KycK (18) m. (gen. Kycic, pl.
KycKH) piece, lump
KyxHH (10) / . (gen. pU KyxoHb)
kitchen

JI
jiaopaTpHH (23) / . laboratory
jirepb (30) m. (pl. mrep, gen.
pl. jiarepfi) camp
AsaTb (30) II (Axty, Ji3Hnn>)
to climb
JiMna ( 1 ) / . lamp
jieB (17) m, (gen. jn.Ba, pl.
AbBbi) lion
jirKHH (30) adj. easy
jifl (o) m. (gen. Abfla, pl. Jibflbi)
ice
jiejKib (8) II (neJK||y, -mm.) to
lie
AKUHfl (8) / . lecture
nec (8) m. (pl. nec) forest,
wood
jiecHHK (24) m. (gen. AecHHK,
pl. jiecHHKH) forester
flcTHHna ( 2 6 ) /. staircase
nerib (11) I (jieT[|io, -emb) to
fly
nerTb (11) II (neny, AeTHmb)
tofly
jiTHHH (11) adj. summer (attr.)
flro (9) n. summer
jiTOM (12) adv. in summer

Aetn. (25) I pf. (nary, jiHAcemb

... naryr, past tense nr, -ji,
-A; -jni) to lie down
ABfjepAbHBm (27) adj. liberal
AHMH (16) m. lemon

Marq (17) m. match

Marb (3) / . (gen. mrepH, pl.
MTepn, gen. pl. MaTepa)
mother
Me (18) m. honey
JTHCHH (21) adj. fox
(attr.),
MeflBflb (24) m. bear
MeflBjKHH (21) adj. bear (attr.),
fox's
bear's
JTHCT (18) m. (pl. jTHCTbH, gen. pl.
MfljieHHO (5) adv. slowly
AHCibeB) leaf
MflHbrii
(28) adj. copper;
jnmfi (27) m. Lyceum
MflHblH
BCABHK (28)
iran (8) . (pl. nana) face
The Bronze Horseman
JiOBKHB (8) adj. dexterous,
MHtfly (17) pr. (+instr.) beadroit
tween
AflKa (30) / . (gen. pl. aaoK)
MeflflHH ( 2 5 ) /. melody, tune
boat
AOJKHTbCH (12) II (flOJK[|yCb), MHee (22) adv. less
MHbme (22) adv. less
-fimbCH) to lie down
Amaflb (20) / . (gen. pl. noma- Memo (10) . (indeclinable) menu
MeHflib (26) I (MeHHi]io, -enn.)
Aft) horse
to change
jiyqnie (15) adv. better
McTHOCTb (30) / . locality
jryjuuHH (15) adj. better; best
Mcro (2) . (pl. Mecr) place
JiBDKH (30) pl. (gen. ABDK) skis
jno6HMbrii (8) adj. favourite; Mcnq (13) m. month
MemTb (15) I (Mem|io, -enn.)
beloved, loved
(+dat.)
to hinder, prevent,
AK)6HTb (8) II (jnoojn, jno6mnb)
to stop
to love, to like
jno6oBTbCH (21) I (jno6y||iocb, MHAAHH (25) m. million
-embCH) (+instr.) to admire
MHMO (14) pr. (+gen.) past, by
m6flH (13) pl. (ace., gen. jnoflfi, MHHHCTpcTBO (27) . ministry;
MHHHCTpCTBO HHOCTpHHblX
dat. jnAHM, instr. jnonbMH,
fleji (27) Foreign office, Miniprep. jnflHx) people
stry of foreign affairs
MHHyTa ( 1 5 ) / . minute
M
MHp (18) m. peace; world
M8B30Aii (29) m. mausoleum
MHTO (8) adv. much; many
MarasHH (14) m. shop
MOflJib (22) / . model
Mafi (4) m. May
MOflejibp (22) m. (dress) deMJieHbKHH (21) adj. little, small
signer
Mano (18) adv. little, few
MJKer 6biTb (13) perhaps
MflbHHK (7) m. boy
MJKHO (8) (it is) possible; KEK
MpKa (30) / . (gen. pl. MpoK)
MJKHO jibuie (29) as much
stamp
as possible
Mcjio ( n ) n. butter; oil
MOH, MOH, Mo; MOH (2) pron.
MaiepnaJi (19) m. material
my
MarpHH (22) / . matter; mate- Monofl (7) adj. young
rial, cloth, fabric
MOJIOK (11) . milk

MOjrqa (29) adv. silently

MOMm (17) m. moment
Mpe (s) . (pl. Mopa) sea
Mop3 (9) m. frost
MOCKBfiq (17) m. (gen. MOCKBira,
pl. MOCKBHTH) Muscovite, in-

habitant of Moscow
MOCT (1)

m.

(gen.

MOCT pl.

Mocrb'i) bridge
MOTOUHKJI (11) m. motorcycle

MOW. (8) I (Mory, MHtemb ...

Mryr, past tense MOT, Morji,
n; -an) to be able
MyjK (14) m. (pl. MyjKbfl, gen.
pl. MyHcH) husband
MyHPiHHa (5) m. man
Mysn (12) 1. museum
MysbTKa ( 1 6 ) /. music
MBI (3) pron. we
MbiTb (29) I (M||K>, -enn.) to
wash
MbicAb ( 2 7 ) / . thought
MHCo (10) . meat
MOT (17) m. (gen. msm, pl.
MOT) ball

Ha3BBHe (25) . name, title

Ha3BTb (28) I pf. (HasoBJIy,
-enn.) to call, name
Ha3BTbCH (25) I pf. (HasoBycb,
Ha30Benn.cn) to be called HasHaqHHe (23) . designation,
purpose
Ha3bTb (28) I (Hasbllio,
-enn.) to call
Ha3WBTBCH (25) I (Ha3B||K>Cb,
-embcn) to be called
HanSojiee (22) adv. most
HaHMHee (22) adv. least
HaHTH (27) I pf. (naSAly, -mb,
past tense nameji) to find
HaKOHn (17) adv. at last
HaKpbmTb (7) I (HaKpbm||io,
-enn.) to cover; HaKpbmTb
Ha CTOA (7) to lay the table
HajiBo (10) adv. on the left
HaneiTaTb (26) I pf. (HaneqTa|io, -enn.) to print; to type
HanncTb (19) I pf. (Hanrnny,
Hanmemb) to write
HanoAHHTb (27) II pf. (HanflH||K>, -mm.) to fill

H
aa (9) pr. -iaec. +prep.) on, at,
to
Ha6jnoflTb (17) I (Ha6jnofl||io,
-enn.) to observe
HaBpx (20) adv. upstairs (motion)
HaBepxy (20) adv. upstairs (place)
HBA (16) pr. (+instr.)
over,
above
Hafl>Kfla ( 2 8 ) /. hope
HaflHTbCH (15) I (Hafl||iocb,
-embcn) to hope
HAO (8) (it is) necessary
HaflocTb (24) mixed conj. (HafloM, Haflonn. ... see ecib)
(+dat.) to bore
HaflJrro (24) adv. for long
Ha3fl (24) adv. ago

HanpBo (10) adv. on the right

HanpHMp (9) adv. for example
Hapfl (29) m. people
HapflHbiH (21) adj. popular,
national
HapymTb (24) I (Hapym||io,
-enn.) to disturb, to disrupt
HacTHBaTb (30) I (HacTHBa|io,
-enn.) to insist
HacroHTb (30) II pf. (HacTo|ib,
-mm.) to insist
HacroHirm (26) adj. genuine;
present, actual
HacipoHHe (21) . mood, temper
HacrynTb (9) I (HacryneT)
to begin (of seasons)
Hay^Hbhi (17) adj. scientific
HaxoflHTb (12) II (naxoHty,
HaxflHmb) to find

Haxoflfttbca (12) II (naxojKycb,

HaxflHmbca) to be found, to
be situated
HSraflO (28) . beginning
nmkn> (19) I pf. (Ha*m||y, -enn.,
past tense Hnan, Havana,
aqano; Hamann) to begin
HanTbCH (19) I pf. (HaraTCH)
to begin (intrans.)
HaiHBaTb (19) I (Ba^HH||K>,
-enn.) to begin
HanHHTbca (19) I to begin (intrans.)
Ham, Hma, Hme; Hnm (3)
pron. our
He (3) particle not
H6o (7) . sky, heaven
Berne (24) adv. nowhere
HeflBHO (9) adv. recently
BeflaneK (14) adv. not fat
HefljiH (13) / . week
HKorfla (24) adv. never, no
time; once, formerly
HKOTopbift (30) pron. certain
HKyna (24) adv. nowhere
HenbSH (8) adv. (it is) impossible
HeMHro (5) adv. a little
HeMHJKKO (5) adv. a little
HeHaBHflerb (28) II (HeHaBBHcy,
HeHaBBAHmb) to hate
HeojKftflaHHo (24) ado. unexpectedly
HCKOAbKO (17) pron. several,
some; somewhat
necMOTpH Ha (29) pr. (+acc.) in
spite of; HecMoipa Ha TO TTO
(29) cj. in spite of the fact that
Hecra (11) I (Hec|y, -mb, past,
tense Bc, Hecn, Hecji; HecJift) to carry, to bear
HCT (2) particle no
HxoiH (29) ado. unwillingly
Hnero (24) pron. nothing
BB (15) particle not; HH ... HH ...
(15) neither... nor
BHTfle (15) adv. nowhere

HBSKBH (22) adj. low

HHKaKft (24) pron. no HHKorfl (15) adv. never
HBKT (15) pron. no one

HHKyfl (24) adv. nowhere

BOTer (13) pron. nothing; it's
nothing, it doesn't matter
minft (24) pron. nobody's
BBTIT (15) pron. nothing
HO (3) cj. but
HOBERK (30) m. (gen. HOBHOKa,
pl. HOBB^KB) novice, beginner
HBOCTb (4) / . (gen. pl. BOBOCTft) news
HBBTH (7) adj. new
HOJK (s) m. (gen. noma, pl.
HO JK6) knife
HOCHTb (11) II (Bonry, Hcmnb)
to carry; to wear (15)
HoneBib (12) (HoqyJIio, -emb)
to spend the night
Hoqb (5) / . (gen. pl. Honft)
night
HoibK) (12) adv. at night
HyjKHO (8) (it is) necessary; must,
need
ayjKHbra (19) adj. necessary
HHHH ( 1 7 ) /. nurse, nanny

O
o (06, 060) (9) pr.
(+prep.)
about, concerning
6a, 6e (17) num. both
ofl (12) m. dinner, lunch
o6flaTb (7) I (o6fla||io, -emb)
to have dinner, lunch
o6e3bana (17) / . ape
o6pa30BHBe (27) n. education
o6pa30BTb (26) I imp. and pf.
(o6pasyio, -enn>) to form
o6pa30BTbCH (19) I impf. and
pf. (o6pa3yeTca) to be formed
o6cepBaipHa (23) / . observatory

6yBb ( 2 2 ) / . footwear
6rnecTBO (27) . society
oBHBnHBe n. announcement
OBHCBHTb (6) I (o&BHCBH ||K>,
-enn.) to explain
o6b'rqHO ( n ) adv. usually
orpMHbrii (23) adj. huge
ofleBra (12) I (ofleB|w, -emb)
to dress
ofleBTbca (12) I (ofleB||iocB,
-embca) to dress oneself
ofliKfla ( 2 2 ) / . clothing
OACTb (27) I pf. (oflH||y, -enn.)
to dress
OflHH, oflH, oflH (17) one
OAHHCflBi (13) ado. once
osepo (13) n. (pl. o3pa) lake
OKasaTbCH (28) I pf. (oKaxcycb,
OKjKembca) to turn out to be
OKasbrsaTb (30) I (oKsbma||io,
-emb) to afford, to give;
OK3baTb nMonn. (30) to
give help
0Ka3bmaibca (28) I (OKsBiBaQiocB, -embca) to turn out
tobe
OKH (2)

(pl.

KBB, gen.

pl.

KOH) window

KOAO (14) pr. (+gen.) about,

near
OKoanmie (27) . end, finishing;
oKOBnaaae yHHBepcHTTa (27)
graduation
OKOTHTb (24) II pf. (OKHB|y,
-mm.) to finish
OKpcTHOcTb (25) / . environs,
surroundings
OH (2) pron. he
OH (2) pron, she
OHB (2) pron. they
OB (2) pron. it
'
oncHBm (29) adj. dangerous
nepa (21)/. opera
onHcHHe (29) n. description
OHBCTb (29) I (onamy, onamemb) to describe

onpaBflaxb (28) I pf. (onpaBfl||io, -erm.) to justify

onHTb (6) adv. again
opHTBHAbHBrH (22) adj. original
ceab (9) / . autumn
ceBbK) (12) adv. in autumn
ocBOBib (26) I pf. (ocay||R>,
-mb) to found
oc6eBBO (13) adv. especially
ocSbrii (30) adj. special
OCrBHTb (29) II pf. (oCTBAK),
ucTBHmb) to leave
OCTaBJIHTb (29) I (0CTaBJIH||KJ,
-enn.) to leave
ocraHBAHBaTb ( n ) I (ocraHBABBaOo, -emb) to stop
ocTaHBABBaibCH (12) I (ocraHBABBaUiocb, -embcfl) to stop
(intrans.)
ocraHOBBTb (24) II pf. (ocraHOBmb, ocraHOBBmb) to stop
ocraHOBHTbca (24) II pf. (ocraHOBjncb, ocraHBambca) to
stop
ocrTBCH (24) I pf. (ocrHllycB,
-embca) to stay, to remain
cTpoB (26) m. (pl. oerpoB)
island
or (14) pr. (+gen.) from
oTBecHMft (30) adj. sheer, steep
OTBr (22) m. answer
OTBTBTB (22) II pf. (OTBiy,
oTBTHnn.) to answer
OTBenTb (6) I (oiBeqaQio, -emb)
to answer
OTflen (18) m. department, section
OTflnbHbn (23) adj. separate
OTfloxHyTb (30) I pf. (otflpxH[|y,
-nn.) to rest
iflbix (13) m. rest
OTABKTb (7) I (OTABtXlK),
-emb) to rest
orn (2) 1. (gen. orna, pl.
orab) father

OTKpblBTb (12) I (OTKpb||K),

-emb) to open
OTKpbmTbCH (12) I (OTKpBIBerca) to open (intrans.)
OTKpwTHe (22) . opening; discovery
oTKpbiTbift (24) adj. open
OTKpb'rrb (27) I pf. (OTKp|K),
-enn.) to open
OTRpbTTbCH (21) I pf. (OTKpeTCH) to open (intrans.)
OTKyfla (30) adv. whence
OTKyAa-TO (30) adv. from somewhere
OTJTHTb (25) I pf. (OTOAb||K>,
-enn., past tense TJIHJI, OTABji, TABAO; - B ) to cast (in

mould)
OTHecrft (29) I pf. (oiHec|y,
-mb, past tense orac) to
carry, take away
OTHOCHTb (29) II (oraomy, OTHCBmb) to carry, take away
OTBomHae (28) . attitude, relation
OTneqraTb (26) I pf. (omeMia||io, -enn.) to print, to
type
orapBBTb (20) II pf. (OT' npBJno, OTnpBHmb) to send
off
OTnpBBTbca (20) II pf. (OTnpBJBOCb, orapBBmbca) to
set off
OTnpaBJiHTbca (20) I (orapaBJia||iocb, -embca) to set off
TiiycK (13) m. leave
OTpaacTb (28) I (OTpajK||K),
. -eim.) to reflect
OTobfla (30) adv. from here,
hence
OTTor m o (28) cj. because
OTryfla (20) adv. from there,
thence
raecTBO (7) . patronymic
OTBsfl (28) m. departure

odnmp (16) m. officer

odiBHBHTKa (10) f (gen. pl.
odiannaHTOK) waitress .
oxTa ( 2 4 ) / . hunt, hunting
oxTBTbCH (24) II (oxqycb,
oxrambca) to hunt
OXTHBK (24) m. hunter

qeHb (3) ado. very

omftKa (27) / . (gen. pl. omft6OK) mistake

n
najibT (22) . (indeclinable)
(over)coat
nMHTHHK (23) m. monument
nanapca ( 1 8 ) / . cigarette
napannT (15) m. parachute;
napamwTHoe flno (15) parachute jumping
napK ( n ) m. park
napjiMeHT (29) m. parliament
napoxA (14) m. steamer
npia (x)f. school desk
natnyx (20) m. (gen. nacryxa,
pl. nacryx) shepherd
n^TKa (18) / . (gen. pl. naien)
packet
nesn (21) m. (gen. neBn, pl.
neBUb'i) singer
nnae (16) n. singing
npBbift (14) num. first
nepeBn (20) m. mountain
pass
nepeBecr (27) I pf. (nepeBeA||y, -mb, past tense nepeBn)
to translate; to transfer
nepeBOflftTb (27) II (nepeBomy,
nepeBflHun.) ife translate; to
transfer
npefl (x6) pr. (+instr.) before
nepeflBHTTbca (30) I (nepeflBHr||iocb, -enn.cn) to move
(intrans.)
nepeflnaTb (20) I pf. (nepeflna||io, -enn.) to redo, to
remake

nepenflbiBaTb (20) I (nepefljrbma||io, -emb) to redo, to

remake
nepeesHtTb (28) I (nepeesJK||K>, -emb) to move (iwtrans.)
nepexaTb (28) I pf. (nepenfly,
-emb) to move (intrans.)
nepeuHcTB (20) I pf. (nepenamfy, nepenftmenn.) to rewrite
nepenftcBTsaTb (20) I (nepenftcba||io, -emb) to rewrite
nepepBTB (25) m. break
nepeqcABTb (26) II pf. (nepeiftcn||K>, -Him.) to enumerate
nepftofl (28) m. period
nep (2) . (pl. npba, gen. pl.
npbeB) nib, pen
nepnanta (22) /. (gen. pl.
nepnroK) glove
ncBH (21)/. (gen. pl. nceH) song
neib (4) I (no||i, -mb) to sing
nenTaib (26) I (ne<iTa|io,
-enn.) to print
nHfljKK (22) nu (gen. tmaymuA,
pl. nHAHcaK) jacket, coat
riHK (20) m. peak
nacTenb (27) m. writer
HBcTb (6) I (many, nmemb)
to write
nftcbMeHHbift cron (10) m.
writing table, desk
HHCbM (6) . (pl. nftcBMa,
gen. pl. nceM) letter
mm. (10) I (m.|K>, -mb, past
tense min, -, nftjio, nana) to
drink
nraymaa Mammca (26) f.
typewriter
nnBarme (23) . swimming
nnBaib (8) I (njiBa|io, -emb)
to swim
nnaH (1) m. plan roiarTb (18) II (runny, nnramb) to pay

nnaTdipMa (18) / . (railway)

platform
njiTb (22) . dress, frock
njieBTb (12) I (njno||i, -mb)
to spit
njioxo (3) adv. badly
njioxji (21) adj. bad
nnonKUTKa (23) / . (gen. pl. tuioinAOK) ground(s)
nnoniaflb (14) / . (gen. pl. naomanft) square; area
njiajK (13) m. beach
no (15) pr. ( dat.) along, about,
according to; (+acc.) up to
(and including)
no-aarnaHCKH (4) adv. (in) English
no6fla (20) /. victory
no6eflBTb (30) II pf. (xst pers.
sing, not used, noSeflftmb,
past pass, participle nooeHtHHHbrii) to conquer
noBnaroflapHTb (19) II .pf. (no6jraroflap||i, -ftnn.) to thank
nBecTb (28) / . (gen. pl. noBecTft) tale, story
noBTopftn. (28) II pf. (noBTop||i6, -Bun.) to repeat
noBTopBTb (25) I (noBTopa|io,
-enn.) to repeat
norfla (9)/. weather
nofl (16) pr.
(+ace.+instr.)
under
HOAaBBTb (27) II pf. (noflaBjn,
noflBHun.) to crush, 'to suppress
noflTOTBKa (30) / . preparation,
training

nOflHHMTb (16) I (nOflHHM||lO,

-emb) to raise, to lift, to pick
up
noflHHMTbca (15) I (noflBHM||K>cb, -embca) torise;to go up,
to ascend
noflHHtae (25) . foot (of a hill,
statue)

noABHTb (27) I pf. (nOABBMy,

noflHHMemb, past tense nflHHJI, -, nflHHAo; - B ) to
raise, to lift, to pick up
noflHHTbca (20) I pf. (noflBBMycb, noABBMembCH," past
tense nonaanca, noAHancb,
-cb; -ftcb) to rise; to go up,
to ascend
noflojKflTb (29) I pf. (noflbjKfllly, -mb, past tense noAOJKflA, -, noflOJKfljio; -H)
to wait for)
noflOHTft (21) I pf. (noflpfllly,
-mb, past tense noflomn) to
approach
noflnacTb (20) I pf. (nonrnnny,
nofliiftmemb) to sign
noflnftcbmaTb (20) I (noflnftCBTBa|io, -enn.) to sign
nonyMaib (21) I pf. (noflyMaflio,
-enn.) to think
noflxoABTb (15) II (noAXOHty,
noAXAHmb) to approach
ne3fl (14) m. (pl. noe3fla)
train
noexaTb (20) I pf. (noflfly, -enn.)
to go, to set off (on some form
of transport)
nojKjryftcra (6) please
nojKBBTb (6) I to live; KaK TBI
(BBI) nojKHBemb (-we) ? How
are you?
no3BoaBTb (30) II pf. (no3BOH[|K), -Em.) to

ring;

to

ring up, to telephone

n3flH0 (25) adv. late
no3HaKMBTbca (29) II pf. (no3BaKMJnocb, n03HaKMHmbca) to make the acquaintance
of
noBTH (20) I pf. (nofllly, -mb,
past tense nomn) to go, to set
off (on foot)
noK (28) cj. while; noK ... He
(28) cj. until

noKa3Tb (27) I .pf, (noKaaty,

noKncemb) to show
noK3biBaTb (25) I (noKSBiBa||io, -emb) to show
BOKaTTbCH (30) I pf. (noKaT||Kicb, -embcn) to go for a ride,
drive
noKHflTb (29) I (noKHflJio,
-enn.) to leave, to abandon
noKBHyTb (29) I pf. (nOKHHQy,
-enn.) to leave, to abandon
noKynTenb (18) m. buyer, purchaser, customer
HOKynTb (18) I (noKynQio,
-emb) to buy
noKymta (18) / . (gen. pl, noK^IOK) purchase, packet
non (10) m. (pl. noma) floor
none (3) . (pl. nojift) field
non3HBTH (30) adj. (short form
non3eH, nonsaa, -o; -BI)
useful
noneiTb (20) II pf. (nonen^,
noneTHTHb) to fly; to set off by
plane
nojmo^b (25) / . (gen. nonyno*m) midnight
njfflbjft (23) adj. (short form
njiOH, nojm, -, -B*I) full
noJiOBHHa (17) / . half
nonoHtHHe (26) . position
nonoTemre (17) . (gen. pl.
nonoTnen) towel
nonyKpyr (26) m. semi-circle
nonyqTb (14) I (nonyiflio,
-enn.) to receive
nonyqftib (26) II pf. (nonyqy,
nonyqamb) to receive
nnb30BaTbCH (16) I (nnb3y|iocb, -embca) (+J!wrr.) to
make use of
nMHHTb (13) II (nMa|io, -mm)
to remember
noMorTb (15) I (noMor||io,
-enn.) (+dat.) to help
nMonib (30) / . help, aid

noHeflnbBBK (13) m. Monday

nocrpoBTB (19) II pf. (nono-HeMnKH (5) adv. (in) Gercrp6|io, -ann.) to build
man
nocTynftrb (21) II pf. (nocrynnib, nocTynann.) to act; to
' UOHBMTb (4) I (nOBBMafllO,
enter (university, etc.)
-emb) to understand
noHarae (24) . idea, concep- noiepiiTb (27) I pf. (noTepa||io,
tion
-enn.) to lose
noHaib (27) I pf. (noHM||y, HOTM (6) adv. then
-enn., past tense HHHJI, no- noTOM^ ITO (20) cj. because
HHJi, nHHJio, -a) to under- noTHHyTb (27) I pf. (noraay,
stand
noTHaemb) to draw, to drag
nonpocHTb (22) II pf. (nonpo- no-ipparnryscKB (5) adv. (in)
my, nonpcmnb) to ask, to
French
request, to beg
noxfl (30) m. expedition, exnonyjiapaocTb (30) / . popularity
cursion; campaign
nonyjiapHbift (17) adj. (short noxoflHTb (20) II pf. (noxOHty,
form nonyjiftpeH, nonyjiapHa,
noxflHuib) to walk (for a
-0; - H ) popular
while)
e t0
nop (12) (+/) it is tan
noneMy (5) adv. why
nopasTb (27) Il pf. (nopajKy, no-qeMy-To (16) adv. for some
nopasftmb) to strike; to astonish
reason
no-pyccKB (2) adv. (in) Russian nHTa ( n ) / . post
nocCTBrenb (17) m. visitor
nomajiboH (11) m. postman
nocerftrb (19) II pf, (nocenry, no^rrft (25) adv. almost
noceTamb) to visit
noMa (28) / . poem
nocemib (15) I (noceiua||K>, noi (27) 1. poet
noib see nen.
-emb) to visit
nocBflTb (19) II pf. (nocBHty, noHBBTbca (28) II pf. (noHBjncb, noaBarnbca) to appear,
nocHflftnn.) to sit (for a while)
to make an appearance
nocjiTb (24) I pf. (noma || JO,
-mb) to send
HOBBAHTbCB (25) I (nOHBJlft||ncne (15) pr. (+gen.) after;
K)Cb, -embCH) to appear, to
ncne TOT KaK (28) cj. after
make an appearance
npannno (6) . rule
nocflAHBH (17) adj. last
nocjrymaTb (20) I pf. (nocjiy- npaBHTenbCTBO (27) . government
ma||io, -enn.) to listen (to)
nocMorprb (24) II pf. (no- npBO (24) . right
CMOTpj, nocMOxpHinb) to look, npBbjft (9) adj. (short form
npas, -, npBo; npBBi) right
to watch
nocnTb (19) II pf. (nocmnb, np3flHHK (7) m. holiday
nocnann.) to sleep (for a npeflnarTb (30) I (npeflnar||io, -emb) to offer, to
while)
suggest
nqcrenb (15)/. bed, bedding
nocrpaflTb (30) I pf. (nocrpa- npeflnoJKHTb (30) II pf. (npeflnojKy, npeflnoHCBmb) to offer,
fl||io, -emb) to suffer; noto suggest
crpaABmHfi (30) injured
322

npeflcraBHTeflb (29) m. representative

npeflCTBHTb (30) II pf, (npeflCTBJno, npeflcTBHnn.) to present; npeflCTBHTb ce6e (36)
to imagine
npncfle neM (28) cj. before
npeKpcHbnt (7) adj. (short form
npeicpceH, npeKpcaa, -o;
-BI) fine, splendid, beautiful
npecTA (27) m. throne; BCTynaib aa npeciA (27) to
ascend the throne
npa (i3)~pr. (+prep.) at, by; in
the presence of; during the
time of
npH6jnDKTbca (15) I (npn6najK||iocb, -embca) to approach
npB6nB3BTenbHO (26) adv. approximately
npHBe3TH (20) I pf. (npBBes||y,
-mb, past tense npaBs) to
bring (in some form of transport)
npraecra (27) I pf. (npaBefl||y,
-mb, past tense npHBJi) to
bring (leading on foot)
npHBJieKib (26) I (npBBAeK|lo, -enn.) to attract
npHBJi^b (27) I pf. (npBBneKy,
npHBAeienn. ... npaBneKyr,
past tense nparuieK, -na, no;
-an) to attract
npHB03HTb (20) II (npBBOHCjV,
npHB3Hmb) to bring (in some
.form of transport)
npHBb'rqKa (16) / . (gen. pl. npaBb'reeK) custom, habit
nparjiacHTB (28) II pf. (npnrjiainy, npnrjiacftnib) to invite
npHTOTOBHTb (19) II pf. (npBrOTBjnO, npHTOTBHmb) to
prepare; to cook

npHflBpHbift (27) adj. court

(attr.)
npHflBpHbift (27) m. courtier
npBflra (20) I pf. (npHflltj
-enn., past tense npnmeJi) to
come (on foot), to arrive
npHesjKTb (14) I (npnesHcallio,
-emb) to come (in some form
of transport)
npaexaib (20) I pf. (npafl||y,
-emb) to come (in some form
'of transport)
npHKa3Tb (27) I pf. (npHKAHcy,
npHKaHcenn.) (+dat.) to order
npHKSBmaTb (27) I (npaK3BiBa||K>, -enn.) (+dat.) to order
npBJiBOK (18) m. (gen, npHjiBKa, pl. npBABKB) counter
(in a shop)
ApanCTTb (20) II pf. (npaneTy, npaneramB) to arrive
by plane
npBMpap (26) adv. approximately
npBMbncTb (26) I (npBMBTKlio,
-enn.) to adjoin, to border on
npHHaflnejKTb (27) II (npBHaflnejK||y, -mm,) to belong
npHHecTB (21) I pf. (npBHecjy,
-enn,, past tense npHHc) to
bring (carrying, on foot)
npHHHMaib (29) I (npanHMaJio,
-emb) to receive, to accept
npBHHTb (29) I pf. (npBM^,
npHMemb, past tense npftHan,
-, npBHHAO; npHHHAB) to
receive, to accept
npapfla ( 2 9 ) / . nature
npHXOflftTb (17) II (npaxojK^j
npaxflmnb) to come (on"
foot), to arrive
npaaraBifi (8) adj. (short form
npHaieH, npHHTHO, -o; -BI)
pleasant
npoDBTb (25) I pf. (npoftbliD,
-mb) to strike (of a clock)

npoBecTH (20) I pf. (npoBeflJy,

-mb, past tense npOBn) to
spend (of time)
npOBOflHTb (30) II (npOBOJK^,
npoBAHmb) to spend (of
time)
npoflaBTb (18) I (npoflaQib,
-mb) to sell
npoflaBu (18) m. (gen. npoAaBn, pl. npoflaBqb) salesman
npoflTb (19) mixed conj. pf. (see
AaTb) to sell
npoflOJDKTb (17) I (npoflon3K||io, -emb) to continue
npoflOJDKBBe (28) n. continuation
npoxaib (24) I pf. (npofljy,
-emb) to go past, to drive past
npojKHTb (29) I pf. (npoiKBB||&
-mb) to live
npOBSBOAHTb (26) II (npOH3BOVK$, npoH3Bflmnb) to produce; npoHSBOflHTb Bne*rainnue (26) to make an impression
npofira (20) I pf. (nponjxlf,
-mb; past tense npomn) to go
past, to walk past
npoKOAOTb (27) I pf. (npoKojn, npoKJieiHb) to puncture
npoAOJKTb (24) II pf. (nponoacy, nponjKHmb) to lay (of
a road)
npocBTb (22) II (nponry, npocumb) to ask, to request, to beg
npocnKT (26) m. avenue
npocia (22) adj. simple
npocbmTbca (12) I (npocbin||wcb, -embca) to wake up
npTBB (14) pr. (+gen.) against;
opposite
npodiecCHOHAbHbrfi (21) adj.
professional
npocpeccop (2) m. (pl. npoqjeccop) professor

npoxoflHTb (20) II (npoxojK^,

npoxflHmb) to go past, to
walk past
nponrrTb (19) I pf. (nponHTio||, -emb) to read
npmnoe (26) . past
npnUTbifi (26) adj. past, last
npb'n-aTb (15) I (npbira||io, -enn.)
to jump
upBTTHyib (19) I pf. (nprBfly,
-enn.) to jump
npBDKK ( i s ) m. (gen. npBDKKi,
pl. npBDKKa) jump
npHMft (26) adj. straight
rrrftna (9) / . bird
ny6AHKa ( 2 1 ) / . public
nycKTb (20) I (nycK|io, -emb)
to let (go).
nycTHTb (20) II pf. (nyrny, nycramb) to let (go)
ijyrenicTBeHHHK (29) m. traveller
nyTemecTsae (20) . journey
nyremcTBOBaTb (13) I (nyremCTBy|io, -emb) to travel
nymKa (25) / . (gen. pl. Hymen)
cannon
m . c a ( i 3 ) / . play
nftnnma ( 1 3 ) / . Friday

pa6oTa ( 2 ) / . work
pa6TaTb (3) I (pa6Ta|io, -enn.)
to work; pa6TaTb BAA ( +
instr.) (22) to work at
pa6THBK (29) m. worker, workman
pa6THHna (22) / . woman-worker
pa6<mfi m. worker
pflao (21) . (indeclinable)
radio, wireless
pfl0CTb(30)/. joy
pas (30) m. time; one (in counting 'one, two ...'); adv. once
(13); em pas (30) once more

324

pasroBpBBaTb (12) I (pasro- Poccfta (2)/. Russia

BpHBa||io, -emb) to talk, to poHAb (6) m. (grand) piano
converse.
py6mKa (23) / . (gen. pl. py6paaroBop (6) m. conversation
meK) shirt
pa3HOo6p3Hbift
(22)
adj. pyAb (17) m. (gen. pyGiift, pl.
various, diverse, of great
py6jrft) rouble
variety
pyiKb (16) . (pl. pyHCbH, gen.
p3BBiB (9) adj. different,
pl. pyacea)rifle,gun
various
pyK (2) / . (ace. pyicy, pl.
pa3pemTb (27) I (paspem||io,
pywa) hand, arm
-emb) (+dat.) to allow
pyKOBOflBTenb (27) m. leader,
paspenrftTb (27) II pf. (pa3instructor
pem|]t, -ann.) (+dat.) to allow pyKonacb (19)/. manuscript
pHHTb (28) II impf, and pf. pyccKHft (4) adj. Russian, Rus(pH||K>, -mm.) to wound
sian (noun)
paao (12) adv. early
p^iKa (7) / . (gen. pl. p^n)
pasbme (13) adv. earlier
pen-holder, pen
pacKpbraTbca (15) I (pacKpBi- pBTa (10)/. fish
Berca) to open up (intrans.) PBTHOK (11) m. (gen. pb'mKa, pl.
paccK3biBaTb (9) I (paccK3bipmai) market
Ba||K>, -enn.) to narrate
pan (29) m. row, series, number,
paccTOHHBe (30) . distance
quantity
pacieBBe (7) . plant
pacra (26) I (pacTjy, -mb, past
C
tense poc, -A, -n; -AB) to grow
peSHOK (12) m. (gen. pe6m<a, C co (14) pr. (+gen.+instr.)
from; off; with
pl. pe6aTa) child
peBOjnomiHHbjft (27) adj. revo- cafl (10) m. (pl. caflBi) garden
caflHTBca (12) II (cajKycb, calutionary
flftmbca) to sit down
peK (1) / . (pl. pKa) river.
caMOJiT (15) m. aeroplane
pecTopH (10) m. restaurant
penaflBB (15) m. relapse, re- cxap (18) m. sugar
cBjKHH (13) adj. fresh
currence of an illness
pemTb (20) I (pemQio, -enn.) CBerTb (21) I (cBeTer) to dawn,
to grow light .
to decide
pemTb (20) II pf. (pern\\f, CBerTb (9) II (cBeny, CBramb)
to shine
-ftnn.) to decide
CBeTjn.ni (22) adj. bright
pflHHa (s) /. fatherland
CBeroipp (14) m. traffic-Ughts
poflHTena (21) pl. parents
poflBTbCH (28) II impf. and pf. -CBHCTK (17) m. (gen. CBHCTK,
pl. CBHcra) whistle; flanarb
(pomfcb, poflBmbCH) to be
CBHCTK (17) to blow the
born
whistle
posa (7) /.rose
pom. (21) /. (gen. pl. pojift) cBoflHbift (21) adj. (short form
CBo66fleH, CBoSflHa, -o; -bi)
part, role
free
poMH (s) m. novel

cflna (18)/ . change (money)

cfljiaib (19) I pf. (cfljia||io,
-emb) to do, to make
ce6a (12) reflexive pron. self,
oneself
csep (9) w. north
cBepo-BociK (26) m. northeast
cBepo-anafl (26) m. northwest
cerflHH (5) adv. today
ceftnc (5) ado. now, immediately
ceKperpB (16) m. (gen. ceKpeTapft, pl. ceKpeTapa) secretary
ceji (27) n. (pl. cna) village
ceMbft (4) / . (pl. cMbB, gen. pl.
cMeft) family
cpbrii (8) adj. grey
cecrp (2) / . (pl. cwpbi, gen.
pl. cecrp) sister
cecTb (19) I pf. (cHflly, -enn.,
past tense cen) to sit down
CHceqb (27) I pf. (cojKry, COJKjKmb ... cojKryT, past tense
CHtr, cojKTJi, -; -ft) to burn

CKpo (13) adv. quickly; soon

CKpwft (22) adj. quick
cKpMHbjft (22) adj. modest
CKynbnrypa ( 2 3 ) / . sculpture
CK^qHBn (13) adj, (short form
CK^nen, CKynaa, CKJpmo; -BI)
dull, boring
cjiflyioiiniH (14) adj. following,
next
cjjftmKOM (13) adv. too
CAOBpB (3) m. (gen. cnoBapft,
pl. cjioBapft) dictionary
CJIBO (1) n. (pl, cnoB) word
CAOJKBTb (29) II pf. (cjioacy,
cjijKHuib) to build, to compose; to fold
cnoH (17) m. (gen. cAOH, pl.
cjioHb'i) elephant
cjiyjK6a (21) / . service; nocxynftTb HA cjryjKy (21) to join
the service, to go to work
aryjKHTb (16) II (cny>K& cnyjKHiTTb) to serve
cjiyx (16) m. hearing, ear
cjjyqTbca (30) I (cnyqerca)
to happen
cnynHTbCH (30) II pf. (cjryqarca) to happen
C H 6 H P B < 2 7 ) / . Siberia
cnymaTB (6) I (cjiyma|io, -emb)
carapra ( 1 8 ) / . cigarette
to listen (to)
caflTb (6) II (cBJKy, cHflnn.)
cnbnnaTb (13) II (cABrmQy,
to sit; caflTbflMa(8) to stay
mm) to hear
at home
cftfla (29) adv. in a sitting -posi- cjtt'mmbi (25) adj. (short form
tion
cjib'imeH, CJiBmraa, cjnmHo;
cftjibHbrii (26) adj. (short form
-BI) audible
cftneH, CBAbB, CBAbHo; -BI) CMnBTH (8) adj. bold, brave,
strong
daring
cftHHft (7) adj. blue
CMepKTbCH (21) I (cMepKeTca)
CKasTb (19) I pf. (cKOHcy,
to grow dark
CKjKemb) to say
CMepib (26) / . death
cxcso^BBia (29) adj. fabulous; CMeaxbCH (12) I (cM||cb, -embincredible
ca) to laugh
CKaji (30) / . (pl. CKJTBi) rock
CMOTpTb (6) II (cMorpi, CMCKAOH (20) m. slope, incline
TpBmb) to look
CKJIBKO (18) how much, how
cntniaa (16) adv. at first
many
CHer (9) m, (pl. caer) snow

CHBMTb (20) I (cHHM||io, -emb)

to take off; to photograph
cHBa (17) adv. afresh
CHHTb (2) I pf. (CHHMy, CHHMeuib) to take off; to photograph
co6Ka (19)/. dog
co6iHft (20) adj. dog's, currish; vile, filthy
coapTb (19) I (co6ap|io,
-enn.) to gather, to collect
co&apTbCH (30) I (co6ap||iocb,
-embca) to gather, to assemble
(intrans.); to intend, to be
about to
cop (25) m. cathedral
coopTb (19) I pf. (co6ep||y, -an.)
to gather, to collect
coSpTBca (20) I pf. (co6epMca) to gather, to assemble (intrans.)
coBepmTb (29) I (coBepm||io,
-enn.) to complete, to perform,
to accomplish
coBepmBTb (29) II pf. (coBepin[|y, -amb) to complete, to
perform, to accomplish
coBr (24) m. advice
coBTOBaib (15) I (coBryJio,
-enn.) (+dat.) to advise
coBiCKHft (5) adj. Soviet
coBpeMHHBK (29) s. contemporary
coBpeMHHbift (29) adj. modern,
contemporary
coBcM (9) adv. quite, entirely
coeAHHATb (26) I (coeflBaa||io,
-enn.) to join up, to link up
cojKannae (15) . regret; K
cojKaJiemno unfortunately
C03flTb (22) mixed conj. pf. (see
flaTb, past tense c3flan, co3flan, c3flano; -a) to create
COBTB (21) I pf. (coanfly, -enn.,
past tense comji) to go down

coAflT (16) 1. (gen. pl. coaain)

soldier
cojnme (9) . sun
coMHesaTbca (12) I (coMaeBQiocb, -embca) to doubt
cocnTb (27) I pf. (comn||ib,
-enn.) to exile, to banish
cocTaBABTb (25) I (cocraBAH|io,
-enn.) to compose, to make up
cocTOTbca (28) II impf, and pf.
(COCTOHTCH, COCTOHTCH) to take

place, to be held
cocTH3Hae (30) . competition
coxpaHTbca (25) II pf. (coxpaH||icb, -ftmbca) to be preserved, to be kept
cnnbaa (10) / . (jj-e. pl. caaen)
bedroom
cnacft6o (6) thank you
cnacTft (27) I pf. (cnac]y, -mb,
. past tense cnac, -ji, -no; -an)
to save
cnaTb (8) II (CHJHO, cmmn.) to
sleep
cnopT (8) m. sport
cnopTHBHbift (23) adj. sporting
cnopiKjjy6 (15) m. sports club
cnopTCMa (8) m. sportsman
cnopTCMmca (8) / . sportswoman
cnpniHBaTb (6) I (cnpmBBa|io,
-enn.) to ask
cnpocHTb (22) II pf. (cnpomy,
cnpocHHib) to ask
cnycKTbca (15) I (cnycK|iocb,
-embca) to descend, to go
down
cnycTHTbca (20) II pf. (cnymycb,
cnycrambca) to descend, to go
down
cpajKTbca (14) I (cpajK||iocB,
-embca) to fight
cp3y (21) adv. immediately
cpefl (13) /. (ace. cpfly) Wednesday
cpeflft (20) pr. (+gen.) among,
between, in the midst of

327

cpflHBB (29) adj. middle, central; average, medium

ccBTjnca (28) / . exile
crBHTb (10) II (cTBJno, crBmnb) to put, to place (vertically)
craflBOH (17) m. stadium
CTaHOBHTbca (16) II (cranoBJnccb, craHBambca) to become
craBxnw (17) / . (railway) station;
centre
crapTbCH (29) I (crap||iocb,
-embca) to try
crapftK (11) m. (gm. crapBK,
pl. crapBKB) old man
crpbift (7) adj. old
craTb (21) pf. (cTH||y, -enn.) to
become
craTbft (5) / . (gen. pl. cttaen)
article (in newspaper)
creH (10)/. (pl. crHBi) wall
crax (27) m. (gm. crax, pl.
CTHXH) verse; craxa verses,
poetry
CTHTb (l8) II (CTHT, CTHT) tO
cost; to be worth
CTOA (1) m. (gm.

cioA, pl.

crania) table
cxonana (23) / . capital
cTonBaa (10) /. dining room
CTopoH (23) / . (ace. ciopoHy,
pl. crpoBBi, gen. pl. CTOpa)
side
CTH (29) adv. in a standing
position
CTOHTb (7) II (cToflio, -ftmb) to
stand
crpanaTb (9) I (crpafl||io, -emb)
to suffer
crpaH (2) / . (pl. crpHbi)
country, land
crpaHHna (25) /. page
CTpmHBia (24) adj. (short form
crpmeH, erpanm, crpamo;
-BI) terrible, awful

crpnKa (25)/. (gen. pU crpnoK)

hand (of clock, watch)
crpOBTB (14) II (cTp6||io, -ami)
to build
CTpHTbca (14) II (crpHTca) to
be built
cryflHT (2) m. student
CTyfleanca (2)/. student
cryn (1) m. (pl, crynba, gm. pl.
CTyjaeB) chair
cy66Ta (13) Saturday
cyflBTb (29) II (cyjKy, cyflann.)
to judge
cyflbft (17) m. (pl. cyflbB, gm.
pl. cyflea) judge; referee
cyMOHKa (22) / . (gm. pl. cyMCnek) (hand)bag
cyn (10) m. soup
cyiKH (27) pl. (gm. cyxoK)
period of 24 hours
cqacTAHBBTH (9) adj. happy
cqT (17) m. bill, account;
score
cnrraTb (18) I (CHBT||io, -emb)
to count; to consider
CBm (3) m. (pl. CBmoBBH, gen.
pl. cbmoeft) son
cbip (10) m. (pl. cbipw) cheese
aofl (6) adv. hither, here
ctOHcr (27) m. subject

T
Taftr (24) / . taiga, wild forest
district
TaK (6) ado. so, thus
TKHce (3) adv. also
TaK KaK (28) cj. as
TaKfi (21) pron. such
TaKcft (14) . (indeclinable) taxi
TaJiHT (21) m. talent
TajiHTJiHBbift (29) adj. talented
TaM (1) adv. there
THen (13) m. (gm. THna, pl.
Tmrbi) dance

TanneBib (12) I (Tainryllio,

-enn.) to dance
TapnKa (10)/. (gm. pl. TapnoK)
plate
TaTb (9) I (Tei) to melt, to
thaw
TBOH,

TBOH,

TBO;

TBOH

(2)

pron. your
Teip (14) m. theatre
TeneBHSop (7) television set;
CMoipTb TeneBBBop to watch
television
TenHOK m. (gm. Tenima, pl.
TejiftTa) calf
Tened)H (10) m. telephone
TMa ( 1 9 ) / . theme, subject
TMHbift (8) adj. dark
TeMnepaTypa ( 8 ) / . temperature
TBHBc (8) t. tennis
Tenpb (4) adv. now
Tenjn.ro (8) adj. warm
TeppHTpHH (23) / . territory
TCTpflb ( 7 ) / . exercise book
Tra ( 3 ) / . (gm. pl. tren) aunt
rarp (16) m. tiger
ran (29) m. type, kind
TanorpduiH (29)/. printing press
THXHH (12) adj. quiet
THXO (6) adv. quietly

THnnma (24) / . quiet, silence

TOBp (18) m. goods, merchandise
TOBparn (3) m. comrade
Torfl (13) adv. then, at that time
Txte (3) adv. also, t o o
TJIBKO (4) adv. only

TOHBA (25) / . ton

ToprBBjH (29) adj. commercial;
mercantile
TpaB ( 9 ) / . grass
TparflHH ( 2 8 ) / . tragedy
TpBoBaHne (30) . demand
Tp6oBaTenbHbni (22) adj. exacting, demanding
Tp6pBaTb (30) I (Tp6y|K>,
-emb) to demand

Tpraft (21) num. third

TpeyrAbHBK (25) m. triangle
TpyflBTbCH (26) II (TpyiKycB>
TpyflmnbcH) to toil
TpyflHbia (29) adj. (short form
TpyneH, TpyAB, TpyflHo; -BI)
difficult
TpyAjinmecH
(26)
working
people, workers
Tpynna (21) / . troupe, company
Tyfl (6) adv. thither, there
Tyr (1) adv. here
TyduiH (22) / . (gm. pl. Tydienb)
shoe, slipper
Tb'icHMa (18) / . thousand
HOpbM (15) / . (pl. TKjpbMbl,
gen. pl. TibpeM) prison
THHteno (28) adv. heavily, hard,
seriously
THJKJibrii (21) adj. heavy
THHyTb (29) I (THHy, THHenn.) to
draw, drag

y
y (8) pr. (+gen.) at, by; in the
possession of
yoerTb (24) I (y6er||K>, -enn.)
to run away
yBBTb (19) I (y6HB||io, -enn.)
to kill
y6aTBia (16) part, killed
y6BTb (19) I pf. (y6b|K>, -mb)
to kUl
VBejnrqHBaTb (30) I (yBejD<mBa||io, -enn.) to increase
yBBACTb (19) II pf. (yBBHty
yBBflann.) to see
yron (10) m. (gm. yrn, pl.
yrnbi) corner
yflp (17) m. blow

yflpaib (25) II pf. (ynp I,

-mm.) to strike, to hit
yAOBBia (22) adj. (short form
yfl66ea, yfl6Ha, -o; -BI) comfortable, convenient

329

yflOBjibCTBHe (21) . pleasure;

flocTaBjiarb
yflOBAbcxBBe
(30) to give pleasure
yesHcTb (28) I (ye3H<|io, -emb)
to go away (on some form of
transport)
yexaib (28) I pf. (yfljy, -enn.)
to go away (on some form of
transport
yjK (4) adv. already
yjKHH (12) m. supper
yjKHHaTb (9) I (yjKHHa||io, -emb)
to have supper '
y3aaBTb (21) I (y3Ha[|K>, -mb)
to find out, to learn; to recognize
yHHaTb (21) I pf. (y3Ha||io, -emb)
to find out, to learn; to recognize
yfiiH (30) I pf. (yan|y, -enn.,
past tense yrun) to go away (on
foot)
VKpamTb (26) I (yKpam||io,
-enn.) to adorn, to beautify
yKpenJieHHbnt (25) part, fortified, strengthened
yHBna(7)/. street
yM (26) m. (gm. yM, pl. yMbr)
mind, intellect, intelligence
yMeprb (27) I pf. (yMp|y, -enn.,
past tense yMep, yMepjii, yMepAO; -jm) to die
yMib (5) I (yM|io, -emb) to be
able, to know how
JMHBTB (8) adj. (short form
yMH, yMB,. -6; -BT) clever,
intelligent
yMBTb (12) I (yMBJBQio,
-emb) to wash
yMbiBTbCH (12) (yMbD3|l0Cb,
-embca) to wash oneself
yBBBepcHTer (14) m. university
yncTb (28) I pf. (ynanlly, -mb,
past tense yuan) to fall
ypK (6) m. lesson; HACT ypK
(6) a lesson is going on

ycnx (16) m. success

ycraHOBTb (25) II pf. (ycraHOBjn, ycTaHBHmb) to set
up, to establish
ycrpBCTBO ( i s ) . arrangement,
system, working
yTpo (12) . morning
yTpoM (12) adv. in the morning
yxo (16) . (pl. yma, gen. pl.
ymft) ear
yxoflBTb (30) II (yxojKy, yxflamb) to go away (on foot)
yncTBOBa-n. (30) I (yqaciByflio,
-enn.) to participate, to take
part
yqOHbrii (23) adj. educational;
3rae6Boe saBefleBae (23) educational institution
yqeaBK (17) m. (gen. yneHmca)
pupil
yqeHbril (23) m. scientist; scholar
yqHBot (23) adj. scientific,
learned, scholarly
ynrrenb (3) m. (pl. yqErena)
teacher
yqBrenbBBna ( 1 4 ) / . teacher
yqftTb (6) II (yqy, fvnmb) to
learn (by heart); to teach
yqftibCH (14) II (yrycb, ynannvCH) to learn, to study

<p6pBKa ( 1 1 ) /. factory
(paKVJibTT (23) m. faculty
(paMftjma (4) / . surname
(pacH (22) m. fashion, style
4>pMa ( 1 1 ) /. farm
d>ft3BK (2) m. physicist
4>B3BqecKflft (23) adj. physical;
physics (attr.)
dianbM (13) m. film
4>p3a ( 2 ) / . sentence
d)paHuy3CKHH (5) adj. French

330

(ppyKTbi (io) pl. m. fruit

(pyeji (8) m. football

X
XBMBK (2) m. chemist
xHMftqecKB (23) adj. chemical;
chemistry (attr.)
XOflHTb (11) II (xojKy, XflHmb)
to go (on foot), to walk; xoflftTb aa AbiJKax (30)toski
xoKKfi (30) m. hockey
xojipa (28)/. cholera
xoJiM (25) m. (gen. xojiM, pl.
xojiMbi) hill

XJIOAHO (8) adv. cold(ly)

xonOABBm (8) adj. (short form

xnofleH, xonoflH, xAOflHO;
XflOflHbl) COld
xop (2) m. choir
xopmaa (7) adj. good
xopom (3) adv. well
xoTTb (21) mixed conj. (xo*ry,
x^emb, ... xoTBM ... XOTHT)
to wish
xoTTbca (21) (x^erca) to want,
to feel like
XOTH (4) cj. although

xpHCTHaHBH m. (pl. xpncTBaae)

Christian
xyfljKHHK (12) m. artist
xyate (is) adv. worse

npcKBfi (27) adj. tsarist

napb (25) tn. (gen. napft, pl.
napft) tsar
DBer (22) m. (pl, nperi) colour
rmeTK (23) m, (gm. rmeiK, pl
HBeTbi) flower
nABTB (23) adj. whole, entire
nen (18) / . (pl. uHBi) price;
Value
nearp (14) m. centre
neaTpnbKbiH (22) adj. central

laft (4) 1. tea

nac (10) m. (pl. iacfi) hour
lcTO (9) adv. frequently, often
lacTb (17) / . (gm. pl. nacrft)
part
qacbT (10) pl. (gm. qacB) clock,
watch
tieft, IJ>H, qb; HBB (6) pron.
whose
nenoBK (7) m. person, man
qeMOflH (21) m. suit-case
npra (11) pr. (+acc.) through,
across, via; after (in time)
qpHbift (7) adj. black
qecTb (24)/. honour
qeTBpr (13) m. (gm. lerBepr)
Thursday
qTBepTb (is) / . (gm. pl. nerBepTft) quarter
THCJI (25) . (pl. qacJia, gen. pl.

qftcen) date, number

TcTbm (13) adj. clean, pure
THTTb (3) I (nBT||K>, -emb) to
read
<ineH (is) m. member
"nenne (14) . reading
<rro (3) pron. what, cj. that
<rr6Bi (28) cj. in order that
BT-AH60 (30) pro, anything
rr-HB6yflb (30) pron. anything,
something
IT6-TO (30) pron. something
qyBTCBOBaTb (l2) t (iyBCTBy|]K>,
-enn.) to feel; lyBcraoBaib
ce6a (12) to feel (oneself)
qyflo (29) n. (pl. ryflec) miracle

m
mxMaTbi (8) pl. (gm. marnai)
chess
nntaa (27)/. tyre
nrapoKHB (8) adj. (short form
mapK, -, -; -) broad,
wide

331

mKacb (io) i. (pl. nntadiBT)

cupboard
ruKOna (io) / . school
mKflbHBK (17) m. schoolboy
m j i a n a ( i 5 ) / . hat
mocc (24) . (indeclinable)
highway
motpp (24) m. driver, chauffeur
mpHcpT (29) m. type, print
nnpaipHO (17) adj. penalty

(attr.)

3
3K3Men (14) 1. examination
SKCKypcBH ( 1 7 ) / . excursion ,
SKcneflBqaH (20) / . expedition
SHnHKflonflHH (27) / . encyclopedia
snxa ( 2 6 ) / . epoch, age
TOT, Ta, ro; TH ( I ) pron. this

K)
tor (9) m. south
ibro-BocTK (26) m. south-east
K>ro-3nafl (26) m. south-west

H
H (2) pron. I
HOAOKO (21) . (pl. HOflOKB,
gen. pl. ftnoK) apple
HBJlftlbCa (23) I (HBJlft||lOCb,
-enibca) to appear; to b
H3bIK (S) m. (gm. HSBTK, pl.
HSBIKB) tongue; language
afin (16) . (pl, nana, gen. pl.
aftn) egg

HpKHH (9) adj. bright apnbfqK (18) m. (gm. apjrbrqK, pl. apAbrqiat) ticket, label
cHbni (20) adj. clear
xTa ( 2 ) / . yacht

332

E N G L I S H - R U S S I A N VOCABULARY
Only the words given in the exercises at the end of the
lessons are given here. This vocabulary should be used in
conjunction with the Russian-English vocabulary, which
is more detailed and which refers the student back to the
lesson in which the word is often treated in detail.
In order to distinguish between a noun and a verb, the
letters s. (substantive) and v. (verb) are used immediately
after the English word in question.
All Russian verbs are given in the imperfective aspect; the
equivalent perfective verb is given in brackets after the
imperfective verb. If there is no perfective verb derived
from the same root, then the nearest equivalent perfective
verb is given.

able: to be able MOTO (CMOIB);

yMib (cyMTb)
about pr.,

adv.

almost adv. non-rft

already adv. ym
also adv.-ixme, Tome
although cj. XOTH

o, no, KOAO;

npB6flH3HTeflbHO, npHMpHO
ache . 6onTb (3a6onTb)
acquaintance s. SBaKMcrao
acquainted: to become acquainted
3aaKMBTbCH (nOSHaKMHTbCH)

actual: in actual "fact B cMOM

flne
aeroplane s. caMOnT
affair s. flno
afraid: to be afraid 6oaTbca
(no6oarbca)
Africa s. A<ppBKa
after pr., cj. ncne, c; ncne Tore
KaK
KaK
again adv. onaib
ago ado. (TOMy) aa3fl
all pron. Becb, BCH, Bc; Bce

always adv. Bcern

amazing adj. HsyMBTenBHBnt
and cj.n
answer . oraeqaTb (OTBTHTb)
any pron. KaKfi-nfio, KaKftanyone pron. Kt-nnoypb
ape s. o6e3BHHa
approach . noflxoflarb (noflOBTB)
arrive- by plane . npaneraTb
(npanereib)
Asia s. A3HH
ask. . cnpmBBaTb (cnpocHTb);
npocBTb (nonpocHib)
asleep: to fall asleep 3acbmTb
(3acHyTb)
attract . npHBJieKib (npBBntn.)

333

aunt s. Tra
autumn s. cem.

badly adv. nnxo

bag s. cyMO^nca
barely adv. eflB
bay s. 6yxTa
be . 6bnb
beard s. 6opofl
beautiful adj. KpacaBbiB
because of pr. ns-aa.
bed s. nocijn.
bed: to go to bed nojKHTbca
(jietn.) cnaTb
bedroom s. cnnbBH
before pr. npefl, flo
begin v. nsmmerb (nanArh);
Ha<maTbCH (HanTbca)
best adj. jiynniH
better adj., adv. Jiymne
between pr. Kmay
beyond pr. sa
black adj.. ^epmaft
blue adj. cftHHft
boat s. nflKa, napoxfl
book s. KHftra
both 6a, 6e
bottle s. 6yiivm&
break: lunch break nepepb'm BB
o6fl
bridge s. MOCT

bright adj. aprarii

brilliant adj. 6necTama
bring v. npaHocftn. (npHBec-ra),
npBB03BTb (npHBe3Tft), npHBOflHTb (npHBeCTft)
British adj. parBCKaa
brother s. 6paT
building s. 3flHHe
but cj. HO, a
buy . HOKynTb (Kynftrb)
by pr. y;K

call . HasbTb (HasBib); to

call for saxAHTB (aaftrft) sa,
3ae3JKTb (3axaTb) aa; to be
called HasbTbCH (Ba3BTbcn)
can see able
canals. KaaiA
car s. aBT0Mo6HAb .
care: to care for sa6iHiBCfl
(n03a6TBTbCH) o . . .
carpet s. KOBp
carriage (railway) s. BarH
Caucasus s. KaBKs
caviare s. BKp
central adj. neHTpanbHbnt, cpflHHH
centre s. nesTp
century s. BeK
chair i. cryji
change (money) s. cflia
cheap adj. flemBbift
cheese s. CBip
chemist s. XHMHK

chess s. mxMaTbi
children s. Ara
choir s. xop
choose . BBKJapTb (Bb'i6paib)
Christian name s. HMH
cigarette s. nairapca, CBrapra
cinema s. KHH

citizen s. rpaxtflaBBB, rpaatflHKa

classroom s. KJiacc
climate s. KnftMaT
clock s. qacbi
close . 3aKpbTb (3aKpb'rrb);
saKpbmTbcfl
(3aKpbiTbca);
closed 3aKpb'iTbnt
clothes s. oflKfla
club s. Kny6
clue s.: not to have a clue He
HMTB nOHHTHH
cold adj. xonAHbnt
collect . co6HpTb (co6pTb)

334

come v. npaxOAHTB (npHflra),

npaesjKTB (irpnxaTb); to
come back BOSBparnaTbca
(BepayTbca)
complete . coBepmTb (coBepmBTb)

comrade s. TOBapmn
concert s. KOHnpr
conference s. KOHcpepmniH
consider . craraTb
continue . npoflOAMciTB (npoflJDKBTb)
COOk V TOTBHTB (npHTOTBHTb)
copeck s. KonftKa
corner s. yron
COSt V. CTHTb
count .CTHTib(cocqarTb)
counter s. npanaBOK
country s. crpaH, pnaHa, flepBHH
courageous adj. CMAbnt
cry v. rniaKaTb (samiaKaTb)
cupboard s. nncad)
customer s. noKynTenb

D
dance . TaHueBib (rioTanneBTb)
dark adj. TMHbift
date s. BBCA

day s. nem; day and night (24

hours) cyTKB
dcide . pemTb (pemftrb)
delegation s. flenermia
description s. onacHae
desk s. nftcbMeHHbm CTOA; npTa
dexterous adj. JIBKHH

dictation s. AHKrBT
dictionary s. cnoBpb
dining-room s. crojiBaa
dinner s. o6fl
director s. flapicrop
do . flnaib (cflnaib)
doctor s.flKTop,Bpaq
dog s. coKa

door s. flBepb
dOUbt . COMHeBTBCH (ycoMHHTbCa)
dress . ofleBTb (oflTb); OfleBibca (oflrbca)
dress s. ruiTbe
dress designer s. MOflenbp
drink . HHTB (Bb'iUHTb)
drive . xaTb (noxara), sflHTb
(no3flBTb)
dull adj. cKyMHbi
during pr. sa; BO BpMH
dwelling place s. jKHjmme

E
each other pron. flpyr flpyra
early adv. pHO
easier adj. nme
east adj. BOCTK
eat . ecrb (ctecib)
eighty num. Bocessboecsa
elephant s. CJIOH

end s. KOHq
engineer s. BHHceHp
England s. AHTJTBH

English adj. aHrnnftcKHa; in

English no-anrjiftftcKH
Englishman s. aarjninBBB
Englishwoman s. aarnHnaHKa
enter v.

BXOAHTB

(BOBTB);

to

enter the university nocrynTb (nocrynBTb) B yaBBepCHTT

even adv. aime

evening s. Bqep; in the evening
BqepoM; this evening cernaa BiepoM
every adj. KJKflbift
everybody pron. Bce
everything pron. Bc exercise s. ynpajKHHHe
exercise book s. Terpaflb
expedition s. sKcneflftmia
expensive adj. floporft

explain o. oS-bacHarb (O6BHCHTb)

eye s. rnas

fact see actual

factory s. <p6pin<a, saBfl
faculty s. qbaKynbTr
fall: to fall asleep sacBmaiB
(sacuyib)
family s. cerna
far adv. aanen; not far HeflaAeK
farm s. (ppMa
father s. OTn
favourite adj. jno6ftMbift
fear . 6OHTBCH (no6oHTbca)
feel . n^BCTBOBaTb (noqyBcraoBaTb): I feel like Mae XBCTCH
fetch v. xoflHTb, HATH (noftrft)
sa
few adj. Mno; a few acKOAbKO
field s. none
fifth num. nHTbift
fifty num. narboecr
find v. aaxoABTb (Haftrft)
find OUt . y3H2BTb (V3HTb)
finish . KomiTb (KH^BTb);
OKOanTb (oKuraHTb); KOHqTbCH (KHTOTbCH)
first num. npBbift; at first adv.
CHaqna
five num. mm.
five hundred num. UHTBCT
flat s. KBapTftpa
fly . nerTb, neTTb (noneTrb)
fond: to be fond of jnoftTB
(nojno6ftTb)
for pr. AAH; 3a
foreign
adj.
HHOCTpKBbia;
Ministry of Foreign Affairs
MHBBCTpCTBO HHOCTpBHblX
nen
forest s. nee
fork s. BBJUca

four num. leTupe

French adj. dipaHnyscKHB; in
French adv. no-d>paBqy3CKH
friend s. flpyr
from pr. or, c, a s

garden s. cafl
German adj. BeMnKHfi; in German no-HeMqKB
get . nonyiTb (nonynftrb);
how are you getting on ? KBK
Bbi nojKBBeTe? to get on .
fljiaTb ycnxa; to get to
flOXOflBTb (flOHTft) flO, flOesHcTb (floxaTb) no; to get up
BCTaBTb (Bcraib)
girl s. flsonKa, fleBynnca
give . flaBTb CnaTb); I am
giving H flai
glove s. nepqTKa
go v. xoflHTb, Hflift (noftrft);
3AHTb, xaTb (noxaTb); to
go away yxoflftn, (yarn), yesJKTb (yxaTb); to go on npoflOJDKTb; tO gO OUt BbJXOflHTb
(BB'TBTB); to

go

up

to

nofl-

xoflftTb (noflOBTB) K; to go to
bed jiojKHTbCH (aem>) cnaib;
to go downstairs cnycKTbca
(cnycTHTbca); to go upstairs
noflHHMTbCH (noAHHTbca); to
go shopping Hflift (noftrft) sa
noKynKaiHH
gOld S. 3AOTO
I
good adj. xopmaa
government s. npaBBrenbCTBO
grammar s. rpaMMTmta
gramme s. rpaMM
grandmother s. 66ynma
great adj. BenftKa
grow . pacra; to grow light
CBerTb
guns. pyjKb

336

if cj. earn, cjm 6BI; if only ...!

CAH OBI TAbKoI
ill adj. 60JH.HH
impossible: it is impossible
Henbsa
impression s. BnenaTAnae; to
make an impression npoBSBoflftn. (npoH3BecTft) BnenaT-

half s. nonoBHa
halls, san
ham s. BeraaH
hand . pyK
happen v. cnynTbCH (cjjyqfiTBca)
hat s. nxnna
jiHHe
hate v. HenaBBfleTb (BOSBeaa- in pr. B, aa; in five minutes'
BBflCTb)
time qepes miTb MHH^T
have v. BMrb; I have ... y India s. HHAHH
MeHH (ecrb) ... I have to ... a insist v. HacraHBaTb (aacioHTB)
flJDKeH, MHe HflP (HJTJKBO) ... intelligent adj. ^MBBTH
he pron. OH
intend v. co6HpTbca
health *. 3flopBbe
interest s. nmepc
hear v. cJibmiaTb (ycnwrnaTb)
interested: to be interested B B heavy adj. raxtAbni
TepecoBTbca
(saBBxepecoher pron. e
BTbca)
here adv. aaecb, Tyr
interesting adj. BHTepcBBiB
high adj. BBICKBB
it pron. oa, er
him pron. er, eMy
its pron. er
his pron. er
history s. Hcrpaa
holiday s. np3flHBK
J
home s. AOM; home(wards) flojacket
s.
rnupKK
Mft; at home flMa
jar s. 6HKa
hope v. aaflHTbca
join
v. coeflHHHTb (coeflanrb)
hospital S, 60AbBBDA
journey s. nyiemecrBHe
hot adj. ropirqaa; Hcpram
journey v. nyTemcTBOBaib
hotel s. rocTBHHna
judge s. cyflbft
houses, AOM
jump s. npBDKK
how adv. KaK
jump v. npbn"aTb (nptAHyib)
how much, many CKJIBKO
June S. BKJHb
hullo 3flpBCTBya(Te)
hundred num. CTO
hungry: I am hungry MHe ecib
K
xtierca, a xony ecrb
kill v. yCauTb (y6ftrb)
hurt v. 6onib
killed part. ySftrbift
husband s. Mya<
kilogramme *. KHnorpMM
kilometre s. KanoMrp
I
kitchen s. tcyxaa
knife s. HOJK
I pron. H
idea s. MBICJU.; I haven't an idea know v. SHaTb; to know how
.yMxb (cyMTb)
He BMlO nOHHTHH

L
lake s. sepo
lamp s. JiMna

love v. jnooftn, (nojiioSftTb)

lunch s. oSfl
lunch v. oGaaib (noo6flara)

language s. HSBTA

large adj. 6oAbmft

M
late adv. nsflHo
lay see table
magazine s. Hcypan
leaf i. ABCT
make v. aeaaib (cflnaTb); to
learn v. yurrb (BbiyqHTb);
make use -of noflb30BaT6cn
yift'ibca (HayqftTbca); y3Ha(BOCnJIb30BaibCH)
BTb (y3HTb)
man s. sjyjKnBHa; lenoBK
leave v. nvsxaanrb (Bb'iftra); many adj. MHTO
Bbie3HcTb (Bb'iexaTb); (yxo- map . KpTa
flBTb, yesHcTb); noKBflTb (no- married adj. enaiBia; 3MyjKeM
KHHyTb); ocraBAHTb (ocrmarry v. jKeHBTbCH; Bbixoflftrb
BBTb)
(BBATTH) 3MyjK
lecture s. jierapw
Marxism s, MapKcasM
lecturer *. flonHT
match s. Mara
left: on the left HanBo
material *. MaTepaan; MaTpaa
Leningrad s. JleHHHrpfl
me pron. mew, MHe
less adj. adv. MHee, Mm>me
meet v. BcrpeqTb (BcrpTBTb);
lesson s. ypK
BcrpeiTbca (BCTprarbca)
let v. nycKTb (nycTHTb); let him
meeting s. Bcipqa; coSpnne
go nycTb OH Bflr
member s. naen
letter s. nacbM
mine pron. MOH
library s, 6a6nBOTKa
ministry s. MBHHcrpcTBO
lie v. nejKib (nonejKib)
minute s. MBHyra
lie down v. jiojKftibca ( n c a )
mistake s. omnica
light: to grow light CBerib
modest adj. CKPOMHWA
like cj. KaK
' month s. Mcan
like v. jnoSxb (nojnoGftn.)
more adj., adv. Somme; more
lion s. jieB
and more Bc 6Jn,me
listen v. cJiymaTb (nocnymaTb)
little adj. Mno; a little HeM- morning s. yxpo; this morning
cerflHa yTpoM
Hro, HeMHJKKO
Moscow s. MocKB
five V. JKBTb (npOJKBTb)
most CaMbBI
lock v. 3ainrpTb (sanepTb)
mother s. maxb
London s. JIHAOH
long adj. AJTHHHBIB; for a long motorcycle s. MOTOIDSKJI
time fljrro; long ago flaBH; much adv. MHTO; as much as
' possible KaK MJKBO 6jn>me
not long ago.HenBHO
museum s. My3a
look V. CMOTpTb (nOCMOTpTb)
lose v. TepHTb (noTepaTb)
must: I must H AOJOKCH, MHe
lot: a lot MHTO
HflO (HyJKHO)
my pron. MOB
loud adj. rpOMKHft

t_.

'" '"."

N
name s. MH, (paMEnna

packet s. nmca
page s. crpaBBna
paper (news) s. rasera
parliament s. napnMeHT
particularly adv. ocfieHHO
pass v. npoxoflftn, (npoaxB);
npoe3jKTb (npoxaib)
pay v. nJiaTBTb (sannaTBib);
to pay at the desk nnaTftrb B
Kccy
pen s. pymta, nep
pencil's. KapaHflm
penholder s. pyqna
physicians. Bpai, icrop
physicist s. d)B3BK
picture s. KapTBna
piece s. KycK
place s. Mcro
place: to take place BMrb Mcro,

near to., pr. 6JIB3KO; KOAO

neither... nor B B ... HH

new adj. HBbift
newspaper s. rasera
next adj. cneflyiomBfi
nib s. nep
no particle HCT
n o o n e pro, B B K T
n o n - s m o k e r s. HeKypaiuHH
n o r t h s. cBep
not particle ne '
notice v. saMenxb (saMraTb)
n o v e l s. poMH
n o w ado. Tenpb, ceftqc

nowhere adv. nara

occupy: to occupy oneself sasaMTbCH

o'clock nac, qac, lacB of pr. B3; o
old adj. crpbift; old man
crapftK how old is ... ?
CKJIBKO ACT . . .

? he is ...

years old eMy ... ACT (rfla,

rofl)
on pr. aa
once adv. pa3
one num. OJXHH
only adv. TJIBKO

open v. OTKpbTb (ontpBrrb);

OTKpbmTbCa (OTKpb'lTBCa)
open adj. orapbTrbni
order v. npaKSbiBaTb (npaKasib)
order: in order.to IT66BI
other adj. Apyra
our pron.

nam

over pr. ipe3

own adj., pron. ccTBeHHbift;
CBOH

COCTOHTbCH
p l a n s . njiaH
play v. nrpaTb (cbirpib)
please noHcajiyftcra
point: there is n o p o i n t . . . H-

iero...
poor adj. 6flHbm
popular adj. nonyjiapHBTH
possible: it is possible MJKHO
postgraduate student s. acnapaHT
postman, s novrajaH
post-office s. nira
prison s. TiopM; to be in prison
CHflTb B TiopbM
problem s. npoSnMa, Bonpc
professor s. npdVccop
progress: to make progress fljiaTB ycnxH
public s. ny6naica
puncture v. npoKnbmaTb (npoKOAOTb)
purchase s. noK^uKa
put
v.
icnacTb
(nononaib);
CTBBTb (nocrBHTb)

339

glW-Jblt/ **M-'-'
quarter s. qraepTB
quickly adv. 6wcTpo, CKpo
quite adv. AOBOJIBHO; coBcM

R
rain s. flOHtflb; it is raining
flOJKflb HflT
rather adv. AOBOJIBHO

read v. i H i a i b (npotnrrTb)
reading s. irmie
realize v. noHBMrb (nornhb)
receive ..nojryqTb (nony*Brrb)
recognize v. yanaBexb (yan&rb)
red adj. KpcHbift
'
remarkable adj. 3aMe*iTejiBHbiH
remember v. nMHBTb, BCTOMHHTB (BCnMHHTb)
reply v. oraeiTb (oraraiT.)
representative s. npeflcraBBTenb
rest v. OTflbrxTb (oTfloxHyiB)
return v. B03BpainTbca (epayXbCH, BOSBpaTBTbCA)
right s. npBO
right adj. npBbTH
right: on the right HanpBo
river s. peit
room s. KMBATa
rouble s. pyojn.
rowing s. rp6na
run v. 6raTb (no6raib); 6eHcTb (no6excTb)
Russia s. Pocca
Russian s., adj. pyccKBH; in
Russian no-p^ccraa

S
same adj. TOT me cMbrii
satisfied adj. aonoabnbm
Saturday s. cy66Ta
sausage s. Kon6ac
say v. roBopHTb (CKasTb); I am
saying a roBopib
School S. HTKOJia

school-desk s. npia
see v. BftfleTb (yBftflerb)
seem v. Kasraca (noKasaraca)
self pron. ce6a
sell v. npoflaBTb (npoflTb)
send v. nocbuira (nocjiTb)
sentence s. (ppsa
set: to set off oTupaBAHTbCH
(OTUpaBBTbCa)
seven num. ceMb
several adj. HCKOJIBKO

shoe s. 60TBHOK, ydwra

shop s. Mara3BH
Shop V. XOABTb, BflTB (noBTB) 3a
noK^mtaMH
sick: I am sick of MHe Baflon(a,
o, a)
side s. CTOpoH
since pr., cj. c, OT; C Tex nop HAK
sing v. nCTb (cneib); I sing H

nolo
singing s. nnne
sister s. cecrp
sit v. caflTb (nocBflib)
sit down v. caaftTbca (cecxb)
six num. mecxb
skate v. KaTTbCH HB KOHbicx
Ski V. XOflHTb Ha JTb'DKaX
sky s. H6o
sleep v. cnaTb (nocnra)
slowly adv. MflneHHO
smoke v. Kypftib (saicypBTb,
BbmypHTb)

snow s. cner; it is snowing caer

HflT

so adv. TaK
SOfa S. AHBH
soldier s. conflT
someone pron. KTO-TO, KTOHa6yflb
SOn S. CbTH
soon adv. CKpo
sore see ache
soundly adv. Kpimo
soup s. cyn
south s. K>r

340

Soviet adj. coBTCKHH

speak v. roBopftn. (noroBopftn.);
I speak H roBopi
spend v. npQBOflBTb (npoBecra)
sport s. cnopi
spring s. secn
stadium s. craflHoa
stairs s. Aecraana
stamp s. MpKa
stand v. CTOHTB (nocroHTb); to
stand up BCiaBxb (BcraTb)
standing: in a standing position
CTH
stations. CTamraa,Boion
stay v. ocTasTbca (ocrraca);
to stay at home CHflrB flMa
stop v. ocraHBABBaib (ocraHOBBTb); OCTaHBABBaTbCA (ocraHOBBTbCH)
street s. yjmna
strike v. 6arb (ynpim,); (of a <
clock) HTb (npo6ftrb); (to
amaze) nopaxcTb (nopa3BXb)
strong adj. cftabHbift
student s. CTyflHT, crynaTKa
study s; KaOHHT
study v. 3aHHMTbca, ytnTbca
stupid adj. rnyribnt
suddenly adv. Bflpyr
suggest v. npefljiarTb (npeflAOJKBTb)
SUit S. KOCTIM
suitcase s. leMOfln
summer s. Aro
supper s. yjKHH
supper: to have supper yjKBHATb
surnames, dmianaa
swim v. nnaftaTb
swimming bath s. 6accfta

T
table s. CTOA; t o lay t h e table
HaKpbmTb
(HAKpiTb)
HB
CTOA

take v. p a t b (BSHTB); BOSHTB,

Be3Tft (noBesTB); Bonftrb Becrft (noBecT); t o take p l a c e
HMTB MCTO, COCTOHTbCH
talk v. roBopHTb (noroBoparb),
6ecflOBaTb
(no6ecflOBaTb),
pa3TOBpHBaTb
tall adj. BbicKB

tea s. i a
teacher s. y^ftiejn.
team s. KOMHfla
telephone v. 3BOBBIB (no3BoHHTb)
television set s. TeneBasop; to
watch the television CMOTpTb
TeneBB3op
ten num. flcHTb
text s. TeKCi
than cj. tieM
that pron. cj. TOT, TOT; ITO
theatre s. TeTp
then adv. HOTM; Torfl
there adv. TaM; Tyn
thesis s. flHccepiamiH
thing s. Benn.
think v. fly/aaTb (noflyMaTb)
third num. TpeiBB
thirsty: I am thirsty MHe x1CTCH HBTb, H XOly HBTB
this pron. TOT; this is ein
three w. Tpa
throat s. rpjio
Thursday s. leiBpr
ticket s. 6anT
tie s. rncryK
tiger s. rarp
time s. BpMa, nop
time: it is time to ... nop ...
to pr. B, aa, K
today adv. cerflHa
together adv. BMcre
tomorrow adv. sBTpa
too

adv.

CAHHTKOM;

TjKe
towel s. nonorane
town s. rpofl

laioKe,

translate . nepeBAHTB (nepeBecTft)

tree s. flpeBO trousers s. 6pjKH
truth s. npBfla
try . ciapTbca (nocrapibCH)
twenty num. pBaawih
twice num. flBa p3a
two num. ppa, flBe
type . nenTaib (orne^iaib,
HaneiTa-n.)
typewriter s. nmyuuaa MamBHKa
tyres, mftna

U
uncle s. flftfla
understand . noBBMTb (noHHTb)
unfortunately adv. K coHcanBBK)
union s. COM3; Soviet Union
COBTCKBH C013
university s. yxmBepcntr
until cj. noK ... ae
upstairs adv. HaBpx; naBepxy
Urals s. y p n
useful adj. non3Hbjft
U.S.S.R. CCCP
usual adj. o6b'nmbift
usually adv. o6binHO

V
vase s. Basa
very adv. neHb
view: in view of BBHAy
village s. cen
visa s. Basa
visit s. nocemeaae
visit . nocemTb (noceiHTb)
visitor s. nocerftTejn,
vocabulary s. cnoBpb
vodka s. BflKa
Volga s. Bojnra

w
Wait . JKflBTb (nOflOJKflTb)
waitress s. odimniHTKa
walk . ryjiHTb (noryjiHTb); to
go for a walk BATH (nofiift)
ryjiHTb
want . xoTib (saxorTB), jKenTb (noHtenTb)
Wash . MBTTb (Bb'lMblTb), yMblBTb (yMBTTb); yMbmTbca
(yMb'iTbca)
watch v. CMOTpTb (nocMOTprb)
wear . Hocftn.
weather s. norfla
Wednesday s. cpe
week s. aeflejiH
weigh . BcHTb
well adv. xopom
what pron. HTO; KAKfi; what
kind of KaKft
whatever pron. mo 6BI ... HH,
KAKfi 6bl ... HH
when adv., cj. Korn
where adv. rfle, Kyfl
wherever adv. roe 6BI ... HH
which pron. KoropBnt
while cj. noK
who pron. Kto; KOTPBIH

whom pron. KOTO, KOMy

whose pron. iefi
whyoo. no^eMy
wide adj. nmpKBH
wife s. mea
wine s. BHH

winter s. SHM; in winter

SBMfi
wish . xorrb, nteniB (noHceJiTb)
withpr. c
within pr. qpe3, B
without pr. 6es
woman s. acuniHua
wonderful adj. npeKpCHbnt,
saMe<iTeAbHBni
wood(s) s. nee

work s. paTa
work . pa6Taib
worker s. pa6<mfi, paTHHK
worth: it is worth... CTHT
write v. micTb (HanHcTb); to
write down sancbmaib (3aJXHCTb)

yes particle a&

yesterday adv. Biep
yet adv. em; yxc
you pron. TBI, BBI
young adj. MOAOAB

your pron. TBOH, Bam

Y
yacht s. axra
year s. ro

Z
zoo s. 3oonpK

343

CONTENTS OF THE LESSONS

Absence of article
Omission of verb 'to be' in present tense
Interrogative sentences
Gender of the noun
Personal pronouns of the 3rd person
Possessive pronouns MO and TBO
Verb endings - , -y, and -er in present tense
Dash instead of link-verb
Gender of nouns (continued)
Possessive pronouns Ham and Bam
Personal pronouns TBI and BBI
Verb ending -eT in present tense
Interrogative sentences
Negative particle He
Gender of nouns (continued)
Personal pronoun of the 3rd person plural
Present tense of verb. Conjugations I and II
Infinitive
Punctuation (subordinate clauses)
Plural of nouns
Conjunctions HO and a
Nouns denoting nationality
Accusative case (preliminary remarks)
Present tense of verb (continued)
Imperative mood
Interrogative adverbs rjie and Kyn
Possessive pronouns
Interrogative pronoun i e
Adjectives
Interrogative pronoun KaKfi

345

3
3-4
4
5-6
6
7
7
7
9-10
IO
IO-II
11
11
11
14
14-15
15-16
16
17
20-1
22
22-3
23
26-7
27-8
28
28-9
29
34-7
37

Demonstrative pronoun 5TOT

Names and patronymics
Short form of adjectives
Adverbs
3rd person singular of verb GBITB
Phrases y MeHH, y MeHH ecTB, etc.
Modal verbs and expressions
Verbs with stem ending in -6-, -B-, -M-, -nPast tense of verb
Expressions denoting possession in past
HJUKeH in past tense
Impersonal sentences in past
Declension of nouns
Nominative case
Prepositional case
Prepositional case - masculine in -y
Mobile vowels
Accusative case
Use of y MeHH, y TC6A, etc. to replace MOH, TBOH,
etc.
Questions with particle JTH
Conjugation of verbs XCHTB, GpaTB, KJiacTB,

37
37
42-4
44
44
44-5
45-7
47
51-2
52-3
53
53
54
54
55-6
60
60
61-2
62
62-3

eCTB, HHTB
63
Verbs of motion
67-9
Conjugation of verbs of motion
69^70
Preposition Ha used to translate 'in', 'at', and
70-1
'to'
Preposition ipe3
71
Reflexive verbs
75-7
Reflexive pronoun ce6a
78
Expressions of time
>.
78
Verbs in -OBaTB, -esaTB
79
Days of the week
82
Future tense of SBITB
84-5
Compound future tense
85-6
346

Expressions of time with B and Ha+the accusative

Genitive case
Present perfect continuous
XOHHTB/HHTH with nouns denoting means of
transport
Uses of negative
Dative case
Instrumental case
Declension of personal pronouns
Declension of nouns in plural
Numerals (cardinals)
Indeterrninate sentences
Numerals (continued)
Agreement of predicate with numerals and
quantitative substantives
Partitive genitive
Plurals in -BH
Use of HH in indirect questions
Aspects
Declension of neuter nouns in -MH
Aspects (continued)
Perfective of verbs of motion
Compounded verbs of motion
Sequence of tense in the future
Declension of adjectives
Relative clauses

Reflexive pronoun ce6n a

Impersonal verbs
Degrees of comparison
Relative clauses after TOT, TO, Te, and see
Possessive pronouns
Reflexive possessive pronoun CBOH
Demonstrative pronouns 5TOT, TOT
Determinative pronouns cM, CMBIH, secB
347

.'
86
91-5
95
96
101-3
103-5
109-12
112-13
117-19
120-1
121
125-6
126-7
127-8
128
128-9
133-8
138
143-5
145
146
146
151-4
154-5
155-6
156
161-6
* 166
170-1
171-3
173-4
174-6

Compound pronoun ppyr ppfra

Negative pronouns and adverbs
Ordinals
Months
Declension of cardinal numbers
Expressions of time
Dates
Active participles
Inversion of numerals and nouns
Passive participles
Collective numerals
Subordinate clauses introduced by conjunctions
Use of ro^ and nro with numerals
Gerunds
Declension, of Russian surnames, patronymics,
and possessive adjectives
Conditional mood
Conditional clauses
Use of IT66BI with past tense
Concessive clauses
Indefinite pronouns and adverbs
Adjectives and numerals

'V^^^,
4*>#AJ*^

176
182-5
185-6
189
191-4
194-6
196
201-5
206
212-16
216-17
. 222-6
226-7
233-7
237-8
245
245-6
247-
248
249-51
251-2

NOTES

NOTES

*
,

.V

*.

NOTES

NOTES

NOTES

t>

NOTES

topft

.-'" '
fir

i s

NOTES

ut
mi

.-

-.4

i
Ml
'1 A.'%2

ii^K:

Compiled by
J.L.I. Fennell

| |
'<-

The Fenguin
Russian Course
A language of vital importance in the world today, Russian
is not difficult to learn.
This complete course is written for students learning on their
own or in class. Thirty lessons with texts and exercises cover
the basic groundwork, and there are useful vocabularies.
T h e approach is a logical and adult one: no spoonfeeding, but
also no rules for rules' sake.
'It is excellenfiy done. Tiie vocabularies aie intelligent'}chosen..., Penguin Books are to be cong.'vxiated'
The Times Educational Supplement

UNITED KINGDOM ,1.2$

AUSTRALIA $ j . 5 0 (RECOMMENDED)
CANADA $ ^ . 9 5
U.S.A. $3.95
COVER DESIGN: OMNIFIC
EFERiNCE

ISBN <J 14. 0 5 1 . 0 2 0 6